FCC ID: E2K24BNHM Notebook PC with Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG WLAN

 

Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG User's Guide Your Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter works with either 802.11b or 802.11g wireless standard. Operating at 2.4 GHz frequency at speeds of up to 54 Mbps you can now connect your computer to high-capacity existing 802.11b networks using multiple access points within large or small environments, and also to high-speed 802.11g networks. Your wireless adapter maintains automatic data rate control according to access point location to achieve the fastest possible connection. All your wireless client connections can be easily managed by the Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless utility. Using the Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless Profile Wizard, you can create profiles automatically to suite your specific connection requirements. Enhanced security measures using 802.1x, WPA encryption and authentication, and 128-bit WEP encryption is standard for both 802.11b and 802.11g. Introduction to Wireless Networking Software Installation Using Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless Connecting to a Network Security Overview Setting up Connection Security Troubleshooting Specifications Glossary Customer Support Safety and Regulatory Notices Warranty Adapter Registration Information in this document is subject to change without notice.

(c) 20002003 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. Intel Corporation, 5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway, Hillsboro, OR 97124-6497 USA The copying or reproducing of any material in this document in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Intel Corporation is strictly forbidden. Intel(R) is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Intel disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

*Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Intel Corporation assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this document. Nor does Intel make any commitment to update the information contained herein. September 2003 Back to Contents Page Wireless LAN Overview: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG User's Guide About Wireless LAN Technology l Choosing a WLAN l Configuring a WLAN l Identifying a WLAN l Surveying the Site of Your WLAN l Factors Affecting Range A wireless network connects computers without using network cables. Computers use radio communications to send data between each other. You can communicate directly with other wireless computers, or connect to an existing network through a wireless access point. When you set up your wireless adapter, you select the operating mode for the kind of wireless network you want. You can use your wireless adapter to connect to other similar wireless devices that comply with the 802.11 standard for wireless networking. Choosing a Wireless LAN Wireless LANs can operate with or without access points, depending on the number of users in the network. Infrastructure mode uses access points to allow wireless computers to send and receive information. Wireless computers transmit to the access point, the access point receives the information and rebroadcasts it to other computers. The access point can also connect to a wired network or to the Internet. Multiple access points can work together to provide coverage over a wide area. Peer-to-Peer mode, also called Ad Hoc mode, works without access points and allows wireless computers to send information directly to other wireless computers. Ad Hoc Mode is only supported in 802.11b and 802.11g networks. You can use Peer-to-Peer mode to network computers in a home or small office or to set up a temporary wireless network for a meeting. Configuring a Wireless LAN There are three basic components that must be configured for an 802.11 wireless LAN to operate properly:

l Network Name: Each wireless network uses a unique Network Name to identify the network. This name is called the Service Set Identifier (SSID). When you set up your wireless adapter, you specify the SSID. If you want to connect to an existing network, you must use the name for that network. If you are setting up your own network you can make up your own name and use it on each computer. The name can be up to 32 characters long and contain letters and numbers. l Profiles: When you set up your computer to access a wireless network, the wireless client manager creates a profile for the wireless settings that you specify. If you want to connect to another network, you can scan for existing networks and make a temporary connection, or create a new profile for that network. After you create profiles, your computer will automatically connect when you change locations. l Security: The 802.11 wireless networks use encryption to help protect your data. Wired equivalent privacy (WEP) uses a 64-bit or 128-bit shared encryption key to scramble data. Before a computer transmits data, it scrambles the data using the secret encryption key. The receiving computer uses this same key to unscramble the data. If you are connecting to an existing network, use the encryption key provided by the administrator of the wireless network. If you are setting up your own network you can make up your own key and use it on each computer. m Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a security enhancement that strongly increases the level of data protection and access control to a WLAN. WPA mode enforces 802.1x authentication and key-exchange to strengthen data encryption. WPA utilizes its Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP). TKIP provides important data encryption enhancements that include a per-packet key mixing function, a message integrity check (MIC) named "Michael", an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a also re-keying mechanism. Using these improvement enhancements, TKIP protects against WEP's known weaknesses. m Cisco Client Extention (CCX) is a server and client 802.1x authentication via a user-supplied logon password. When a wireless access point communicates with a Cisco LEAP-enabled RADIUS (Cisco Secure Access Control Server (ACS) server), Cisco LEAP provides access control through mutual authentication between client wireless adapters and the wireless network and provides dynamic, individual user encryption keys to help protect the privacy of transmitted data. Identifying a Wireless Network Depending on the size and components of a wireless LAN, there are many ways to identify a wireless LAN:

l The Network Name or Service Set Identifier (SSID): Identifies a wireless network. All wireless devices on the network must use the same SSID. l Extended Service Set Identifier (ESSID): A special case of SSID used to identify a wireless network that includes access points. l Independent Basic Service Set Identifier (IBSSID): A special case of SSID used to identify a network of wireless computers configured to communicate directly with one another without using an access point. l Basic Service Set Identifier (BSSID): A unique identifier for each wireless device. The BSSID is the Ethernet MAC address of the device. l Broadcast SSID: An access point can respond to computers sending probe packets with the broadcast SSID. If this feature is enabled on the access point, any wireless user can associate with the access point by using a blank (null) SSID. Surveying the Site of Your Wireless LAN Conducting a site survey for your wireless LAN is the most crucial step in the process of setting up a wireless network. It greatly reduces the amount of troubleshooting you will have to do once you have the wireless LAN set up and ready for connection testing. To conduct a site survey, you will need the following tools:

l An access point (or laptop computer) that is set up to be the transmitter. It should be mounted near and at the same height as the designated location of your wireless LAN. l A laptop that will act as the mobile receiver. It must contain your site survey software. l An area or building map, which will be used to plot the strength of your signals. Once you have the tools you need, you are ready to survey the inside of the building. Launch the site survey software on the mobile receiver laptop and carry it around in the intended wireless LAN area to test the signal strength. Be sure to also check the signal strength of each intended access point location. If you encounter problems while surveying the site, make sure your transmitter laptop is not located on a wall containing metal, such as an air-conditioning duct, which will interfere with the range of your signal. Simply move the transmitter and test the signal strength again. For users to have seamless coverage when moving from access point to access point, the signal levels at each point must overlap. There is software available that will seamlessly hand off changing signal levels from one access point to another. Your building's infrastructure can sometimes interfere with the microwave signal, but finding the location and cause of the interference will allow you to figure out the best place to mount your access points for optimal area coverage. Microwave signals travel in all directions, which means there is one access point for a multi-floor building. However, the range is highly dependent on the material used to construct the flooring, especially metal materials. Once your signal strength is strong inside the building, you are ready to check the strength outside the building. To do so, simply carry the mobile receiver laptop as far down the street or around the building as you can go without losing significant signal strength. If possible, you should be aware of the types of networks being used by the companies on the floors above and below you, so that you can work together in harmony. With wireless networks, security is very important and if you communicate with those around you, you are better prepared to select the right channels, as well as the best location for access points. Factors Affecting Range Although access points can transmit signals up to 60 feet away in an area with many walled barriers or as much as 500 feet away in a large open area, the range is affected by the following factors:

l Building materials, such as steel and drywall, can shorten the range of the radio l Physical layout of the area can interfere with the signals and cause them to be signals. dropped. l Electronic noise from cell phones, microwave ovens, or other devices on the same frequency can interfere with the transmission of the signals. l Range is inversely proportional to data rate, so the faster that the signals are sent, the less distance they will travel. Taking these factors into consideration when you survey the site for your WLAN is key to providing all of your users with undisturbed mobile connectivity. Using multiple access points will, of course, reduce the impact of these factors if your area has dividing walls throughout. What is a Site Survey?

A site survey is an in-depth examination and analysis of a proposed wireless LAN site. The purpose of a site survey is to determine the number of access points needed, the types of antennas needed, and the best placement for those access points and antennas. Although the goal of a site survey is simple, the means of arriving at that goal are not. Some of the steps involve taking measurements, but most involve experience, trial and error, and a little guesswork rather than numbers and figures. When to Perform a Site Survey Intel recommends that you perform a site survey prior to installing a wireless LAN. Site surveys are especially important when:

l You are installing a new site: Evaluate the placement of the access points and antennas throughout the proposed site. l You are changing an existing site: When modifying or extending an existing network structure, re-evaluate the placement of the access points and antennas. If you need a different level of coverage in some areas, you may need to move, replace, or supplement access points and antennas. l You are physically changing the site: Remodeling may introduce new sources of interference, such as motors and metal structures within the coverage area of the access point, even if it does not directly effect the sites where the access points are located. Elements of an Effective Site Survey An effective site survey requires four elements. Failure to commit the appropriate time, money, and energy to accomplish a proper site survey in advance may result in greater expenditures of money and time later, when problems arise that require repeated adjustments to the wireless configuration. The three elements of an effective site survey are:

1. Examine the network usage problems solved by the wireless LAN. How many clients need a wireless LAN connection? What areas of the site require wireless LAN connectivity? How many hours each day is wireless LAN connectivity required? Which locations are likely to generate the largest amount of data traffic?

Where is future network expansion most likely?

2. Study blueprints of the proposed wireless LAN site. A site blueprint provides a map of the site as well as the location of objects, such as walls, partitions, and anything else that could affect the performance of a wireless LAN. Examining the site blueprint prior to conducting the physical walk-

through helps you identify areas in which wireless equipment is likely to perform well and areas where it is not. Many obstructions are not readily visible and, in some cases, a room originally built for a specific purpose, such as a radiology lab, might have been converted into something completely different, such as a conference room. The blueprint may also show areas proposed for future building expansion. To prepare for the next step of the site survey, mark possible wireless device locations on the blueprint and refer to the marked blueprint during the physical walk-through and inventory. 3. Conduct a physical walk-through and inventory. The primary purpose of the physical walk-through is to document any items or materials near a proposed device location that may interfere with reception or transmission and affect network performance. Document stock and inventory levels, current environmental conditions and any materials that may interfere with the wireless LAN. Back to Contents Page Please read all restrictions and disclaimers. Back to Contents Page Software Installation: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG User's Guide Software Installation Installing Drivers and Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless Software See the instructions for your operating system:

l Windows 2000 l Windows XP Installation under Windows* 2000 Preliminary Notes The installation instructions in this section are based on the following assumptions:

l The wireless adapter hardware has already been installed in the computer in accordance with the computer manufacturer's instructions. l The computer has not been powered on since the hardware installation was completed. l No other wireless LAN card is installed in this computer. To install the driver before installing hardware, use Start > Run and browse to the file SetupWLD.exe in the path PROW2200\WIN2K on the Intel CD. After running SetupWLD.exe, shut down the computer and install the hardware. When the computer restarts, the driver will be automatically installed. After loading the Windows 2000 operating system, be sure to log in with administrative rights. If you log in to Windows 2000 without administrative rights, you may run into problems during the installation. During initial adapter installation and configuration, it may take up to two minutes for adapter settings to be confirmed. Driver Installation To install driver software in Windows* 2000, follow these steps:

1. Power up the computer in which the wireless adapter hardware has just been installed. 2. Log in with administrative rights when prompted by Windows 2000. 3. Wait for Windows to detect the newly installed hardware and display the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog. If Windows does not detect the new hardware, see Troubleshooting. 4. Insert the Intel CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive. If the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections menu screen appears, leave it open and click the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog to make that the active window. 5. On the Install Hardware Device Drivers screen verify that Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended) is selected, then click Next. 6. When the Locate Driver Files dialog appears, verify that the item CD-ROM drives 7. When the Driver Files Search Results dialog appears, indicating that a driver was is checked and click Next. found, click Next. 8. On the Network Name screen, click Next to accept the default Network Name

(SSID), or enter a specific SSID for your network, then click Next. 9. On the Data Encryption screen, click Next to accept the default encryption setting None, or enter specific encryption settings for your network, then click Next. 10. On the Found New Hardware Wizard screen, click Finish. Proceed to install Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless. Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless Installation (Required) Continue with the following steps to install the Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless wireless configuration utility (required):

Some versions of this product do not support the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections menu screen for installation of utility software. If the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections menu screen does not appear, or if it does not have a menu item for Wireless LAN Adapters, you can start the Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless installer manually using Start > Run and browsing to the file iSetup.exe in the path APPS/PROSET/WINXPT32 on the Intel CD supplied with the product. Skip Steps 11 and 12 below and continue with Step 13. 11. On the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections screen, click Wireless LAN Adapters. This screen may have been launched in step 4 above. If the screen is not visible when you close the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog, display it by removing and re-inserting the Intel CD, or by running autorun.exe from the CD. 12. On the Intel PRO/Wireless LAN Adapters menu screen, click Install Software. 13. On the Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless screen, click Next. 14. On the License Agreement screen, after reading the license agreement, select I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next. 15. On the Setup Type screen, verify that Typical is selected, then click Next. This is the recommended setting for a first-time installation. 16. On the Ready to Install the Program screen click Install. 17. After the software is installed on your computer, click Finish. Click Exit to close the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections screen. 18. To launch Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless, double-click the Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless icon in the system tray or follow the path Start > Programs > Intel Network Adapters > Intel(R) PROSet. For additional information on the program, press F1 or click Help while the program is running. During initial adapter installation and configuration, it may take up to two minutes for adapter settings to be confirmed. Uninstalling Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless After uninstalling Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless using the "add/remove" feature in Windows, re-boot the computer. Any current connection remains active (the profile is active) until the computer re-boots. Installation under Window* XP Preliminary Notes The installation instructions in this section are based on the following assumptions:

l The wireless adapter hardware has already been installed in the computer in accordance with the computer manufacturer's instructions. l The computer has not been powered on since the hardware installation was completed. l No other wireless LAN card is installed in this computer. To install the driver before installing hardware, use Start > Run and browse to the file SetupWLD.exe in the path PROW2200\WINXP on the Intel CD. After running SetupWLD.exe, shut down the computer and install the hardware. When the computer restarts, the driver will be automatically installed. Before proceeding, make sure that you are operating Windows XP with administrative rights. If you log in to Windows XP without administrative rights, you may run into problems during the installation. The Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless utility or the Windows XP wireless configuration feature can be used to configure wireless network settings. The instructions below include steps for installing the Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless utility and for turning off the Windows XP configuration feature. If you do not turn off the Windows XP feature, you will not be able to use Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless to configure wireless network settings. For information on how to use the Windows XP feature, see your Windows XP documentation. Driver Installation To install drivers under Windows* XP, follow these steps:

1. Power up the computer in which the wireless adapter hardware has just been installed. 2. Log in with administrative rights if prompted by Windows XP. 3. Wait for Windows to detect the newly installed hardware and display the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog. Verify that Install the software automatically

(Recommended) is selected. If Windows does not detect the new hardware, see Troubleshooting. 4. Insert the Intel CD into your CD drive. The New Hardware Found Wizard searches for the correct driver files and copies them to your hard drive. 5. On the Network Name screen, click Next to accept the default Network Name

(SSID), or enter a specific SSID for your network, then click Next. 6. On the Data Encryption screen, click Next to accept the default encryption setting None, or enter specific encryption settings for your network, then click Next. 7. On the Found New Hardware Wizard screen, click Finish. Proceed to disable the Windows XP wireless configuration feature. Disable Windows XP Wireless Configuration (Required) To disable the Windows XP wireless configuration feature so that you can use Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless for wireless configuration, continue as follows:

Instructions are written for use with the Windows XP Start Menu and Control Panel Category View, not with "Classic" Start Menu or Control Panel views. 8. Click Start and Control Panel. 9. On the Pick a category screen, click Network and Internet Connections, then under the heading or pick a Control Panel icon click Network Connections. 10. In the Network Connections window, right-click your Wireless Network Connection and select Properties. 11. Select the Wireless Networks tab. 12. Click to clear ("deselect") the check box Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings, then click OK on the Wireless Network tab. Do not click any other tabs. Continue with the installation of Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless. Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless Installation (Required) Continue with the following steps to install the Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless wireless configuration utility (required):

Some versions of this product do not support the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections menu screen for installation of utility software. If the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections menu screen does not appear, or if it does not have a menu item for Wireless LAN Adapters, you can start the Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless installer manually using Start > Run and browsing to the file iSetup.exe in the path APPS/PROSET/WINXP32 on the Intel CD supplied with the product. Skip Steps 13 and 14 below and continue with Step 15. 13. Display the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections screen by removing and re-

inserting the Intel CD, or by running autorun.exe from the CD. Click Wireless LAN Adapters. 14. On the Intel PRO/Wireless LAN Adapters menu screen, click Install Software. 15. On the Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless screen, click Next. 16. On the License Agreement screen, after reading the license agreement, select I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next. 17. On the Setup Type screen, select Typical and then click Next. This is the recommended setting for a first-time installation. 18. On the Ready to Install the Program screen click Install. 19. After the software is installed on your computer, click Finish. Click Exit to close the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections screen. 20. To launch Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless, double-click the Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless icon in the system tray or follow the path Start > Programs > Intel Network Adapters > Intel(R) PROSet. For additional information on the program, press F1 or click Help while the program is running. Uninstalling Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless After uninstalling Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless using the "add/remove" feature in Windows, re-boot the computer. Any current connection remains active (the profile is active) until the computer re-boots. Back to Contents Page Please read all restrictions and disclaimers. Back to Contents Page Troubleshooting: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG User's Guide Troubleshooting l LAN Utility Conflict Message l Using a Profile with an incorrect WEP Encryption Key l Problems with installation l Users are dropped from the wireless network l Range decreases as data rate increases l Signal doesn't pass through a short or thin wall l Signal strength drops when a cell phone is used in area l Range is shorter than it should be l Interference from fluorescent lights l When too much range is undesirable l Help Prevent access to wireless networks from outside the building l Problems with network connectivity l Checking Adapter Statistics l Before calling Customer Support LAN Utility Conflict Message Message dialog "Another wireless LAN utility is communicating with the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN adapter. To avoid conflicts, Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless has temporarily disabled its Profile Management features" is displayed. Refer to Enabling Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless to manage Your Wireless Connections for information. Using a Profile with an incorrect WEP Encryption Key When connected to an access point using a profile with an incorrect WEP key encryption, the task tray icon and the General page will both indicate good signal strength and that you are associated with the AP. However, when you attempt to send data to the AP using this profile, because of the incorrect WEP key encryption, authentication cannot be established to acquire an IP address from the AP to allow data transfer. Refer to the following WEP encryption and authentication settings. Open Authentication with an incorrect WEP 64 or 128-bit encryption key:

l A profile with an incorrect WEP encryption key will allow the wireless adapter to associate with the access point. l No data transfer Open Authentication with no WEP encryption:

l Allows association to an access point l Data transfer is allowed Shared Authentication:

l Associated to an AP always allows data transfer. Problems with installation Windows does not detect the wireless adapter:

1. Remove and re-install the adapter. 2. Uninstall and reinstall the adapter's drivers. Users are dropped from the wireless network Suggested causes and solutions:

l Find out if a person or workgroup moved or if the building has been rearranged. l If two or more users are seated too close to each other, performance can suffer. Instruct your users to space themselves a small distance apart to keep receivers from being overloaded. l Delivery trucks with very large metal sides can affect performance by reflecting destructive signals back into a building. If you have an installation that includes a shipping dock, check to see if the problem coincides with the arrival of large trucks. l Personal systems can also interfere with your network. Wireless speakers, cordless earphones, some Bluetooth devices, and similar systems can be the source of an infrequent but hard to find the problem. Some systems do not conform to wireless regulations. Shut off suspect devices or remove them from the area. l If possible, remove and reinstall your new software. Conflicts with other resident software packages are always a possibility, and they are not always the fault of the newest addition. Sometimes just starting over fixes the problem. l Swap units around. Does your problem follow the changed units, or is it unique to a specific location? If it follows the product, the swapped unit could be damaged, or improperly configured. If the problem stays with the location, try to find out what is different about that particular room or area. Range decreases as data rate increases This is a normal condition. Range is inversely proportional to data rate: the faster the data, the shorter the range. This has to do with the modulation technology used. Very fast data rates require extremely complex signal waveforms, where even minor distortions can result in data errors. Slower data rates are much more tolerant, and consequently will get through even in the presence of some amount of noise, interference, distortion and echo. Signal doesn't pass through a short or thin wall Range is highly dependent on the physical environment. In a line-of-sight location, with elevated and calibrated antennas, range predictions are quite accurate. This is not true in a typical office building, where the walls may be simple drywall (which is almost transparent to microwaves), or could be plaster with metal underneath. Most sites are somewhere between these two extremes, and consist of a mixture of surfaces. You cant tell what is inside a wall by just looking at it, and we cant tell you exactly what distance you will achieve. Consider published range information to be typical, average, common or usual. Do not expect it to be exact. Signal strength drops when a cell phone is used in the area Range also depends on the electronic environment. If other equipment that could cause interference is nearby, the range of your transceiver could vary widely, and could change suddenly when the other equipment activates. This is particularly true for 802.11b installations, which share their frequencies with microwave ovens, cordless phones, wireless hi-fi speakers, electronics toys and similar devices. Try to keep your system away from other transmitters, and from other sources of electrical noise, such as large motors, spot welders, and similar electronically noisy devices. Range is shorter than it should be Repeat some tests late in the evening, or on a weekend, when there may be less interference. However, some users leave their networks turned all the time so this test is not foolproof. By all means, try more than one channel. Your range problem may just be a nearby user whose system uses your present test channel. Interference from fluorescent lights If you mount an access point close to fluorescent light fixtures, the lamp glow appears constant, but inside the lamp tube, ionization appears and disappears 120 times a second. This can modulate or chop an incoming signal and interfere with reception. When too much range is undesirable Too much range is not necessarily a good thing. At first it would appear that you would want as much range as possible, but with the increase in range comes an increase in interference potential, as your unit hears not only your other units but also manages to hear the systems of other companies up and down the street. If you have a large installation, you will also wind up with more than one access point using the same channel. If a remote unit hears two or more access points, this will slow the network. Help Prevent access to wireless networks from outside the building Excess transmit range presents a special reverse problem. For example, putting an access point adjacent to a second floor bay window invites anyone with the right software on the street below to pick up and enjoy all network transmissions. We discuss some possible solutions to this problem further on. Problems with Network Connectivity If you cannot connect to the wireless network, try the following:

Check Network Settings 1. From the General page, check that the Network Name (SSID) and operating mode are correct. If the laptop is configured for ad hoc networking, make sure that the channel is correct. 2. To correct these settings, click the Networks tab. 3. Select the profile being used. 4. Click the Edit button and make the changes. Check Security Settings 1. From the General page, check that the security settings are correct. 2. To correct the security settings, click the Networks tab. 3. Select the profile being used. 4. Click the Edit button. 5. Click the Security tab. Make sure that the settings for WEP encryption are correct. Checking Adapter Statistics Adapter Statistics If the adapter is communicating with an access point (infrastructure mode) or other computers in peer-to-peer mode, click the Statistics button in the Troubleshooting tab to display the current information about how well the adapter is transmitting and receiving information. Before calling Customer Support Make a note of the following answers before calling customer support:

l From the General tab, view the adapter's connection details. Check that it is associated with an access point, and the quality and strength of the signal. l From the General page, click the Details button and check what revision of software and hardware or other LAN software are you running?

l How many remote units do you have talking to each access point?

l What channels are you using, and how are they dispersed?

l How much coverage overlap is there between access points?

l How high above the floor are the access points mounted?

l What other electronic equipment is operating in the same band?

l What construction materials are used in wall and floors?

Back to Contents Page Please read all restrictions and disclaimers. Back to Contents Page Connecting to a Network: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG User's Guide Connecting to a Network using Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless l Enabling Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless to manage Your Wireless Connections l How to access Advanced Settings l System Wide Advanced Settings l Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless Configuration Service l Scanning for Available Networks l Connecting to a Network Using an Access Point l Connecting to a Peer-to-Peer (Ad Hoc) Network l Switching the Radio Off and On l Disable the Radio from Windows l Viewing Adapter Advanced Settings in Windows Enabling Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless to manage Your Wireless Connections If you are using Windows XP as your wireless manager the following described how to enable Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless as your wireless manager. 1. From the desktop, Click the Start button > Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections, right-click Wireless Network Connection, then click Properties. 2. In Wireless Network Connection Properties, Click the Wireless Network tab. 3. Verify that the Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings checkbox is clear (unchecked). 4. Double-click the Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless icon in the desktop task tray. 5. If you have previously setup your profiles, click the Networks tab. The profile list should display available networks to connect to. If no profiles have been established, refer to Creating a New Profile for more information. How to access Advanced Settings Use the Advanced Setting to configure your network connection preferences, and profile management option. To access the Advanced Settings:

1. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 2. Click the Advanced button. Advanced Settings:

l Auto-connection l Connection preference l Infrastructure wireless mode selection l Profile management l 11b/11g mixed environment protection protocol l Advanced Security l Import/Export Button Refer to System Wide Settings for more about profile management options in Advanced Settings. System Wide Advanced Settings Profile Management Options The following Profile Management options can be found in Advanced Settings. Display available networks when not associated: When cleared, disables the Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless wireless manager dialog listing the available networks. When checked, the Intel Configuration Service running in the background automatically displays available networks not listed in the Profile List. This method provides automatic connection to available networks in the range of your wireless adapter. The Configuration Service constantly monitors your wireless adapter's connection status. If no matching profiles are found in the Profile List for a network, a dialog automatically displays the available network access points and computers (ad hoc mode) within range of the wireless adapter. The Configuration Service can also be used if there is more than one wireless adapter installed using 802.11b bands. When the Intel Configuration Service dialog is displayed, listing the available networks, checking "Dont show this again"

option, will prevent the dialog from displaying again if the adapter becomes unassociated. The Configuration Service will continue to function and attempt to connect, using a profile from the Profile List, or to an available network depending on the selection mode. This means that if Connect Using Preferred Profiles Only is selected and no matching profile is found, then the adapter will remain unassociated. You can still use the Connect button from the Networks tab to connect to an available network. Notify when disabling profile management features:

Check: If Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless is currently managing your wireless adapter a message dialog displays "Windows XP is managing your profiles" if Windows XP Zero Configuration becomes enabled. l Select yes, Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless will manage the wireless adapter. l Select No, Windows XP will manage the wireless adapter. If any other wireless manager (not Windows XP wireless manager) becomes enabled the message dialog displays "Another wireless LAN utility is communicating with the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN adapter. To avoid conflicts, Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless has temporarily disabled its Profile Management features."

Clear: If Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless is currently managing your wireless adapter you will not be notified in the event that Windows XP Zero Configuration or any other wireless manager becomes enabled. In the event that Windows XP Zero Configuration is enabled, and this box is cleared, or you answer no to the above question, the Connect button on the Profile page cannot be used to connect to any available networks. The Scan button can be used to scan for available networks. However, the Connect button is non-functioning when used to connect to an available network. l Ad hoc mode is disabled. The Connect button in the ad hoc connect dialog is non-

functioning. l Task tray icon menu: Launching an ad hoc profile and applying a profile from the task tray menu is not available. Notify when Windows XP Zero Configuration is enabled:

Check: If the box is checked, when Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless starts up, a message dialog displays "Windows XP is managing your profiles" if Windows XP Zero Configuration is enabled, indicating that Windows XP is currently configured to manage the wireless adapter. Do you wish to disable Windows XP management and let Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless manage your wireless network?

l Select Yes - Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless will manage the wireless adapter. l Select No - Windows XP will manage the wireless adapter. Clear: If the box is cleared, when Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless starts up, you will not be notified in the event that Windows XP Zero Configuration wireless manager is enabled. Enable Profile Management Features: If the box is checked, it indicates that Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless is configured to manage your wireless adapter. If cleared, Windows XP is the wireless network manager. Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless Configuration Service The Configuration Service feature operates in background to automatically display available networks not listed in the Profile List. This method provides automatic connection in a 2.4 environment to available networks in the range of your wireless adapter. The Configuration Service constantly monitors your wireless adapter's connection status. If no matching profiles are found in the Profile List for a network, a dialog automatically displays the available network access points and computers (ad hoc mode) within range of the wireless adapter. The Configuration Service can also be used if there is more than one wireless adapter installed using 802.11b band. The Configuration Service features:

l The Configuration Service is launched when you log on to your computer. l No active profile switching will be performed. Once the adapter is associated with the access point, if a higher priority profile becomes available, no switching will occur. l The Configuration Service is only available if Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless is installed. l If a connection to an access point cannot be made using any of the profiles in the Profile List, a dialog will display the available networks. l If there are multiple profiles listed for an available network, a dialog box will list the profiles for you to choose from. l If an available network is detected with WEP encryption and authentication, a dialog for setting up WEP encryption displays before the connection is made. The Configuration Service can be used in two ways:

1. Connect to available network using profiles only: In this mode the Configuration Service attempts to connect to a network access point using profiles from the Profile List only. If no matching profile is found, a dialog appears that lists the available networks. You can also close this dialog without connecting by clicking the Cancel button. The adapter will remain unassociated, and the list of available networks will NOT be displayed again unless another available network is detected. This mode is set in the Advanced Setting options. 2. Connect to any available network if no matching profile found: In this mode the Configuration Service attempts to connect to a network access point first using profiles from the Profile List. If no matching profile is found, the Configuration Service automatically connects to any available network. This mode is set in the Advanced Setting options. Enabling Automatic Connection The Configuration Service also monitors for the "resume status" after a laptop computer suspend event. When this occurs, the Configuration Service will re-enable the automatic connection service. These features can be enabled again after rebooting your computer or after a suspend and resume cycle. Features affected when another profile management application is detected For AAA Client:

Select OK, and the AAA Client application will manage the adapter. The current connection will continue with the affected Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless features show below. To avoid conflicts, the Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless profile management features have been temporarily disabled. To re-enable these features, first disable the other LAN utility and then either:

1. Re-enable from Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless Advanced Settings. 2. Resume after a computer suspend. 3. Reboot the computer. NOTE: AAA Client Wireless Manager - If Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless detects another wireless AAA client manager, a notification dialog displays, if you choose

"OK" on this dialog, the Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless profile management features are automatically disabled. The Advanced Setting "Notify when disabling profile management features" check box must be checked in order to display the notification dialog if Windows XP Zero Configuration in not enabled. The default setting is enabled (checked). For Windows XP Zero Configuration:

l Select Yes, to disable Windows XP Zero Configuration. Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless will continue to manage the adapter. l Select No, Windows XP will manage the adapter. The current connection will continue with the affected Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless features show below. You can also prevent the dialog from being displayed again, in which case Windows XP Zero Configuration will automatically manage the wireless adapter. The notification dialog can be re-enabled from the Advanced Settings options. Affected Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless features:

l The Connect button on the Profile page is non-functioning. l The Scan button can be used to scan for available networks, however, the Connect button is non-functioning when used to connect to an available network. l Ad hoc mode is disabled. The Connect button in the ad hoc connect dialog is non-

functioning. l Task tray icon menu: Launching an ad hoc profile and applying a profile from the task tray menu is not available. NOTE: If the buttons described above are used, the following message displays:

"Another wireless LAN utility is communicating with the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN adapter. To avoid conflicts, Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless has temporarily disabled its Profile Management features."

Scanning for Available Networks A fast way to connect to a network is to use the Scan button to search for a network access point in range of your wireless adapter. When a network is found, you can instantly connect without a profile or create a new profile. NOTE: Profiles with the Enable Auto-Import feature enabled will also be displayed in the profile list of available networks. Refer to Automatic Profile Distribution for more information. To scan for available networks:

1. From the General page, select the wireless adapter on the left side pane. 2. Select the Networks tab. 3. Click the Scan button. 4. The Available Networks dialog displays the names of the available networks. Click the Refresh button to refresh the list of available networks. 5. Select the network from the list, and click the Connect button. 6. Select the network profile name with <no profile> shown, and click the Connect button. 7. Click the No, connect me directly without creating a profile option. Note, you can click Yes, create a profile for this network now to create a profile to be used later. NOTE: If the selected network has 802.1x authentication, you must first create a profile using the Profile Wizard. However, if the network has no WEP security

(Open), WEP 64 or 128-bit encryption, or WPA-PSK, you can enter the required security settings in the dialog that displays after clicking the Connect button. Then a one time connection without a profile can be made. l The selected network has WPA security settings: If the selected network has 802.1x authentication security settings, after clicking the Connect button, the Profile Wizard Advanced Security page will display. From this dialog you can enter the 802.1x settings and connect to the network. l The selected network has no (Open) WEP security settings: If the selected network has no security (Open). Click the Connect button to connect to the network. l The selected network has WEP or WPA-PSK security settings: If the selected network has WEP encryption security settings, after clicking the Connect button, the Profile Wizard Advanced Security page will display. From this dialog you can enter the WEP security settings and connect to the network. 8. Click OK to connect to a network. Connecting to a Network Using an Access Point An infrastructure network consists of one or more access points and one or more computers with wireless adapters installed. Each access point must have a wired connection to the Local Area Network (LAN). You can connect to a network by first creating a new profile using the Profile Wizard, then selecting that profile to connect to the network access point using the Connect button. You can also connect to a network, by using the Scan button. Refer to Creating a New Profile for more information. Connecting to a Peer-to-Peer (Ad Hoc) Network Connect or Start an Ad Hoc Network Start an Ad Hoc Network Ending an Ad Hoc Session Creating an Ad Hoc Profile Using the Profile Wizard In peer-to-peer (ad hoc) mode, you can send and receive information to other computers in an ad hoc network. All wireless clients in the ad hoc network must use the same network name (SSID) and channel number. For a list of allowed 802.11b ad hoc channels, refer to the Adapter Settings for more information. NOTE: While scanning with an ad hoc profile set to a specific transmit channel, if an ad hoc network is found on another channel, you will be connected using the new channel. The new channel number is displayed in the Adapter Settings. Connect to an Ad Hoc Network NOTE: For information about connecting to an ad hoc using a profile, refer to Create an Ad Hoc Profile using the Profile Wizard. Connect to an ad hoc network using a profile l Select an ad hoc profile from the Profile List and click the Connect button. This method uses a pre-defined ad hoc profile created by the Profile Wizard. When connecting to an ad hoc network, the transmit channel established by the first computer is used. This channel may be different than the one selected when the ad hoc profile was created by the Profile Wizard. Join an ad hoc network without a profile l Join a one-time ad hoc session without a profile. This method does not use a pre-

defined profile. To connect to any ad hoc network, click the Scan button to scan for any ad hoc networks, enter the password (SSID), then click the Connect button to connect. When joining an ad hoc network, the transmit channel established by the first computer is used. Start an Ad Hoc Network You can start an ad hoc network by using your computer as a wireless station. This method uses your computer's SSID to establish the ad hoc network for other users to connect to. When you are the originator of an ad hoc network, all other users must use the channel and SSID. Ending an Ad Hoc Session To end an ad hoc session, click the default profile in the Profile List and click the Close button. Creating an Ad Hoc Profile Using the Profile Wizard The following describes how to create a new ad hoc profile using the Profile Wizard and connect to an ad hoc network General Settings 1. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 2. Click the Add button. The General Settings dialog displays. 3. Enter a profile name in the Profile Name field. 4. Enter the network SSID, in the Network Name (SSID) field. 5. Click Ad hoc operating mode. 6. Click Password protect this profile to set a profile password. 7. Click Next. Security Settings 8. Select either None, WEP for the data encryption. 9. If WEP is selected, select either 64 or 128-bit for the Encryption Level. 10. Select the key index 1, 2, 3 or 4. 11. Enter the required pass phrase or hex key. 12. If the Password Protection checkbox was checked on the General settings page, then click Next to display the Password page. Password Protection Settings 13. Click the Password protect this profile checkbox. 14. Enter a password in the Password field. 15. Reenter the same password in the Confirm New Password field. 16. Click the Back button to change or verify the settings or click Finish when you have completed the profile settings and return to the Networks page. Connect to the Network 17. Changing the default transmit channel from the Adapter tab: Unless the other computers in the ad hoc network use a different channel from the default channel, there is no need to change the default channel. If you want to change the default channel, click the Adapter tab, and click Configure under Ad Hoc Channel Selection. Choose the operating band select a channel. Click OK to save the setting. 18. Select the Networks tab 19. After creating the new profile, click the profile in the Profile List. Profiles using ad hoc mode are indicated by a computer icon next to the profile name. 20. Click the Connect button to connect to the ad hoc network. Switching the Radio Off/On When your computer is switched on, if the radio is enabled it is constantly transmitting signals. In certain situations, such as landing or takeoff of an airplane, the radio signals may need to be turned off, if not these signals may cause interference. The following describes how to use your keyboard (if this option is available) and Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless to switch the radio on or off. The radio can be enabled or disabled from your computer keyboard, the task tray wireless menu option and from Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless. The current status of the radio is displayed in the task tray wireless icon and on the General page. Using the optional hardware radio on/off switch The radio can enabled or disabled from your keyboard, or from an external hardware switch if these options are available. Refer to your computer manufacturer for more information. Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless displays the current state of the radio on the General page if one of these option is installed. Using Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless to switch the radio on/off The radio can be switched on or off from General page in Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless. The current state of the radio is displayed in the wireless adapter task tray menu option. The General page also displays the current state of the radio if the hardware option is installed. Switching the radio On/Off Note: When your laptop is switched on, the radio is constantly transmitting signals. In certain situations, such as in a plane, signals from the radio may cause interference. To switch the radio OFF: From the General page; click the Off button next to Switch Radio On/Off. l The wireless adapter is not associated with the network when the radio is off. l Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless can be used to edit or add profile contents when the radio is off. To switch the radio ON: From the General page; click the On button next to Switch Radio On/Off. When the radio is on, an attempt will be made to associate with the network access point using the last profile. If the adapter cannot connect to the access point, the Configuration Service will attempt to find an available network. Refer to Configuration Service for more information. Switching the radio on or off from the Task Tray menu option Right-click the wireless icon in the task tray and select the wireless adapter being used. Depending on the previous state of the radio, select Switch Radio Off (radio is already ON, select to turn OFF) or Switch Radio On (radio is already OFF, select to turn ON). Disable the Radio from Windows The radio can be disabled (made non-functional) via the Windows operating system using Device Manager. Windows XP/2000 1. From your desktop, right-click My Computer and click Properties. 2. Click the Hardware tab. 3. Click the Device Manager button. 4. Double-click Network adapters. 5. Right-click the installed wireless adapter in use. 6. Choose Disable from the pop-up menu. 7. Click OK. Viewing Adapter Advanced Settings in Windows The following advanced options are available in the Windows Device Manager Advanced tab if Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless is not installed. If PROSet for Wireless is installed the Advanced tab displays the Open button. Selected this button to open PROSet for Wireless. To access the Advanced options:

1. From your desktop, right-click My Computer and click Properties. 2. Click the Hardware tab. 3. Click the Device Manager button. 4. Double-click Network adapters. 5. Right-click the name of the installed wireless adapter in use. 6. Select the Advanced tab. Advanced tab option under Windows XP and 2000:

l Ad Hoc Transmit Power - Set 802.11b ad hoc output power level of the wireless adapter. l Mixed mode protection - RTS/CTS enabled: (Default setting). Use this mode to avoid collisions in mixed mode environments where the 802.11g and 802.11b clients cannot hear each other. CTS-to-self enabled: This mode improves performance in mixed mode environments where 802.11g and 802.11b clients are in close proximity and can hear each other. This option can also be set in Advanced Settings. l Power Management - Set a balance between the computer's power source and the battery. l Wireless Mode - Select the wireless mode (modulation type) for date rate. The default setting is "802.11g and 802.11b." This option uses both 11 Mbps and 54 Mbps date rate. Other options are, "802.11g only" and "802.11b only."

Back to Contents Page Please read all restrictions and disclaimers. Back to Contents Page Using PROSet Profiles: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG User's Guide Using Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless Profiles l Setting up Windows Network Profiles l Profile Connection Preferences l Transmit Data Rates and Access Points l Creating a New Profile l Importing and Exporting Profiles l Setting a Profile Password l Automatic Profile Distribution l Editing an Existing Profile l Deleting a Profile l Connecting to a Network without a Profile l Connecting to a Network if a Blank SSID displays l Loading a Profile from the Task Tray Setting up Windows Network Profiles A profile is a saved group of network settings. Profiles are displayed in the Profile List in the wireless client manager General page. Profiles can be arranged in order of network connection priority. You can connect to one network using the first profile in the Profile List, then automatically connect to another network using the next profile. This allows you to stay connected while roaming freely from one wireless network to another. Although you can assign multiple profiles to a single network, you can only use one profile per connection. To add a new profile, use the Profile Wizard sequence of dialogs to configure the profile contents. The following example uses all of the Profile Wizard dialogs. Some settings may not be required for all profiles. Refer to the following to setup profile connection preferences:

Profile Connection Preferences To access the profile connection preference option:

1. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 2. Click the Advanced button. 3. Under the Auto-connection heading, click the one of the following options:

l Connect to available networks using profiles only (Default setting): Use the profiles in the Profile List to connect to any available network. l Connect to any available network if no matching profile is found: Connect to any available network without using a profile from the Profile List. l Connect to any network based on profiles only (Cisco Mode): Connect to any available network access point using profiles enabled for Cisco CCX (version 1) mode. This mode allows connection to access points that support multiple and blank network names

(SSIDs). m Enable Mixed-Cell (Requires Cisco CCX options): Select this Advanced Settings check box to allow the wireless LAN adapter to communicate with mixed cells. A mixed cell is a wireless network in which some devices use WEP and some do not. The option Enable Cisco-Client eXtentions in the Profile Wizard General Settings page must be enabled for mixed cell support. 4. Click OK to save the setting and return to the previous dialog. Transmit Data Rates and Access Points To achieve the optimum transmit data rate it is important to identify the type of access point that the wireless adapter is connecting to. The Advanced Settings provide the mode selections to optimize your operating environment. Infrastructure Mode The following describes how the wireless preference modes operate using Infrastructure mode. The adapter can operate in three modes:

l Connect to 802.11g and 802.11b: This is the default setting. The adapter will search for either 11g or 11b access points using data transmit rates of 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, or 54 Mbps. This connection defaults to 11g access points. The Available Networks list displays all 11b and 11g access points. l Connect to 802.11g only: The adapter will search for a 11g access point only using data transmit rates of 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, or 54 Mbps. The Available Networks list displays only 11g access points. l Connect to 802.11b only: The adapter will search for the best 11b and 11g access points using data rates of 1, 2, 5.5, or 11 Mbps. The Available Networks list displays any 11b and 11g access point. Access Point and Client Combinations The following table shows compare the adapter wireless preference mode, and the transmit date rates using a specific type of access point. The wireless mode (Modulation type) options determine the discovered access points displayed in the Scan list (Available Networks dialog). 11b Access Point Wireless Mode 11g and 11b 11b only 11g only 11g (11g and 11b) Access Point Wireless Mode Scan List Yes 11g and 11b Transmit Data Rates 1, 2, 5.5, or 11 Mbps 1, 2, 5.5, or 11 Mbps None Scan List Yes Yes No Connect Yes Yes No Connect Yes 11b only 11g only Yes Yes Yes Yes 11g (11g only mode) Access Point**

Wireless Mode 11g and 11b Scan List Yes Connect Yes 11b only 11g only No Yes No Yes Transmit Data Rates 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, or 54 Mbps*. 1, 2, 5.5, or 11 Mbps 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, or 54 Mbps*. Transmit Data Rates 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, or 54 Mbps*. None 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, or 54 Mbps*. Note: (*) depends on the signal strength and quality. Use RTS/CTS (Default setting) to avoid collisions in mixed mode environments where the 11g and 11b clients cannot hear each other. Use CTS-to-self to improve performance in mixed mode environments where 11g and 11b clients are in close proximity and can hear each other. Note: (**) Because 11b clients cannot connect to this access point mixed mode protection

(RTS/CTS or CTS-to-self) is not used. Ad Hoc Mode The following summarizes how the modulation settings operate using ad hoc mode. Ad Hoc Initiator Ad Hoc Joiner Action 11b-only 11b-only Basic rates (1, 2, 5.5, or 11 Mbps) Down scale basic rates, turn on protection* (1, 2, 5.5, or 11 Mbps) 11g-only 11b and 11g Basic rates (1, 2, 5.5, or 11 Mbps) 11b-only 11g-only 11b and 11g Does not apply to Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG adapter. For other cards - down scale basic rates, turn on protection* (1, 2, 5.5, or 11 Mbps) Basic rates (1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, or 54 Mbps) 11g-only 11b and 11g Upscale) basic rates (1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, or 54 Mbps) 11b-only Basic rates, turn on protection* (1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, or 54 Mbps) Downscale basic rates, turn on protection* depends on initiator (1, 2, 5.5, or 11 Mbps) 11g-only 11b and 11g Basic rates, turn on protection* depends on initiator (1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, or 54 Mbps) Comments 11b-only 11b and 11g 11b and 11g 11b and 11g 11g-only 11g-only 11b and 11g 11b and 11g 11b and 11g Note: (*) See Viewing Adapter Advanced Settings in Windows - Use "RTS/CTS enable" (Default setting) to avoid collisions in mixed mode environments where the 11g and 11b clients cannot hear each other. Use "CTS-to-self enable" to improve performance in mixed mode environments where 11g and 11b clients are in close proximity and can hear each other. Ad Hoc Transmit Rates Overview The following describes how the wireless preference modes operate using Ad Hoc mode. The adapter can operate in three modes:

l Connect to 802.11g and 802.11b: mixed mode (default setting). The adapter will search for either 11g or 11b access points using data transmit rates of 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, or 54 Mbps. This connection defaults to 11g access points. The Available Networks list displays all 11b and 11g access points. l Connect to 802.11g only: The adapter will search for a 11g access point only using data transmit rates of 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, or 54 Mbps. The Available Networks list displays only 11g access points. l Connect to 802.11b only: The adapter will search for the best 11b and 11g access points using data rates of 1, 2, 5.5, or 11 Mbps. The Available Networks list displays any 11b and 11g access point. When different modulation settings are used in ad hoc mode, they influence the computer in the following ways:

l It determines to which ad hoc network we are allowed to connect to. l It determines whom we show in our scan list. A station in an ad hoc network constantly adapts itself to the current situation in the ad hoc network as far as other stations capabilities are concerned. Updating of the supported transmit data rates is done in the following way:

Only the basic rates change. Supported rates of a station never change. At all times the basic rates advertised by stations in an ad hoc network should be the same, and should reflect the set of basic rates supported by every station in this ad hoc network. Since basic rates is the actual information used by a station to decide if it can join the ad hoc network then this is enough to determine if a station can or cannot connect to this ad hoc network. Mixed Mode Mixed mode stations (802.11g and 802.11b) are able to join any ad hoc network they hear. Joining an ad hoc network l Join an 11b ad hoc network only keep the supported rates and update the basic rates to fit the ad hoc network you are joining. Protection (RTS/CTS or CTS-to-self) is on. l Join an 11g ad hoc network only keep the supported rates and up scale the basic rates advertised in the beacons. Note that this is not good because the station ceases being a mixed mode and become an 11g only station. l Join an 11a and 11b ad hoc network only keep the supported rates and update the basic rates to fit the ad hoc network you are joining. Initiating an ad hoc network When initiating a mixed mode ad hoc network the default rates for mixed mode is: 1, 2, 5.5, 11, 6, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48 and 54 Mbps with rates 1, 2 as basic. When other stations join in, the basic rates are down scaled if required. Protection is on when 11b station are joining. 11b only mode Joining an ad hoc network In this mode you can only join an ad hoc network that advertises only basic data rates of 1, 2, 5.5, or 11 Mbps. So, the list of potential ad hoc networks will include 11b and 11b and 11g, but not 11g. Supported rates remain unchanged, and basic rates are adapted to match those advertised by the ad hoc network which you are joining in the beacons. Initiating an ad hoc network When initiating an 11b only ad hoc network, the following rates 1, 2, 5.5 and 11 Mbps, with 1 and 2 as basic. As other stations join in they down scale their basic rates if required. Protection

(RTS/CTS or CTS-to-self) is on. 11g only mode Initiate an ad hoc network as an 11g only (1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, or 54 Mbps). Support joining and down scaling in the same way as in Mixed mode. When initiating such an ad hoc network the advertised rates are: 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48 and 54 with 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 11, 12 and 24 Mbps as basic. 11g only stations are able to join any ad hoc network they hear. Joining an ad hoc network The basic rates in this case are taken from the beacons. l Join an 11b ad hoc network only keep the supported rates and down scale the basic rates to fit the ad hoc network you are joining. Protection (RTS/CTS or CTS-to-self) is on. l Join an 11g ad hoc network only keep the supported rates and adopt the basic rates advertised in the beacons. l Join an 11a and 11b ad hoc network only keep the supported rates and update the basic rates to fit the ad hoc network you are joining. Initiating an ad hoc network When initiating an 11g only ad hoc network the advertised rates are: 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48 and 54 Mbps with 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 11, 12 and 24 Mbps as basic. When other stations join in, the basic rates are down scaled if required. Protection (RTS/CTS or CTS-to-self) is on when 11b station is joining. Creating a New Profile To add a new profile, use the Profile Wizard sequence of dialogs to configure the profile contents. The following example uses all of the Profile Wizard dialogs, although some of the settings may not be required. To create a new profile and connect to a network:

1. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 2. Click the Add button. The General Settings dialog displays. NOTE: If this is the first time you have created a profile, click the profile named Default in the Profile List, click the Edit button and rename the default profile in the Profile Name field on the General page. General Settings 1. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 2. Click the Add button. The General Settings dialog displays. 3. Enter a profile name in the Profile Name field. 4. Enter the network SSID, in the Network Name (SSID) field. 5. Click Infrastructure or Ad hoc for the operating mode. 6. Click Password protect this profile to set a password for the profile. 7. The Mandatory AP option is only used if Infrastructure mode is selected. Use this option to connect to a specific access point. Click the Mandatory AP button, enter the MAC address for the access point. Click OK to save the setting and return to the General Settings page. 8. If you are using Cisco CCX, click the Enable Cisco Client eXtentions option to enable Cisco CKIP data encryption on the Security Settings page. If you have checked the Cisco's

"Mixed-Cell" box in the Advanced Setting, this option must also be checked. 9. Check the Enable Auto-Import check box to allow this profile to be imported. Refer to Automatic Profile Distribution for more information. 10. Click Next. Security Settings 11. Select Open or Shared in the Network Authentication options. Open, does not use any authentication method. Shared uses the WEP key as the authentication method. 12. Select either None, WEP or CKIP (if Enable Cisco Client eXtentions is enabled on the General Settings page) for the data encryption. 13. If WEP is selected, select either 64 or 128-bit for the Encryption Level. 14. Select the key index 1, 2, 3 or 4. 15. Enter the required pass phrase or hex key. 16. Click the 802.1x Enabled checkbox to enable the 802.1x security option. 17. Select MD5 or the appropriate 802.1x Authentication Type set by your system administrator. 18. After selecting your authentication type, click the Configure button to open the Settings dialog. Enter the user name and password of the user you have created on the authentication server. The user name and password do not have to be the same as name and password of your current Windows user login. The "Server Identity" can be use the default setting. The "Client Certificate" should be the one obtained from your RADIUS server or other certification server. 19. Click Close to save the settings. 20. If the Password Protection checkbox was checked on the General settings page, then click Next to display the Password page. Password Protection Settings 21. Click the Password protect this profile checkbox. 22. Enter a password in the Password field. 23. Reenter the same password in the Confirm New Password field. 24. Click the Back button to change or verify the settings or click Finish when you have completed the profile settings and return to the Networks page. Connect to the Network 25. Click the new profile name shown in the Profile List. Use the up and down arrows to position the priority of the new profile in the priority list. 26. Click the Advanced button to set the network connection preferences. 27. Click the Connect button to connect to the network. 28. Click OK to close the Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless utility. Importing and Exporting Profiles NOTE: A password protected profile can be imported and exported, however, before editing the profile, the password must be entered. Refer to Setting a Profile Password for more information. To import profiles:

1. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 2. Click the Advanced button. 3. Click the Import/Export button. 4. Click the Import button. 5. Locate the profile to import on your hard disk or enter the profile name in the File name field. The profile extension is .profile. 6. Click the Import to import the profile into the Profile List. 7. Click OK twice to return to the Networks tab. 8. Click OK to close the Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless utility. To export profiles:

1. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 2. Click the Advanced button. 3. Click the profiles to export from the export profile list. 4. Click the Browse button and select a directory to save the profiles in. Click OK to return to the previous dialog. 5. Click the Export button to start exporting the profiles. 6. Click OK twice to return to the Networks tab. 7. Click OK to close the Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless utility. Setting a Profile Password To set a password for an existing profile:

1. Select the profile from the Profile List in the Networks page, and click the Edit button. 2. Click the Password tab. 3. Click the check box next to "Password protect this profile" to enable profile password. 4. Enter a ten character password in the Password field. 5. Enter the new password again in the Confirm New Password field. 6. Click OK to exit and return to the Networks tab. 7. Click OK to close and exit the Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless utility. To password protect a new profile:

1. Select the profile from the Profile List in the Networks page, and click the Add button. 2. Click the Password tab. 3. Click the check box next to "Password protect this profile" to enable profile password. 4. Enter a ten character password in the Password field. 5. Enter the new password again in the Confirm New Password field. 6. A message box displays that the new password was successfully applied. Click OK to close the message box. Note, if the new password is not successfully confirmed, click OK to close the message box and repeat step 4 and 5. 7. Click OK to exit and return to the Networks tab. 8. Click OK to close and exit the wireless Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless utility. Automatic Profile Distribution The Enable Auto-Import feature allows a network administrator to distribute a profile automatically to computers connected to a network. The Enable Auto-Import box is located on the Profile Wizard dialogs. When the checkbox is checked the profile must be copied to a specific directory on the host computer, from there it can be distributed to multiple computers. Once the profile is received by the remote computer it will automatically be available for use from the Scan profile list. If an attempt is made to edit a distributed profile that is password protected, a password prompt will appear. Automatically importing WLAN profiles is accomplished by monitoring the import folder on your hard disk for new profile files. Only profiles that have the Enable Auto-Import box checked on the Profile Wizard dialogs can be automatically imported. If a profile of the same name already exists in the Profile List, a dialog is displayed from which you can either reject the import, or accept in which case the existing profile will be replaced. All imported profiles will be placed at the bottom of the Profile List, and the profile file will be immediately deleted after the import whether the import was successful or not. Step 1: To export an "Enabled Auto-Import" profile from the profile list:

1. Select a profile to be edited from the Profile List in the Networks page, and click the Edit button or click the Add button to create a new profile using the Profile Wizard. 2. Check the Enable Auto-Import checkbox on the General page. 3. Click OK (Edit a profile) or Finish (Add a profile) to save the settings. Step 2: Export the profile from the profile list to a folder on your computer. 4. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 5. Click the Advanced button. 6. Click the profile to export from the export profile list. 7. Click the Browse button and select a folder to save the profiles in. Click OK to return to the previous dialog. 8. Click the Export button to start exporting the profile. 9. Click OK twice to return to the Networks dialog. 10. Click OK to close the Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless. Step 3: Copy (not drag-and-drop) the exported profile from its folder (see step 7) to the following directory, Programs Files\Intel\PROSetWireless\PROSet\Import. The profile is now ready to distribute to other computers. Once the profile is received by the remote computer it will automatically be available for use from the profile list. Editing an Existing Profile To edit an existing profile:

1. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 2. Select the profile to edit from the Profile List. 3. Click the Edit button. The General page displays. 4. Click on the General, Security, and Password tabs to make the necessary changes for the network profile settings:

5. Click OK on any of the pages to save all the settings and return to the Networks tab. 6. Click the new profile name shown in the Profile List. Use the up and down arrows to position the priority of new profile in the priority list. 7. Click the Advanced button to set the network connection preferences. 8. Click the Connect button to connect to the network. 9. Click OK to close the Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless utility. Deleting a Profile To delete a profile:

1. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 2. Click the profile to be deleted from the Profile List. 3. Click the Delete button. 4. Click Yes to permanently delete the profile. NOTE: You cannot delete all profiles from the profile list. There must always be one profile displayed in the list. Connecting to a Network without a Profile To connect to an available network without a profile:

1. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 2. Click the Scan button. 3. Select the network profile name with <no profile> shown, and click the Connect button. 4. Click the No, connect me directly without creating a profile option. Note, you can click Yes, create a profile for this network now to create a profile to be used later. 5. Click OK to connect. Connecting to a Network if a Blank SSID displays If the wireless adapter receives a blank network name (SSID) from a stealth access point, both the blank SSID and <no profile> display in the available networks list. To associate with a stealth access point, a new profile must first be created before connection. After connection both the blank SSID and the associated SSID can be viewed in the available networks list. To connect to an access point that transmits a blank network name (SSID) in the Available Networks list:

1. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 2. Click the Scan button. 3. Select the network name with a blank SSID and <no profile> shown in the Available Networks list. 4. Click the Connect button. 5. The Profile Wizard dialog displays. Enter a profile name and Network Name (SSID) and security settings if required. Click Next to save the profile settings and return to the Networks tab. 6. Click Next. 7. Click Finish. 8. Select the new profile from the profile list and click Connect. Loading a Profile from the Task Tray To load a profile from the Task Tray:

1. Right-click Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless icon in the task tray. 2. Select the Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG adapter. 3. Click Select Profile and select the profile to be launched. Back to Contents Page Please read all restrictions and disclaimers. Back to Contents Page Security Overview: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG User's Guide Encryption Overview WEP Encryption and Authentication 802.1x Authentication What is a RADIUS Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) PEAP Cisco LEAP Encryption Overview Security in the WLAN can be supplemented by enabling data encryption using WEP

(Wireless Encryption Protocol). You can choose a 64 or 128 bit level encryption. Also, the data can then be encrypted with a key. Another parameter called the key index provides the option to create multiple keys for that profile. However, only one key can be used at a time. You can also choose to password protect an Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless profile to ensure privacy. The pass phrase is used to generate a WEP key automatically. You have the option of either using a pass phrase or entering a WEP key manually. Using 64-bit encryption, the pass phrase is 5 characters long and you can choose to enter any arbitrary and easy to remember phrase like Acme1 or enter 10 Hexadecimal numbers for the WEP key corresponding to the network the user wants to connect to. For 128-bit encryption, the pass phrase is 13 characters long or you can enter a 26 hexadecimal numbers for the WEP key to get connected to the appropriate network. WEP Encryption and Authentication Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption and shared authentication provides protection for your data on the network. WEP uses an encryption key to encrypt data before transmitting it. Only computers using the same encryption key can access the network or decrypt the encrypted data transmitted by other computers. Authentication provides an additional validation process from the adapter to the access point. Supported a authentication schemes are Open and Shared-Key authentication:

l Shared-Key authentication is supported using 64-bit and 128-bit WEP encryption l Open mode does not use an encryption authentication method to associate to a keys. specific access point. Network Keys When Data Encryption (WEP, CKIP or TKIP) is enabled, a network key is used for encryption. A network key can be provided for you automatically (for example, it might be provided on your wireless network adapter, or enter it yourself and specify the key length

(64-bits or 128-bit), key format (ASCII characters or hexadecimal digits), and key index

(the location where a specific key is stored). The longer the key length, the more secure the key. Every time the length of a key is increased by one bit, the number of possible keys double. Under 802.11, a wireless station can be configured with up to four keys (the key index values are 1, 2, 3, and 4). When an access point or a wireless station transmits an encrypted message using a key that is stored in a specific key index, the transmitted message indicates the key index that was used to encrypt the message body. The receiving access point or wireless station can then retrieve the key that is stored at the key index and use it to decode the encrypted message body. Encryption Static and Dynamic Key Types 802.1x uses two types of encryption keys, static and dynamic. Static encryption keys are changed manually and are more vulnerable. MD5 authentication only uses static encryption keys. Dynamic encryption keys are renewed automatically on a periodic basis. This makes the encryption key(s) more secure. To enable dynamic encryption keys, you must use 802.1x certificate-based authentication methods, such as TLS or TTLS or PEAP. 802.1x Authentication 802.1x features l 802.1x supplicant protocol support l Support for the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) - RFC 2284 l Supported Authentication Methods:

l MD5 - RFC 2284 l EAP TLS Authentication Protocol - RFC 2716 and RFC 2246 l EAP Tunneled TLS (TTLS) l Cisco LEAP l PEAP l Supports Windows XP, 2000 802.1x Authentication Notes l 802.1x authentication methods, include passwords, certificates, and smart cards

(plastic cards that hold data) l 802.1x authentication option can only be used with Infrastructure operation mode l Network Authentication modes are: EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, MD5 Challenge, LEAP

(for Cisco-Client eXtentions mode only), and PEAP (for WPA modes only) Overview 802.1x authentication is independent of the 802.11 authentication process. The 802.1x standard provides a framework for various authentication and key-management protocols. There are different 802.1x authentication types, each providing a different approach to authentication but all employing the same 802.1x protocol and framework for communication between a client and an access point. In most protocols, upon the completion of the 802.1x authentication process, the supplicant receives a key that it uses for data encryption. With 802.1x authentication, an authentication method is used between the client and a Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) server connected to the access point. The authentication process uses credentials, such as a user's password that are not transmitted over the wireless network. Most 802.1x types support dynamic per-user, per-session keys to strengthen the static key security. 802.1x benefits from the use of an existing authentication protocol known as the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP). 802.1x authentication for wireless LANs has three main components: The authenticator

(the access point), the supplicant (the client software), and the authentication server (a Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service server (RADIUS). 802.1x authentication security initiates an authorization request from the WLAN client to the access point, which authenticates the client to an Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) compliant RADIUS server. This RADIUS server may authenticate either the user (via passwords or certificates) or the system (by MAC address). In theory, the wireless client is not allowed to join the networks until the transaction is complete. There are several authentication algorithms used for 802.1x; MD5-Challenge, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, Protected EAP

(PEAP), and EAP Cisco Wireless Light Extensible Authentication Protocol (LEAP). These are all methods for the WLAN client to identify itself to the RADIUS server. With RADIUS authentication, users identities are checked against databases. RADIUS constitutes a set of standards addressing Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA). Radius includes a proxy process to validate clients in a multi-server environment. The IEEE 802.1x standard is for controlling and authenticating access to port-based 802.11 wireless and wired Ethernet networks. Port-based network access control is similar to a switched local area network (LAN) infrastructure that authenticates devices that are attached to a LAN port and prevent access to that port if the authentication process fails. How 802.1x authentication works A simplified description of the 802.1x authentication is:

1. A client sends a "request to access" message to an access point. The access point requests the identity of the client. 2. The client replies with its identity packet which is passed along to the 3. The authentication server sends an "accept" packet to the access point. 4. The access point places the client port in the authorized state and data traffic is authentication server. allowed to proceed. Refer to Setting up the Client for WEP and MD5 authentication for details about setting up an 802.1x profile using the Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless utility. What is a RADIUS?

RADIUS is the Remote Access Dial-In User Service, an Authorization, Authentication, and Accounting (AAA) client-server protocol for when a AAA dial-up client logs in or out of a Network Access Server. Typically, a RADIUS server is used by Internet Service Providers (ISP) to performs AAA tasks. AAA phases are described as follows:

l Authentication phase: Verifies a user name and password against a local database. After the credentials are verified, the authorization process begins. l Authorization phase: Determines whether a request will be allowed access to a resource. An IP address is assigned for the Dial-Up client. l Accounting phase: Collects information on resource usage for the purpose of trend analysis, auditing, session time billing, or cost allocation. Wi-Fi Protected Access* (WPA) Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a security enhancement that strongly increases the level of data protection and access control to a WLAN. WPA mode enforces 802.1x authentication and key-exchange and only works with dynamic encryption keys. To strengthen data encryption, WPA utilizes its Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP). TKIP provides important data encryption enhancements that include a per-packet key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a also re-keying mechanism. Using these improvement enhancements, TKIP protects against WEP's known weaknesses. PEAP PEAP is a new Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) IEEE 802.1x authentication type designed to take advantage of server-side EAP-Transport Layer Security (EAP-TLS) and to support various authentication methods, including user's passwords and one-time passwords, and Generic Token Cards. Cisco LEAP Cisco LEAP (EAP Cisco Wireless) is a server and client 802.1x authentication via a user-

supplied logon password. When a wireless access point communicates with a Cisco LEAP-enabled RADIUS (Cisco Secure Access Control Server (ACS) server), Cisco LEAP provides access control through mutual authentication between client wireless adapters and the wireless network and provides dynamic, individual user encryption keys to help protect the privacy of transmitted data. Cisco Rogue AP security feature The Cisco Rogue AP feature provides security protection from an introduction of a rogue access point that could mimic a legitimate access point on a network in order to extract information about user credentials and authentication protocols which could compromise security. This feature only works with Cisco's LEAP authentication. Standard 802.11 technology does not protect a network from the introduction of a rogue access point. CKIP Cisco Key Integrity Protocol (CKIP) is Cisco proprietary security protocol for encryption in 802.11 media. CKIP uses the following features to improve 802.11 security in infrastructure mode:

l Key Permutation l Message Integrity Check l Message Sequence Number Mixed-Cell Some access points, for example Cisco 350 or Cisco 1200, support environments in which not all client stations support WEP encryption, this is called Mixed-Cell Mode. When these wireless network operate in optional encryption mode, client stations that join in WEP mode, send all messages encrypted, and stations, that join in using standard mode, send all messages unencrypted. These APs broadcast that the network is not using encryption, but allow clients to join using WEP mode. When Mixed-Cell is enabled in a profile, it allows you to connect to access points that are configured for optional encryption. NOTE: Make sure to enable the Advanced Settings Mixed-Cell (Requires Cisco CCX option) when using Enable Cisco-Client eXtentions in a profile. A Cisco CCX enabled profile uses CKIP data encryption and 802.1x LEAP authentication. Back to Contents Page Please read all restrictions and disclaimers. Back to Contents Page Setting up Connection Security: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG User's Guide Security and Encryption Setting up Data Encryption and Authentication Encryption Overview How to Enable WEP Encryption System Administrator Tasks Setting up the Client for WEP and MD5 authentication Setting up the Client for WPA-PSK using WEP or TKIP authentication Setting up the Client for WPA using TKIP encryption and TLS authentication Setting up the Client for WPA using TKIP encryption and TTLS or PEAP authentication Setting up the Client for CCX using CKIP encryption and LEAP authentication Setting up Data Encryption and Authentication Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption and shared authentication helps provide protection for your data on the network. WEP uses an encryption key to encrypt data before transmitting it. Only computers using the same encryption key can access the network or decrypt the encrypted data transmitted by other computers. Authentication provides an additional validation process from the adapter to the access point. The WEP encryption algorithm is vulnerable to passive and active network attacks. TKIP and CKIP algorithms include enhancements to the WEP protocol that mitigate existing network attacks and address its shortcomings. Open and Shared Key authentication 802.11 support two types of network authentication methods; Open System and Shared that use 64-bit and 128-bit WEP encryption. Open does not require an encryption authentication method to associate to a specific access point. Supported authentication schemes are Open and Shared authentication:

l Using Open authentication, any wireless station can request authentication. The station that needs to authenticate with another wireless station sends an authentication management frame that contains the identity of the sending station. The receiving station or AP will grant any request for authentication. Open authentication allows any device network access. If no encryption is enabled on the network, any device that knows the SSID of the access point can gain access to the network. l Using Shared authentication, each wireless station is assumed to have received a secret shared key over a secure channel that is independent from the 802.11 wireless network communications channel. Shared key authentication requires that the client configure a static WEP key. The client access will be granted only if it passed a challenge based authentication. Network Keys When Data Encryption (WEP, CKIP or TKIP) is enabled, a network key is used for encryption. A network key can be provided for you automatically (for example, it might be provided on your wireless network adapter, or you can enter it yourself and specify the key the key length (64-bits or 128-bit), key format (ASCII characters or hexadecimal digits), and key index (the location where a specific key is stored). The longer the key length, the more secure the key. Every time the length of a key is increased by one bit, the number of possible keys double. Under 802.11, a wireless station can be configured with up to four keys (the key index values are 1, 2, 3, and 4). When an access point or a wireless station transmits an encrypted message using a key that is stored in a specific key index, the transmitted message indicates the key index that was used to encrypt the message body. The receiving access point or wireless station can then retrieve the key that is stored at the key index and use it to decode the encrypted message body. Encryption Static and Dynamic Key Types 802.1x uses two types of encryption keys, static and dynamic. Static encryption keys are changed manually and are more vulnerable. MD5 authentication only uses static encryption keys. Dynamic encryption keys are renewed automatically on a periodic basis. This makes the encryption key(s) more secure. To enable dynamic encryption keys, you must use 802.1x authentication methods, such as TLS, TTLS, PEAP or LEAP. Encryption Overview Security in the WLAN can be supplemented by enabling data encryption using WEP

(Wireless Encryption Protocol). You can choose a 64 or 128 bit level encryption. Also, the data can then be encrypted with a key. Another parameter called the key index is provides the option to create multiple keys for that profile. However, only one key can be used at a time. You can also choose to password protect the profile to ensure privacy. The pass phrase is used to generate a WEP key automatically. You have the option of either using a pass phrase or entering a WEP key manually. Using 64-bit encryption, the pass phrase is 5 characters long and you can choose to enter any arbitrary and easy to remember phrase like, Acme1, or enter 10 Hexadecimal characters for the WEP key that matches the network that the connects to. For 128-bit encryption, the pass phrase is 13 characters long or you can enter a 26 hexadecimal characters for the WEP key to get connected to the appropriate network. Note: You must use the same encryption type, key index number, and WEP key as other devices on your wireless network. How to Enable WEP Encryption The following example describes how to edit an existing profile and apply WEP encryption. Note: Before you begin, contact your system administrator for the network WEP pass phrase or Hex Key. To enable WEP encryption:

1. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 2. Select the profile from the Profile List and click the Edit button. 3. Click the Security tab. 4. Select any Network Authentication mode (Open is recommended). 5. Select WEP for Data Encryption. 6. Select 64-bit or 128-bit for the Encryption Level. 7. Select a key index number 1, 2, 3, or 4. 8. Select either of the following:

l Use pass phrase: Click Use Pass Phrase to enable. Enter a text phrase, up to five (using 64-bit) or 13 (using 128-bit) alphanumeric characters (0-9, a-z or A-Z), in the pass phrase field. l Use hex Key: Click Use hex Key to enable. Enter up to ten (using 64-

bit) alphanumeric characters, 0-9, A-F, or twenty-six (using 128-bit) alphanumeric characters, 0-9, A-F in the hex key field. 9. Click OK to save the profiles settings. System Administrator Tasks NOTE: The following information is intended for system administrators. How to Obtain a Client Certificate If you do not have any certificates for EAP-TLS, or EAP-TTLS you must get a client certificate to allow authentication. Typically you need to consult with your system network administrator for instructions on how to obtain a certificate on your network. Certificates can be managed from "Internet Settings", accessed from either Internet Explorer or the Windows Control Panel applet. Use the "Content" page of "Internet Settings". Windows XP and 2000: When obtaining a client certificate, do not enable strong private key protection. If you enable strong private key protection for a certificate, you will need to enter an access password for the certificate each time this certificate is used. You must disable strong private key protection for the certificate if you are configuring the service for TLS/TTLS authentication. Otherwise the 802.1x service will fail authentication because there is no logged in user to whom it can display the prompt dialog. Notes about Smart Cards After installing a Smart Card, the certificate is automatically installed on your computer and can be select from the person certificate store and root certificate store. Setting up the Client for TLS authentication Step 1: Getting a certificate To allow TLS authentication, you need a valid client (user) certificate in the local repository for the logged-in users account. You also need a trusted CA certificate in the root store. The following information provides two methods for getting a certificate;

l from a corporate certification authority implemented on a Windows 2000 Server l using Internet Explorers certificate import wizard to import a certificate from a file Getting a certificate from a Windows 2000 CA:

1. Start Internet Explorer and browse to the Certificate Authority HTTP Service (use a URL such as http://yourdomainserver.yourdomain/certsrv with certsrv being the command that brings you to the certificate authority. You can also use the IP address of the server machine, such as"192.0.2.12/certsrv."

2. Logon to the CA with the name and password of the user account you created

(above) on the authentication server. The name and password do not have to be the same as the Windows logon name and password of your current user. 3. On the Welcome page of the CA select Request a certificate task and submit the form. 4. On the Choose Request Type page, select Advanced request, then click Next. 5. On the Advanced Certificate Requests page, select Submit a certificate request to this CA using a form, then click Submit. 6. On the Advanced Certificate Request page choose the User certificate template. Select "Mark keys as exportable", and click Next. Use the provided defaults shown. 7. On the Certificate Issued page select Install this certificate. Note: If this is the first certificate you have obtained, the CA will first ask you if it should install a trusted CA certificate in the root store. The dialog will not say this is a trusted CA certificate, but the name on the certificate shown will be that of the host of the CA. Click yes, you need this certificate for both TLS and TTLS. 8. If your certificate was successfully installed, you will see the message, "Your new certificate has been successfully installed."

9. To verify the installation, click Internet Explorer > Tools > Internet Options >

Content > Certificates. The new certificate should be installed in "Personal"

folder. Importing a certificate from a file 1. Open Internet Properties (right-click on the Internet Explorer icon on the desktop 2. Click the Certificates button on the Content page. This will open the list of installed and select Properties. certificates. 3. Click the Import button under the list of certificates. This will start the Certificate Import Wizard. (Note: Steps 1 through 3 may also be accomplished by double-

clicking the icon for the certificate. 4. Select the file and proceed to the Password page. 5. On the Password page specify your access password for the file. Clear the Enable strong private key protection option. 6. On the Certificate store page select "Automatically select certificate store based on the type of certificate" (the certificate must be in the User accounts Personal store to be accessible in the Configure dialog of the Client; this will happen if automatic is selected). 7. Proceed to "Completing the Certificate Import" and click the Finish button. The following example describes how to use WPA with TKIP encryption using TTLS or PEAP authentication. Setting up the Client for TLS authentication Step 2: Specifying the certificate used by Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless 1. Obtain and install a client certificate, refer to Step 1 or consult your system administrator. 2. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 3. Click the Add button. 4. Enter the profile and network (SSID) name. 5. Select Infrastructure for the operating mode. 6. Click Next. 7. Select Open for the Network Authentication. You can also select any other available authentication mode. 8. Select WEP as the Data Encryption. You can also select any other available encryption type. 9. Click the 802.1x Enabled checkbox. 10. Set the authentication type to TLS to be used with this connection. 11. Click the Configure button to open the settings dialog. 12. Enter your user name in the User Name field. 13. Select the "Certificate Issuer" from the list. Select Any Trusted CA as the default. l Click the "allow intermediate certificates" checkbox to allow a number of unspecified certificates to be in the server certificate chain between the server certificate and the specified CA. If unchecked, then the specified CA must have directly issued the server certificate. 14. Enter the Server name. l If you know the server name enter this name. l Select the appropriate option to match the server name exactly or specify the domain name. certificates. 15. Under the "Client certificate" option click the Select button to open a list of installed l Note about Certificates: The specified identity should match the field "Issued to" in the certificate and should be registered on the authentication server

(i.e., RADIUS server) that is used by the authenticator. Your certificate must be "valid" with respect to the authentication server. This requirement depends on the authentication server and generally means that the authentication server must know the issuer of your certificate as a Certificate Authority. You should be logged in using the same username you used when the certificate was installed. 16. Select the certificate from the list and click OK. The client certificate information displays under "Client Certificate". 17. Click Close. 18. Click the Finish button to save the security settings for the profile. Setting up the Client for WEP and MD5 authentication To add WEP and MD5 authentication to a new profile:

Note: Before you begin, contact your system administrator for the username and password on the RADIUS server. 1. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 2. Click the Add button from the Profile List. 3. Enter the profile and network (SSID) name. 4. Select Infrastructure for the operating mode. 5. Click Next. 6. Select Open (recommended) for the Network Authentication. 7. Select WEP as the Data Encryption. 8. Select either 64 or 128-bit for the Encryption Level. 9. Select the key index 1, 2, 3 or 4. 10. Enter the required pass phrase or hex key. 11. Click the 802.1x Enabled checkbox. 12. Select MD5 as the 802.1x Authentication Type. 13. Check the Use Windows logon checkbox to allow a single-sign-on connection process. The Credentials dialog displays after you select the profile from the Profile List. 14. If the "Use Windows Logon" is not checked, click Configure to open the credentials dialog. Enter the user name and password of the user account created on the authentication server. Check the Save User Credentials checkbox to save the credentials for future use with this 802.1x profile. Note: The user name and password do not have to be the same as the name and password of your current Windows user login. 15. Click Close to save the settings. 16. If the Password Protection checkbox was checked on the General settings page, then click Next display the Password page and enter a profile password. 17. Click the Finish button to save the profile settings. 18. Select the Networks tab. 19. Select the profile and click Connect. 20. If your selected "Use Windows logon" (step 13) on the Security Settings dialog the Credentials displays. Enter your Windows user name and password. Check the Save User Credentials checkbox to save the credentials for future use with this profile. 21. Click OK to save the settings and connect to the network. Setting up the Client for WPA-PSK using WEP or TKIP authentication Use Wi-Fi Protected Access - Pre Shared Key (WPA-PSK) mode if there is no authentication server being used. This mode does not use any 802.1x authentication protocol, It can be used with the data encryption types: WEP or TKIP. WPA-PSK requires configuration of a pre-shared key (PSK). You must enter a pass phrase or 64 hex characters for a Pre-Shared Key of length 256-bits. The data encryption key is derived from the PSK. To configure a profile using WPA-PSK:

1. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 2. Click the Add button. 3. Enter the profile and network (SSID) name. 4. Select Infrastructure for the operating mode. 5. Click Next. 6. Select WPA-PSK for the Network Authentication. You can also select authentication mode. 7. Select WEP or TKIP as the Data Encryption. 8. Select either of the following:

l Use pass phrase: Click Use Pass Phrase to enable. Enter a text phrase, up to 8 (using 64-bit) or 63 (using 128-bit) alphanumeric characters (0-9, a-z or A-Z), in the pass phrase field. l Use hex Key: Click Use hex Key to enable. Enter up to 64 alphanumeric characters, 0-9, A-F in the hex key field. 9. Click the Finish button to save the security settings for the profile. Setting up the Client for WPA using TKIP encryption and TLS authentication Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) mode can be used with TLS, TTLS, or PEAP. This 802.1x authentication protocol using data encryption options; WEP or TKIP. Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) mode binds with 802.1x authentication. The data encryption key is received from the 802.1x key exchange. To improve data encryption, Wi-Fi Protected Access utilizes its Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP). TKIP provides important data encryption enhancements including a re-keying method. 1. Obtain and install a client certificate, refer to Setting up the Client for TLS authentication or consult your system administrator. 2. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 3. Click the Add button. 4. Enter the profile and network (SSID) name. 5. Select Infrastructure for the operating mode. 6. Click Next. 7. Select WPA for the Network Authentication. 8. Select TKIP as the Data Encryption. 9. Set the authentication type to TLS to be used with this connection. 10. Click the Configure button to open the settings dialog. 11. Enter your user name in the User Name field. 12. Select the "Certificate Issuer" from the list. Select Any Trusted CA as the default. l Click the "allow intermediate certificates" checkbox to allow a number of unspecified certificates to be in the server certificate chain between the server certificate and the specified CA. If unchecked, then the specified CA must have directly issued the server certificate. 13. Enter the Server name. l If you know the server name enter this name. l Select the appropriate option to match the server name exactly or specify the domain name. 14. Use Client Certificate: This option selects a client certificate from the Personal certificate store of the Windows logged-in user. This certificate will be used for client authentication. Click the Select button to open a list of installed certificates. l Note about Certificates: The specified identity should match the field "Issued to" in the certificate and should be registered on the authentication server

(i.e., RADIUS server) that is used by the authenticator. Your certificate must be "valid" with respect to the authentication server. This requirement depends on the authentication server and generally means that the authentication server must know the issuer of your certificate as a Certificate Authority. You should be logged in using the same username you used when the certificate was installed. 15. Select the certificate from the list and click OK. The client certificate information displays under "Client Certificate". 16. Click Close. 17. Click the Finish button to save the security settings for the profile. Setting up the Client for WPA using TKIP encryption and TTLS or PEAP authentication Using TTLS authentication: These settings define the protocol and the credentials used to authenticate a user. In TTLS, the client uses EAP-TLS to validate the server and create a TLS-encrypted channel between the client and server. The client can use another authentication protocol, typically password-based protocols, such as MD5 Challenge over this encrypted channel to enable server validation. The challenge and response packets are sent over a non-exposed TLS encrypted channel. Using PEAP authentication: PEAP settings are required for the authentication of the client to the authentication server. In PEAP, the client uses EAP-TLS to validate the server and create a TLS-encrypted channel between client and server. The client can use another EAP mechanism, such as Microsoft Challenge Authentication Protocol

(MSCHAP) Version 2, over this encrypted channel to enable server validation. The challenge and response packets are sent over a non-exposed TLS encrypted channel. The following example describes how to use WPA with TKIP encryption using TTLS or PEAP authentication. 1. Obtain and install a client certificate, refer to Setting up the Client for TLS authentication or consult your system administrator. 2. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 3. Click the Add button. 4. Enter the profile and network (SSID) name. 5. Select Infrastructure for the operating mode. 6. Click Next. 7. Select WPA for the Network Authentication. 8. Select TKIP as the Data Encryption. 9. Check the Use Windows logon checkbox to allow a single-sign-on connection process. The Credentials dialog displays after you select the profile from the Profile List. 10. If Use Windows logon is not checked, the credentials can be entered in the user name and password fields. See step 13, 18 and 19. 11. Set the authentication type to TTLS or PEAP to be used with this connection. 12. Click the Configure button to open the settings dialog. 13. Enter the roaming identity name in the Roaming Identity field. This optional feature is the 802.1X identity supplied to the authenticator. It is recommended that this field not contain a true identity, but instead the desired realm (e.g. anonymous@myrealm). 14. Select the "Certificate Issuer" from the list. Select Any Trusted CA as the default. l Click the "allow intermediate certificates" checkbox to allow a number of unspecified certificates to be in the server certificate chain between the server certificate and the specified CA. If unchecked, then the specified CA must have directly issued the server certificate. 15. Enter the Server name. l If you know the server name enter this name. l Select the appropriate option to match the server name exactly or specify the domain name. 16. Authentication Protocol:

l PEAP: Select MS-CHAP-V2. This parameter specifies the authentication protocol operating over the PEAP tunnel. The protocols are: MS-CHAP-V2

(Default), GTC, and TLS. l TTLS: Select PAP. This parameter specifies the authentication protocol operating over the TTLS tunnel. The protocols are: PAP (Default), CHAP, MD5, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP-V2. 17. Enter the user name. This username must match the user name that is set in the authentication server by the IT administrator prior to client's authentication. The user name is case-sensitive. This name specifies the identity supplied to the authenticator by the authentication protocol operating over the TLS tunnel. This users identity is securely transmitted to the server only after an encrypted channel has been verified and established. 18. Enter the user password. Specifies the user password. This password must match the password that is set in the authentication server. 19. Check the Save User Credentials checkbox to save the credentials for future use with this profile. Note: The user name and password do not have to be the same as the name and password of your current Windows user. 20. Re-enter the user password. If confirmed, displays the same password characters entered in the Password field. 21. Use Client Certificate: This option selects a client certificate from the Personal certificate store of the Windows logged-in user. This certificate will be used for client authentication. Click the Select button to open a list of installed certificates. l Note about Certificates: The specified identity should match the field "Issued to" in the certificate and should be registered on the authentication server

(i.e., RADIUS server) that is used by the authenticator. Your certificate must be "valid" with respect to the authentication server. This requirement depends on the authentication server and generally means that the authentication server must know the issuer of your certificate as a Certificate Authority. You should be logged in using the same username you used when the certificate was installed. 22. Select the certificate from the list and click OK. The client certificate information displays under "Client Certificate". 23. Click Close. 24. Click the Finish button to save the security settings for the profile. 25. Select the profile from the Profile List and click Connect. 26. If your selected "Use Windows logon" (step 10) on the Security Settings dialog the Credentials displays. Enter your Windows user name and password. Check the Save User Credentials checkbox to save the credentials for future use with this 802.1x profile. 27. Click OK to save the settings and connect to the network. Setting up the Client for CCX using CKIP encryption and LEAP authentication Configuring LEAP using Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless NOTE: A LEAP profile can only be configured using Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless. An Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless CCX (v1.0) profile must be configured to connect to a specific ESS or Wireless LAN network. The profiles settings include LEAP, CKIP and Rogue AP detection settings. To configure a profile for CCX security settings:

1. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 2. Click the Add button. 3. Enter the profile and network (SSID) name. 4. Select Infrastructure for the operating mode. 5. Click the Cisco Client eXtentions check box to enable CCX security. If you have checked the Cisco's "Mixed-Cell" box in the Advanced Setting, this option must also be checked. Note: The Network authentication and the Data Encryption now include the CCX security options: Open, Shared for 802.11 Authentication and none, WEP, CKIP for Data encryption. 6. Click Next. 7. Select Open in the Network Authentication options. 8. Select CKIP as the Data encryption. 9. Click the 802.1x Enabled checkbox to enable the 802.1x security option. 10. Select LEAP as the 802.1x Authentication Type. 11. Check the Use Windows logon checkbox to allow a single-sign-on connection process. The Credentials dialog displays after you select the profile from the Profile List. 12. If the Use Windows Logon is not checked, click Configure to open the credentials dialog. Enter the user name and password of the user account created on the authentication server. Check the Save User Credentials checkbox to save the credentials for future use with this 802.1x profile. Note: The user name and password do not have to be the same as the name and password of your current Windows user login. 13. Click on the Enable Rogue AP Detection if the network is setup to account for rogue APs. This setting should also be made if only the "Network-EAP" checkbox is selected in the AP configuration settings (applies to all Cisco APs). 14. Click Close to save the settings. 15. Select the Networks tab. 16. Select the CCX profile from the Profile List and click Connect. 17. If your selected "Use Windows logon" (step 11) on the Security Settings dialog the Credentials displays. Enter your Windows user name and password. Check the Save User Credentials checkbox to save the credentials for future use with this CCX profile, otherwise you will prompted for your credentials each time you logon. 18. Click OK to save the settings and connect to the network. CCX Access Point and Client Configurations The access point provides settings to select different authentication types depending on the WLAN environment. The client sends an Authentication algorithm field during the 802.11 authentication handshake that takes place between the client and the AP during connection establishment. The Authentication algorithm values recognized by a CCX enabled AP is different for the different authentication types. For instance "Network-EAP"

which denotes LEAP has a value of 0x80 while "Open" which is the 802.11 specified Open authentication and "Required EAP" which requires an EAP handshake exchange have values of 0x0. Network-EAP only AP: For CCX enabled networks using LEAP authentication only the authentication type is set with "Network-EAP" checkbox selected, and "Open" and "Required EAP" boxes unchecked. The AP is then configured to allow LEAP clients ONLY to authenticate and connect. In this case, the AP expects the 802.11 authentication algorithm to be set to 0x80 (LEAP), and rejects clients that attempt authentication with an Authentication algorithm value 0x0. Client: In this case the client needs to send out an authentication algorithm value of 0x80 else the 802.11 authentication handshake would fail. During boot, when the Wireless LAN driver is already loaded, but the Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless supplicant is still unloaded, the client sends 802.11 authentication with an Authentication algorithm value of 0x0. Once the Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless supplicant loads, and engages the LEAP profile, it sends 802.11 authentication with an Authentication algorithm value of 0x80. However, the supplicant sends out 0x80 only if the Rogue AP box is checked. Network-EAP, Open and Required EAP AP: If Network-EAP, Open and Required EAP boxes are checked then it would accept both types of 802.11 authentication algorithm values 0x0 and 0x80. However, once the client is associated and authenticated the AP expects an EAP handshake to take place. For any reason if the EAP handshake does not take place quickly, the AP would not respond to the client for about 60 seconds. Client: Here the client could send out an authentication algorithm value of 0x80 or 0x0. Both values are acceptable and the 802.11 authentication handshake would succeed. During boot, when the Wireless LAN driver is already loaded and the client sends 802.11 authentication with an Authentication algorithm value of 0x0. This is sufficient to get authenticated but the corresponding EAP or LEAP credentials need to be communicated to the AP to establish a connection. Open and Required EAP only AP: In the case where the AP is configured with Network-EAP unchecked, but Open and Required EAP checked, the AP will reject any client attempting to 802.11 authenticate using an authentication algorithm value of 0x80. The AP would accept any client using an authentication algorithm value of 0x0, and expects EAP handshake to commence soon after. In this case, the client uses MD5, TLS, LEAP or any other appropriate EAP method suitable for the specific network configuration. Client: The client in this case is required to send out an authentication algorithm value of 0x0. As mentioned before the sequence involves a repeat of the initial 802.11 authentication handshake. First, the Wireless LAN driver initiates authentication with a value of 0x0 and later the supplicant would repeat the process. However, the authentication algorithm value used by the supplicant depends status of the Rogue AP checkbox. When the Rogue AP box is unchecked, the client sends an 802.11 authentication with Authentication algorithm value of 0x0 even after the supplicant loads and engages the LEAP profile. Some non-Intel clients, for example, when set to LEAP, cannot authenticate in this case. However, the Intel Wireless LAN client can authenticate, if the Rogue AP is unchecked. Rogue AP Checkbox configuration When the checkbox is checked it ensures that the client implements the Rogue AP feature as required by CCX. The client makes note of APs that it failed to authenticate with and sends this information to the AP that allows it to authenticate and connect. Also, the supplicant sets the Authentication algorithm type to 0x80 when the Rogue AP box is checked. There may be some network configurations implementing and Open and Required EAP only as described above. For this setup to work, the client must use an Authentication Algorithm value of 0x0, as opposed to the need to use 0x80 for Network-

EAP only described above. Therefore, the Rogue AP checkbox also enables the client to support Network-EAP only and Open and Required EAP only. Cisco CCX Feature Support The Cisco mandatory Client Compliance Specifications Version1.0:

l Compliance to all mandatory items of 802.11 l De-fragmentation of MSDUs and MMPDUs l Generate CTS in response to an RTS l Open and Shared key authentication support l Support Active scanning l Wi-Fi compliance required l On Windows platforms, Microsoft 802.11 NIC compliance l 802.1X-2001 Compliance l EAP-TLS (Transport Level Security, RFC 2716) support on Windows XP l EAP-MD4 (RFC 1320) support on Windows XP l EAP packets to be sent unencrypted l Broadcast key rotation support l CKIP support l WEP/RC4 support l Support of 4 keys for WEP l Both WEP40 and WEP128 keys are supported l LEAP support is required l Rogue AP reporting support l Cisco Extension: Aironet IE support CWmin and CWmax fields l Encapsulation Transformation Rule IE support l Cisco Extension: AP IP address IE l Cisco Extension: Symbol IE l Mixed (WEP and non-WEP) cells l AP may respond to more than one SSID VLAN awareness l Stealth mode support - Clients should ignore missing SSIDs in beacons l Multiple SSID support Client should be able to roam up to 3 SSIDs l Client to use configured SSID in probe request Note: Please refer to Cisco Client extensions version 1.0 document available at www.cisco.com for more details. Back to Contents Page Please read all restrictions and disclaimers. Back to Contents Page Specifications: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG User's Guide Specifications Form Factor Dimensions Weight Antenna Interface Connector Dual Diversity Antenna Connector Interface Operating Temperature Humidity Type Frequency band Mini PCI Type 3B Width 2.34 in x Length 1.75 in x Height 0.20 in

(59.45 mm x 44.45 mm x 5 mm) 0.7 oz. (12.90 g.) Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 On-board dual diversity switching 124-pin SO-DIMM edge connector 0 to +70 degrees Celsius 50 to 85% non-condensing 2.400 - 2.472 GHz (US) 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Japan) 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Europe ETSI) Frequency Modulation Modulation Channels Data Rates OFDM with BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM, DBPSK, DQPSK, CCK Full 14 channel support 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 24, 36, 48 and 54 Mbps 16 dBm (typical) 100 ft (30 m) @ 11 Mbps / 300 ft (90 m) @ 1 Mbps 400 ft (120 m) @ 11 Mbps / 1500 ft (460 m) @ 1 Mbps Indoor Range Outdoor Range Power Transmit Output Power Adapter Power Consumption Transmit Receive Idle Disable Voltage General Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance certification Wi-Fi certification for 802.11b and 802.11g WLAN Standard Architecture Security 1.45 W 0.85 W 60 mw 50 mw 3.3 V IEEE 802.11g Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) WPA, Cisco CCX v1.0, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-

TLS, EAP-TTLS, WEP 128-bit and 64-bit. UL, C-UL, CB (IEC 60590) Windows* XP, 2000 Product Safety Back to Contents Page Please read all restrictions and disclaimers. Back to Contents Glossary of Terms: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG User's Guide Numerical A B D E F I K M O P R S T U W Numerical 802.11a: The 802.11a standard specifies a maximum data transfer rate of 54Mbps and an operating frequency of 5GHz. The 802.11a standard uses the Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) transmission method. Additionally, the 802.11a standard supports 802.11 features such as WEP encryption for security. 802.11b:The 802.11b standard specifies a maximum data transfer rate of 11Mbps, an operating frequency of 2.4GHz, and WEP encryption for security. 802.11b networks are also referred to as Wi-Fi networks. 802.11g: The 802.11g standard specifies a maximum data transfer rate of 54Mbps, an operating frequency of 2.4GHz, and WEP encryption for security. 802.11g networks are also referred to as Wi-Fi networks. 802.11x: A series of IEEE specifications for LANs: currently 802.11b, 802.11a, and 802.11g. Using any one of these extensions to the 802.11 standard permits wireless communication between a client and an access point or between two clients. 802.1x is based on the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP), the 802.1x standard is one of the IEEE standards for network authentication and key management. It establishes a framework that supports multiple authentication methods. This standard can be incorporated into any type of network to enhance its security. A Access Point: A device that serves as a communications hub for wireless clients and provides a connection to a wired LAN. Advanced Encryption Standard (AES): A federal information-processing standard, supporting 128-, 192-, and 256-bit keys. B Basic Service Set Identifier (BSSID): A unique identifier for each wireless client on a wireless network. The BSSID is the Ethernet MAC address of each adapter on the network. Bit Rate: The total number of bits (ones and zeros) per second that a network connection can support. Note that this bit rate will vary, under software control, with different signal path conditions. Bluetooth: An incompatible, very short-range lower speed communications system

(PAN), developed first in Europe as a "cable replacement" for printers and similar peripheral connections. Its usage has expanded to include cordless earphones and similar devices. It uses the 2.4 GHz ISM band, and "co-exists" with 802.11b. Here the term, "co-exist" means that not all researchers agree on the amount of mutual interference generated when both systems operate in the same location. Broadcast SSID: Used to allow an access point to respond to clients on a wireless network by sending probes. D Data Rate (Information Rate): Not all bits carry user information. Each group (packet) of bits contains headers, trailers, echo control, destination information, and other data required by the transmission protocol. It is important to understand the difference between bit rate and data rate, since the overhead information may consume more than 40% of the total transmission. This difference is common to many such data systems, including Ethernet. Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) and Frequency-Hop Spread Spectrum

(FHSS): Two incompatible technologies used in radio transmission. Dynamic IP Address: An IP address that is automatically assigned to a client station in a TCP/IP network, typically by a DHCP server. Network devices that serve multiple users, such as servers and printers, are usually assigned static IP addresses. E Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP): An IETF standard that establishes an authentication protocol for network access. Many authentication methods, including passwords, certificates, and smart cards, work within this framework. EAP-TLS: A type of authentication method using the Extensible Authentication Protocol

(EAP) and a security protocol called the Transport Layer Security (TLS). EAP-TLS uses certificates which use passwords. EAP-TLS authentication supports dynamic WEP key management. EAP-TTLS: A type of authentication method using the Extensible Authentication Protocol

(EAP) and Tunneled Transport Layer Security (TTLS). EAP-TTLS uses a combination of certificates and another method, such as passwords. It is more secure than MD5 authentication, which uses passwords, and less secure than EAP-TLS authentication, which exclusively uses certificates. EAP-TTLS authentication supports dynamic WEP key management. Encryption: Scrambling data so that only the authorized recipient can read it. Usually a key is needed to decrypt the data. Extended Service Set IDentifier (ESSID): A type of unique identifier applied to both the AP and the wireless PC Card that is attached to each packet. This allows the AP to recognize each wireless client and its traffic. F Firewall:A firewall is a set of related programs, located at a network gateway server, that protects the resources of a network from users from other networks. Frequencies: Strike a piano key and you generate a tone. Pick up the tone with a microphone and your tone turns in to a "vibrating" or "cycling" electronic signal. The rate of vibration depends on the key struck. In electronics we refer to this rate of vibration as the number of "cycles per second." The formal term for this value is Hertz. As we move up in rate, such as in the Broadcast Band, we can use Kilohertz (KHz) to represent 1,000 Hz, or Megahertz (MHz) to represent 1,000,000 Hz. Continuing much further upward, we finally reach 1,000,000,000 Hz, which we can fortunately shorten to a Gigahertz (GHz). These frequencies are the home of both 802.11a (5 GHz) and 802.11b (2.4 GHz). I Independent Basic Service Set Identifier (IBSSID): Used to identify a wireless network configured to allow each wireless client to communicate directly with each other without an access point. Independent Network: A network that provides (usually temporarily) peer-to-peer connectivity without relying on a complete network infrastructure. Infrastructure Network: A wireless network centered around an access point. In this environment, the access point not only provides communication with the wired network but also mediates wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): An organization involved in setting computing and communications standards. ISM Bands: A series of frequency bands, set aside by the FCC for Industrial, Scientific and Medical applications. Users of these bands operate equipment on a shared basis, meaning that they must expect, and accept interference from other legal users. Products manufactured for ISM Band use must be approved by the FCC, but the user does not have to be licensed. In addition to WLAN, ISM bands support cordless phones, microwave ovens, baby monitors, toys, ham radio transceivers, and other wireless services. K Kerberos: An authentication system enabling protected communication over an open network using a unique key called a ticket. M Media Access Control (MAC) Address: A hardwired address applied at the factory. It uniquely identifies network hardware, such as a wireless PC Card, on a LAN or WAN. Microcell: A bounded physical space in which a number of wireless devices can communicate. Because it is possible to have overlapping cells as well as isolated cells, the boundaries of the cell are established by some rule or convention. Microwave: Technically, the term describes any frequency above 1.0 GHz. Unfortunately the advertising industry has contorted this meaning considerably. In our discussion we will stick to the technical definition. Multipath: The signal variation caused when radio signals take multiple paths from transmitter to receiver. O Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM): A modulation technique for transmitting large amounts of digital data over radio waves. 802.11a uses OFDM, as will 802.11g. P Peer-to-Peer Mode: A wireless network structure that allows wireless clients to communicate with each other without using an access point. Personal Area Network (PAN): A personal area network, or PAN, is a networking scheme that enables computing devices such as PCs, laptop computers, handheld personal computers, printers and personal digital assistants (PDAs) to communicate with each other over short distances either with or without wires. Preamble: A preliminary signal transmitted over a WLAN to control signal detection and clock synchronization. R Radio Frequency (RF) Terms (GHz, MHz, Hz): The international unit for measuring frequency is Hertz (Hz), which is equivalent to the older unit of cycles per second. One Mega-Hertz (MHz) is one million Hertz. One Giga-Hertz (GHz) is one billion Hertz. For reference: the standard US electrical power frequency is 60 Hz, the AM broadcast radio frequency band is 0.55 -1.6 MHz, the FM broadcast radio frequency band is 88-108 MHz, and microwave ovens typically operate at 2.45 GHz. Range: The distance over which a given system can communicate. RC4: An encryption algorithm designed at RSA Laboratories; specifically, a stream cipher of pseudo-random bytes that is used in WEP encryption. Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS): An authentication and accounting system that verifies users' credentials and grants access to requested resources. Roaming: Movement of a wireless node between two microcells. Roaming usually occurs in infrastructure networks built around multiple access points. S Service Set Identifier (SSID): Used to identify clients on a wireless network. Shared key: An encryption key known only to the receiver and sender of data. Site Survey: A process where you set up one transceiver in a fixed location, and then use another unit to plot the field strength of the first units transmitted signal. By moving the transmitter around, and repeating the plots, you can develop a plan as to the best locations for access points. You will also identify dead zones and other areas in need of special attention. This can be a long, slow process, but it beats ripping up an unsatisfactory installation and starting over. These tests require special software commands. Refer to your manual for specific instructions. If you have a very large, or unusually complex installation situation, you might want to consider calling in professionals to do your survey. We are not permitted to suggest installer names, but you can check your yellow pages or similar sources for likely candidates. Static IP Address: A permanent IP address that is assigned to a node in a TCP/IP network. T Transmission Control Protocol (TCP): A method (protocol) used with the IP (Internet Protocol) to send data in the form of message units between network devices over a LAN or WAN. The IP carries the delivery of the data (routing), and TCP keeps track of the individual units of data (called packets) that a message is divided into for delivery over the network. Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP): The basic communication language or set of protocols for communications over a network (developed specifically for the Internet). TCP/IP defines a suite or group of protocols and not only TCP and IP. Transceiver: A commonly used term that describes a combination transmitter and receiver. Both 802.11a and 802.11b devices would be properly described as data transceivers. U UNII Bands: Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure. In contrast to the ISM bands, these are a group of frequency bands set aside by the FCC for WLAN type communications only. Users must accept interference from other legal WLAN users, but the other sources of interference problems are, or legally should be, missing. W WEP64 and WEP128: Wired Equivalent Privacy, 64 bit and 128 bit (64 bit is sometimes referred to as 40 bit). This is a low-level encryption technique designed to give the user about the same amount of privacy that he would expect from a LAN. It is extremely important to understand that WEP is not some CIA-proof supercode! It performs as intended, giving the user a simple level of data security and protection from casual electronic eavesdropping. Use of the 128 bit option at all possible times is recommended. Remember that 802.11 devices transmit (broadcast) in all directions, and that it is possible, with very complex software, to copy and decode WEP transmissions. The task is not trivial, but it is possible. If your data is extremely sensitive, you should consider some form of secondary protection, such as strong passwords and an additional level of encryption. Suitable software packages are available from reputable suppliers. Although not intended by the original architects, WEP also helps prevents unauthorized access to your system by an outsider. Hackers have been known to access systems from outside a building, and to then to access the Web for a leisurely session, all at the system owners expense. Wide Area Network (WAN): A wide area network (WAN) is a voice, data, or video network that provides connections from one or more computers or networks within a business to one or more computers or networks that are external to such business. Wireless: A microwave transceiver system. Wireless LAN (WLAN): Wireless LAN is a type of local-area network that uses high-

frequency radio waves rather than wires to communicate between nodes. WLAN is a flexible data communication system used as an alternative to, or an extension of a wired LAN. Wireless Node: A user computer with a wireless network interface card (adapter). Back to Contents Please read all restrictions and disclaimers. Back to Contents Page Customer Support: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG User's Guide Intel support is available online or by telephone. Available services include the most up-

to-date product information, installation instructions about specific products, and troubleshooting tips. Online Support Technical Support: http://support.intel.com Network Product Support: http://www.intel.com/network Corporate Web Site: http://www.intel.com Back to Contents Page Please read all restrictions and disclaimers. Back to Contents Page Regulatory Information: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG User's Guide Information For the User Regulatory Information Information for the user Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter (model WM3B2200BG) Safety Notices The FCC with its action in ET Docket 96-8 has adopted a safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency (RF) electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC certified equipment. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG adapter meets the Human Exposure limits found in OET Bulletin 65, 2001, and ANSI/IEEE C95.1, 1992. Proper operation of this radio according to the instructions found in this manual will result in exposure substantially below the FCCs recommended limits. The following safety precautions should be observed:

l Do not touch or move antenna while the unit is transmitting or receiving. l Do not hold any component containing the radio such that the antenna is very close or touching any exposed parts of the body, especially the face or eyes, while transmitting. l Do not operate the radio or attempt to transmit data unless the antenna is connected; if not, the radio may be damaged. l Use in specific environments:

m The use of wireless devices in hazardous locations is limited by the constraints posed by the safety directors of such environments. m The use of wireless devices on airplanes is governed by the Federal Aviation m The use of wireless devices in hospitals is restricted to the limits set forth by Administration (FAA). each hospital. l Antenna use:

m In order to comply with FCC RF exposure limits, low gain integrated antennas should be located at a minimum distance of 20 cm (8 inches) or more from the body of all persons. m High-gain, wall-mount, or mast-mount antennas are designed to be professionally installed and should be located at a minimum distance of 30 cm (12 inches) or more from the body of all persons. Please contact your professional installer, VAR, or antenna manufacturer for proper installation requirements. l Explosive Device Proximity Warning (see below) l Antenna Warning (see below) l Use on Aircraft Caution (see below) l Other Wireless Devices (see below) l Power Supply (Access Point) (see below) Explosive Device Proximity Warning Warning: Do not operate a portable transmitter (such as a wireless network device) near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the device has been modified to be qualified for such use. Antenna Warnings Warning: To comply with the FCC and ANSI C95.1 RF exposure limits, it is recommended for the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG adapter installed in a desktop or portable computer, that the antenna for this device be installed so as to provide a separation distance of al least 20 cm (8 inches) from all persons and that the antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or radio transmitter. It is recommended that the user limit exposure time if the antenna is positioned closer than 20 cm (8 inches). Warning: The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG product is not designed for use with high-gain directional antennas. Use of such antennas with these products is illegal. Use On Aircraft Caution Caution: Regulations of the FCC and FAA prohibit airborne operation of radio-

frequency wireless devices because their signals could interfere with critical aircraft instruments. Other Wireless Devices Safety Notices for Other Devices in the Wireless Network: Refer to the documentation supplied with wireless Ethernet adapters or other devices in the wireless network. Local Restrictions on Radio Usage Caution: Due to the fact that the frequencies used by Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG product device may not yet be harmonized in all countries. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG product is designed for use only in specific countries, and is not allowed to be operated in countries other than those of designated use. As a user of this product, you are responsible for ensuring that the product is used only in the countries for which it was intended and for verifying that it is configured with the correct selection of frequency and channel for the country of use. Any deviation from the permissible settings for the country of use is an infringement of national law and may be punished as such. For country-specific information, see the additional compliance information supplied with the product. Wireless interoperability The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG adapter is designed to be interoperable with any wireless LAN product that is based on direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) radio technology and to comply with the following standards:

l IEEE Std. 802.11b-1999. Standard on Wireless LAN. l IEEE Std. 802.11g compliant. Standard on Wireless LAN. l Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) certification, as defined by the WECA (Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance). The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN 2200BG adapter and your health The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG adapter, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by this device, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG adapter wireless device operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG adapter wireless device may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations include the following:

l Using the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG adapter equipment on board airplanes, or l Using the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG adapter equipment in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or environment (an airport, for example), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG adapter wireless device before you turn it on. Regulatory information This device is intended for OEM integrators only. This device cannot be co-located with any other transmitter. Information for the OEM Integrators: Please refer to the full Grant of equipment document for other restrictions. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG adapter wireless network device must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. For country-specific approvals, see Radio approvals. Intel Corporation is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG adapter kit, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than that specified by Intel Corporation. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment is the responsibility of the user. Intel Corporation and its authorized resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from the user failing to comply with these guidelines. NOTEThe Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG adapter transmits less than 100 mW, but more than 10 mW. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation of the device is subject to the following two conditions:

l This device may not cause harmful interference. l This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTEThe radiated output power of the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG adapter wireless network device is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG wireless network device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, you should keep a distance of at least 20 cm between you (or any other person in the vicinity) and the antenna that is built into the computer. Interference statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, the equipment may cause harmful interference to radio communications. There is no guarantee, however, that such interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by taking one or more of the following measures:

l Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. l Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver. l Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. l Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. NOTEThe Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG adapter wireless network device must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. Any other installation or use will violate FCC Part 15 regulations. U.S. Frequency Bands 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz CanadaIndustry Canada (IC) This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003, Issue 2, and RSS-210, Issue 4 (Dec. 2000). Cet appariel numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003, No. 2, et CNR-

210, No 4 (Dec 2000).

"To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing."

Pour empcher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit tre utilis a l'intrieur et devrait tre plac loin des fentres afinde fournir un cran de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'mission) est install l'extrieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. EuropeEU Declaration of Conformity Europe and Frequency Bands 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Europe ETSI) This equipment complies with the essential requirements of the European Union directive 1999/5/EC. Cet quipement est conforme aux principales exigences essentielles dfinies dans la Directive europenne RTTE 1999/5/CE. Die Gerte erfllen die grundlegenden Anforderungen der RTTE-Richtlinie 1999/5/EG. Questa apparecchiatura conforme ai requisiti essenziali della Direttiva Europea R&TTE 1999/5/CE. Este equipo cumple los requisitos principales de la Directiva 1999/5/CE de la UE,

"Equipos de Terminales de Radio y Telecomunicaciones". Este equipamento cumpre os requisitos essenciais da Directiva 1999/5/CE do Parlamento Europeu e do Conselho (Directiva RTT). O exoplismos autos plhroi tis basikes apaits ths koinotikhs odhgias EU R&TTE 1999/5/E. Deze apparatuur voldoet aan de noodzakelijke vereisten van EU-richtlijn betreffende radioapparatuur en telecommunicatie-eindapparatuur 1999/5/EG. Dette udstyr opfylder de Vsentlige krav i EU's direktiv 1999/5/EC om Radio- og teleterminaludstyr. Dette utstyret er i overensstemmelse med hovedkravene i R&TTE-direktivet (1999/5/EC) fra EU. Utrustningen uppfyller kraven fr EU-direktivet 1999/5/EC om ansluten teleutrustning och msesidigt erknnande av utrustningens verensstmmelse (R&TTE). Tm laite vastaa EU:n radio- ja teleptelaitedirektiivin (EU R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC) vaatimuksia. France For Metropolitan departments, 2.400 - 2.4835 Ghz for indoor use. 2.400 -2.454 Ghz

(channels 1 to 7) for outdoor use. For Guadeloupe, Martinique, St Pierre et Miquelon, Mayotte: 2.400 - 2.4835 Ghz for indoor and outdoor use. For Reunion, Guyane:

2.400 - 2.4835 Ghz for indoor use. 2.420 - 2.4835 Ghz for outdoor use (channels 5 to 13) The wireless adapter transmits less than 100 mW, but more than 10 mW. Belgique Dans le cas d'une utilisation prive, l'extrieur d'un btiment, au-dessus d'un espace public, aucun enregistrement n'est ncessaire pour une distance de moins de 300m. Pour une distance suprieure 300m un enregistrement auprs de l'IBPT est requise. Pour les enregistrements et licences, veuillez contacter l'IBPT. Italia For use in private premises: no restriction outdoor or indoor, 2.400 - 2.4835 Ghz For use in public premises: no restriction outdoor or indoor, 2.400 - 2.4835 Ghz, but a general authorization has to be requested to the ministry of Post and telecommunicati. Japan Frequency Bands 2.400 - 2.497 GHz (Japan) Radio approvals To determine whether you are allowed to use your wireless network device in a specific country, please check to see if the radio type number that is printed on the identification label of your device is listed in the manufacture OEM Regulatory Guidance document. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Regulatory Warning For use in (or with) UL Listed personal computers or compatible. Back to Contents Page Please read all restrictions and disclaimers. Back to Contents Page Warranty: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG User's Guide OEM Hardware Warranty Information Limited Hardware Warranty (1 year): Notwithstanding anything to the contrary, including any terms and conditions contained in the Intel CD-ROM or elsewhere, Intel warrants to the integrator/OEM that the adapter product delivered in this package will be free from defects in material and workmanship for one (1) year. This warranty does not cover the adapter product if it is damaged in the process of being installed or improperly used. Please read all restrictions and disclaimers.

 

 

tp.htm Page 1 of 1 Dell User's Guide Notes, Notices, and Cautions NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. Abbreviations and Acronyms For a complete list of abbreviations and acronyms, see the Glossary. If you purchased a Dell n Series computer, any references in this document to Microsoft Windows operating systems are not applicable. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. 2003 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, Latitude, Dell Precision, OptiPlex, Inspiron, Dimension, Dell TravelLite, and DellNet are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks and Intel SpeedStep and Centrino are trademarks of Intel Corporation; Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation; Bluetooth is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and is used by Dell Inc. under license; ENERGY STAR is a registered trademark of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Dell Inc. has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Model PP10L September 2003 P/N M1794 Rev. A00 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh985E.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary Glossary Page 1 of 14 A B C D E F G H I K L M N O P R S T U V W X Z Terms in this Glossary are provided for informational purposes only and may or may not describe features included with your particular computer. A AC alternating current The form of electricity that powers your computer when you plug the AC adapter power cable in to an electrical outlet. ACPI advanced configuration and power interface A power management specification that enables Microsoft Windows operating systems to put a computer in standby or hibernate mode to conserve the amount of electrical power allocated to each device attached to the computer. AGP accelerated graphics port A dedicated graphics port that allows system memory to be used for video-related tasks. AGP delivers a smooth, true-color video image because of the faster interface between the video circuitry and the computer memory. antivirus software A program designed to identify, quarantine, and/or delete viruses from your computer. APR advanced port replicator A docking device that allows you to conveniently use a monitor, keyboard, mouse, and other devices with your portable computer. ASF alert standards format A standard to define a mechanism for reporting hardware and software alerts to a management console. ASF is designed to be platform- and operating system-independent. B backup A copy of a program or data file on a floppy disk, CD, or hard drive. As a precaution, back up the data files from your hard drive regularly. battery An internal power source used to operate portable computers when not connected to an AC adapter and an electrical outlet. battery life span The length of time (years) during which a portable computer battery is able to be depleted and recharged. battery operating time The length of time (minutes or hours) that a portable computer battery holds a charge while powering the computer. BIOS basic input/output system A program (or utility) that serves as an interface between the computer hardware and the operating system. Unless you understand what effect the settings have on the computer, do not change the settings for this program. Also referred to as the system setup program. bit The smallest unit of data interpreted by your computer. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary Page 2 of 14 Bluetooth A wireless technology standard for short-range (9 m [29 feet]) networking devices that allows for enabled devices to automatically recognize each other. boot sequence Specifies the order of the devices from which the computer attempts to boot. bootable CD A CD that you can use to start your computer. In case your hard drive is damaged or your computer has a virus, ensure that you always have a bootable CD or floppy disk available. Your Drivers and Utilities or Resource CD is a bootable CD. bootable disk A disk that you can use to start your computer. In case your hard drive is damaged or your computer has a virus, ensure that you always have a bootable CD or floppy disk available. bps bits per second The standard unit for measuring data transmission speed. BTU British thermal unit A measurement of heat output. bus A communication pathway between the components in your computer. bus speed The speed, given in MHz, that indicates how fast a bus can transfer information. byte The basic data unit used by your computer. A byte is usually equal to 8 bits. C C Celsius A temperature measurement system where 0 is the freezing point and 100 is the boiling point of water. cache A special high-speed storage mechanism which can be either a reserved section of main memory or an independent high-speed storage device. The cache enhances the efficiency of many microprocessor operations. L1 cache Primary cache stored inside the microprocessor. L2 cache Secondary cache which can either be external to the microprocessor or incorporated into the microprocessor architecture. carnet An international customs document that facilitates temporary imports into foreign countries. Also known as a merchandise passport. CD compact disc An optical form of storage media, typically used for audio and software programs. CD drive A drive that uses optical technology to read data from CDs. CD player The software used to play music CDs. The CD player displays a window with buttons that you use to play a CD. CD-R CD recordable A recordable version of a CD. Data can be recorded only once onto a CD-R. Once recorded, the data cannot be erased or written over. CD-RW CD rewritable A rewritable version of a CD. Data can be written to a CD-RW disc, and then erased and written over (rewritten). file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary Page 3 of 14 CD-RW drive A drive that can read CDs and write to CD-RW (rewritable CDs) and CD-R (recordable CDs) discs. You can write to CD-RW discs multiple times, but you can write to CD-R discs only once. CD-RW/DVD drive A drive, sometimes referred to as a combo drive, that can read CDs and DVDs and write to CD-RW (rewritable CDs) and CD-R (recordable CDs) discs. You can write to CD-RW discs multiple times, but you can write to CD-R discs only once. clock speed The speed, given in MHz, that indicates how fast computer components that are connected to the system bus operate. COA Certificate of Authenticity The Windows alpha-numeric code located on a sticker on your computer. You may need the COA to complete the operating system setup or reinstallation. Also referred to as the Product Key or Product ID. Control Panel A Windows utility that allows you to modify operating system and hardware settings, such as display settings. controller A chip that controls the transfer of data between the microprocessor and memory or between the microprocessor and devices. CRIMM continuity rambus in-line memory module A special module that has no memory chips and is used to fill unused RIMM slots. cursor The marker on a display or screen that shows where the next keyboard, touch pad, or mouse action will occur. It often is a blinking solid line, an underline character, or a small arrow. D DDR SDRAM double-data-rate SDRAM A type of SDRAM that doubles the data burst cycle, improving system performance. device Hardware such as a disk drive, printer, or keyboard that is installed in or connected to your computer. device driver See driver. DIN connector A round, six-pin connector that conforms to DIN (Deutsche Industrie-Norm) standards; it is typically used to connect PS/2 keyboard or mouse cable connectors. disk striping A technique for spreading data over multiple disk drives. Disk striping can speed up operations that retrieve data from disk storage. Computers that use disk striping generally allow the user to select the data unit size or stripe width. DMA direct memory access A channel that allows certain types of data transfer between RAM and a device to bypass the microprocessor. docking device See APR. DMTF Distributed Management Task Force A consortium of hardware and software companies who develop management standards for distributed desktop, network, enterprise, and Internet environments. domain A group of computers, programs, and devices on a network that are administered as a unit with common rules and procedures for use by a specific group of users. A user logs on to the domain to gain file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary access to the resources. Page 4 of 14 DRAM dynamic random-access memory Memory that stores information in integrated circuits containing capacitors. driver Software that allows the operating system to control a device such as a printer. Many devices do not work properly if the correct driver is not installed in the computer. DSL Digital Subscriber Line A technology that provides a constant, high-speed Internet connection through an analog telephone line. dual display mode A display setting that allows you to use a second monitor as an extension of your display. Also referred to as extended display mode. DVD digital versatile disc A disc usually used to store movies. DVDs are double-sided, whereas CDs are single-sided. DVD drives read most CD media as well. DVD drive A drive that uses optical technology to read data from DVDs and CDs. DVD player The software used to watch DVD movies. The DVD player displays a window with buttons that you use to watch a movie. DVD+RW DVD rewritable A rewritable version of a DVD. Data can be written to a DVD+RW disc, and then erased and written over (rewritten). (DVD+RW technology is different from DVD-RW technology.) DVD+RW drive A drive that can read DVDs and most CD media and write to DVD+RW (rewritable DVDs) discs. DVI digital video interface A standard for digital transmission between a computer and a digital video display; the DVI adapter works through the computer's integrated graphics. E ECC error checking and correction A type of memory that includes special circuitry for testing the accuracy of data as it passes in and out of memory. ECP extended capabilities port A parallel connector design that provides improved bidirectional data transmission. Similar to EPP, ECP uses direct memory access to transfer data and often improves performance. EIDE enhanced integrated device electronics An improved version of the IDE interface for hard drives and CD drives. EMI electromagnetic interference Electrical interference caused by electromagnetic radiation. ENERGY STAR Environmental Protection Agency requirements that decrease the overall consumption of electricity. EPP enhanced parallel port A parallel connector design that provides bidirectional data transmission. ESD electrostatic discharge A rapid discharge of static electricity. ESD can damage integrated circuits found in computer and communications equipment. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary Page 5 of 14 expansion card A circuit board that installs in an expansion slot on the system board in some computers, expanding the capabilities of the computer. Examples include video, modem, and sound cards. expansion slot A connector on the system board (in some computers) where you insert an expansion card, connecting it to the system bus. Express Service Code A numeric code located on a sticker on your Dell computer. Use the Express Service Code when contacting Dell for assistance. Express Service Code service may not be available in some countries. extended display mode A display setting that allows you to use a second monitor as an extension of your display. Also referred to as dual display mode. NOTE: If your computer has two PC Card connectors, always install extended PC Cards in the top connector. extended PC Card A PC Card that extends beyond the edge of the PC Card slot when installed. NOTICE: Always remove an extended PC Card before packing the computer or traveling. If something strikes the exposed end of the PC Card, the system board may be damaged. F Fahrenheit A temperature measurement system where 32 is the freezing point and 212 is the boiling point of water. FCC Federal Communications Commission A U.S. agency responsible for enforcing communications-

related regulations that state how much radiation computers and other electronic equipment can emit. floppy drive A disk drive that can read and write to floppy disks. folder A term used to describe space on a disk or drive where files are organized and grouped. Files in a folder can be viewed and ordered in various ways, such as alphabetically, by date, and by size. format The process that prepares a drive or disk for file storage. When a drive or disk is formatted, the existing information on it is lost. FSB front side bus The data path and physical interface between the microprocessor and RAM. FTP file transfer protocol A standard Internet protocol used to exchange files between computers connected to the Internet. G G gravity A measurement of weight and force. GB gigabyte A measurement of data storage that equals 1024 MB (1,073,741,824 bytes). When used to refer to hard drive storage, the term is often rounded to 1,000,000,000 bytes. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary Page 6 of 14 GHz gigahertz A measurement of frequency that equals one thousand million Hz, or one thousand MHz. The speeds for computer microprocessors, buses, and interfaces are often measured in GHz. graphics mode A video mode that can be defined as x horizontal pixels by y vertical pixels by z colors. Graphics modes can display an unlimited variety of shapes and fonts. GUI graphical user interface Software that interacts with the user by means of menus, windows, and icons. Most programs that operate on the Windows operating systems are GUIs. H hard drive A drive that reads and writes data on a hard disk. The terms hard drive and hard disk are often used interchangeably. heat sink A metal plate on some microprocessors that helps dissipate heat. help file A file that contains descriptive or instructional information about a product. Some help files are associated with a particular program, such as Help in Microsoft Word. Other help files function as stand-alone reference sources. Help files typically have a filename extension of .hlp or .chm. hibernate mode A power management mode that saves everything in memory to a reserved space on the hard drive and then turns off the computer. When you restart the computer, the memory information that was saved to the hard drive is automatically restored. HTML hypertext markup language A set of codes inserted into an Internet web page intended for display on an Internet browser. HTTP hypertext transfer protocol A protocol for exchanging files between computers connected to the Internet. Hz hertz A unit of frequency measurement that equals 1 cycle per second. Computers and electronic devices are often measured in kilohertz (kHz), megahertz (MHz), gigahertz (GHz), or terahertz (THz). I IC Industry Canada The Canadian regulatory body responsible for regulating emissions from electronic equipment, much as the FCC does in the United States. IC integrated circuit A semiconductor wafer, or chip, on which thousands or millions of tiny electronic components are fabricated for use in computer, audio, and video equipment. IDE integrated device electronics An interface for mass storage devices in which the controller is integrated into the hard drive or CD drive. IEEE 1394 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. A high-performance serial bus used to connect IEEE 1394-compatible devices, such as digital cameras and DVD players, to the computer. infrared sensor A port that allows you to transfer data between the computer and infrared-compatible devices without using a cable connection. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary Page 7 of 14 integrated Usually refers to components that are physically located on the computer's system board. Also referred to as built-in. I/O input/output An operation or device that enters and extracts data from your computer. Keyboards and printers are I/O devices. I/O address An address in RAM that is associated with a specific device (such as a serial connector, parallel connector, or expansion slot) and allows the microprocessor to communicate with that device. IRQ interrupt request An electronic pathway assigned to a specific device so that the device can communicate with the microprocessor. Each device connection must be assigned an IRQ. Although two devices can share the same IRQ assignment, you cannot operate both devices simultaneously. ISP Internet service provider A company that allows you to access its host server to connect directly to the Internet, send and receive e-mail, and access websites. The ISP typically provides you with a software package, user name, and access phone numbers for a fee. K Kb kilobit A unit of data that equals 1024 bits. A measurement of the capacity of memory integrated circuits. KB kilobyte A unit of data that equals 1024 bytes but is often referred to as 1000 bytes. keyboard shortcut A command requiring you to press multiple keys at the same time. Also referred to as a key combination. kHz kilohertz A measurement of frequency that equals 1000 Hz. L LAN local area network A computer network covering a small area. A LAN usually is confined to a building or a few nearby buildings. A LAN can be connected to another LAN over any distance through telephone lines and radio waves to form a wide area network (WAN). LCD liquid crystal display The technology used by portable computer and flat-panel displays. LED light-emitting diode An electronic component that emits light to indicate the status of the computer. local bus A data bus that provides a fast throughput for devices to the microprocessor. LPT line print terminal The designation for a parallel connection to a printer or other parallel device. M Mb megabit A measurement of memory chip capacity that equals 1024 Kb. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary Page 8 of 14 Mbps megabits per second One million bits per second. This measurement is typically used for transmission speeds for networks and modems. MB megabyte A measurement of data storage that equals 1,048,576 bytes. 1 MB equals 1024 KB. When used to refer to hard drive storage, the term is often rounded to 1,000,000 bytes. MB/sec megabytes per second One million bytes per second. This measurement is typically used for data transfer ratings. memory A temporary data storage area inside your computer. Because the data in memory is not permanent, it is recommended that you frequently save your files while you are working on them, and always save your files before you shut down the computer. Your computer can contain several different forms of memory, such as RAM, ROM, and video memory. Frequently, the word memory is used as a synonym for RAM. memory address A specific location where data is temporarily stored in RAM. memory mapping The process by which the computer assigns memory addresses to physical locations at start-up. Devices and software can then identify information that the microprocessor can access. memory module A small circuit board containing memory chips, which connects to the system board. MHz megahertz A measure of frequency that equals 1 million cycles per second. The speeds for computer microprocessors, buses, and interfaces are often measured in MHz. microprocessor A computer chip that interprets and executes program instructions. Sometimes the microprocessor is referred to as the processor or the CPU (central processing unit). modem A device that allows your computer to communicate with other computers over analog telephone lines. Three types of modems include: external, PC Card, and internal. You typically use your modem to connect to the Internet and exchange e-mail. module bay A bay that supports devices such as optical drives, a second battery, or a Dell TravelLite module. monitor The high-resolution TV-like device that displays computer output. mouse A pointing device that controls the movement of the cursor on your screen. Typically you roll the mouse over a hard, flat surface to move the pointer or cursor on your screen. ms millisecond A measure of time that equals one thousandth of a second. Access times of storage devices are often measured in ms. N network adapter A chip that provides network capabilities. A computer may include a network adapter on its system board, or it may contain a PC Card with an adapter on it. A network adapter is also referred to as a NIC (network interface controller). NIC See network adapter. notification area The section of the Windows taskbar that contains icons for providing quick access to programs and computer functions, such as the clock, volume control, and print status. Also referred to as file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary system tray. Page 9 of 14 ns nanosecond A measure of time that equals one billionth of a second. NVRAM nonvolatile random access memory A type of memory that stores data when the computer is turned off or loses its external power source. NVRAM is used for maintaining computer configuration information such as date, time, and other system setup options that you can set. O Optical Drive A drive that uses optical technology to read or write data from CDs, DVDs, or DVD+RWs. Example of optical drives include CD drives, DVD drives, CD-RW drives, and CD-RW/DVD combo drives. P parallel connector An I/O port often used to connect a parallel printer to your computer. Also referred to as an LPT port. partition A physical storage area on a hard drive that is assigned to one or more logical storage areas known as logical drives. Each partition can contain multiple logical drives. PC Card A removable I/O card adhering to the PCMCIA standard. Modems and network adapters are common types of PC Cards. PCI peripheral component interconnect PCI is a local bus that supports 32-and 64-bit data paths, providing a high-speed data path between the microprocessor and devices such as video, drives, and networks. PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association The organization that establishes standards for PC Cards. PIN personal identification number A sequence of numerals and/or letters used to restrict unauthorized access to computer networks and other secure systems. PIO programmed input/output A method of transferring data between two devices through the microprocessor as part of the data path. pixel A single point on a display screen. Pixels are arranged in rows and columns to create an image. A video resolution, such as 800 x 600, is expressed as the number of pixels across by the number of pixels up and down. Plug-and-Play The ability of the computer to automatically configure devices. Plug and Play provides automatic installation, configuration, and compatibility with existing hardware if the BIOS, operating system, and all devices are Plug and Play compliant. POST power-on self-test Diagnostics programs, loaded automatically by the BIOS, that perform basic tests on the major computer components, such as memory, hard drives, and video. If no problems are detected during POST, the computer continues the start-up. program Any software that processes data for you, including spreadsheet, word processor, database, and file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary Page 10 of 14 game packages. Programs require an operating system to run. PS/2 personal system/2 A type of connector for attaching a PS/2-compatible keyboard, mouse, or keypad. PXE pre-boot execution environment A WfM (Wired for Management) standard that allows networked computers that do not have an operating system to be configured and started remotely. R RAID redundant array of independent disks A system of two or more drives working together for performance and fault tolerance. RAID drives are typically used on servers and high-end PCs. The three most common RAID levels are 0, 3, and 5:

Level 0: Provides data striping but no redundancy. Level 0 improves performance but does not provide fault tolerance.

Level 3: Same as Level 0, but also reserves one dedicated drive for error correction data, providing good performance and some level of fault tolerance.

Level 5: Provides data striping at the byte level and also stripe error correction information, resulting in excellent performance and good fault tolerance. RAM random-access memory The primary temporary storage area for program instructions and data. Any information stored in RAM is lost when you shut down your computer. readme file A text file included with a software package or hardware product. Typically, readme files provide installation information and describe new product enhancements or corrections that have not yet been documented. read-Only Data and/or files you can view but cannot edit or delete. A file can have read-only status if:

It resides on a physically write-protected floppy disk, CD, or DVD.

It is located on a network in a directory and the system administrator has assigned rights only to specific individuals. refresh rate The frequency, measured in Hz, at which your screen's horizontal lines are recharged

(sometimes also referred to as its vertical frequency). The higher the refresh rate, the less video flicker can be seen by the human eye. resolution The sharpness and clarity of an image produced by a printer or displayed on a monitor. The higher the resolution, the sharper the image. RFI radio frequency interference Interference that is generated at typical radio frequencies, in the range of 10 kHz to 100,000 MHz. Radio frequencies are at the lower end of the electromagnetic frequency spectrum and are more likely to have interference than the higher frequency radiations, such as infrared and light. ROM read-only memory Memory that stores data and programs that cannot be deleted or written to by the computer. ROM, unlike RAM, retains its contents after you shut down your computer. Some programs essential to the operation of your computer reside in ROM. RPM revolutions per minute The number of rotations that occur per minute. Hard drive speed is often measured in rpm. RTC real time clock Battery-powered clock on the system board that keeps the date and time after you file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary shut down the computer. Page 11 of 14 RTCRST real-time clock reset A jumper on the system board of some computers that can often be used for troubleshooting problems. S ScanDisk A Microsoft utility that checks files, folders, and the hard disk's surface for errors. ScanDisk often runs when you restart the computer after it has stopped responding. SDRAM synchronous dynamic random-access memory A type of DRAM that is synchronized with the optimal clock speed of the microprocessor. serial connector An I/O port often used to connect devices such as a handheld digital device or digital camera to your computer. Service Tag A bar code label on your computer that identifies your computer when you access Dell Support at support.dell.com or when you call Dell for customer service or technical support. setup program A program that is used to install and configure hardware and software. The setup.exe or install.exe program comes with most Windows software packages. Setup program differs from system setup program. shortcut An icon that provides quick access to frequently used programs, files, folders, and drives. When you place a shortcut on your Windows desktop and double-click the icon, you can open its corresponding folder or file without having to find it first. Shortcut icons do not change the location of files. If you delete a shortcut, the original file is not affected. Also, you can rename a shortcut icon. shutdown The process of closing windows and exiting programs, exiting the operating system, and turning off your computer. You can lose data if you turn off your computer before completing a shutdown. smart card A card that is embedded with a microprocessor and a memory chip. Smart cards can be used to authenticate a user on computers equipped for smart cards. software Anything that can be stored electronically, such as computer files or programs. S/PDIF Sony/Philips Digital Interface An audio transfer file format that allows the transfer of audio from one file to another without converting it to and from an analog format, which could degrade the quality of the file. standby mode A power management mode that shuts down all unnecessary computer operations to save energy. surge protectors Prevent voltage spikes, such as those that may occur during an electrical storm, from entering the computer through the electrical outlet. Surge protectors do not protect against lightning strikes or against brownouts, which occur when the voltage drops more than 20 percent below the normal AC-line voltage level. Network connections cannot be protected by surge protectors. Always disconnect the network cable from the network connector during electrical storms. SVGA super-video graphics array A video standard for video cards and controllers. Typical SVGA resolutions are 800 x 600 and 1024 x 768. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary Page 12 of 14 The number of colors and resolution that a program displays depends on the capabilities of the monitor, the video controller and its drivers, and the amount of video memory installed in the computer. S-video TV-out A connector used to attach a TV or digital audio device to the computer. SXGA super-extended graphics array A video standard for video cards and controllers that supports resolutions up to 1280 x 1024. SXGA+ super-extended graphics array plus A video standard for video cards and controllers that supports resolutions up to 1400 x 1050. system board The main circuit board in your computer. Also known as the motherboard. system setup program A utility that serves as an interface between the computer hardware and the operating system. System setup allows you to configure user-selectable options in the BIOS, such as date and time or system password. Unless you understand what effect the settings have on the computer, do not change the settings for this program. system tray See notification area. T TAPI telephony application programming interface Enables Windows programs to operate with a wide variety of telephony devices, including voice, data, fax, and video. text editor A program used to create and edit files that contain only text; for example, Windows Notepad uses a text editor. Text editors do not usually provide word wrap or formatting functionality (the option to underline, change fonts, and so on). travel module A plastic device designed to fit inside the module bay of a portable computer to reduce the weight of the computer. U UPS uninterruptible power supply A backup power source used when the electrical power fails or drops to an unacceptable voltage level. A UPS keeps a computer running for a limited amount of time when there is no electrical power. UPS systems typically provide surge suppression and may also provide voltage regulation. Small UPS systems provide battery power for a few minutes to enable you to shut down your computer. USB universal serial bus A hardware interface for a low-speed device such as a USB-compatible keyboard, mouse, joystick, scanner, set of speakers, printer, broadband devices (DSL and cable modems), imaging devices, or storage devices. Devices are plugged directly in to a 4-pin socket on your computer or in to a multi-port hub that plugs in to your computer. USB devices can be connected and disconnected while the computer is turned on, and they can also be daisy-chained together. UTP unshielded twisted pair Describes a type of cable used in most telephone networks and some computer networks. Pairs of unshielded wires are twisted to protect against electromagnetic interference, rather than relying on a metal sheath around each pair of wires to protect against interference. UXGA ultra extended graphics array A video standard for video cards and controllers that supports file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary Page 13 of 14 resolutions up to 1600 x 1200. V video controller The circuitry on a video card or on the system board (in computers with an integrated video controller) that provides the video capabilitiesin combination with the monitorfor your computer. video memory Memory that consists of memory chips dedicated to video functions. Video memory is usually faster than system memory. The amount of video memory installed primarily influences the number of colors that a program can display. video mode A mode that describes how text and graphics are displayed on a monitor. Graphics-based software, such as Windows operating systems, displays in video modes that can be defined as x horizontal pixels by y vertical pixels by z colors. Character-based software, such as text editors, displays in video modes that can be defined as x columns by y rows of characters. video resolution See resolution. virus A program that is designed to inconvenience you or to destroy data stored on your computer. A virus program moves from one computer to another through an infected disk, software downloaded from the Internet, or e-mail attachments. When an infected program starts, its embedded virus also starts. A common type of virus is a boot virus, which is stored in the boot sectors of a floppy disk. If the floppy disk is left in the drive when the computer is shut down and then turned on, the computer is infected when it reads the boot sectors of the floppy disk expecting to find the operating system. If the computer is infected, the boot virus may replicate itself onto all the floppy disks that are read or written in that computer until the virus is eradicated. V volt The measurement of electric potential or electromotive force. One V appears across a resistance of 1 ohm when a current of 1 ampere flows through that resistance. W W watt The measurement of electrical power. One W is 1 ampere of current flowing at 1 volt. WHr watt-hour A unit of measure commonly used to indicate the approximate capacity of a battery. For example, a 66-WHr battery can supply 66 W of power for 1 hour or 33 W for 2 hours. wallpaper The background pattern or picture on the Windows desktop. Change your wallpaper through the Windows Control Panel. You can also scan in your favorite picture and make it wallpaper. write-protected Files or media that cannot be changed. Use write-protection when you want to protect data from being changed or destroyed. To write-protect a 3.5-inch floppy disk, slide its write-protect tab to the open position. X file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary Page 14 of 14 XGA extended graphics array A video standard for video cards and controllers that supports resolutions up to 1024 x 768. Z ZIF zero insertion force A type of socket or connector that allows a computer chip to be installed or removed with no stress applied to either the chip or its socket. Zip A popular data compression format. Files that have been compressed with the Zip format are called Zip files and usually have a filename extension of .zip. A special kind of zipped file is a self-extracting file, which has a filename extension of .exe. You can unzip a self-extracting file by double-clicking it. Zip drive A high-capacity floppy drive developed by Iomega Corporation that uses 3.5-inch removable disks called Zip disks. Zip disks are slightly larger than regular floppy disks, about twice as thick, and hold up to 100 MB of data. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Page 1 of 13 Appendix Appendix Macrovision Product Notice Ergonomic Computing Habits Regulatory Notices Warranty and Return Policy Macrovision Product Notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Ergonomic Computing Habits CAUTION: Improper or prolonged keyboard use may result in injury. CAUTION: Viewing the display or external monitor screen for extended periods of time may result in eye strain. For comfort and efficiency, observe the following ergonomic guidelines when setting up and using your computer workstation:

Position your computer directly in front of you as you work.

Adjust the tilt of the computer's display, its contrast and/or brightness settings, and the lighting around you (such as overhead lights, desk lamps, and the curtains or blinds on nearby windows) to minimize reflections and glare on the display.

When using an external monitor with your computer, set the monitor at a comfortable viewing distance

(usually 450 to 610 millimeters [18 to 24 inches] from your eyes). Make sure the monitor screen is at eye level or slightly lower when you are sitting in front of the monitor.

Use a chair that provides good lower-back support.

Keep your forearms horizontal with your wrists in a neutral, comfortable position while using the keyboard, touch pad, track stick, or external mouse.

Always use the palm rest with the keyboard, touch pad, or track stick. Leave space to rest your hands when using an external mouse.

Let your upper arms hang naturally at your sides. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh1EA0.htm 1/13/2004 Appendix Page 2 of 13

Ensure that your feet are resting flat on the floor.

When sitting, make sure the weight of your legs is on your feet and not on the front of your chair seat. Adjust your chair's height or use a footrest, if necessary, to maintain proper posture.

Vary your work activities. Try to organize your work so that you do not have to type for extended periods of time. When you stop typing, try to do things that use both hands. For more information about ergonomic computing habits, see the BSR/HFES 100 standard, which can be purchased on the Human Factors and Ergonomics Society (HFES) website at:

www.hfes.org/publications/HFES100.html References:

1. American National Standards Institute. ANSI/HFES 100: American National Standards for Human Factors Engineering of Visual Display Terminal Workstations. Santa Monica, CA: Human Factors Society, Inc., 1988. 2. Human Factors and Ergonomics Society. BSR/HFES 100 Draft standard for trial use: Human Factors Engineering of Computer Workstations. Santa Monica, CA: Human Factors and Ergonomics Society, 2002. 3. International Organization for Standardization (ISO). ISO 9241 Ergonomics requirements for office work with visual display terminals (VDTs). Geneva, Switzerland: International Organization for Standardization, 1992. Regulatory Notices Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) is any signal or emission, radiated in free space or conducted along power or signal leads, that endangers the functioning of a radio navigation or other safety service or seriously degrades, obstructs, or repeatedly interrupts a licensed radio communications service. Radio communications services include but are not limited to AM/FM commercial broadcast, television, cellular services, radar, air-

traffic control, pager, and Personal Communication Services (PCS). These licensed services, along with unintentional radiators such as digital devices, including computers, contribute to the electromagnetic environment. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) is the ability of items of electronic equipment to function properly together in the electronic environment. While this computer has been designed and determined to be compliant with regulatory agency limits for EMI, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference with radio communications services, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, you are encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient the receiving antenna.

Relocate the computer with respect to the receiver.

Move the computer away from the receiver.

Plug the computer into a different outlet so that the computer and the receiver are on different branch circuits. If necessary, consult a Dell Technical Support representative or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. Dell computers are designed, tested, and classified for their intended electromagnetic environment. These electromagnetic environment classifications generally refer to the following harmonized definitions:

file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh1EA0.htm 1/13/2004 Appendix Page 3 of 13

Class A is typically for business or industrial environments.

Class B is typically for residential environments. Information Technology Equipment (ITE), including devices, expansion cards, printers, input/output (I/O) devices, monitors, and so on, that are integrated into or connected to the computer should match the electromagnetic environment classification of the computer. A Notice About Shielded Signal Cables: Use only shielded cables for connecting devices to any Dell device to reduce the possibility of interference with radio communications services. Using shielded cables ensures that you maintain the appropriate EMC classification for the intended environment. For parallel printers, a cable is available from Dell. If you prefer, you can order a cable from Dell on the World Wide Web at accessories.us.dell.com/sna/category.asp?category_id=4117. Most Dell computers are classified for Class B environments. However, the inclusion of certain options can change the rating of some configurations to Class A. To determine the electromagnetic classification for your computer or device, see the following sections specific for each regulatory agency. Each section provides country-specific EMC/EMI or product safety information. FCC Notices (U.S. Only) Most Dell computers are classified by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) as Class B digital devices. To determine which classification applies to your computer, examine all FCC registration labels located on the bottom, side, or back panel of your computer, on card-mounting brackets, and on the cards themselves. If any one of the labels carries a Class A rating, your entire computer is considered to be a Class A digital device. If all labels carry an FCC Class B rating as distinguished by either an FCC ID number or the FCC logo, (

), your computer is considered to be a Class B digital device. Once you have determined your computer's FCC classification, read the appropriate FCC notice. Note that FCC regulations provide that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Dell could void your authority to operate this equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference.

This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Class A This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction manual, may cause harmful interference with radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case you will be required to correct the interference at your own expense. Class B This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction manual, may cause interference with radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh1EA0.htm 1/13/2004 Appendix Page 4 of 13 can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, you are encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help. FCC Identification Information The following information is provided on the device or devices covered in this document in compliance with FCC regulations:

Model number:

Company name:

Dell Inc. One Dell Way Round Rock, Texas 78682 USA 512-338-4400 Modem Regulatory Information This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. On the bottom of your computer is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for your equipment. If requested, you must provide this information to the telephone company. The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices that may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most areas, the sum of all the RENs on your telephone line should be less than five to ensure proper service from the telephone company. To be certain of the number of devices that you may connect to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. The registration jack Universal Service Order Code (USOC) used by this equipment is RJ-11C. An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment. This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack that is Part 68 compliant. This equipment cannot be used on public coin-phone service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. There are no user serviceable parts on the modem contained in your computer. If your telephone equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that service may be temporarily discontinued. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service. If you experience trouble with this telephone equipment, see "Getting Help" in your computer's file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh1EA0.htm 1/13/2004 Appendix Page 5 of 13 troubleshooting documentation or, for some computers, the section titled "Contacting Dell" in your computer's online guide to find the appropriate telephone number for obtaining customer assistance. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. Fax Branding The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent, identification of the business, other entity, or individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges. IC Notice (Canada Only) Most Dell computers (and other Dell digital apparatus) are classified by the Industry Canada (IC) Interference-

Causing Equipment Standard #3 (ICES-003) as Class B digital devices. To determine which classification

(Class A or B) applies to your computer (or other Dell digital apparatus), examine all registration labels located on the bottom, side, or the back panel of your computer (or other digital apparatus). A statement in the form of "IC Class A ICES-003" or "IC Class B ICES-003" will be located on one of these labels. Note that Industry Canada regulations provide that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Dell could void your authority to operate this equipment. Modem Regulatory Information The IC label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The IC label does not guarantee that the equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alteration made by a user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telephone communications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection, that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water-pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas. NOTICE: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves. Contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. NOTE: The REN assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh1EA0.htm 1/13/2004 Appendix Page 6 of 13 terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed the number five. The REN for the internal modem as stated on the IC regulatory label located on the bottom of the computer is 0.6 B. The following information is provided in compliance with IC regulations:

Dell Inc. One Dell Way Round Rock, TX 78682 USA 512-338-4400 CE Notice (European Union) Marking by the symbol Voltage Directive of the European Union. Such marking is indicative that this Dell system meets the following technical standards:

indicates compliance of this Dell computer to the EMC Directive and the Low

EN 55022 "Information Technology Equipment Radio Disturbance Characteristics Limits and Methods of Measurement."

EN 55024 "Information Technology Equipment - Immunity Characteristics - Limits and Methods of Measurement."

EN 61000-3-2 "Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3: Limits - Section 2: Limits for Harmonic Current Emissions (Equipment Input Current Up to and Including 16 A Per Phase)."

EN 61000-3-3 "Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3: Limits - Section 3: Limitation of Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker in Low-Voltage Supply Systems for Equipment With Rated Current Up to and Including 16 A."

EN 60950 "Safety of Information Technology Equipment."

NOTE: EN 55022 emissions requirements provide for two classifications:

Class A is for typical commercial areas.

Class B is for typical domestic areas. RF INTERFERENCE WARNING: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio frequency (RF) interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. This Dell device is classified for use in a typical Class B domestic environment. A "Declaration of Conformity" in accordance with the preceding directives and standards has been made and is on file at Dell Inc. Products Europe BV, Limerick, Ireland. CE Mark Notice This equipment complies with the essential requirements of the European Union Directive 1999/5/EC. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh1EA0.htm 1/13/2004 Appendix Page 7 of 13 New Zealand Telecom Warnings General

"The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services."

"This equipment does not fully meet Telecom impedance requirements. Performance limitations may occur when used in conjunction with some parts of the network. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances."

"This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom `111' Emergence Service."

"If a charge for local calls is unacceptable, the `Dial' button should NOT be used for local calls. Only the 7-

digits of the local number should be dialed from your telephone. DO NOT dial the area code digit or the `0'

prefix."

"This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line."

Important Notice

"Under power failure conditions, this telephone may not operate. Please ensure that a separate telephone, not dependent on local power, is available for emergency use."

"Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specification:

file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh1EA0.htm 1/13/2004 Appendix Page 8 of 13 1. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation, and the equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. 2. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall go on-line for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. 3. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing."

"All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is to be aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act of 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is used and what is disclosed to any other party."

Simplified Chinese Class A Warning Notice (China Only) On Class A systems, the following warning will appear near the regulatory label:

Warning: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. EN 55022 Compliance (Czech Republic Only) VCCI Notice (Japan Only) Most Dell computers are classified by the Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) as Class B information technology equipment (ITE). However, the inclusion of certain options can change the rating of some configurations to Class A. ITE, including devices, expansion cards, printers, input/output (I/O) devices, monitors, and so on, integrated into or connected to the computer should match the electromagnetic environment classification (Class A or B) of the computer. To determine which classification applies to your computer, examine the regulatory labels/markings located on the bottom, side, or back panel of your computer. Once you have determined your computer's VCCI classification, read the appropriate VCCI notice (see "VCCI Class A ITE Regulatory Mark" or "VCCI Class B ITE Regulatory Mark"). Class A ITE file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh1EA0.htm 1/13/2004 Appendix Page 9 of 13 This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) for information technology equipment. If this equipment is used in a domestic environment, radio disturbance may arise. When such trouble occurs, the user may be required to take corrective actions. VCCI Class A ITE Regulatory Mark If the regulatory label includes the following marking, your computer is a Class A product:

Class B ITE This is a Class B product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) for information technology equipment. If this equipment is used near a radio or television receiver in a domestic environment, it may cause radio interference. Install and use the equipment according to the instruction manual. VCCI Class B ITE Regulatory Mark If the regulatory label includes the following marking, your computer is a Class B product:

MIC Notice (Republic of Korea Only) To determine which classification (Class A or B) applies to your computer (or other Dell digital device), examine the Republic of Korean Ministry of Information and Communications (MIC) registration labels located on your computer (or other Dell digital device). The MIC label may be located separately from the other regulatory marking applied to your product. Line two of the label identifies the emissions class for the product"(A)" for Class A products or "(B)" for Class B products. NOTE: MIC emissions requirements provide for two classifications:

Class A devices are for business purposes.

Class B devices are for nonbusiness purposes. Class A Device file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh1EA0.htm 1/13/2004 Appendix Page 10 of 13 Please note that this device has been approved for business purposes with regard to electromagnetic interference. If you find that this device is not suitable for your use, you may exchange it for a nonbusiness-

purpose device. MIC Class A Regulatory Label If the regulatory label includes the following marking, your computer is a Class A product:

Class B Device Please note that this device has been approved for nonbusiness purposes and may be used in any environment, including residential areas. MIC Class B Regulatory Label If the regulatory label includes the following marking, your computer is a Class B product:

Polish Center for Testing and Certification Notice The equipment should draw power from a socket with an attached protection circuit (a 3-prong socket). All equipment that works together (computer, monitor, printer, and so on) should have the same power supply source. The phasing conductor of the room's electrical installation should have a reserve short-circuit protection device in the form of a fuse with a nominal value no larger than 16 amperes (A). file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh1EA0.htm 1/13/2004 Appendix Page 11 of 13 To completely switch off the equipment, the power supply cable must be removed from the power supply socket, which should be located near the equipment and easily accessible. A protection mark "B" confirms that the equipment is in compliance with the protection usage requirements of standard PN-EN 55022. BSMI Notice (Taiwan Only) If you find a computer, the following section is applicable:

or mark on the regulatory label on the bottom, side, or back panel of your file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh1EA0.htm 1/13/2004 Appendix Page 12 of 13 NOM Information (Mexico Only) The following information is provided on the device(s) described in this document in compliance with the requirements of the official Mexican standards (NOM):

Exporter:

Importer:

Ship to:

Dell Inc. One Dell Way Round Rock, TX 78682 Dell Computer de Mxico, S.A. de C.V. Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11 Piso Col. Lomas Altas 11950 Mxico, D.F. Dell Computer de Mxico, S.A. de C.V. al Cuidado de Kuehne & Nagel de Mxico S. de R.L. Avenida Soles No. 55 Col. Peon de los Baos 15520 Mxico, D.F. Model number:

PP10L Supply voltage:

100240 VAC file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh1EA0.htm 1/13/2004 Appendix Page 13 of 13 Frequency:

5060 Hz Current Consumption: 1.5 A Output voltage:

19.5 VDC Output current:

4.62 A ENERGY STAR Compliance Certain configurations of Dell computers comply with the requirements set forth by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) for energy-efficient computers. If the front panel of your computer bears the ENERGY STAR Emblem, your original configuration complies with these requirements and all ENERGY STAR power management features of the computer are enabled. NOTE: Any Dell computer bearing the ENERGY STAR Emblem is certified to comply with EPA ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Dell. Any changes you make to this configuration

(such as installing additional expansion cards or drives) may increase the computer's power consumption beyond the limits set by the EPA's ENERGY STAR Computers program. ENERGY STAR Emblem The EPA's ENERGY STAR Computers program is a joint effort between the EPA and computer manufacturers to reduce air pollution by promoting energy-efficient computer products. The EPA estimates that use of ENERGY STAR computer products can save computer users up to two billion dollars annually in electricity costs. In turn, this reduction in electricity usage can reduce emissions of carbon dioxide, the gas primarily responsible for the greenhouse effect, and sulfur dioxide and nitrogen oxides, the primary causes of acid rain. You can also help reduce electricity usage and its side effects by turning off your computer when it is not in use for extended periods of time, particularly at night and on weekends. Warranty and Return Policy Dell Inc. ("Dell") manufactures its hardware products from parts and components that are new or equivalent to new in accordance with industry-standard practices. For information about the Dell warranty for your computer, see the System Information Guide or separate paper warranty document that shipped with your computer. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh1EA0.htm 1/13/2004 Specifications Page 1 of 6 Specifications Microprocessor Microprocessor type L1 cache L2 cache External bus frequency System Information Data bus width DRAM bus width Intel Centrino Mobile Technology or Intel Pentium M Processor 64 KB (internal); 32-KB instruction and 32-KB write-back data 1 MB 400 MHz, source synchronous processor system bus 64 bits 64 bits Microprocessor address bus width 32 bits Flash EPROM PCI bus PC Card CardBus controller PC Card connector Cards supported 1MB 32 bits PCI4510 CardBus controller supports one Type I or Type II card 3.3 V and 5 V PC Card connector size 68 pins Data width (maximum) PCMCIA 16 bits CardBus 32 bits Memory Minimum speed requirement 266 MHz Memory module connector Memory module capacities Memory type Standard memory Maximum memory Ports and Connectors Serial two user-accessible DDR SDRAM connectors 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB, and 1024MB 2.5V DDR SDRAM 128 MB 2 GB 9-pin connector; 16550C-

compatible, file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh7746.htm 1/13/2004 Specifications Page 2 of 6 Parallel Video Audio USB Infrared sensor S-video TV-out Mini PCI Modem Network adapter IEEE 1394 Communications Modem:

Type Controller Interface Network adapter Wireless Video Video type Video controller Video memory 16-byte buffer connector 25-hole connector; unidirectional, bidirectional, or ECP 15-hole connector microphone miniconnector, stereo headphones/speakers miniconnector two 4-pin USB 2.0compliant connectors sensor compatible with IrDA Standard 1.1 (Fast IR) and IrDA Standard 1.0 (Slow IR) 7-pin mini-DIN connector (optional S-video to composite video adapter cable) Type IIIA Mini PCI card slot RJ-11 port RJ-45 port 4-pin serial connector v.92 56K MDC softmodem internal AC'97 bus 10/100 Ethernet LAN on system board internal Mini PCI Wi-Fi wireless support; Bluetooth (optional, available at point of sale only) Intel UMA Integrated Intel 855GME Integrated chip set 1 MB with Intel DVMT up to 32 MB

(with 128 MB of system memory) or 64 MB (with 256 MB or more of system memory) LCD interface LVDS Audio Audio type compatible with Soundblaster and Microsoft Windows Sound file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh7746.htm 1/13/2004 Specifications Page 3 of 6 Audio controller Stereo conversion Interfaces:

Internal External Speaker System Intel AC'97 20-bit (stereo digital-to-analog), 18-bit (stereo analog-to-digital) AC'97 microphone miniconnector, stereo headphones/speakers miniconnector two 4-ohm speakers Internal speaker amplifier 2-W channel into 4 ohms Volume controls Display keyboard shortcuts or program menus Type (active-matrix TFT) XGA Dimensions:

Height Width Diagonal 228.1 mm (9 inches) 304.1 mm (12 inches) 380.1 mm (15 inches) Maximum resolutions 1024 x 768 at 16.8 million colors Response time (typical) Refresh rate Operating angle Viewing angles:

Horizontal Vertical Pixel pitch Power Consumption:

25-ms rise (maximum), 35-ms fall (maximum) 60 Hz 0 (closed) to 180 60 45 0.2172 x 0.2172 mm Panel with backlight (typical) 4.6 W Controls Keyboard Number of keys Key travel Key spacing brightness can be controlled through keyboard shortcuts 87 (U.S. and Canada); 88 (Europe);

91 (Japan) 2.7 mm 0.3 mm (0.11 inch 0.016 inch) 19.05 mm 0.3 mm (0.75 inch file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh7746.htm 1/13/2004 Specifications Page 4 of 6 Layout Touch Pad X/Y position resolution

(graphics table mode) Size:

Width Height Battery Type Dimensions:

Depth Height Width Weight Voltage Charge time with computer off

(approximate) Operating time 0.012 inch) QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji 240 cpi 64.88-mm (2.55-inch) sensor-active area 48.88-mm (1.92-inch) rectangle 6-cell "smart" lithium ion (48 WHr) 4-cell "smart" lithium ion (32 WHr) 77.5 mm (3.05 inches) 19.5 mm (0.76 inch) 123.4 mm (4.86 inches) 0.32 kg (0.7 lb) (6-cell battery) 0.23 kg (0.52 lb) (4-cell battery) 11.1 VDC (6-cell battery) 14.8 VDC (4-cell battery) 1 hour for 80 percent charge approximately 3 to 4 hours (6-cell battery); approximately 2 to 2.5 hours (4-cell battery); can be significantly reduced under certain power-intensive conditions Life span (approximate) 300 discharge/charge cycles Temperature range:

Operating Storage AC Adapter Input voltage Input current (maximum) Input frequency Output current Output power 0 to 35C (32 to 95F) 20 to 65C (4 to 149F) 90264 VAC 1.7 A 4763 Hz 3.34A (65 W) 4.62A (90 W) 65 W or 90 W file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh7746.htm 1/13/2004 Specifications Page 5 of 6 Rated output voltage 19.5 VDC Dimensions:

Height Width Depth Weight (with cables) Temperature range:

Operating Storage Computer Dimensions and Weight Height Width Depth Weight:

28.2mm (1.11 inches) (65 W) 34.2mm (1.35 inches) (90 W) 57.9mm (2.28 inches) (65 W) 60.8mm (2.39 inches) (90 W) 137.2mm (5.40 inches) (65 W) 153.4mm (6.04 inches) (90 W) 0.4 kg (1 lb) (90 W) 0.3 kg (.69 lb) (65 W) 0 to 35C (32 to 95F) 40 to 65C (40 to 149F) 35.5 mm (1.40 inches) 338.4 mm (13.32 inches) 273 mm (10.75 inches) With travel module and standard battery 2.49 kg (5.49 lb) With CD drive and standard battery 2.70 kg (5.94 lb) Computer Environmental Temperature range:

Operating Storage 0 to 35C (32 to 95F) 40 to 65C (40 to 149F) Relative humidity (maximum):

Operating Storage 10% to 90% (noncondensing) 5% to 95% (noncondensing) Maximum vibration (using a random-vibration spectrum that simulates user environment):

Operating Storage 0.66 GRMS 1.30 GRMS Maximum shock (measured with hard drive in head-parked position and a 2-ms half-sine pulse):

Operating Storage 122 G 163 G file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh7746.htm 1/13/2004 Specifications Altitude (maximum):

Operating Storage 15.2 to 3048 m (50 to 10,000 ft) 15.2 to 10,668 m (50 to 35,000 ft) Page 6 of 6 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh7746.htm 1/13/2004 Specifications Page 1 of 6 Specifications Microprocessor Microprocessor type L1 cache L2 cache External bus frequency System Information Data bus width DRAM bus width Intel Centrino Mobile Technology or Intel Pentium M Processor 64 KB (internal); 32-KB instruction and 32-KB write-back data 1 MB 400 MHz, source synchronous processor system bus 64 bits 64 bits Microprocessor address bus width 32 bits Flash EPROM PCI bus PC Card CardBus controller PC Card connector Cards supported 1MB 32 bits PCI4510 CardBus controller supports one Type I or Type II card 3.3 V and 5 V PC Card connector size 68 pins Data width (maximum) PCMCIA 16 bits CardBus 32 bits Memory Minimum speed requirement 266 MHz Memory module connector Memory module capacities Memory type Standard memory Maximum memory Ports and Connectors Serial two user-accessible DDR SDRAM connectors 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB, and 1024MB 2.5V DDR SDRAM 128 MB 2 GB 9-pin connector; 16550C-

compatible, file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh7746.htm 1/13/2004 Specifications Page 2 of 6 Parallel Video Audio USB Infrared sensor S-video TV-out Mini PCI Modem Network adapter IEEE 1394 Communications Modem:

Type Controller Interface Network adapter Wireless Video Video type Video controller Video memory 16-byte buffer connector 25-hole connector; unidirectional, bidirectional, or ECP 15-hole connector microphone miniconnector, stereo headphones/speakers miniconnector two 4-pin USB 2.0compliant connectors sensor compatible with IrDA Standard 1.1 (Fast IR) and IrDA Standard 1.0 (Slow IR) 7-pin mini-DIN connector (optional S-video to composite video adapter cable) Type IIIA Mini PCI card slot RJ-11 port RJ-45 port 4-pin serial connector v.92 56K MDC softmodem internal AC'97 bus 10/100 Ethernet LAN on system board internal Mini PCI Wi-Fi wireless support; Bluetooth (optional, available at point of sale only) Intel UMA Integrated Intel 855GME Integrated chip set 1 MB with Intel DVMT up to 32 MB

(with 128 MB of system memory) or 64 MB (with 256 MB or more of system memory) LCD interface LVDS Audio Audio type compatible with Soundblaster and Microsoft Windows Sound file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh7746.htm 1/13/2004 Specifications Page 3 of 6 Audio controller Stereo conversion Interfaces:

Internal External Speaker System Intel AC'97 20-bit (stereo digital-to-analog), 18-bit (stereo analog-to-digital) AC'97 microphone miniconnector, stereo headphones/speakers miniconnector two 4-ohm speakers Internal speaker amplifier 2-W channel into 4 ohms Volume controls Display keyboard shortcuts or program menus Type (active-matrix TFT) XGA Dimensions:

Height Width Diagonal 228.1 mm (9 inches) 304.1 mm (12 inches) 380.1 mm (15 inches) Maximum resolutions 1024 x 768 at 16.8 million colors Response time (typical) Refresh rate Operating angle Viewing angles:

Horizontal Vertical Pixel pitch Power Consumption:

25-ms rise (maximum), 35-ms fall (maximum) 60 Hz 0 (closed) to 180 60 45 0.2172 x 0.2172 mm Panel with backlight (typical) 4.6 W Controls Keyboard Number of keys Key travel Key spacing brightness can be controlled through keyboard shortcuts 87 (U.S. and Canada); 88 (Europe);

91 (Japan) 2.7 mm 0.3 mm (0.11 inch 0.016 inch) 19.05 mm 0.3 mm (0.75 inch file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh7746.htm 1/13/2004 Specifications Page 4 of 6 Layout Touch Pad X/Y position resolution

(graphics table mode) Size:

Width Height Battery Type Dimensions:

Depth Height Width Weight Voltage Charge time with computer off

(approximate) Operating time 0.012 inch) QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji 240 cpi 64.88-mm (2.55-inch) sensor-active area 48.88-mm (1.92-inch) rectangle 6-cell "smart" lithium ion (48 WHr) 4-cell "smart" lithium ion (32 WHr) 77.5 mm (3.05 inches) 19.5 mm (0.76 inch) 123.4 mm (4.86 inches) 0.32 kg (0.7 lb) (6-cell battery) 0.23 kg (0.52 lb) (4-cell battery) 11.1 VDC (6-cell battery) 14.8 VDC (4-cell battery) 1 hour for 80 percent charge approximately 3 to 4 hours (6-cell battery); approximately 2 to 2.5 hours (4-cell battery); can be significantly reduced under certain power-intensive conditions Life span (approximate) 300 discharge/charge cycles Temperature range:

Operating Storage AC Adapter Input voltage Input current (maximum) Input frequency Output current Output power 0 to 35C (32 to 95F) 20 to 65C (4 to 149F) 90264 VAC 1.7 A 4763 Hz 3.34A (65 W) 4.62A (90 W) 65 W or 90 W file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh7746.htm 1/13/2004 Specifications Page 5 of 6 Rated output voltage 19.5 VDC Dimensions:

Height Width Depth Weight (with cables) Temperature range:

Operating Storage Computer Dimensions and Weight Height Width Depth Weight:

28.2mm (1.11 inches) (65 W) 34.2mm (1.35 inches) (90 W) 57.9mm (2.28 inches) (65 W) 60.8mm (2.39 inches) (90 W) 137.2mm (5.40 inches) (65 W) 153.4mm (6.04 inches) (90 W) 0.4 kg (1 lb) (90 W) 0.3 kg (.69 lb) (65 W) 0 to 35C (32 to 95F) 40 to 65C (40 to 149F) 35.5 mm (1.40 inches) 338.4 mm (13.32 inches) 273 mm (10.75 inches) With travel module and standard battery 2.49 kg (5.49 lb) With CD drive and standard battery 2.70 kg (5.94 lb) Computer Environmental Temperature range:

Operating Storage 0 to 35C (32 to 95F) 40 to 65C (40 to 149F) Relative humidity (maximum):

Operating Storage 10% to 90% (noncondensing) 5% to 95% (noncondensing) Maximum vibration (using a random-vibration spectrum that simulates user environment):

Operating Storage 0.66 GRMS 1.30 GRMS Maximum shock (measured with hard drive in head-parked position and a 2-ms half-sine pulse):

Operating Storage 122 G 163 G file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh7746.htm 1/13/2004 Specifications Altitude (maximum):

Operating Storage 15.2 to 3048 m (50 to 10,000 ft) 15.2 to 10,668 m (50 to 35,000 ft) Page 6 of 6 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh7746.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Page 1 of 17 Getting Help Technical Assistance Problems With Your Order Product Information Returning Items for Warranty Repair or Credit Before You Call Contacting Dell Technical Assistance If you need help with a technical problem, Dell is ready to assist you. CAUTION: If you need to remove the computer covers, first disconnect the computer power and modem cables from all electrical outlets. 1. Complete the procedures in "Solving Problems."

2. Run the Dell Diagnostics. 3. Make a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist and fill it out. 4. Use Dell's extensive suite of online services available at Dell Support (support.dell.com) for help with installation and troubleshooting procedures. 5. If the preceding steps have not resolved the problem, contact Dell. NOTE: Call technical support from a telephone near or at the computer so that technical support can assist you with any necessary procedures. NOTE: Dell's Express Service Code system may not be available in all countries. When prompted by Dell's automated telephone system, enter your Express Service Code to route the call directly to the proper support personnel. If you do not have an Express Service Code, open the Dell Accessories folder, double-click the Express Service Code icon, and follow the directions. For instructions on using the technical support service, see "Technical Support Service."

NOTE: Some of the following services are not always available in all locations outside the continental U.S. Call your local Dell representative for information on availability. Online Services file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Page 2 of 17 You can access Dell Support at support.dell.com. Select your region on the WELCOME TO DELL SUPPORT page, and fill in the requested details to access help tools and information. You can contact Dell electronically using the following addresses:

World Wide Web www.dell.com/

www.dell.com/ap/ (for Asian/Pacific countries only) www.euro.dell.com (for Europe only) www.dell.com/la/ (for Latin American countries)

Anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP) ftp.dell.com/

Log in as user: anonymous, and use your e-mail address as your password.

Electronic Support Service mobile_support@us.dell.com support@us.dell.com apsupport@dell.com (for Asian/Pacific countries only) support.euro.dell.com (for Europe only)

Electronic Quote Service sales@dell.com apmarketing@dell.com (for Asian/Pacific countries only)

Electronic Information Service info@dell.com AutoTech Service Dell's automated technical support serviceAutoTechprovides recorded answers to the questions most frequently asked by Dell customers about their portable and desktop computers. When you call AutoTech, use your touch-tone telephone to select the subjects that correspond to your questions. The AutoTech service is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. You can also access this service through the technical support service. For the telephone number to call, see the contact numbers for your region. Automated Order-Status Service file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Page 3 of 17 To check on the status of any Dell products that you have ordered, you can go to support.dell.com, or you can call the automated order-status service. A recording prompts you for the information needed to locate and report on your order. For the telephone number to call, see the contact numbers for your region. Technical Support Service Dell's technical support service is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, to answer your questions about Dell hardware. Our technical support staff uses computer-based diagnostics to provide fast, accurate answers. To contact Dell's technical support service, see "Technical Assistance" and then call the number for your country as listed in "Contacting Dell."

Problems With Your Order If you have a problem with your order, such as missing parts, wrong parts, or incorrect billing, contact Dell for customer assistance. Have your invoice or packing slip handy when you call. For the telephone number to call, see the contact numbers for your region. Product Information If you need information about additional products available from Dell, or if you would like to place an order, visit the Dell website at www.dell.com. For the telephone number to call to speak to a sales specialist, see the contact numbers for your region. Returning Items for Warranty Repair or Credit Prepare all items being returned, whether for repair or credit, as follows:

1. Call Dell to obtain a Return Material Authorization Number, and write it clearly and prominently on the outside of the box. For the telephone number to call, see the contact numbers for your region. 2. Include a copy of the invoice and a letter describing the reason for the return. 3. 4. Include a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist indicating the tests you have run and any error messages reported by the Dell Diagnostics. Include any accessories that belong with the item(s) being returned (power cables, software floppy disks, guides, and so on) if the return is for credit. 5. Pack the equipment to be returned in the original (or equivalent) packing materials. You are responsible for paying shipping expenses. You are also responsible for insuring any product returned, and you assume the risk of loss during shipment to Dell. Collect On Delivery (C.O.D.) packages are not accepted. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Page 4 of 17 Returns that are missing any of the preceding requirements will be refused at Dell's receiving dock and returned to you. Before You Call NOTE: Have your Express Service Code ready when you call. The code helps Dell's automated-support telephone system direct your call more efficiently. Remember to fill out the Diagnostics Checklist. If possible, turn on your computer before you call Dell for technical assistance and call from a telephone at or near the computer. You may be asked to type some commands at the keyboard, relay detailed information during operations, or try other troubleshooting steps possible only at the computer itself. Ensure that the computer documentation is available. CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, read the safety instructions in your System Information Guide. Diagnostics Checklist Name:

Date:

Address:

Phone number:

Service tag (bar code on the back of the computer):

Express Service Code:

Return Material Authorization Number (if provided by Dell support technician):

Operating system and version:

Devices:

Expansion cards:

Are you connected to a network? Yes No Network, version, and network adapter:

Programs and versions:

See your operating system documentation to determine the contents of the system's start-up files. If the computer is connected to a printer, print each file. Otherwise, record the contents of each file before calling Dell. Error message, beep code, or diagnostic code:

Description of problem and troubleshooting procedures you performed:

Contacting Dell To contact Dell electronically, you can access the following websites:

file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Page 5 of 17

www.dell.com

support.dell.com (technical support)

premiersupport.dell.com (technical support for educational, government, healthcare, and medium/large business customers, including Premier, Platinum, and Gold customers) For specific web addresses for your country, find the appropriate country section in the table below. NOTE: Toll-free numbers are for use within the country for which they are listed. When you need to contact Dell, use the electronic addresses, telephone numbers, and codes provided in the following table. If you need assistance in determining which codes to use, contact a local or an international operator. Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Anguilla Antigua and Barbuda Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address General Support General Support Argentina (Buenos Aires) Website: www.dell.com.ar Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers toll-free: 800-335-0031 1-800-805-5924 Tech Support and Customer Care toll-free: 0-800-444-0733 International Access Code: 00 Sales Country Code: 54 Tech Support Fax City Code: 11 Aruba Customer Care Fax General Support Australia (Sydney) E-mail (Australia): au_tech_support@dell.com International Access Code: 0011 Country Code: 61 City Code: 2 E-mail (New Zealand): nz_tech_support@dell.com Home and Small Business Government and Business Preferred Accounts Division (PAD) Customer Care Corporate Sales Transaction Sales Fax Austria (Vienna) Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 900 Country Code: 43 City Code: 1 E-mail: tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Home/Small Business Sales Home/Small Business Fax Home/Small Business Customer Care 0-810-444-3355 11 4515 7139 11 4515 7138 toll-free: 800-1578 1-300-65-55-33 toll-free: 1-800-633-559 toll-free: 1-800-060-889 toll-free: 1-800-819-339 toll-free: 1-800-808-385 toll-free: 1-800-808-312 toll-free: 1-800-818-341 0820 240 530 00 0820 240 530 49 0820 240 530 14 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Page 6 of 17 Preferred Accounts/Corporate Customer Care Home/Small Business Technical Support Preferred Accounts/Corporate Technical Support Bahamas Barbados Switchboard General Support General Support Belgium (Brussels) Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 32 City Code: 2 Bermuda Bolivia Brazil International Access Code: 00 E-mail: tech_be@dell.com E-mail for French Speaking Customers:

support.euro.dell.com/be/fr/emaildell/

Technical Support Customer Care Corporate Sales Fax Switchboard General Support General Support Website: www.dell.com/br Customer Support, Technical Support Tech Support Fax Country Code: 55 Customer Care Fax City Code: 51 British Virgin Islands Sales General Support Brunei Customer Technical Support (Penang, Malaysia) Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) Transaction Sales (Penang, Malaysia) Online Order Status: www.dell.ca/ostatus Country Code: 673 Canada (North York, Ontario) International Access Code: 011 0820 240 530 16 0820 240 530 14 0660 8779 0820 240 530 00 toll-free: 1-866-278-6818 1-800-534-3066 02 481 92 88 02 481 91 19 02 481 91 00 02 481 92 99 02 481 91 00 1-800-342-0671 toll-free: 800-10-0238 0800 90 3355 51 481 5470 51 481 5480 0800 90 3390 toll-free: 1-866-278-6820 604 633 4966 604 633 4949 604 633 4955 AutoTech (automated technical support) toll-free: 1-800-247-9362 TechFax toll-free: 1-800-950-1329 Customer Care (Home Sales/Small Business) toll-free: 1-800-847-4096 Customer Care (med./large business, government) toll-free: 1-800-326-9463 Technical Support (Home Sales/Small Business) toll-free: 1-800-847-4096 Technical Support (med./large bus., government) toll-free: 1-800-387-5757 Sales (Home Sales/Small Business) Sales (med./large bus., government) toll-free: 1-800-387-5752 toll-free: 1-800-387-5755 Spare Parts Sales & Extended Service Sales 1 866 440 3355 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Page 7 of 17 Cayman Islands General Support 1-800-805-7541 Chile (Santiago) Sales, Customer Support, and Technical Support toll-free: 1230-020-4823 Country Code: 56 City Code: 2 China (Xiamen) Tech Support website: support.ap.dell.com/china Country Code: 86 City Code: 592 Tech Support E-mail: cn_support@dell.com Tech Support Fax 818 1350 Home and Small Business Technical Support toll-free: 800 858 2437 Corporate Accounts Technical Support Customer Experience Home and Small Business Preferred Accounts Division Large Corporate Accounts GCP Large Corporate Accounts Key Accounts Large Corporate Accounts North Large Corporate Accounts North Government and Education Large Corporate Accounts East Large Corporate Accounts East Government and Education Large Corporate Accounts Queue Team Large Corporate Accounts South Large Corporate Accounts West Large Corporate Accounts Spare Parts Colombia Costa Rica Czech Republic

(Prague) General Support General Support Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: czech_dell@dell.com International Access Code: 00 Technical Support Customer Care Country Code: 420 Fax City Code: 2 Denmark

(Copenhagen) International Access Code: 00 TechFax Switchboard Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail Support (portable computers):

den_nbk_support@dell.com E-mail Support (desktop computers):

toll-free: 800 858 2333 toll-free: 800 858 2060 toll-free: 800 858 2222 toll-free: 800 858 2062 toll-free: 800 858 2055 toll-free: 800 858 2628 toll-free: 800 858 2999 toll-free: 800 858 2955 toll-free: 800 858 2020 toll-free: 800 858 2669 toll-free: 800 858 2572 toll-free: 800 858 2355 toll-free: 800 858 2811 toll-free: 800 858 2621 980-9-15-3978 0800-012-0435 02 2186 27 27 02 2186 27 11 02 2186 27 14 02 2186 27 28 02 2186 27 11 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Country Code: 45 den_support@dell.com E-mail Support (servers):

Nordic_server_support@dell.com Technical Support Customer Care (Relational) Home/Small Business Customer Care Switchboard (Relational) Fax Switchboard (Relational) Switchboard (Home/Small Business) Fax Switchboard (Home/Small Business) Dominica General Support Dominican Republic General Support Ecuador El Salvador General Support General Support Finland (Helsinki) Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 990 Country Code: 358 City Code: 9 E-mail: fin_support@dell.com E-mail Support (servers): Nordic_support@dell.com Technical Support Technical Support Fax Relational Customer Care Home/Small Business Customer Care Fax Switchboard France (Paris)

(Montpellier) Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/fr/fr/emaildell/

International Access Code: 00 Home and Small Business Technical Support Country Code: 33 Customer Care City Codes: (1) (4) Switchboard Switchboard (calls from outside of France) Sales Fax Fax (calls from outside of France) Corporate Technical Support Customer Care Switchboard Page 8 of 17 7023 0182 7023 0184 3287 5505 3287 1200 3287 1201 3287 5000 3287 5001 toll-free: 1-866-278-6821 1-800-148-0530 toll-free: 999-119 01-899-753-0777 09 253 313 60 09 253 313 81 09 253 313 38 09 693 791 94 09 253 313 99 09 253 313 00 0825 387 270 0825 823 833 0825 004 700 04 99 75 40 00 0825 004 700 0825 004 701 04 99 75 40 01 0825 004 719 0825 338 339 01 55 94 71 00 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Sales Fax Germany (Langen) Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 49 City Code: 6103 E-mail: tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Technical Support Home/Small Business Customer Care Global Segment Customer Care Preferred Accounts Customer Care Large Accounts Customer Care Public Accounts Customer Care Switchboard Greece Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 30 Grenada Guatemala Guyana Hong Kong International Access Code: 001 Country Code: 852 E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/gr/en/emaildell/

Technical Support Gold Technical Support Switchboard Sales Fax General Support General Support General Support Website: support.ap.dell.com E-mail: ap_support@dell.com Technical Support (Dimension and Inspiron) Technical Support (OptiPlex, Latitude, and Dell Precision) Page 9 of 17 01 55 94 71 00 01 55 94 71 01 06103 766-7200 0180-5-224400 06103 766-9570 06103 766-9420 06103 766-9560 06103 766-9555 06103 766-7000 080044149518 08844140083 2108129800 2108129800 2108129812 toll-free: 1-866-540-3355 1-800-999-0136 toll-free: 1-877-270-4609 296 93188 296 93191 Customer Service (non-technical, post-sales issues) 800 93 8291 Transaction Sales Large Corporate Accounts HK Large Corporate Accounts GCP HK India Technical Support Sales Ireland

(Cherrywood) Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: dell_direct_support@dell.com International Access Code: 16 Ireland Technical Support U.K. Technical Support (dial within U.K. only) Country Code: 353 Home User Customer Care toll-free: 800 96 4109 toll-free: 800 96 4108 toll-free: 800 90 3708 1600 33 8045 1600 33 8044 1850 543 543 0870 908 0800 01 204 4014 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help City Code: 1 Small Business Customer Care U.K. Customer Care (dial within U.K. only) Corporate Customer Care Corporate Customer Care (dial within U.K. only) Ireland Sales U.K. Sales (dial within U.K. only) Fax/SalesFax Switchboard Italy (Milan) Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 39 City Code: 02 E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/it/it/emaildell/

Home and Small Business Technical Support Customer Care Fax Switchboard Corporate Technical Support Customer Care Fax Switchboard Page 10 of 17 01 204 4014 0870 906 0010 1850 200 982 0870 907 4499 01 204 4444 0870 907 4000 01 204 0103 01 204 4444 02 577 826 90 02 696 821 14 02 696 821 13 02 696 821 12 02 577 826 90 02 577 825 55 02 575 035 30 02 577 821 Jamaica General Support (dial from within Jamaica only) 1-800-682-3639 Japan (Kawasaki) Website: support.jp.dell.com International Access Code: 001 Country Code: 81 City Code: 44 Technical Support (servers) toll-free: 0120-198-498 Technical Support outside of Japan (servers) 81-44-556-4162 Technical Support (Dimension and Inspiron) toll-free: 0120-198-226 Technical Support outside of Japan (Dimension and Inspiron) Technical Support (Dell Precision, OptiPlex, and Latitude) Technical Support outside of Japan (Dell Precision, OptiPlex, and Latitude) Faxbox Service 24-Hour Automated Order Service Customer Care Business Sales Division (up to 400 employees) Preferred Accounts Division Sales (over 400 employees) Large Corporate Accounts Sales (over 3500 employees) 81-44-520-1435 toll-free:0120-198-433 81-44-556-3894 044-556-3490 044-556-3801 044-556-4240 044-556-1465 044-556-3433 044-556-3430 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Public Sales (government agencies, educational institutions, and medical institutions) Global Segment Japan Individual User Switchboard Korea (Seoul) Technical Support International Access Code: 001 Country Code: 82 City Code: 2 Sales Customer Service (Seoul, Korea) Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) Fax Switchboard Latin America Customer Technical Support (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) Customer Service (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) Fax (Technical Support and Customer Service)

(Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) Sales (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) SalesFax (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) Luxembourg Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: tech_be@dell.com Page 11 of 17 044-556-1469 044-556-3469 044-556-1760 044-556-4300 toll-free: 080-200-3800 toll-free: 080-200-3600 toll-free: 080-200-3800 604 633 4949 2194-6202 2194-6000 512 728-4093 512 728-3619 512 728-3883 512 728-4397 512 728-4600 or 512 728-3772 International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 352 Technical Support (Brussels, Belgium) 3420808075 Home/Small Business Sales (Brussels, Belgium) toll-free: 080016884 Corporate Sales (Brussels, Belgium) Customer Care (Brussels, Belgium) Fax (Brussels, Belgium) Switchboard (Brussels, Belgium) Macao Technical Support Country Code: 853 Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) Transaction Sales Malaysia (Penang) Technical Support International Access Code: 00 Customer Service Country Code: 60 City Code: 4 Mexico International Access Transaction Sales Corporate Sales Customer Technical Support 02 481 91 00 02 481 91 19 02 481 92 99 02 481 91 00 toll-free: 0800 582 604 633 4949 toll-free: 0800 581 toll-free: 1 800 888 298 04 633 4949 toll-free: 1 800 888 202 toll-free: 1 800 888 213 001-877-384-8979 or 001-877-269-3383 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Page 12 of 17 Code: 00 Sales Country Code: 52 Customer Service Main Montserrat General Support Netherlands Antilles General Support Netherlands

(Amsterdam) International Access Code: 00 Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail (Technical Support):

(Enterprise): nl_server_support@dell.com Country Code: 31

(Latitude): nl_latitude_support@dell.com City Code: 20

(Inspiron): nl_inspiron_support@dell.com

(Dimension): nl_dimension_support@dell.com

(OptiPlex): nl_optiplex_support@dell.com

(Dell Precision): nl_workstation_support@dell.com Technical Support Technical Support Fax Home/Small Business Customer Care Relational Customer Care Home/Small Business Sales Relational Sales Home/Small Business Sales Fax Relational Sales Fax Switchboard Switchboard Fax New Zealand E-mail (New Zealand): nz_tech_support@dell.com International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 64 E-mail (Australia): au_tech_support@dell.com Home and Small Business Government and Business Sales Fax 50-81-8800 or 01-800-888-3355 001-877-384-8979 or 001-877-269-3383 50-81-8800 or 01-800-888-3355 toll-free: 1-866-278-6822 001-800-882-1519 020 674 45 00 020 674 47 66 020 674 42 00 020 674 4325 020 674 55 00 020 674 50 00 020 674 47 75 020 674 47 50 020 674 50 00 020 674 47 50 0800 446 255 0800 444 617 0800 441 567 0800 441 566 Nicaragua General Support 001-800-220-1006 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Page 13 of 17 Norway (Lysaker) Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 00 E-mail Support (portable computers):

nor_nbk_support@dell.com Country Code: 47 E-mail Support (desktop computers):

nor_support@dell.com E-mail Support (servers):

nordic_server_support@dell.com Technical Support Relational Customer Care Home/Small Business Customer Care Panama Peru Switchboard Fax Switchboard General Support General Support Poland (Warsaw) Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 011 E-mail: pl_support@dell.com Customer Service Phone Country Code: 48 City Code: 22 Customer Care Sales Customer Service Fax Reception Desk Fax Switchboard Portugal Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 351 E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/pt/en/emaildell/

Technical Support Customer Care Sales Fax Puerto Rico General Support St. Kitts and Nevis General Support St. Lucia St. Vincent and the Grenadines General Support General Support Singapore Technical Support 671 16882 671 17514 23162298 671 16800 671 16865 001-800-507-0962 0800-50-669 57 95 700 57 95 999 57 95 999 57 95 806 57 95 998 57 95 999 707200149 800 300 413 800 300 410 or 800 300 411 or 800 300 412 or 21 422 07 10 21 424 01 12 1-800-805-7545 toll-free: 1-877-441-4731 1-800-882-1521 toll-free: 1-877-270-4609 toll-free: 800 6011 051 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Page 14 of 17

(Singapore) Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) International Access Code: 005 Transaction Sales Corporate Sales 604 633 4949 toll-free: 800 6011 054 toll-free: 800 6011 053 Country Code: 65 South Africa

(Johannesburg) International Access Code:

Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: dell_za_support@dell.com Technical Support Customer Care 09/091 Country Code: 27 Sales Fax City Code: 11 Switchboard Southeast Asian and Pacific Countries Customer Technical Support, Customer Service, and Sales (Penang, Malaysia) Spain (Madrid) Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 34 City Code: 91 E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/es/es/emaildell/

Home and Small Business Technical Support Customer Care Sales Switchboard Fax Corporate Technical Support Customer Care Switchboard Fax Sweden (Upplands Vasby) Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: swe_support@dell.com International Access Code: 00 E-mail Support for Latitude and Inspiron:

Swe-nbk_kats@dell.com Country Code: 46 City Code: 8 E-mail Support for OptiPlex: Swe_kats@dell.com E-mail Support for Servers:

Nordic_server_support@dell.com Technical Support Relational Customer Care Home/Small Business Customer Care Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Support 011 709 7710 011 709 7707 011 709 7700 011 706 0495 011 709 7700 604 633 4810 902 100 130 902 118 540 902 118 541 902 118 541 902 118 539 902 100 130 902 118 546 91 722 92 00 91 722 95 83 08 590 05 199 08 590 05 642 08 587 70 527 20 140 14 44 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Fax Technical Support Sales Switzerland

(Geneva) Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: swisstech@dell.com International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 41 E-mail for French-speaking HSB and Corporate Customers:

support.euro.dell.com/ch/fr/emaildell/

Technical Support (Home and Small Business) City Code: 22 Technical Support (Corporate) Customer Care (Home and Small Business) Customer Care (Corporate) Fax Switchboard Page 15 of 17 08 590 05 594 08 590 05 185 0844 811 411 0844 822 844 0848 802 202 0848 821 721 022 799 01 90 022 799 01 01 Taiwan Technical Support (portable and desktop computers) toll-free: 00801 86 1011 International Access Code: 002 Country Code: 886 Technical Support (servers) Transaction Sales Corporate Sales Thailand Technical Support toll-free: 0080 60 1256 toll-free: 0080 651 228 or 0800 33 556 toll-free: 0080 651 227 or 0800 33 555 toll-free: 0880 060 07 International Access Code: 001 Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) 604 633 4949 Country Code: 66 Sales Trinidad/Tobago General Support Turks and Caicos Islands General Support U.K. (Bracknell) Website: support.euro.dell.com toll-free: 0880 060 09 1-800-805-8035 toll-free: 1-866-540-3355 International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 44 City Code: 1344 Customer Care website:

support.euro.dell.com/uk/en/ECare/Form/Home.asp E-mail: dell_direct_support@dell.com Technical Support (Corporate/Preferred Accounts/PAD

[1000+ employees]) Technical Support (direct/PAD and general) Global Accounts Customer Care Home and Small Business Customer Care Corporate Customer Care 0870 908 0500 0870 908 0800 01344 373 186 0870 906 0010 01344 373 185 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Preferred Accounts (5005000 employees) Customer Care Central Government Customer Care Local Government & Education Customer Care Health Customer Care Home and Small Business Sales Corporate/Public Sector Sales Uruguay General Support Page 16 of 17 0870 906 0010 01344 373 193 01344 373 199 01344 373 194 0870 907 4000 01344 860 456 toll-free: 000-413-598-

2521 toll-free: 1-800-433-9014 U.S.A. (Austin, Texas) International Access Code: 011 Country Code: 1 Automated Order-Status Service AutoTech (portable and desktop computers) toll-free: 1-800-247-9362 Consumer (Home and Home Office) Technical Support Customer Service DellNet Service and Support toll-free: 1-800-624-9896 toll-free: 1-800-624-9897 toll-free: 1-877-Dellnet

(1-877-335-5638) Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Customers toll-free: 1-800-695-8133 Financial Services website: www.dellfinancialservices.com Financial Services (lease/loans) toll-free: 1-877-577-3355 Financial Services (Dell Preferred Accounts [DPA]) toll-free: 1-800-283-2210 Business Customer Service and Technical Support toll-free: 1-800-822-8965 Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Customers toll-free: 1-800-695-8133 Projectors Technical Support toll-free: 1-877-459-7298 Public (government, education, and healthcare) Customer Service and Technical Support toll-free: 1-800-456-3355 Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Customers toll-free: 1-800-234-1490 Dell Sales toll-free: 1-800-289-3355 or toll-free: 1-800-879-

3355 Dell Outlet Store (Dell refurbished computers) toll-free: 1-888-798-7561 Software and Peripherals Sales Spare Parts Sales Extended Service and Warranty Sales Fax Dell Services for the Deaf, Hard-of-Hearing, or Speech-Impaired toll-free: 1-800-671-3355 toll-free: 1-800-357-3355 toll-free: 1-800-247-4618 toll-free: 1-800-727-8320 toll-free: 1-877-DELLTTY

(1-877-335-5889) file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help U.S. Virgin Islands General Support Venezuela General Support Page 17 of 17 1-877-673-3355 8001-3605 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Using the System Setup Program Page 1 of 4 Using the System Setup Program Overview Viewing the System Setup Screens System Setup Screens Commonly Used Options Overview NOTE: Your operating system may automatically configure most of the options available in the system setup program, thus overriding options that you set through the system setup program. (An exception is the External Hot Key option, which you can disable or enable only through the system setup program.) For more information on configuring features for your operating system, see your Microsoft Windows Help or the Windows Help and Support Center. You can use the system setup program as follows:

To set or change user-selectable featuresfor example, your password

To verify information about the computer's current configuration, such as the amount of system memory After you set up the computer, run the system setup program to familiarize yourself with your system configuration information and optional settings. You may want to write down the information for future reference. NOTICE: Unless you are an expert computer user or are directed to do so by Dell technical support, do not change the settings for this program. Certain changes might make your computer work incorrectly. Viewing the System Setup Screens 1. Turn on (or restart) your computer. 2. When the DELL logo appears, press <F2> immediately. If you wait too long and the Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. System Setup Screens The system setup screens display the current setup information and settings for your computer. On each file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh4200.htm 1/13/2004 Using the System Setup Program Page 2 of 4 screen, the system setup options are listed at the left of the screen. To the right of each option is the setting or value for that option. You can change settings that appear as white type on the screen. Options or values that you cannot change (because they are determined by the computer) appear less bright. The upper-right corner of the screen displays help information for the currently highlighted option; the lower-

right corner displays information about the computer. System setup key functions are listed across the bottom of the screen. The screens display such information as:

System configuration

Boot order

Boot (start-up) configuration and docking-device configuration settings

Basic device configuration settings

Battery charge status

System security and hard-drive password settings Commonly Used Options Certain options require that you reboot the computer for new settings to take effect. Changing the Boot Sequence The boot sequence, or boot order, tells the computer where to look to find the software needed to start the operating system. You can control the boot sequence using the Boot Order page of the system setup program. The Boot Order page displays a general list of the bootable devices that may be installed in your computer, including but not limited to the following:

Diskette Drive

Modular bay HDD

Internal HDD

CD/DVD/CD-RW drive During the boot routine, the computer starts at the top of the list and scans each enabled device for the operating system start-up files. When the computer finds the files, it stops searching and starts the operating system. To control the boot devices, select (highlight) a device by pressing the up-arrow key or down-arrow key, and then enable or disable the device or change its order in the list.

To enable or disable a device, highlight the item and press the space-bar key. Enabled items appear as white and display a small triangle to their left; disabled items appear blue or dimmed without a triangle.

To reorder a device in the list, highlight the device and then press <U> or <D> (not case-sensitive) to file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh4200.htm 1/13/2004 Using the System Setup Program Page 3 of 4 move the highlighted device up or down. Boot sequence changes take effect as soon as you save the changes and exit the system setup program. Performing a One-Time Boot You can set a one-time-only boot sequence without entering the system setup program. (You can also use this procedure to boot the Dell Diagnostics on the diagnostics utility partition on your hard drive.) 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Connect the computer to an electrical outlet. 3. Turn on the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press <F12> immediately. If you wait too long and the Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. 4. When the boot device list appears, highlight the device from which you want to boot and press

<Enter>. The computer boots to the selected device. The next time you reboot the computer, the normal boot order is restored. Changing Printer Modes Set the Parallel Mode option according to the type of printer or device connected to the parallel connector. To determine the correct mode to use, see the documentation that came with the device. Setting Parallel Mode to Disabled disables the parallel port and the port's LPT address, freeing its interrupt for another device to use. Changing COM Ports Serial Port allows you to map the serial port COM address or disable the serial port and its address, freeing its interrupt for another device to use. Enabling the Infrared Sensor 1. Enter the system setup program:

a. Turn on your computer. b. Press <F2> when the DELL logo appears. 2. Press <Alt><P> until you locate Infrared Data Port under Basic Device Configuration. 3. Press the down-arrow key to highlight Disabled next to Infrared Data Port. 4. Press the right-arrow key to change the setting to a COM port. Ensure that the COM port that you select is different from the COM port assigned to the serial connector. 5. Press the down-arrow key to select Infrared Mode, and press the right-arrow key to change the file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh4200.htm 1/13/2004 Using the System Setup Program Page 4 of 4 setting to Fast IR or Slow IR. It is recommended that you use Fast IR. If the infrared device cannot communicate with your computer, turn off the computer and repeat steps 1 through 5 to change the setting to Slow IR. 6. Press <Esc> to save the changes and exit the system setup program. If you are prompted to restart your computer, click Yes. 7. Follow the instructions on the screen while the infrared sensor driver is being installed. 8. At the end of the installation process, click Yes to restart the computer. After you enable the infrared sensor, you can use it to establish a link to an infrared device. To set up and use an infrared device, see the infrared device documentation and Windows Help. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh4200.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 1 of 17 Adding and Replacing Parts Before You Begin Recommended Tools Shutting Down Your Computer Memory Keyboard Bluetooth Mini PCI Card Hard Drive Connecting a Television to the Computer Before You Begin This section provides procedures for removing and installing the components in your computer. Unless otherwise noted, each procedure assumes that the following conditions exist:

You have performed the steps in "Shutting Down Your Computer."

You have read the safety information in your System Information Guide. Recommended Tools The procedures in this document may require the following tools:

Small flat-blade screwdriver

Phillips screwdriver

Small plastic scribe

Flash BIOS update program floppy disk or CD Shutting Down Your Computer file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 2 of 17 Use the following safety guidelines to help protect your computer from potential damage and to ensure your own personal safety. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. NOTICE: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. CAUTION: Handle components and cards with care. Do not touch the components or contacts on a card. Hold a card by its edges or by its metal mounting bracket. Hold a component such as a microprocessor by its edges, not by its pins. NOTICE: When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its strain-relief loop, not on the cable itself. Some cables have a connector with locking tabs; if you are disconnecting this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before you disconnect the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep them evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable, ensure that both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned. NOTICE: To avoid damaging the computer, perform the following steps before you begin working inside the computer. 1. Ensure that the work surface is flat and clean to prevent the computer cover from being scratched. 2. Shut down the computer. 3. Ensure that the computer and any attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds. 4. If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network wall jack. 5. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 6. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. 7. Remove any installed PC Cards from the PC Card slot. 8. Close the display and turn the computer upside down on a flat work surface. NOTICE: To avoid damaging the system board, you must remove the main battery before you service the computer. 9. Slide and hold the battery-bay latch release on the bottom of the computer, and then remove the battery from the bay. 10. Remove any installed modules, including a second battery, if installed. 11. Remove the hard drive. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 3 of 17 Memory You can increase your computer memory by installing memory modules on the system board. See

"Specifications" for information on the memory supported by your computer. Be sure to add only memory modules that are intended for your computer. NOTE: Memory modules purchased from Dell are covered under your computer warranty. CAUTION: Before working inside your Dell computer, read the safety instructions in your System Information Guide. 1. Turn the computer over, remove the screw from the memory module cover, and lift the cover. NOTICE: To prevent damage to the memory module connector, do not use tools to spread the inner metal tabs that secure the memory module. 2. If you are replacing a memory module, remove the existing module. NOTICE: Handle memory modules by their edges, and do not touch the components on a module. a. Use your fingertips to carefully spread apart the securing clips on each end of the memory module connector until the module pops up. b. Remove the module from the connector. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 4 of 17 NOTICE: If you need to install memory modules in two connectors, install a memory module in the connector labeled "JDIM (DIMMA)" before you install a module in the connector labeled "JDIM2

(DIMMB)."

3. Ground yourself and install the new memory module:

a. Align the notch in the module with the slot in the center of the connector. b. Slide the edge of the module firmly into the connector, and rotate the module down until you feel a click. If you do not feel the click, remove the module and reinstall it. NOTE: If the memory module is not installed properly, the computer does not boot. No error message indicates this failure. 4. Replace the cover and screw. NOTICE: If the memory module cover is difficult to close, remove the module and reinstall it. Forcing the cover to close may damage your computer. 5. Insert the battery into the battery bay, or connect the AC adapter to your computer and an electrical outlet. 6. Turn on the computer. As the computer boots, it detects the additional memory and automatically updates the system configuration information. Keyboard CAUTION: Before performing the following procedures, read the safety instructions in your System Information Guide. NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 5 of 17 periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as the back panel) on the computer."

1. Turn the computer top-side up and open it. 1 2 3 display center control cover palm rest 2. Remove the center control cover:

a. Open the display all the way (180 degrees) so that it lies flat against your work surface. b. Starting on the right side of the computer, use a plastic scribe to pry up the center control cover. Lift it away from the computer, and lay it aside. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 6 of 17 1 center control cover 3. Remove the keyboard:

a. Remove the two M2.5 x 6-mm screws across the top of the keyboard. NOTICE: The keycaps on the keyboard are fragile, easily dislodged, and time-consuming to replace. Be careful when removing and handling the keyboard. b. Rotate the keyboard up and slide it forward. c. Hold the keyboard up and slightly forward to allow access to the keyboard connector. d. Pull up on the keyboard connector tab to disconnect the keyboard connector from the system board. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 7 of 17 1 M2.5 x 6-mm screws (2) 2 keyboard tabs 3 palm rest NOTE: When you replace the keyboard, ensure that the keyboard tabs are completely in place to avoid scratching the palm rest. Bluetooth If you ordered a Bluetooth card with your computer, the card is already installed. CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, read the safety instructions in your System Information Guide. 1. Ensure that the work surface is flat and clean to prevent scratching the computer cover. 2. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and then shut down the computer. 3. If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 4. Disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet. 5. Wait 10 to 20 seconds, and then disconnect any attached devices. 6. Remove any installed PC Cards, batteries, and module bay devices. NOTICE: Handle components and cards by their edges, and avoid touching pins and contacts. Ground yourself by touching a metal connector on the back of the computer. Continue to ground yourself periodically during this procedure. 7. Remove the Hard Drive. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 8 of 17 8. Pull the Bluetooth card connector out of the system board connector. 9. Pull the cable to remove the Bluetooth card from the computer. 1 Bluetooth card 2 system board connector 3 Bluetooth card connector 4 cable NOTE: When replacing the Bluetooth card, ensure the Bluetooth cable is routed correctly so that you do not damage the cable when you install the hard drive. Mini PCI Card CAUTION: FCC rules strictly prohibit users from installing 5-GHz (802.11a,802.11a/b, 802.11a/b/g) Wireless LAN Mini PCI cards. Under no circumstances should the user install such a device. Only trained Dell service personnel are authorized to install a 5-GHz Wireless LAN Mini PCI card. If you are removing and/or installing a 2.4-GHz (802.11b, 802.11b/g) Mini PCI card, follow the instructions noted below. Only products approved for use in your portable computer may be installed. Approved Mini PCI cards may be purchased only from Dell. NOTE: 2.4-GHz Wireless LAN PC Cards may be removed and installed by the user. If you ordered a Mini PCI card at the same time that you ordered your computer, the card is already installed. NOTE: Handle components and cards by their edges, and avoid touching pins and contacts. CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, read the safety instructions in your System file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 9 of 17 Information Guide. 1. Turn the computer over, and remove the screw from the Mini PCI card cover. 2. Place your finger under the cover at the indentation, and lift and slide the cover open. 3. If a Mini PCI card is not already installed, go to step 6. If you are replacing a Mini PCI card, remove the existing card:

a. Disconnect the Mini PCI card from any attached cables. b. Release the Mini PCI card by spreading the metal securing tabs until the card pops up slightly. c. Lift the Mini PCI card out of its connector. 4. Align the new Mini PCI card with the connector at a 45-degree angle, and press the Mini PCI card into the connector. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 10 of 17 5. Connect the antenna cables from the Mini PCI card to the antenna connectors on the computer. NOTICE: The connectors are keyed for correct insertion; do not force the connections. 1 antenna connectors on card (2) 2 antenna cables (2) 6. Lower the Mini PCI card toward the inner tabs to approximately a 20-degree angle. 7. Continue lowering the Mini PCI card until it snaps into the inner tabs of the connector. 8. Replace the cover. Hard Drive NOTICE: To prevent data loss, shut down your computer before removing the hard drive. Do not remove the hard drive while the computer is on, in standby mode, or in hibernate mode. NOTICE: Hard drives are extremely fragile; even a slight bump can damage the drive. CAUTION: If you remove the hard drive from the computer when the drive is hot, do not touch the metal housing of the hard drive. CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, read the safety instructions in your System Information Guide. NOTE: Dell does not guarantee compatibility or provide support for hard drives from sources other than Dell. 1. Turn the computer over. Use a small screwdriver to loosen the captive hard drive screw. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 11 of 17 1 captive screws 2. Turn the computer over so that it is upright. NOTICE: You cannot remove your hard drive unless you open your display first. 3. Open the display approximately 2.54 cm (1 in). NOTICE: When the hard drive is not in the computer, store it in protective antistatic packaging. See

"Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge" in your System Information Guide."

4. Pull the hard drive cover out of the computer. 5. Remove the new drive from its packaging. Save the original packaging for use when storing or shipping the hard drive. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 12 of 17 NOTICE: You cannot replace your hard drive unless you open your display first. 6. Ensure that the display is open approximately 2.54 cm (1 inch). NOTICE: Use firm and even pressure to slide the drive into place. If you force the hard drive into place using excessive force, you may damage the hard drive connector. 7. Press the hard drive cover into the bay until it is fully seated in the bay. 8. Turn the computer over. Use a small screwdriver to tighten the screw. 9. Use the Operating System CD to install the operating system for your computer. 10. Use the Drivers and Utilities CD to install the drivers and utilities for your computer. Connecting a Television to the Computer Your computer has an S-video TV-out connector that enables you to connect the computer to a television. Using a commercially available S-video cable or composite video cable, you can connect the computer to a television in one of two ways:

S-video (for a television with S-video input)

Composite video (for a television with only a composite video input; also uses a composite TV-out adapter cable) NOTE: Diagrams for each connection combination appear at the beginning of each subsection to help you determine which method you should use. The audio connector on the side of the computer enables you to connect the computer to your television or audio device, using a commercially available audio cable. When you complete the cable connection, see "Enabling the Display Settings for a Television" to ensure that the computer recognizes and works properly with the television. S-Video Connection file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 13 of 17 Before you begin, ensure that you have the following cables:

1 2 S-video cable audio cable 1. Shut down the computer and the television and/or audio device you want to connect. 2. Plug one end of the S-video cable in to the S-video connector on the computer. 3. Plug the other end of the S-video cable in to your television. 4. Plug the single-connector end of the audio cable in to the headphone connector on your computer. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 14 of 17 5. Plug the two RCA connectors on the other end of the audio cable in to the audio input connectors on your television or audio device. 6. Turn on the television, turn on any audio device you connected, and then turn on the computer. 7. See "Enabling the Display Settings for a Television" to ensure that the computer recognizes and works properly with the television. Composite Video Connection To connect the computer to a television that has a composite video input only, use a composite TV-out adapter cable available from Dell. Before you begin, ensure that you have the following cables:

file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 15 of 17 1 composite TV-out adapter cable 2 composite video cable 3 audio cable 1. Turn off the computer and the television and/or audio device you want to connect. 2. Connect the composite TV-out adapter cable to the S-video TV-out connector on the computer. 1 S-video TV-out connector 2 S-video connector 3 composite TV-out adapter cable 4 composite video connector 3. Plug one end of the composite video cable in to the composite video connector on the composite TV-out adapter cable. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 16 of 17 4. Plug the other end of the composite video cable in to the composite video connector on the television. 5. Plug the single-connector end of the audio cable in to the headphone connector on the computer. 6. Plug the two RCA connectors on the other end of the audio cable in to the audio input connectors on your television or audio device. Enabling the Display Settings for a Television Intel UMA Integrated Video Controller NOTE: Ensure that you properly connect the television before you enable the display settings. 1. Open the Control Panel window. In Microsoft Windows XP, click the Start button and click the Control Panel icon. Under Pick a Category, click Appearance and Themes. In Windows 2000, click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Display icon, click the Settings tab, and then click Advanced. 3. Click the Intel (R) Extreme Graphics tab. 4. Click the Graphic Properties button. 5. If you want to use only a television without using the computer display or any other display options:

a. In the new window, click Television so that a red check mark appears over the television icon. b. Ensure that the settings are correct. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 17 of 17 6. If you want to use a television and the computer display at the same time:

a. In the new window, click Intel (R) Dual Display Clone and ensure that one of the devices listed is a television. b. Click Device Settings. c. In the new window, ensure that the display resolution settings are correct. 7. Click Apply to view the new settings. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Reinstalling Software Page 1 of 9 Reinstalling Software Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities Using Microsoft Windows System Restore Reinstalling Windows XP Reinstalling Windows 2000 Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities Dell ships your computer to you with required drivers and utilities already installedno further installation or configuration is needed. NOTICE: The Drivers and Utilities CD may contain drivers for operating systems that are not on your computer. Ensure that you are installing software appropriate for your operating system. To reinstall drivers for optional devices such as wireless communications and DVD drives, you may need the CD and documentation that came with those devices. NOTICE: The Dell Support website, support.dell.com, and the Drivers and Utilities CD provide approved drivers for Dell computers. If you install drivers from other sources, your computer might not work correctly. To reinstall a driver or utility from your Drivers and Utilities CD:

1. Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs. 2. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD. In most cases, the CD starts running automatically. If it does not, start Microsoft Windows Explorer, click your CD drive directory to display the CD contents, and then double-click the autorcd.exe file. The first time that you run the CD, it might prompt you to install setup files. Click OK, and follow the instructions on the screen to continue. 3. From the Language drop-down menu in the toolbar, select your preferred language for the driver or utility (if available). A welcome screen appears. 4. Click Next. The CD automatically scans your hardware to detect drivers and utilities used by your computer. After the CD completes the hardware scan, you can also detect other drivers and utilities. Under Search Criteria, select the appropriate categories from the System Model, Operating System, and Topic file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E2.htm 1/13/2004 Reinstalling Software drop-down menus. Page 2 of 9 A link or links appear(s) for the specific drivers and utilities used by your computer. 5. Click the link of a specific driver or utility to display information about the driver or utility that you want to install. 6. Click the Install button (if present) to begin installing the driver or utility. At the welcome screen, follow the screen prompts to complete the installation. If no Install button is present, automatic installation is not an option. For installation instructions, either see the appropriate instructions in the following subsections, or click Extract, follow the extracting instructions, and read the readme file. If instructed to navigate to the driver files, click the CD directory on the driver information window to display the files associated with that driver. Manually Reinstalling Drivers for Windows XP NOTE: If you are reinstalling an infrared-sensor driver, you must first enable the infrared sensor in the system setup program before continuing with the driver installation. 1. After extracting the driver files to your hard drive as described previously, click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. Click the Start button and right-click My Computer. 2. Click Properties. 3. Click the Hardware tab and click Device Manager. 4. Double-click the type of device for which you are installing the driver (for example, Modems or Infrared devices). 5. Double-click the name of the device for which you are installing the driver. 6. Click the Driver tab and click Update Driver. 7. Select Install from a list or specific location (Advanced) and click Next. 8. Click Browse, and browse to the location to which you previously extracted the driver files. 9. When the name of the appropriate driver appears, click Next. 10. Click Finish and restart your computer. Using the Windows XP Device Driver Rollback If you install a new device driver that causes system instability, you can use the Windows XP Device Driver Rollback to replace the new device driver with the previously installed version of the device driver. If you cannot reinstall your previous driver by using the Device Driver Rollback process, then use System Restore to return your operating system to its previous operating state before you installed the new device driver. To use Device Driver Rollback:

1. Click the Start button and right-click My Computer. 2. Click Properties. 3. Click the Hardware tab and click Device Manager. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E2.htm 1/13/2004 Reinstalling Software Page 3 of 9 4. In the Device Manager window, right-click the device for which the new driver was installed and then click Properties. 5. Click the Drivers tab. 6. Click Roll Back Driver. Manually Reinstalling Drivers for Windows 2000 NOTE: If you are reinstalling an infrared driver, you must first enable the infrared sensor in the system setup program before continuing with the driver installation. 1. After extracting the driver files to your hard drive as described previously, click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the System icon. 3. Click the Hardware tab. 4. Click Device Manager. 5. Double-click the type of device for which you are installing the driver (for example, Modems or Infrared devices). 6. Double-click the name of the device. 7. Click the Driver tab and click Update Driver. 8. Click Next. 9. Ensure that Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended) is selected, and then click Next. 10. Ensure that the Specify a location check box is checked and that all other check boxes are unchecked, and click Next. 11. Click Browse to browse to the location to which you previously extracted the driver files. 12. When the name of the appropriate driver appears, click Next. 13. Click Finish and restart your computer. Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities In the Microsoft Windows XP and Windows 2000 operating systems, IRQ conflicts occur if a device either is not detected during the operating system setup or is detected but incorrectly configured. See the following subsection that corresponds to your operating system to check for IRQ conflicts on your computer. Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Performance and Maintenance and click System. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E2.htm 1/13/2004 Reinstalling Software Page 4 of 9 3. Click the Hardware tab and click Device Manager. 4. In the Device Manager list, check for conflicts with the other devices. Conflicts are indicated by a yellow exclamation point (!) beside the conflicting device or a red X if the device has been disabled. 5. Double-click any conflicting device listed to bring up the Properties window so that you can determine what needs to be reconfigured or removed from the Device Manager. 6. Resolve these conflicts before checking specific devices. 7. Double-click the malfunctioning device type in the Device Manager list. 8. Double-click the icon for the specific device in the expanded list. The Properties window appears. If an IRQ conflict exists, the Device status area in the Properties window reports what other devices are sharing the device's IRQ. 9. Resolve any IRQ conflicts. You can also use the Windows XP Hardware Troubleshooter. To use the troubleshooter, click the Start button and click Help and Support. Type hardware troubleshooter in the Search field, and then click the arrow to start the search. Click Hardware Troubleshooter in the Search Results list. In the Hardware Troubleshooter list, click I need to resolve a hardware conflict on my computer and click Next. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the System icon. 3. Click the Hardware tab. 4. Click Device Manager. 5. Click View and click Resources by connection. 6. Double-click Interrupt request (IRQ) to view the IRQ assignments. Conflicts are indicated by a yellow exclamation point (!) beside the conflicting device or a red X if the device has been disabled. 7. Double-click any conflicting device listed to bring up the Properties window so that you can determine what needs to be reconfigured or removed from the Device Manager. Resolve these conflicts before checking specific devices. 8. Double-click the malfunctioning device type in the Device Manager list. 9. Double-click the icon for the specific device in the expanded list. The Properties window appears. If an IRQ conflict exists, the Device status area in the Properties window reports what other devices are sharing the device's IRQ. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E2.htm 1/13/2004 Reinstalling Software Page 5 of 9 10. Resolve any IRQ conflicts. You can also use the Windows 2000 Hardware Troubleshooter. To use the troubleshooter, click the Start button and click Help. Click Troubleshooting and Maintenance on the Contents tab, click Windows 2000 troubleshooters, and then click Hardware. In the Hardware Troubleshooter list, click I need to resolve a hardware conflict on my computer, and then click Next. Using Microsoft Windows System Restore The Microsoft Windows XP operating system provides a System Restore feature that allows you to return your computer to an earlier operating state if changes to the computer's hardware, software (including new hardware or program installations), or system settings have left the computer in an undesirable operating state. You can also undo the last system restore. System Restore automatically creates system checkpoints. You can also manually create your own checkpoints by creating restore points. To limit the amount of hard disk space used, older restore points will be automatically purged. To resolve an operating system problem, you can use System Restore from Safe Mode or Normal Mode to return your computer to an earlier operating state. System Restore does not cause you to lose personal files stored in the My Documents folder, data files, or e-

mail messages after restoring the computer to an earlier time. If you restore the computer to an operating state that existed before you installed a program, the program's data files are not lost, but you must reinstall the actual program again. NOTICE: It is important to make regular backups of your data files. System Restore does not monitor changes to or recover your data files. If the original data on the hard disk is accidentally erased or overwritten, or if it becomes inaccessible because of a hard disk malfunction, use your backup files to recover the lost or damaged data. System Restore is enabled on your new computer. However, if you reinstall Windows XP with less than 200 MB of free hard-disk space available, System Restore is automatically disabled. Before you use System Restore, confirm that it is enabled:

1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click the Performance and Maintenance. 3. Click System. 4. Click the System Restore tab. 5. Ensure that Turn off System Restore is not checked. Creating a Restore Point In Windows XP, you can either use the System Restore Wizard or manually create a restore point. Using the System Restore Wizard To use the System Restore Wizard, click the Start button, click Help and Support, click System Restore, file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E2.htm 1/13/2004 Reinstalling Software Page 6 of 9 and then follow the instructions in the System Restore Wizard window. You can also create and name a restore point if you are logged on as the computer administrator or a user with administrator rights. Manually Creating a Restore Point 1. Click the Start button, point to All Programs Accessories System Tools, and then click System Restore. 2. Click Create a restore point. 3. Click Next. 4. Type a name for the new restore point in the Restore point description field. The present date and time are automatically added to the description of the new restore point. 5. Click Create. 6. Click OK. Restoring the Computer to an Earlier Operating State If problems occur after installing a device driver, first try using Device Driver Rollback. If Device Driver Rollback does not resolve the problem, then use System Restore. NOTICE: Before restoring the computer to an earlier operating state, save and close all open files and exit all open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system restoration is complete. 1. Click the Start button, point to All Programs Accessories System Tools, and then click System Restore. 2. Ensure that Restore my computer to an earlier time is selected and click Next. 3. Click a calendar date to which you want to restore your computer. The Select a Restore Point screen provides a calendar that allows you to see and select restore points. All calendar dates with available restore points appear in bold. 4. Select a restore point and click Next. If a calendar date has only one restore point, then that restore point is automatically selected. If two or more restore points are available, click the restore point that you want to use. NOTICE: Save and close all open files and exit all open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system restoration is complete. 5. Click Next. In Windows XP, the Restoration Complete screen appears after System Restore finishes collecting data, and then the computer automatically restarts. 6. After the computer restarts, click OK. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E2.htm 1/13/2004 Reinstalling Software Page 7 of 9 To change the restore point, you can either repeat the steps using a different restore point, or you can undo the restoration. Undoing the Last System Restore NOTICE: Save and close all open files and exit all open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system restoration is complete. 1. Click the Start button, point to All Programs Accessories System Tools, and then click System Restore. 2. Select Undo my last restoration and click Next. NOTICE: Save and close all open files and exit all open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system restoration is complete. 3. Click Next. The System Restore screen appears, and then the computer automatically restarts. 4. After the computer restarts, click OK. Reinstalling Windows XP Before reinstalling the Microsoft Windows XP operating system to correct a problem, try correcting the problem by using Windows System Restore. NOTICE: The Operating System CD provides options for reinstalling the Windows XP operating system. The options can potentially overwrite files installed by Dell and possibly affect programs installed on your hard drive. Therefore, do not reinstall your operating system unless instructed to do so by a Dell technical support representative. 1. Insert the Operating System CD. 2. Shut down the computer, and then turn on the computer. 3. Press any key when the Press any key to boot from CD message appears on the screen. 4. When the Windows XP Setup screen appears, press <Enter> to select To set up Windows now. 5. Read the information in the License Agreement window, and then press <F8> on your keyboard to agree with the license information. 6. If your computer already has Windows XP installed and you want to recover your current Windows XP data, type r to select the repair option, and then go to step 15. If you want to install a new copy of Windows XP, press <Esc> to select the fresh copy option and then press <Enter> on the next screen to select the highlighted partition (recommended). Then follow the instructions on the screen. The Windows XP Setup screen appears and Windows XP begins to copy files and install the device file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E2.htm 1/13/2004 Reinstalling Software Page 8 of 9 drivers. The computer automatically restarts multiple times before it requires additional input. 7. When the Welcome to Microsoft screen appears, click the green arrow icon at the bottom of the screen to continue. Then follow the instructions on the screen to finish the installation. 8. When the Regional Settings screen appears, select the settings for your locale and click Next. 9. Enter your name and organization in the Personalize Your Software screen and click Next. 10. If you are reinstalling Windows XP Home Edition, enter a name for your computer when the Computer Name window appear and click Next. If you are reinstalling Windows XP Professional, enter a name for your computer and a password when the Computer Name and Administrator Password window appears and click Next. 11. If you have a modem installed, the Modem Dialing Information screen appears. Enter the requested information and click Next. 12. Enter the date, time, and time zone in the Date and Time Settings window and click Next. 13. If your computer has a network adapter, select the appropriate network settings. If your computer does not have a network adapter, you do not see this option. Windows XP begins to install its components and configure the computer. The computer automatically restarts. 14. When the Welcome to Microsoft screen appears, click the green arrow icon at the bottom of the screen to continue. Then follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation. 15. Remove the CD from the drive. 16. Reinstall the appropriate drivers. 17. Reinstall your virus protection software. Reinstalling Windows 2000 NOTICE: The Operating System CD provides options for reinstalling the Windows 2000 operating system. The options can potentially overwrite files installed by Dell and possibly affect programs installed on your hard drive. Therefore, do not reinstall your operating system unless instructed to do so by a Dell technical support representative. 1. Turn on the computer, and enter the system setup program as directed by a Dell technical support representative or as follows:

a. Shut down the computer. b. Before the computer boots into Windows, press <F2> to enter the system setup program. c. Press <Alt><P> to move to the Boot menu. d. In the system setup program Boot menu, follow the instructions on the screen to change the boot sequence so that the CD or DVD drive boots first. Then insert the Operating System CD into the drive. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E2.htm 1/13/2004 Reinstalling Software Page 9 of 9 e. Press <Esc> to save your changes and exit the system setup program. f. Press any key to boot the computer from the CD. 2. When the Windows 2000 Setup window appears, ensure that To setup Win2000 now, press ENTER is highlighted. Then press <Enter>. 3. Read the information in the License Agreement window and press <F8> to continue. 4. When the Windows 2000 Professional Setup window appears, press the arrow keys to select the Windows 2000 partition option that you want. Then press the key for the partition option you chose. 5. When the Windows 2000 Professional Setup window reappears, press the arrow keys to select the type of file system that you want Windows 2000 to use, and then press<Enter>. 6. Press <Enter> again to restart your computer. 7. Click Next when the Welcome to the Windows 2000 Setup Wizard window appears. 8. When the Regional Settings window appears, select your region, and then click Next. 9. Enter your name and organization in the Personalize Your Software window and click Next. 10. Enter the Windows product key, which is printed on the Microsoft label on your computer. Then click Next. 11. When the Computer Name and Administrator Password window appears, enter a name for your computer and a password, if desired. Then click Next. 12. Enter the date and time in the Date and Time Settings window and click Next. Windows 2000 installs components and configures the computer. 13. When the Completing the Windows 2000 Setup Wizard window appears, remove the CD from the drive and click Finish. The computer automatically restarts. Enabling Hibernate Mode 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings and click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Power Management icon. 3. Click the Hibernate tab. 4. Ensure that Enable hibernate support is selected and click Apply. 5. Click OK to close the Control Panel. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E2.htm 1/13/2004 Cleaning Your Computer Page 1 of 3 Cleaning Your Computer Computer and Keyboard Display Touch Pad Floppy Drive Optical Media Computer and Keyboard 1. Shut down your computer, disconnect any attached devices, and disconnect them from their electrical outlets. 2. Remove any installed batteries. 3. Gently use a vacuum cleaner with a brush attachment to remove dust from the slots and holes on your computer and between the keys on the keyboard. NOTICE: To avoid damaging the computer or display, do not spray cleaning solution directly onto the display. Only use products specifically designed for cleaning LCDs, and follow the instructions that are included with the product. 4. Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water or an LCD cleaner, and wipe the computer and keyboard. Do not allow water from the cloth to seep between the touch pad and the surrounding palm rest. Display NOTICE: To avoid damaging the computer or display, do not spray cleaning solution directly onto the display. Only use products specifically designed for cleaning LCDs, and follow the instructions that are included with the product. 1. Shut down your computer, disconnect any attached devices, and disconnect them from their electrical outlets. 2. Remove any installed batteries. 3. Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water or an LCD cleaner, and wipe the display until it is clean. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh4ECE.htm 1/13/2004 Cleaning Your Computer Page 2 of 3 Touch Pad 1. Shut down your computer, disconnect any attached devices, and disconnect them from their electrical outlets. 2. Remove any installed batteries. 3. Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water, and stroke it gently across the surface of the touch pad. Do not allow water from the cloth to seep between the touch pad and the surrounding palm rest. Floppy Drive Use only a commercially available cleaning kit to clean your floppy drive. Such kits contain pretreated floppy disks to remove contaminants that accumulate during typical operation. Optical Media NOTICE: Always use compressed air to clean the lens in the drive, and follow the instructions that are included with the compressed air. Never touch the lens in the drive. If you notice problems, such as skipping, with the playback quality of your CDs or DVDs, try cleaning the discs. 1. Hold the disc by its outer edge. You can also touch the inside edge of the center hole. NOTICE: To avoid damaging the surface, do not wipe in a circular motion around the disc. 2. With a soft, dry, lint-free cloth, gently wipe the bottom of the disc (the unlabeled side) in a straight line from the center to the outer edge. You can also purchase commercial products that clean discs and provide some protection from dust, fingerprints, and scratches. Cleaning products for CDs are safe to use on DVDs. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh4ECE.htm 1/13/2004 Cleaning Your Computer Page 3 of 3 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh4ECE.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Dell Diagnostics Page 1 of 3 Using the Dell Diagnostics When to Use the Dell Diagnostics Features of the Dell Diagnostics Starting the Dell Diagnostics When to Use the Dell Diagnostics Whenever a major component or device in your computer does not function properly, you may have a component failure. If you are experiencing a problem with your Dell computer, perform the checks in

"Solving Problems" and run the Dell Diagnostics before you call Dell for technical assistance. Running the Dell Diagnostics may help you to resolve the problem yourself quickly without having to contact Dell for assistance. If you are experienced with computers and know what component(s) you need to test, select the appropriate diagnostic test group(s) or subtest(s). If you are unsure about how to begin diagnosing a problem, see

"Starting the Dell Diagnostics."

Features of the Dell Diagnostics The Dell Diagnostics helps you to check your computer hardware without any additional equipment and without destroying any data. By using the diagnostics, you can have confidence in the operation of your computer. If you find a problem that you cannot solve by yourself, the diagnostic tests can provide you with important information you need when talking to Dell's service and support personnel. NOTICE: Use the Dell Diagnostics to test only your Dell computer. Using this program with other computers may cause incorrect computer responses or result in error messages. The diagnostic test groups or subtests also have the following features:

Options that let you perform express, extended, or custom tests on one or all devices

An option that allows you to select tests based on a symptom of the problem you are having

An option that allows you to choose the number of times a test group or subtest is repeated

The ability to display test results

Options to temporarily suspend testing if an error is detected, or to terminate testing

Extensive online Help that describes the tests and devices

Status messages that inform you whether test groups or subtests were completed successfully

Error messages that appear if any problems are detected file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhA58A.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Dell Diagnostics Page 2 of 3 Starting the Dell Diagnostics The Dell Diagnostics is located on a hidden Diagnostic utility partition on your hard drive. NOTE: If your computer cannot display a screen image, contact Dell. 1. Shut down the computer. 2. If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 3. Connect the computer to an electrical outlet. NOTE: If you cannot see anything on your display, you can hold down the mute button and press the power button (instead of F12) to begin the Dell Diagnostics. You do not need to highlight Diagnostics and press <Enter>. The computer automatically runs the Pre-boot System Assessment. 4. Turn on the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press <F12> immediately. If you wait too long and the Microsoft Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. 5. When the boot device list appears, highlight Diagnostics and press <Enter>. The computer begins to run the Pre-boot System Assessment, a series of embedded diagnostics that perform initial testing on your system board, keyboard, hard drive, and display.

During the assessment, answer any questions that appear.

If a component failure is detected, the computer stops and beeps. To stop the assessment and reboot to the operating system, press <N>; to continue to the next test, press <Y>; to retest the component that failed, press <R>.

If failures are detected during the Pre-boot System Assessment, write down the error code(s) and contact Dell before continuing on to the Dell Diagnostics.

If you receive a message stating that no Diagnostics utility partition has been found, follow the instructions on the screen to run the Dell Diagnostics from your Drivers and Utilities CD. If the Pre-boot System Assessment completes successfully, you receive the message Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue. 6. Press any key to start the Dell Diagnostics from the Diagnostics utility partition on your hard drive. 7. After the Dell Diagnostics loads and the Main Menu screen appears, click the button for the option you want. NOTE: The Service Tag for your computer is located in the title bar of each screen. Option Function Express Test Performs a quick test of devices. The test typically takes 10 to 20 minutes and requires no interaction on your part. Run Express Test first to increase the file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhA58A.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Dell Diagnostics Page 3 of 3 possibility of tracing the problem quickly. Extended Test Performs a thorough check of devices. The test typically takes 1 hour or more and requires you to answer questions periodically. Custom Test Tests a specific device. You can customize the tests to be run. Symptom Tree Allows you to select tests based on a symptom of the problem you are experiencing. The option lists the most common symptoms. 8. If a problem is encountered during a test, a message appears, displaying the error code and a description of the problem. Write down the error code and problem description and follow the instructions on the screen. If you cannot resolve the error condition, contact Dell. 9. If you run a test from the Custom Test or Symptom Tree option, click the applicable tab described in the following table for more information. Tab Function Results Displays the results of the test and any error conditions encountered. Errors Help Displays error conditions encountered, error codes, and problem description. Describes the test and may indicate requirements for running the test. Configuration Displays your hardware configuration for the selected device. The Dell Diagnostics obtains your configuration information for all devices from the system setup program, memory, and various internal tests and displays the information in the device list in the left pane of the screen. The device list may not display the names of all the components installed on your computer or all devices attached to your computer. Parameters Allows you to customize the test by changing the test settings. 10. When you have finished running a test, close the screen to return to the Main Menu screen. To exit the Dell Diagnostics and reboot the computer, close the Main Menu screen. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhA58A.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 1 of 17 Solving Problems Power Problems Error Messages Video and Display Problems Sound and Speaker Problems Printer Problems Modem and Internet Connection Problems Touch Pad or Mouse Problems External Keyboard Problems Unexpected Characters Drive Problems PC Card Problems Network Problems General Program Problems If Your Dell Computer Gets Wet If You Drop or Damage Your Computer Resolving Other Technical Problems Power Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. Check the power light When the power light is lit or blinking, the computer has power. If the power light is blinking, the computer is in standby modepress the power button to exit standby mode. If the light is off, press the power button to turn on the computer. Charge the battery The battery charge may be depleted. 1. Reinstall the battery. 2. Use the AC adapter to connect the computer to an electrical outlet. 3. Turn on the computer. Check the battery status light If the battery status light flashes orange or is a steady file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 2 of 17 orange the battery charge is low or depleted. Connect the computer to an electrical outlet. If the battery status light flashes green and orange, the battery is too hot to charge. Shut down the computer, disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet, and then let the battery and computer cool to room temperature. If the battery status light rapidly flashes orange, the battery may be defective. Contact Dell. Test the electrical outlet Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. Check the AC adapter Check the AC adapter cable connections. If the AC adapter has a light, ensure that the light is on. Connect the computer directly to an electrical outlet Bypass power protection devices, power strips, and the extension cable to verify that the computer turns on. Eliminate possible interference Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, halogen lamps, or other appliances. Adjust the power properties See "Power Management."

Reseat the memory modules If the computer power light turns on but the display remains blank, reseat the memory modules. Error Messages If the message is not listed, see the documentation for the operating system or the program that was running at the time the message appeared. Auxiliary device failure The touch pad or external mouse may be faulty. For an external mouse, check the cable connection. Enable the Pointing Device option in the system setup program. If the problem persists, contact Dell. Bad command or file name Ensure that you have spelled the command correctly, put spaces in the proper place, and used the correct pathname. Cache disabled due to failure The primary cache internal to the microprocessor has failed. Contact Dell. CD drive controller failure The CD drive does not respond to commands from the computer. See "Drive Problems."

Data error The floppy or hard drive cannot read the data. See "Drive Problems."

Decreasing available memory One or more memory modules may be faulty or improperly seated. Reseat the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. See

"Memory."

Disk C: failed initialization The hard drive failed initialization. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Floppy drive 0 seek failure The system configuration information may not match the hardware configuration. Run the Diskette tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Diskette read failure The floppy disk may be defective. If the drive access light turns on, try a different disk. See "Drive Problems."

Diskette subsystem reset failed The floppy drive controller may be faulty. Run the file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 3 of 17 Diskette tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Diskette write-protected Because the floppy disk is write-protected, the operation cannot be completed. Slide the write-protect notch. Drive not ready The operation requires a floppy disk in the drive or a hard drive in the bay before it can continue. Insert a floppy disk, or push the floppy disk all the way into the drive until the eject button pops out. Or, install a hard drive in the hard drive bay. Error reading PCMCIA card The computer cannot identify the PC Card. Reinsert the card or try another PC Card. Extended memory size has changed The amount of memory recorded in NVRAM does not match the memory installed in the computer. Restart the computer. If the error appears again, contact Dell. Gate A20 failure A memory module may be loose. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. General failure The operating system is unable to carry out the command. The message is usually followed by specific informationfor example, Printer out of paper. Take the appropriate action. Hard-disk drive configuration error The computer cannot identify the drive type. Turn off the computer, remove the hard drive, and boot the computer from a bootable floppy disk or CD. Then turn off the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Hard-disk drive controller failure 0 The hard drive does not respond to commands from the computer. Turn off the computer, remove the hard drive, and boot the computer from a bootable floppy disk or CD. Then turn off the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Hard-disk drive failure The hard drive does not respond to commands from the computer. Turn off the computer, remove the hard drive, and boot the computer from a bootable floppy disk or CD. Then turn off the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Hard-disk drive read failure The hard drive may be defective. Turn off the computer, remove the hard drive, and boot the computer from a bootable floppy disk or CD. Then turn off the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Insert bootable media The operating system is trying to boot to a nonbootable floppy disk or CD. Insert a bootable floppy disk or CD. Invalid configuration information-please run System Setup Program The system configuration information does not match the hardware configuration. The message is most likely to occur after a memory module is installed. Correct the appropriate options in the system setup program. See "Using the System Setup Program."

Keyboard clock line failure For external keyboards, check the cable connection. Run the Keyboard Controller test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Keyboard controller failure For external keyboards, check the cable connection. Restart the computer, and avoid touching the keyboard or the mouse during the boot routine. Run the Keyboard Controller test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Keyboard data line failure For external keyboards, check the cable connection. Run the Keyboard Controller test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Keyboard stuck key failure For external keyboards or keypads, check the cable file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 4 of 17 connection. Restart the computer, and avoid touching the keyboard or keys during the boot routine. Run the Stuck Key test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Memory address line failure at address, read value expecting value A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. Memory allocation error The software you are attempting to run is conflicting with the operating system, another program, or a utility. Turn off the computer, wait 30 seconds, and then restart it. Try to run the program again. If the error message still appears, see the software documentation. Memory data line failure at address, read value expecting value A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. Memory double word logic failure at address, read value expecting value A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. Memory odd/even logic failure at address, read value expecting value A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. Memory write/read failure at address, read value expecting value A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. No boot device available The computer cannot find the floppy disk or hard drive. If the floppy drive is your boot device, ensure that a bootable floppy disk is in the drive. If the hard drive is your boot device, ensure that the drive is installed, properly seated, and partitioned as a boot device. No boot sector on hard drive The operating system may be corrupted. Contact Dell. No timer tick interrupt A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Non-system disk or disk error A floppy disk is in the floppy drive. Remove the floppy disk and restart the computer. Not a boot diskette The operating system is trying to boot to a nonbootable floppy disk. Insert a bootable floppy disk. Operating system not found Contact Dell. Optional ROM bad checksum The optional ROM apparently failed. Contact Dell. A required .DLL file was not found The program that you are trying to open is missing an essential file. Remove and then reinstall the program. Microsoft Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Add or Remove Programs. 3. Select the program you want to remove. 4. Click Remove or Change/Remove and follow the prompts on the screen. 5. See the program documentation for installation instructions. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Add/Remove Programs icon. 3. Select the program that you want to remove. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 5 of 17 4. Click Change or Remove Programs. 5. See the program documentation for installation instructions. Sector not found The operating system cannot locate a sector on the floppy or hard drive. You may have a defective sector or corrupted FAT on the floppy disk or hard drive. Run the Windows error-checking utility to check the file structure on the floppy disk or hard drive. See Windows Help for instructions. If a large number of sectors are defective, back up the data (if possible), and then reformat the floppy disk or hard drive. Seek error The operating system cannot find a specific track on the floppy disk or hard drive. If the error is on the floppy disk, try another floppy disk. Shutdown failure A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Time-of-day clock lost power System configuration settings are corrupted. Connect your computer to an electrical outlet to charge the battery. If the problem persists, try to restore the data by entering the system setup program. Then immediately exit the program. See "Using the System Setup Program." If the message reappears, contact Dell. Time-of-day clock stopped The reserve battery that supports the system configuration settings may require recharging. Connect your computer to an electrical outlet to charge the battery. If the problem persists, contact Dell. Time-of-day not set-please run the System Setup program The time or date stored in the system setup program does not match the system clock. Correct the settings for the Date and Time options. See "Using the System Setup Program."

Timer chip counter 2 failed A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Unexpected interrupt in protected mode The keyboard controller may be malfunctioning, or a memory module may be loose. Run the System Memory tests and the Keyboard Controller test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

x:\ is not accessible. The device is not ready Insert a disk into the drive and try again. Warning: Battery is critically low The battery is running out of charge. Replace the battery, or connect the computer to an electrical outlet. Otherwise, activate hibernate mode or turn off the computer. Video and Display Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. If the display is blank NOTE: If you are using a program that requires a higher resolution than your computer supports, it is recommended that you attach an external monitor to your computer. Check the battery If you are using a battery to power your computer, the battery charge may be depleted. Connect the computer to an electrical outlet using the AC adapter, and turn on the computer. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 6 of 17 Test the electrical outlet Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. Check the AC adapter Check the AC adapter cable connections. If the AC adapter has a light, ensure that the light is on. Connect the computer directly to an electrical outlet Bypass power protection devices, power strips, and the extension cable to verify that the computer turns on. Adjust the power properties Search for the keyword standby in Windows Help or the Windows Help and Support Center. Switch the video image If your computer is attached to an external monitor, press

<Fn><F8> to switch the video image to the display. If the display is difficult to read Adjust the brightness See "Adjusting Brightness" for instructions on adjusting the brightness. Move the subwoofer away from the computer or monitor If your external speaker system includes a subwoofer, ensure that the subwoofer is at least 60 cm (2 ft) away from the computer or external monitor. Eliminate possible interference Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, halogen lamps, or other appliances. Rotate the computer to face a different direction Eliminate sunlight glare, which can cause poor picture quality. Adjust the Windows display settings Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and then click Control Panel. 2. Click Appearance and Themes. 3. Click the area you want to change or click the Display icon. 4. Try different settings for Color quality and Screen resolution. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Display icon and click the Settings tab. 3. Try different settings for Colors, Screen area, and Advanced Settings. Run the Video diagnostics tests If no error message appears and you still have a display problem, but the display is not completely blank, run the Video device group in the Dell Diagnostics. Then contact Dell. See "Error Messages" If an error message appears, see "Error Messages."

If only part of the display is readable Connect an external monitor 1. Shut down your computer and connect an external monitor to the computer. 2. Turn on the computer and the monitor and adjust the monitor brightness and contrast controls. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 7 of 17 If the external monitor works, the computer display or video controller may be defective. Contact Dell. Sound and Speaker Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. If you have a problem with integrated speakers Adjust the Windows volume control Double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. Adjust the volume, bass, or treble controls to eliminate distortion. Adjust the volume using keyboard shortcuts See "Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad."

Press <Fn><End> to disable (mute) or reenable the integrated speakers. Reinstall the sound (audio) driver See "Reinstalling Software."

For Windows 2000 only, ensure that digital audio for the CD drive is enabled 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the System icon. 3. Click the Hardware tab. 4. Click Device Manager. 5. Double-click DVD/CD-ROM drives. 6. Double-click the name of the drive. 7. On the drive Properties screen, click the Properties tab. 8. Click the box near the bottom of the screen to enable digital audio for your CD or DVD drive. If you have a problem with external speakers NOTE: The volume control in some MP3 players overrides the Windows volume setting. If you have been listening to MP3 songs, make sure that you did not turn the player volume down or off. Check the speaker cable connections See the setup diagram supplied with the speakers. Test the electrical outlet Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. Ensure that the speakers are turned on See the setup diagram supplied with the speakers. Adjust the Windows volume control Double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. Adjust the volume, bass, or treble controls to eliminate distortion. Test the speakers Plug the speaker audio cable in to the Ensure that the headphone volume control is turned up. Play a music CD. connector on the computer. Run the speaker self-test Some speaker systems have a self-test button on the subwoofer. See the speaker documentation for self-test instructions. Eliminate possible interference Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, or halogen lamps to check for interference. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 8 of 17 Reinstall the sound (audio) driver See "Reinstalling Software."

Run the Misc. PCI Devices diagnostic test See "Using the Dell Diagnostics." If the tests complete successfully, the controller is functioning properly. If the problem persists, or if the tests do not complete successfully, contact Dell. For Windows 2000 only, ensure that digital audio for the CD drive is enabled 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the System icon. 3. Click the Hardware tab. 4. Click Device Manager. 5. Double-click DVD/CD-ROM drives. 6. Double-click the name of the drive. 7. On the drive Properties screen, click the Properties tab. 8. Click the box near the bottom of the screen to enable digital audio for your CD or DVD drive. Printer Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you perform the various checks. Check the printer cable connections Ensure that the printer cable is properly connected to the computer. Check the printer cable 1. Shut down the computer and turn off the printer. 2. Swap the printer cable with a cable that you know is working. 3. Turn on the printer and computer, and try again to print. 4. If you print successfully, contact Dell for assistance in obtaining a new printer cable. Test the electrical outlet Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. Ensure that the printer is turned on See the documentation supplied with the printer. Verify that Windows recognizes the printer Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Printers and Other Hardware. 3. Click View installed printers or fax printers. If the printer model is listed, right-click the printer icon. 4. Click Properties and click the Ports tab. Ensure that the Print to the following port

(s): setting is LPT1 (Printer Port). Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Printers. If the printer model is listed, right-click the printer icon. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 9 of 17 2. Click Properties and click the Ports tab. 3. Ensure that the Print to the following port: option is set for your printer type:

For a parallel printer: LPT1 (Printer Port)

For a USB printer: USB Reinstall the printer driver See "Reinstalling Software."

Check the printer Run the printer self-test. If the test does not complete successfully, the printer is probably defective. Contact the printer manufacturer. Modem and Internet Connection Problems NOTICE: Connect the modem to an analog telephone wall jack only. Connecting the modem to a digital telephone network may damage the modem. NOTICE: Modem and network connectors look similar. Do not plug a telephone line in to the network connector. Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. NOTE: If you can connect to your Internet service provider (ISP), your modem is functioning properly. If you are sure that your modem is working properly and you still experience problems, contact your ISP. Check the telephone wall jack Disconnect the telephone line from the modem and connect it to a telephone. Listen for a dial tone. Ensure that you have touchtone telephone service. Try connecting the modem to a different telephone wall jack. Slow connection speeds can be caused by telephone noise as well as by telephone line or network conditions. Contact your telephone company or network administrator for more information. Connect the modem directly to the telephone wall jack If you have other telephone devices sharing the line, such as an answering machine, fax machine, surge protector, or line splitter, then bypass them and use the telephone line to connect the modem directly to the telephone wall jack. Check the connection Verify that the telephone line is connected to the modem. Check the telephone line Try using a different telephone line. If you are using a line that is 3 m (10 ft) or more in length, try a shorter one. Irregular dial tone If you have voice mail service, you might hear an irregular dial tone when you have messages. Contact your telephone company for instructions on restoring a dial tone. Turn off call waiting (catch-phone) See your telephone directory for instructions on deactivating this feature. Then adjust the dial-up networking connection properties. Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Printers and Other Hardware, click Phone and Modem Options, click the Dialing Rules tab, and then click Edit.... In the Edit Location window, ensure that To disable call waiting, dial: is checked, and 3. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 10 of 17 then select the proper code as listed in your telephone directory. 4. Click Apply and click OK. 5. Close the Phone and Modems Options window. 6. Close the Control Panel window. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Click Phone and Modem Options. 3. Click the Dialing Rules tab and click Edit. 4. Ensure that To disable call waiting, dial: is checked, and then select the proper code as listed in your telephone directory. 5. Click Apply and click OK. 6. Close the Phone and Modem Options window. Verify that the modem is communicating with Windows Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Printers and Other Hardware and click Phone and Modem Options. 3. Click the Modems tab. 4. Click the COM port for your modem. 5. Click Properties, click the Diagnostics tab, and then click Query Modem to verify that the modem is communicating with Windows. If all commands receive responses, the modem is operating properly. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Phone and Modem Options. If multiple entries for the same modem or modems are listed but not installed, delete the entries, restart the computer, and repeat steps 1 and 2. 3. Click the Diagnostics tab. 4. Click the COM port for your modem. 5. Click Query Modem to verify that the modem is communicating with Windows. If all commands receive responses, the modem is operating properly. Touch Pad or Mouse Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you perform the various checks. Check the touch pad settings Windows XP 1. Click the Start button, click Control Panel, and then click Printers and Other Hardware. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 11 of 17 2. Click Mouse. 3. Try adjusting the settings. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Mouse icon. 3. Try adjusting the settings. Check the mouse cable Shut down the computer. Disconnect the mouse cable, check it for damage, and firmly reconnect the cable. If you are using a mouse extension cable, disconnect it and connect the mouse directly to the computer. To verify that the problem is with the mouse, check the touch pad 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect the mouse. 3. Turn on the computer. 4. At the Windows desktop, use the touch pad to move the cursor around, select an icon, and open it. If the touch pad operates correctly, the mouse may be defective. Check the system setup program settings Verify that the system setup program lists the correct device for the pointing device option. (The computer automatically recognizes a USB mouse without making any setting adjustments.) Test the mouse controller To test the mouse controller (which affects pointer movement) and the operation of the touch pad or mouse buttons, run the Mouse test in the Pointing Devices test group in the Dell Diagnostics. Reinstall the touch pad driver See "Reinstalling Software."

External Keyboard Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you perform the various checks. NOTE: Use the integrated keyboard when working in MS-DOS mode or when running the Dell Diagnostics or the system setup program. When you attach an external keyboard, the integrated keyboard remains fully functional. Check the keyboard cable Shut down the computer. Disconnect the keyboard cable and check it for damage, and firmly reconnect the cable. If you are using a keyboard extension cable, disconnect it and connect the keyboard directly to the computer. Check the external keyboard 1. Shut down the computer, wait 1 minute, and turn it on again. 2. Verify that the numbers, capitals, and scroll lock lights on the keyboard blink during the boot routine. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 12 of 17 3. From the Windows desktop, click the Start button, point to Programs, point to Accessories, and click Notepad. 4. Type some characters on the external keyboard and verify that they appear on the display. If you cannot verify these steps, you may have a defective external keyboard. To verify that the problem is with the external keyboard, check the integrated keyboard 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect the external keyboard. 3. Turn on the computer. 4. From the Windows desktop, click the Start button, point to Programs, point to Accessories, and click Notepad. 5. Type some characters on the external keyboard and verify that they appear on the display. If the characters appear now but did not with the external keyboard, you may have a defective external keyboard. Run the keyboard diagnostics tests Run the PC-AT Compatible Keyboards tests in the Dell Diagnostics. If the tests indicate a defective external keyboard, contact Dell. Unexpected Characters Disable the numeric keypad Press <Num Lk> to disable the numeric keypad if numbers are displayed instead of letters. Verify that the numbers lock light is not lit. Drive Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. If you cannot save a file to a floppy disk drive Ensure that Windows recognizes the drive In Windows XP, click the Start button and click My Computer. In other operating systems, double-click My Computer. If the drive is not listed, perform a full scan with your antivirus software to check for and remove viruses. Viruses can sometimes prevent Windows from recognizing the drive. Insert a bootable disk and restart the computer. Ensure that the disk is not write-protected You cannot save data to a write-protected disk. Try another floppy disk Insert another disk to eliminate the possibility that the original disk is defective. Reinstall the drive 1. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and shut down the computer. 2. Remove the drive from the module bay. See "Using the Module Bay" for instructions. 3. Reinstall the drive. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 13 of 17 4. Turn on the computer. Clean the drive See "Cleaning Your Computer" for instructions. Check the drive for errors

If a drive error message appears, see "Error Messages" for an explanation.

Run the Diskette tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

If you cannot play a CD, CD-RW, DVD, or DVD+RW NOTE: Because of different worldwide file types, not all DVD titles work in all DVD drives. High-speed CD drive vibration is normal and may cause noise. The noise does not indicate a defect with the drive or the CD. Ensure that Windows recognizes the drive In Windows XP, click the Start button and click My Computer. In other operating systems, double-click My Computer. If the drive is not listed, perform a full scan with your antivirus software to check for and remove viruses. Viruses can sometimes prevent Windows from recognizing the drive. Insert a bootable disk and restart the computer. Try another disc Insert another disc to eliminate the possibility that the original disc is defective. Adjust the Windows volume control Double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. Reinstall the drive 1. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and shut down the computer. 2. Remove the drive. See "Using the Module Bay" for instructions. 3. Reinstall the drive. 4. Turn on the computer. Clean the drive or disc See "Cleaning Your Computer" for instructions. Check the drive for errors If a drive error message appears, see "Error Messages" for an explanation. Run the IDE Drives tests as described in the Dell Diagnostics. If you cannot eject the CD, CD-RW, DVD, or DVD+RW drive tray 1. Ensure that the computer is turned off. 2. Straighten a paper clip and insert one end into the eject hole at the front of the drive;

push firmly until the tray is partially ejected. 3. Gently pull out the tray until it stops. If you hear an unfamiliar scraping or grinding sound

Ensure that the sound is not caused by the program that is running.

Ensure that the disk or disc is inserted properly. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 14 of 17 If the CD-RW or DVD+RW drive stops writing Disable standby or hibernate mode in Windows before writing to a CD-RW Search for the keyword standby or hibernate in Windows Help or the Windows Help and Support Center. Change the write speed to a slower rate See the help files for your CD or DVD creation software. Exit all other open programs Exiting all other open programs before writing to the CD-RW or DVD+RW may alleviate the problem. If you have problems with a hard drive Allow the computer to cool before turning it on A hot hard drive may prevent the operating system from starting. Try allowing the computer to return to room temperature before turning it on. Check the drive for errors

Run the Windows error-checking tool:

1. In Windows XP, click the Start button and click My Computer. In Windows 2000, double-

click My Computer. 2. Right-click the drive letter (local disk) that you want to scan for errors, and then click Properties. 3. Click the Tools tab. 4. Under Error-checking, click Check Now. 5. Click Start.

Run the IDE Drives tests as described in the Dell Diagnostics. PC Card Problems Check the PC Card Ensure that the PC Card is properly inserted into the connector. Ensure that the card is recognized by Windows Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware (Unplug or Eject Hardware in Windows 2000) icon in the Windows taskbar. Ensure that the card is listed. Run the PC Card diagnostics test See the documentation that came with the PC Card for instructions if a diagnostics test was provided with the card. If you have problems with a Dell-provided PC Card Contact Dell. If you have problems with a PC Card not provided by Dell Contact the PC Card manufacturer. Network Problems file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 15 of 17 Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. Check the network cable connector Ensure that the network cable connector is firmly connected to the connector on the computer and the network wall jack. Check the network lights on the network connector Green indicates that the network connection is active. If the status light is not green, try replacing the network cable. Amber indicates that the network adapter driver is loaded and the adapter is detecting activity. Restart the computer Try to log on to the network again. Contact your network administrator Verify that your network settings are correct and that the network is functioning. General Program Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. A program crashes NOTE: Software usually includes installation instructions in its documentation or on a floppy disk or CD. See the software documentation Many software manufacturers maintain websites with information that may help you solve the problem. Ensure that you properly installed and configured the program. Reinstall the program if necessary. A program stops responding End the program 1. Simultaneously press <Ctrl><Shift><Esc>. 2. Click the Applications tab, and then select the program that is no longer responding. 3. Click End Task. A solid blue screen appears Turn the computer off If the computer does not respond to a keystroke or a proper shutdown, press the power button until the computer turns off. Press the power button again to restart the computer. Windows XP The computer restarts. Windows 2000 The solid blue screen appears because you were not able to perform a proper Windows shutdown. ScanDisk automatically runs during the start-up process. Follow the instructions on file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems the screen. Error messages appear Page 16 of 17 Review "Error Messages" Look up the message and take the appropriate action. See the software documentation. Confirm that the problem is software-related Run the System Board Devices tests in the Dell Diagnostics. If all tests in the device group run successfully, the problem may be software-

related. See the software documentation. If Your Dell Computer Gets Wet CAUTION: Perform this procedure only after you are certain that it is safe to do so. If the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, it is recommended that you turn off AC power at the circuit breaker before attempting to remove the power cables from the electrical outlet. Use the utmost caution when removing wet cables from a live power source. 1. Shut down the computer, disconnect the AC adapter from the computer, and then disconnect the AC adapter from the electrical outlet. 2. Turn off any attached external devices, and disconnect them from their power sources and then from the computer. 3. Ground yourself by touching one of the metal connectors on the back of the computer. 4. Remove the module bay device and any installed PC Cards, and put them in a safe place to dry. 5. Remove the battery. 6. Wipe off the battery and put it in a safe place to dry. 7. Remove the hard drive. 8. Remove the memory module(s). 9. Open the display and place the computer right-side up across two books or similar props to let air circulate all around it. Let the computer dry for at least 24 hours in a dry area at room temperature. NOTICE: Do not use artificial means, such as a hair dryer or a fan, to speed the drying process. CAUTION: To help prevent electrical shock, verify that the computer is thoroughly dry before continuing with the rest of this procedure. 10. Ground yourself by touching one of the metal connectors on the back of the computer. 11. Replace the memory module(s), the memory module cover, and the screw(s). 12. Replace the hard drive. 13. Replace the module bay device and any PC Cards you removed. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 17 of 17 14. Replace the battery. 15. Turn on the computer and verify that it is working properly. NOTE: See your System Information Guide or separate paper warranty document that shipped with your computer for information on your warranty coverage. If the computer does not start, or if you cannot identify the damaged components, contact Dell. If You Drop or Damage Your Computer 1. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect the AC adapter from the computer and from the electrical outlet. 3. Turn off any attached external devices, and disconnect them from their power sources and then from the computer. 4. Remove and reinstall the battery. 5. Turn on the computer. NOTE: See your System Information Guide for information on your warranty coverage. If the computer does not start, or if you cannot identify the damaged components, contact Dell. Resolving Other Technical Problems Go to the Dell Support website Go to support.dell.com for help with general usage, installation, and troubleshooting questions. See "Getting Help" for a description of the hardware and software support provided by Dell. E-mail Dell Go to support.dell.com and then click E-Mail Dell in the Communicate list. Send an e-mail message to Dell about your problem; you can expect to receive an e-mail message from Dell within hours. See "Getting Help" for a description of the hardware and software support provided by Dell. Contact Dell If you cannot solve your problem using the Dell Support website

(support.dell.com) or e-mail service, call Dell for technical assistance. See "Getting Help" for a description of the hardware and software support provided by Dell. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 1 of 17 Solving Problems Power Problems Error Messages Video and Display Problems Sound and Speaker Problems Printer Problems Modem and Internet Connection Problems Touch Pad or Mouse Problems External Keyboard Problems Unexpected Characters Drive Problems PC Card Problems Network Problems General Program Problems If Your Dell Computer Gets Wet If You Drop or Damage Your Computer Resolving Other Technical Problems Power Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. Check the power light When the power light is lit or blinking, the computer has power. If the power light is blinking, the computer is in standby modepress the power button to exit standby mode. If the light is off, press the power button to turn on the computer. Charge the battery The battery charge may be depleted. 1. Reinstall the battery. 2. Use the AC adapter to connect the computer to an electrical outlet. 3. Turn on the computer. Check the battery status light If the battery status light flashes orange or is a steady file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 2 of 17 orange the battery charge is low or depleted. Connect the computer to an electrical outlet. If the battery status light flashes green and orange, the battery is too hot to charge. Shut down the computer, disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet, and then let the battery and computer cool to room temperature. If the battery status light rapidly flashes orange, the battery may be defective. Contact Dell. Test the electrical outlet Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. Check the AC adapter Check the AC adapter cable connections. If the AC adapter has a light, ensure that the light is on. Connect the computer directly to an electrical outlet Bypass power protection devices, power strips, and the extension cable to verify that the computer turns on. Eliminate possible interference Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, halogen lamps, or other appliances. Adjust the power properties See "Power Management."

Reseat the memory modules If the computer power light turns on but the display remains blank, reseat the memory modules. Error Messages If the message is not listed, see the documentation for the operating system or the program that was running at the time the message appeared. Auxiliary device failure The touch pad or external mouse may be faulty. For an external mouse, check the cable connection. Enable the Pointing Device option in the system setup program. If the problem persists, contact Dell. Bad command or file name Ensure that you have spelled the command correctly, put spaces in the proper place, and used the correct pathname. Cache disabled due to failure The primary cache internal to the microprocessor has failed. Contact Dell. CD drive controller failure The CD drive does not respond to commands from the computer. See "Drive Problems."

Data error The floppy or hard drive cannot read the data. See "Drive Problems."

Decreasing available memory One or more memory modules may be faulty or improperly seated. Reseat the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. See

"Memory."

Disk C: failed initialization The hard drive failed initialization. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Floppy drive 0 seek failure The system configuration information may not match the hardware configuration. Run the Diskette tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Diskette read failure The floppy disk may be defective. If the drive access light turns on, try a different disk. See "Drive Problems."

Diskette subsystem reset failed The floppy drive controller may be faulty. Run the file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 3 of 17 Diskette tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Diskette write-protected Because the floppy disk is write-protected, the operation cannot be completed. Slide the write-protect notch. Drive not ready The operation requires a floppy disk in the drive or a hard drive in the bay before it can continue. Insert a floppy disk, or push the floppy disk all the way into the drive until the eject button pops out. Or, install a hard drive in the hard drive bay. Error reading PCMCIA card The computer cannot identify the PC Card. Reinsert the card or try another PC Card. Extended memory size has changed The amount of memory recorded in NVRAM does not match the memory installed in the computer. Restart the computer. If the error appears again, contact Dell. Gate A20 failure A memory module may be loose. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. General failure The operating system is unable to carry out the command. The message is usually followed by specific informationfor example, Printer out of paper. Take the appropriate action. Hard-disk drive configuration error The computer cannot identify the drive type. Turn off the computer, remove the hard drive, and boot the computer from a bootable floppy disk or CD. Then turn off the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Hard-disk drive controller failure 0 The hard drive does not respond to commands from the computer. Turn off the computer, remove the hard drive, and boot the computer from a bootable floppy disk or CD. Then turn off the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Hard-disk drive failure The hard drive does not respond to commands from the computer. Turn off the computer, remove the hard drive, and boot the computer from a bootable floppy disk or CD. Then turn off the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Hard-disk drive read failure The hard drive may be defective. Turn off the computer, remove the hard drive, and boot the computer from a bootable floppy disk or CD. Then turn off the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Insert bootable media The operating system is trying to boot to a nonbootable floppy disk or CD. Insert a bootable floppy disk or CD. Invalid configuration information-please run System Setup Program The system configuration information does not match the hardware configuration. The message is most likely to occur after a memory module is installed. Correct the appropriate options in the system setup program. See "Using the System Setup Program."

Keyboard clock line failure For external keyboards, check the cable connection. Run the Keyboard Controller test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Keyboard controller failure For external keyboards, check the cable connection. Restart the computer, and avoid touching the keyboard or the mouse during the boot routine. Run the Keyboard Controller test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Keyboard data line failure For external keyboards, check the cable connection. Run the Keyboard Controller test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Keyboard stuck key failure For external keyboards or keypads, check the cable file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 4 of 17 connection. Restart the computer, and avoid touching the keyboard or keys during the boot routine. Run the Stuck Key test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Memory address line failure at address, read value expecting value A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. Memory allocation error The software you are attempting to run is conflicting with the operating system, another program, or a utility. Turn off the computer, wait 30 seconds, and then restart it. Try to run the program again. If the error message still appears, see the software documentation. Memory data line failure at address, read value expecting value A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. Memory double word logic failure at address, read value expecting value A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. Memory odd/even logic failure at address, read value expecting value A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. Memory write/read failure at address, read value expecting value A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. No boot device available The computer cannot find the floppy disk or hard drive. If the floppy drive is your boot device, ensure that a bootable floppy disk is in the drive. If the hard drive is your boot device, ensure that the drive is installed, properly seated, and partitioned as a boot device. No boot sector on hard drive The operating system may be corrupted. Contact Dell. No timer tick interrupt A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Non-system disk or disk error A floppy disk is in the floppy drive. Remove the floppy disk and restart the computer. Not a boot diskette The operating system is trying to boot to a nonbootable floppy disk. Insert a bootable floppy disk. Operating system not found Contact Dell. Optional ROM bad checksum The optional ROM apparently failed. Contact Dell. A required .DLL file was not found The program that you are trying to open is missing an essential file. Remove and then reinstall the program. Microsoft Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Add or Remove Programs. 3. Select the program you want to remove. 4. Click Remove or Change/Remove and follow the prompts on the screen. 5. See the program documentation for installation instructions. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Add/Remove Programs icon. 3. Select the program that you want to remove. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 5 of 17 4. Click Change or Remove Programs. 5. See the program documentation for installation instructions. Sector not found The operating system cannot locate a sector on the floppy or hard drive. You may have a defective sector or corrupted FAT on the floppy disk or hard drive. Run the Windows error-checking utility to check the file structure on the floppy disk or hard drive. See Windows Help for instructions. If a large number of sectors are defective, back up the data (if possible), and then reformat the floppy disk or hard drive. Seek error The operating system cannot find a specific track on the floppy disk or hard drive. If the error is on the floppy disk, try another floppy disk. Shutdown failure A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Time-of-day clock lost power System configuration settings are corrupted. Connect your computer to an electrical outlet to charge the battery. If the problem persists, try to restore the data by entering the system setup program. Then immediately exit the program. See "Using the System Setup Program." If the message reappears, contact Dell. Time-of-day clock stopped The reserve battery that supports the system configuration settings may require recharging. Connect your computer to an electrical outlet to charge the battery. If the problem persists, contact Dell. Time-of-day not set-please run the System Setup program The time or date stored in the system setup program does not match the system clock. Correct the settings for the Date and Time options. See "Using the System Setup Program."

Timer chip counter 2 failed A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Unexpected interrupt in protected mode The keyboard controller may be malfunctioning, or a memory module may be loose. Run the System Memory tests and the Keyboard Controller test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

x:\ is not accessible. The device is not ready Insert a disk into the drive and try again. Warning: Battery is critically low The battery is running out of charge. Replace the battery, or connect the computer to an electrical outlet. Otherwise, activate hibernate mode or turn off the computer. Video and Display Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. If the display is blank NOTE: If you are using a program that requires a higher resolution than your computer supports, it is recommended that you attach an external monitor to your computer. Check the battery If you are using a battery to power your computer, the battery charge may be depleted. Connect the computer to an electrical outlet using the AC adapter, and turn on the computer. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 6 of 17 Test the electrical outlet Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. Check the AC adapter Check the AC adapter cable connections. If the AC adapter has a light, ensure that the light is on. Connect the computer directly to an electrical outlet Bypass power protection devices, power strips, and the extension cable to verify that the computer turns on. Adjust the power properties Search for the keyword standby in Windows Help or the Windows Help and Support Center. Switch the video image If your computer is attached to an external monitor, press

<Fn><F8> to switch the video image to the display. If the display is difficult to read Adjust the brightness See "Adjusting Brightness" for instructions on adjusting the brightness. Move the subwoofer away from the computer or monitor If your external speaker system includes a subwoofer, ensure that the subwoofer is at least 60 cm (2 ft) away from the computer or external monitor. Eliminate possible interference Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, halogen lamps, or other appliances. Rotate the computer to face a different direction Eliminate sunlight glare, which can cause poor picture quality. Adjust the Windows display settings Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and then click Control Panel. 2. Click Appearance and Themes. 3. Click the area you want to change or click the Display icon. 4. Try different settings for Color quality and Screen resolution. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Display icon and click the Settings tab. 3. Try different settings for Colors, Screen area, and Advanced Settings. Run the Video diagnostics tests If no error message appears and you still have a display problem, but the display is not completely blank, run the Video device group in the Dell Diagnostics. Then contact Dell. See "Error Messages" If an error message appears, see "Error Messages."

If only part of the display is readable Connect an external monitor 1. Shut down your computer and connect an external monitor to the computer. 2. Turn on the computer and the monitor and adjust the monitor brightness and contrast controls. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 7 of 17 If the external monitor works, the computer display or video controller may be defective. Contact Dell. Sound and Speaker Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. If you have a problem with integrated speakers Adjust the Windows volume control Double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. Adjust the volume, bass, or treble controls to eliminate distortion. Adjust the volume using keyboard shortcuts See "Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad."

Press <Fn><End> to disable (mute) or reenable the integrated speakers. Reinstall the sound (audio) driver See "Reinstalling Software."

For Windows 2000 only, ensure that digital audio for the CD drive is enabled 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the System icon. 3. Click the Hardware tab. 4. Click Device Manager. 5. Double-click DVD/CD-ROM drives. 6. Double-click the name of the drive. 7. On the drive Properties screen, click the Properties tab. 8. Click the box near the bottom of the screen to enable digital audio for your CD or DVD drive. If you have a problem with external speakers NOTE: The volume control in some MP3 players overrides the Windows volume setting. If you have been listening to MP3 songs, make sure that you did not turn the player volume down or off. Check the speaker cable connections See the setup diagram supplied with the speakers. Test the electrical outlet Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. Ensure that the speakers are turned on See the setup diagram supplied with the speakers. Adjust the Windows volume control Double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. Adjust the volume, bass, or treble controls to eliminate distortion. Test the speakers Plug the speaker audio cable in to the Ensure that the headphone volume control is turned up. Play a music CD. connector on the computer. Run the speaker self-test Some speaker systems have a self-test button on the subwoofer. See the speaker documentation for self-test instructions. Eliminate possible interference Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, or halogen lamps to check for interference. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 8 of 17 Reinstall the sound (audio) driver See "Reinstalling Software."

Run the Misc. PCI Devices diagnostic test See "Using the Dell Diagnostics." If the tests complete successfully, the controller is functioning properly. If the problem persists, or if the tests do not complete successfully, contact Dell. For Windows 2000 only, ensure that digital audio for the CD drive is enabled 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the System icon. 3. Click the Hardware tab. 4. Click Device Manager. 5. Double-click DVD/CD-ROM drives. 6. Double-click the name of the drive. 7. On the drive Properties screen, click the Properties tab. 8. Click the box near the bottom of the screen to enable digital audio for your CD or DVD drive. Printer Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you perform the various checks. Check the printer cable connections Ensure that the printer cable is properly connected to the computer. Check the printer cable 1. Shut down the computer and turn off the printer. 2. Swap the printer cable with a cable that you know is working. 3. Turn on the printer and computer, and try again to print. 4. If you print successfully, contact Dell for assistance in obtaining a new printer cable. Test the electrical outlet Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. Ensure that the printer is turned on See the documentation supplied with the printer. Verify that Windows recognizes the printer Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Printers and Other Hardware. 3. Click View installed printers or fax printers. If the printer model is listed, right-click the printer icon. 4. Click Properties and click the Ports tab. Ensure that the Print to the following port

(s): setting is LPT1 (Printer Port). Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Printers. If the printer model is listed, right-click the printer icon. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 9 of 17 2. Click Properties and click the Ports tab. 3. Ensure that the Print to the following port: option is set for your printer type:

For a parallel printer: LPT1 (Printer Port)

For a USB printer: USB Reinstall the printer driver See "Reinstalling Software."

Check the printer Run the printer self-test. If the test does not complete successfully, the printer is probably defective. Contact the printer manufacturer. Modem and Internet Connection Problems NOTICE: Connect the modem to an analog telephone wall jack only. Connecting the modem to a digital telephone network may damage the modem. NOTICE: Modem and network connectors look similar. Do not plug a telephone line in to the network connector. Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. NOTE: If you can connect to your Internet service provider (ISP), your modem is functioning properly. If you are sure that your modem is working properly and you still experience problems, contact your ISP. Check the telephone wall jack Disconnect the telephone line from the modem and connect it to a telephone. Listen for a dial tone. Ensure that you have touchtone telephone service. Try connecting the modem to a different telephone wall jack. Slow connection speeds can be caused by telephone noise as well as by telephone line or network conditions. Contact your telephone company or network administrator for more information. Connect the modem directly to the telephone wall jack If you have other telephone devices sharing the line, such as an answering machine, fax machine, surge protector, or line splitter, then bypass them and use the telephone line to connect the modem directly to the telephone wall jack. Check the connection Verify that the telephone line is connected to the modem. Check the telephone line Try using a different telephone line. If you are using a line that is 3 m (10 ft) or more in length, try a shorter one. Irregular dial tone If you have voice mail service, you might hear an irregular dial tone when you have messages. Contact your telephone company for instructions on restoring a dial tone. Turn off call waiting (catch-phone) See your telephone directory for instructions on deactivating this feature. Then adjust the dial-up networking connection properties. Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Printers and Other Hardware, click Phone and Modem Options, click the Dialing Rules tab, and then click Edit.... In the Edit Location window, ensure that To disable call waiting, dial: is checked, and 3. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 10 of 17 then select the proper code as listed in your telephone directory. 4. Click Apply and click OK. 5. Close the Phone and Modems Options window. 6. Close the Control Panel window. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Click Phone and Modem Options. 3. Click the Dialing Rules tab and click Edit. 4. Ensure that To disable call waiting, dial: is checked, and then select the proper code as listed in your telephone directory. 5. Click Apply and click OK. 6. Close the Phone and Modem Options window. Verify that the modem is communicating with Windows Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Printers and Other Hardware and click Phone and Modem Options. 3. Click the Modems tab. 4. Click the COM port for your modem. 5. Click Properties, click the Diagnostics tab, and then click Query Modem to verify that the modem is communicating with Windows. If all commands receive responses, the modem is operating properly. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Phone and Modem Options. If multiple entries for the same modem or modems are listed but not installed, delete the entries, restart the computer, and repeat steps 1 and 2. 3. Click the Diagnostics tab. 4. Click the COM port for your modem. 5. Click Query Modem to verify that the modem is communicating with Windows. If all commands receive responses, the modem is operating properly. Touch Pad or Mouse Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you perform the various checks. Check the touch pad settings Windows XP 1. Click the Start button, click Control Panel, and then click Printers and Other Hardware. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 11 of 17 2. Click Mouse. 3. Try adjusting the settings. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Mouse icon. 3. Try adjusting the settings. Check the mouse cable Shut down the computer. Disconnect the mouse cable, check it for damage, and firmly reconnect the cable. If you are using a mouse extension cable, disconnect it and connect the mouse directly to the computer. To verify that the problem is with the mouse, check the touch pad 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect the mouse. 3. Turn on the computer. 4. At the Windows desktop, use the touch pad to move the cursor around, select an icon, and open it. If the touch pad operates correctly, the mouse may be defective. Check the system setup program settings Verify that the system setup program lists the correct device for the pointing device option. (The computer automatically recognizes a USB mouse without making any setting adjustments.) Test the mouse controller To test the mouse controller (which affects pointer movement) and the operation of the touch pad or mouse buttons, run the Mouse test in the Pointing Devices test group in the Dell Diagnostics. Reinstall the touch pad driver See "Reinstalling Software."

External Keyboard Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you perform the various checks. NOTE: Use the integrated keyboard when working in MS-DOS mode or when running the Dell Diagnostics or the system setup program. When you attach an external keyboard, the integrated keyboard remains fully functional. Check the keyboard cable Shut down the computer. Disconnect the keyboard cable and check it for damage, and firmly reconnect the cable. If you are using a keyboard extension cable, disconnect it and connect the keyboard directly to the computer. Check the external keyboard 1. Shut down the computer, wait 1 minute, and turn it on again. 2. Verify that the numbers, capitals, and scroll lock lights on the keyboard blink during the boot routine. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 12 of 17 3. From the Windows desktop, click the Start button, point to Programs, point to Accessories, and click Notepad. 4. Type some characters on the external keyboard and verify that they appear on the display. If you cannot verify these steps, you may have a defective external keyboard. To verify that the problem is with the external keyboard, check the integrated keyboard 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect the external keyboard. 3. Turn on the computer. 4. From the Windows desktop, click the Start button, point to Programs, point to Accessories, and click Notepad. 5. Type some characters on the external keyboard and verify that they appear on the display. If the characters appear now but did not with the external keyboard, you may have a defective external keyboard. Run the keyboard diagnostics tests Run the PC-AT Compatible Keyboards tests in the Dell Diagnostics. If the tests indicate a defective external keyboard, contact Dell. Unexpected Characters Disable the numeric keypad Press <Num Lk> to disable the numeric keypad if numbers are displayed instead of letters. Verify that the numbers lock light is not lit. Drive Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. If you cannot save a file to a floppy disk drive Ensure that Windows recognizes the drive In Windows XP, click the Start button and click My Computer. In other operating systems, double-click My Computer. If the drive is not listed, perform a full scan with your antivirus software to check for and remove viruses. Viruses can sometimes prevent Windows from recognizing the drive. Insert a bootable disk and restart the computer. Ensure that the disk is not write-protected You cannot save data to a write-protected disk. Try another floppy disk Insert another disk to eliminate the possibility that the original disk is defective. Reinstall the drive 1. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and shut down the computer. 2. Remove the drive from the module bay. See "Using the Module Bay" for instructions. 3. Reinstall the drive. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 13 of 17 4. Turn on the computer. Clean the drive See "Cleaning Your Computer" for instructions. Check the drive for errors

If a drive error message appears, see "Error Messages" for an explanation.

Run the Diskette tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

If you cannot play a CD, CD-RW, DVD, or DVD+RW NOTE: Because of different worldwide file types, not all DVD titles work in all DVD drives. High-speed CD drive vibration is normal and may cause noise. The noise does not indicate a defect with the drive or the CD. Ensure that Windows recognizes the drive In Windows XP, click the Start button and click My Computer. In other operating systems, double-click My Computer. If the drive is not listed, perform a full scan with your antivirus software to check for and remove viruses. Viruses can sometimes prevent Windows from recognizing the drive. Insert a bootable disk and restart the computer. Try another disc Insert another disc to eliminate the possibility that the original disc is defective. Adjust the Windows volume control Double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. Reinstall the drive 1. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and shut down the computer. 2. Remove the drive. See "Using the Module Bay" for instructions. 3. Reinstall the drive. 4. Turn on the computer. Clean the drive or disc See "Cleaning Your Computer" for instructions. Check the drive for errors If a drive error message appears, see "Error Messages" for an explanation. Run the IDE Drives tests as described in the Dell Diagnostics. If you cannot eject the CD, CD-RW, DVD, or DVD+RW drive tray 1. Ensure that the computer is turned off. 2. Straighten a paper clip and insert one end into the eject hole at the front of the drive;

push firmly until the tray is partially ejected. 3. Gently pull out the tray until it stops. If you hear an unfamiliar scraping or grinding sound

Ensure that the sound is not caused by the program that is running.

Ensure that the disk or disc is inserted properly. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 14 of 17 If the CD-RW or DVD+RW drive stops writing Disable standby or hibernate mode in Windows before writing to a CD-RW Search for the keyword standby or hibernate in Windows Help or the Windows Help and Support Center. Change the write speed to a slower rate See the help files for your CD or DVD creation software. Exit all other open programs Exiting all other open programs before writing to the CD-RW or DVD+RW may alleviate the problem. If you have problems with a hard drive Allow the computer to cool before turning it on A hot hard drive may prevent the operating system from starting. Try allowing the computer to return to room temperature before turning it on. Check the drive for errors

Run the Windows error-checking tool:

1. In Windows XP, click the Start button and click My Computer. In Windows 2000, double-

click My Computer. 2. Right-click the drive letter (local disk) that you want to scan for errors, and then click Properties. 3. Click the Tools tab. 4. Under Error-checking, click Check Now. 5. Click Start.

Run the IDE Drives tests as described in the Dell Diagnostics. PC Card Problems Check the PC Card Ensure that the PC Card is properly inserted into the connector. Ensure that the card is recognized by Windows Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware (Unplug or Eject Hardware in Windows 2000) icon in the Windows taskbar. Ensure that the card is listed. Run the PC Card diagnostics test See the documentation that came with the PC Card for instructions if a diagnostics test was provided with the card. If you have problems with a Dell-provided PC Card Contact Dell. If you have problems with a PC Card not provided by Dell Contact the PC Card manufacturer. Network Problems file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 15 of 17 Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. Check the network cable connector Ensure that the network cable connector is firmly connected to the connector on the computer and the network wall jack. Check the network lights on the network connector Green indicates that the network connection is active. If the status light is not green, try replacing the network cable. Amber indicates that the network adapter driver is loaded and the adapter is detecting activity. Restart the computer Try to log on to the network again. Contact your network administrator Verify that your network settings are correct and that the network is functioning. General Program Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. A program crashes NOTE: Software usually includes installation instructions in its documentation or on a floppy disk or CD. See the software documentation Many software manufacturers maintain websites with information that may help you solve the problem. Ensure that you properly installed and configured the program. Reinstall the program if necessary. A program stops responding End the program 1. Simultaneously press <Ctrl><Shift><Esc>. 2. Click the Applications tab, and then select the program that is no longer responding. 3. Click End Task. A solid blue screen appears Turn the computer off If the computer does not respond to a keystroke or a proper shutdown, press the power button until the computer turns off. Press the power button again to restart the computer. Windows XP The computer restarts. Windows 2000 The solid blue screen appears because you were not able to perform a proper Windows shutdown. ScanDisk automatically runs during the start-up process. Follow the instructions on file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems the screen. Error messages appear Page 16 of 17 Review "Error Messages" Look up the message and take the appropriate action. See the software documentation. Confirm that the problem is software-related Run the System Board Devices tests in the Dell Diagnostics. If all tests in the device group run successfully, the problem may be software-

related. See the software documentation. If Your Dell Computer Gets Wet CAUTION: Perform this procedure only after you are certain that it is safe to do so. If the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, it is recommended that you turn off AC power at the circuit breaker before attempting to remove the power cables from the electrical outlet. Use the utmost caution when removing wet cables from a live power source. 1. Shut down the computer, disconnect the AC adapter from the computer, and then disconnect the AC adapter from the electrical outlet. 2. Turn off any attached external devices, and disconnect them from their power sources and then from the computer. 3. Ground yourself by touching one of the metal connectors on the back of the computer. 4. Remove the module bay device and any installed PC Cards, and put them in a safe place to dry. 5. Remove the battery. 6. Wipe off the battery and put it in a safe place to dry. 7. Remove the hard drive. 8. Remove the memory module(s). 9. Open the display and place the computer right-side up across two books or similar props to let air circulate all around it. Let the computer dry for at least 24 hours in a dry area at room temperature. NOTICE: Do not use artificial means, such as a hair dryer or a fan, to speed the drying process. CAUTION: To help prevent electrical shock, verify that the computer is thoroughly dry before continuing with the rest of this procedure. 10. Ground yourself by touching one of the metal connectors on the back of the computer. 11. Replace the memory module(s), the memory module cover, and the screw(s). 12. Replace the hard drive. 13. Replace the module bay device and any PC Cards you removed. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 17 of 17 14. Replace the battery. 15. Turn on the computer and verify that it is working properly. NOTE: See your System Information Guide or separate paper warranty document that shipped with your computer for information on your warranty coverage. If the computer does not start, or if you cannot identify the damaged components, contact Dell. If You Drop or Damage Your Computer 1. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect the AC adapter from the computer and from the electrical outlet. 3. Turn off any attached external devices, and disconnect them from their power sources and then from the computer. 4. Remove and reinstall the battery. 5. Turn on the computer. NOTE: See your System Information Guide for information on your warranty coverage. If the computer does not start, or if you cannot identify the damaged components, contact Dell. Resolving Other Technical Problems Go to the Dell Support website Go to support.dell.com for help with general usage, installation, and troubleshooting questions. See "Getting Help" for a description of the hardware and software support provided by Dell. E-mail Dell Go to support.dell.com and then click E-Mail Dell in the Communicate list. Send an e-mail message to Dell about your problem; you can expect to receive an e-mail message from Dell within hours. See "Getting Help" for a description of the hardware and software support provided by Dell. Contact Dell If you cannot solve your problem using the Dell Support website

(support.dell.com) or e-mail service, call Dell for technical assistance. See "Getting Help" for a description of the hardware and software support provided by Dell. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Using PC Cards Page 1 of 3 Using PC Cards PC Card Types Extended PC Cards Installing a PC Card Removing a PC Card CAUTION: Before performing any of the procedures listed below, read and follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. PC Card Types See "Specifications" for information on supported PC Cards. NOTE: A PC Card is not a bootable device. The PC Card slot has one connector that supports a single Type I or Type II card. The PC Card slot supports CardBus technology and extended PC Cards. "Type" of card refers to its thickness, not its functionality. Extended PC Cards An extended PC Card (for example, a wireless network adapter) is longer than a standard PC Card and extends outside the computer. Follow these precautions when using extended PC Cards:

Protect the exposed end of an installed card. Striking the end of the card can damage the system board.

Always remove an extended PC Card before you pack the computer in its carrying case.

Install an extended card in the upper PC Card connector to allow room for a second PC Card. Installing a PC Card You can install a PC Card in the computer while the computer is running. The computer automatically detects the card. PC Cards are generally marked with a symbol (such as a triangle or an arrow) to indicate which end to insert into the slot. The cards are keyed to prevent incorrect insertion. If card orientation is not clear, see the documentation that came with the card. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh2518.htm 1/13/2004 Using PC Cards To install a PC Card:

Page 2 of 3 1. Hold the card with its orientation symbol pointing into the slot and the top side of the card facing up. The latch needs to be in the "in" position before you insert the card. 2. Slide the card into the slot until the card is completely seated in its connector. If you encounter too much resistance, do not force the card. Check the card orientation and try again. The computer recognizes most PC Cards and automatically loads the appropriate device driver. If the configuration program tells you to load the manufacturer's drivers, use the floppy disk or CD that came with the PC Card. Removing a PC Card NOTICE: Before you remove a PC Card from the computer, click the a card and stop it from functioning. If you do not stop the card in the configuration utility, you could lose data. Do not attempt to eject a card by pulling its cable, if one is attached. icon on the taskbar to select 1. Press the eject button. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh2518.htm 1/13/2004 Using PC Cards 1 eject button 2. Push the eject button a second time. 3. Gently remove the card. Page 3 of 3 1 2 eject button PC Card file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh2518.htm 1/13/2004 Connecting to a Wireless Local Area Network Page 1 of 4 Connecting to a Wireless Local Area Network Determining Your Network Type Connecting to a Network in Microsoft Windows XP Finalizing Your Network Connection (Security Settings) NOTE: These networking instructions do not apply to Bluetooth or cellular products. Before you can connect to a wireless Local Area Network (LAN), you must have specific information about your network. Be sure to get the name of your wireless network along with any special security settings from your network administrator. The settings are unique to your network and cannot be provided by Dell. Determining Your Network Type NOTE: Most wireless networks are of the infrastructure type. Consult your network administrator if you are unsure of the type of network you are connecting to. Wireless networks fall into two categoriesinfrastructure networks and ad-hoc networks. An infrastructure network uses routers or access points to connect several computers. An ad-hoc network does not use routers or access points and consists of computers that broadcast to one another. 1 2 infrastructure network Ad-Hoc network Connecting to a Network in Microsoft Windows XP file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh55CE.htm 1/13/2004 Connecting to a Wireless Local Area Network Page 2 of 4 Your wireless network card requires proper software and drivers in order to connect to a network. The software is pre-installed in the factory. If the software is removed or corrupted, follow the instructions listed in the User's Guide for your wireless card. The User's Guide is located on your Drivers and Utilities CD (that came with your computer) in the "User's Guides-Network User's Guides" category. The User's Guide is also available on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. 1. Click the Start button, click Control Panel, and then click Switch to Classic View. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Click Wireless Network Connection. The Wireless Network Connection icon is highlighted. 4. Under Network Tasks in the left-hand pane, click Change settings of this connection. The Wireless Network Connection Properties window appears. 5. Select the Wireless Networks tab. NOTE: The names of wireless networks that your computer can detect are listed under Available Networks. 6. Click Add. The Wireless network properties window appears. 7. Enter the name of your network in the Network name (SSID) field. 8. If you are connecting to an ad-hoc network, which does not use any routers or access points, click the check box labeled This is a computer-to-computer (ad hoc) network; wireless access points are not used. 9. Click OK. Your new network name appears in the Preferred networks area. Finalizing Your Network Connection (Security Settings) To finalize your connection, you must change your wireless security settings to match the wireless network you are trying to connect to. Choose one of the following connection options based on the security settings for your network:

Connecting to a Network without Security-Related Requirements (common for home and small office networks)

Connecting to a Network with Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) Security Requirements

Connecting to a Network with Wired Equivalent Protocol (WEP) Security Requirements NOTE: Network security settings are only provided by your network administrator and are unique to file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh55CE.htm 1/13/2004 Connecting to a Wireless Local Area Network Page 3 of 4 your network. Dell cannot provide this information. Connecting to a Network Without Security-Related Requirements 1. In the Preferred networks area, click the name of your wireless network. 2. Click Properties. 3. From the Network Authentication drop-down menu, select Open. Earlier versions of the Dell wireless software may not contain the drop-down menu. If you are using an earlier version, click to uncheck the Data encryption (WEP enabled) check box and go to step 5. 4. From the Data encryption drop-down menu, select Disabled. NOTE: Your computer can take up to 1 minute to connect to the network. 5. Click OK. Your network setup is complete. Connecting to a Network With Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) Security Requirements The following instructions are basic steps for connecting to a WPA network. If your network requires a user name, password, or domain settings, consult the setup instructions in the User's Guide for your wireless network card. NOTE: WPA protocols require that you know the Network Authentication and Data Encryption settings for your wireless network. In addition, your WPA-protected network may require special settings such as a network key, user name, password, and domain name. Be sure to get all necessary WPA settings from your network administrator before continuing. 1. In the Preferred networks section, click the name of your wireless network. 2. Click Properties. 3. From the Network Authentication drop-down menu, select your network authentication type (as provided by the network administrator). If you do not see the drop-down menu, you must update your wireless software before continuing. Download and install the latest version of your wireless driver software from the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. 4. From the Data encryption drop-down menu, select your data encryption type (as provided by the network administrator). 5. If your wireless network requires a key, enter it in the Network key field. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh55CE.htm 1/13/2004 Connecting to a Wireless Local Area Network Page 4 of 4 NOTE: Your computer can take up to 1 minute to connect to the network. 6. Click OK. Your network setup is complete. Connecting to a Network With Wired Equivalent Protocol (WEP) Security Requirements 1. In the Preferred networks section, click the name of your wireless network. 2. Click Properties. 3. From the Network Authentication drop-down menu, select Open. Earlier versions of Dell wireless software may not contain the drop-down menus. If you are using an earlier version, click to check the check box labeled Data encryption (WEP enabled) and go to step 5. 4. From the Data encryption drop-down menu, select WEP. 5. If the wireless network does not require a network key (for example, a password), go to step 8. 6. Click to uncheck the check box labeled The key is provided for me automatically. 7. Enter the WEP network key, provided by your network administrator, in the Network key field. 8. Enter the WEP network key again in the Confirm network key field. NOTE: Your computer can take up to 1 minute to connect to the network. 9. Click OK. Your network setup is complete. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh55CE.htm 1/13/2004 Power Management Page 1 of 6 Power Management Power Management Tips Power Management Wizard Power Management Modes Power Options Properties Power Management Tips NOTE: See "Using a Battery" for more information on conserving battery power.

Connect the computer to an electrical outlet when possible because battery life is largely determined by the number of times the battery is charged.

Place the computer in standby mode or hibernate mode when you leave the computer unattended for long periods of time.

To enter a power management mode, close the display or press <Fn><Esc>.

To exit a power management mode, press the power button. Power Management Wizard NOTE: The Power Management Wizard is not available if you have restricted access rights. Click or double-click the icon to open the Power Management Wizard. The first two screens of the wizardWelcome and What is Power Management?describe and define various power management options. NOTE: On the What is Power Management? screen, you can select Do not show this page again. When you select this option, the Welcome screen also does not appear again. Use the following screens of the Power Management Wizard to set various power management options, including sleep modes, power schemes, and low battery-charge alarms. Setting Sleep Modes The screen defines standby and hibernate modes. From the screen you can:

file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhAD84.htm 1/13/2004 Power Management Page 2 of 6

Set standby-mode password options.

Enable or disable hibernate mode.

Select how the computer will respond when you close the display:

Choose no action.

Enter standby mode.

Enter hibernate mode.

Select how the computer will respond when you press the power button:

Choose no action.

Enter standby mode.

Enter hibernate mode.

Shut down the Microsoft Windows operating system and turn off the computer.

Prompt a user for an action (Ask me what to do).

Select how the computer will respond when you press <Fn><Esc>.

Choose no action.

Enter standby mode.

Enter hibernate mode.

Shut down Microsoft Windows and turn off the computer.

Prompt a user for an action (Ask me what to do). Selecting a Power Scheme NOTE: When your computer is running on battery power, the Network Disabled power scheme disables your internal network and wireless activity. When your computer is connected to an electrical outlet, the Network Disabled power scheme disables only your wireless activity. You must set the power scheme through QuickSet (not Microsoft Windows) for Network Disabled to work. The screen allows you to select, create, and edit power scheme settings. In addition, you can delete power schemes that you create, but you cannot delete Dell QuickSet predefined power schemes (Maximum Battery, Maximum Performance, Presentation, and Network Disabled). NOTE: QuickSet automatically adds the word (QuickSet) after the names of power schemes created using QuickSet. All QuickSet power schemes are displayed in a drop-down menu near the center of the screen. The power settings for each scheme in the menu are listed below the menu. The power settings are listed separately for when the computer is running on battery or connected to an electrical outlet. The Power Management Wizard also allows you to associate the display brightness level with a power scheme. You must enable brightness-level power schemes through QuickSet in order to set the brightness level. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhAD84.htm 1/13/2004 Power Management Page 3 of 6 The display brightness, internal network-card activity, and wireless activity features are not available through the Microsoft Windows Control Panel power schemes. In order to make use of these value-added features, you must set them through QuickSet power schemes. NOTE: Brightness shortcut keys only affect the display on your portable computer, not monitors that you attach to your portable computer or docking device. If your computer is in CRT only mode and you try to change the brightness level, the Brightness Meter appears, but the brightness level on the monitor does not change. Setting Battery Alarms and Actions The screen allows you to enable the low-battery and critical-battery alarms and to change settings for the alarms. For example, you can set the low-battery alarm to 20 percent to remind you to save work and switch to AC power, and you can set the critical-battery alarm to 10 percent to enter hibernate mode. From the screen, you can:

Select whether the alarm will notify you by sound or text.

Adjust the power level at which you want the alarm to notify you.

Select how the computer will respond when the alarm notifies you:

Choose no action.

Enter standby mode.

Enter hibernate mode.

Shut down Windows and turn off the computer. Completing the Power Management Wizard The screen summarizes the QuickSet power scheme, sleep mode, and battery alarm settings for your computer. Review the settings you have selected and click Finish. For more information about QuickSet, right-click the icon in the taskbar and click Help. Power Management Modes Standby Mode Standby mode conserves power by turning off the display and the hard drive after a predetermined period of inactivity (a time-out). When the computer exits standby mode, it returns to the same operating state it was in before entering standby mode. NOTICE: If your computer loses AC and battery power while in standby mode, it may lose data. To enter standby mode:

In the Microsoft Windows XP operating system, click the Start button, click Turn off computer, file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhAD84.htm 1/13/2004 Power Management Page 4 of 6 and then click Stand by. In Windows 2000, click the Start button, click Shutdown, click Standby, and then click OK. or

Depending on how you set the power management options on the Advanced tab in the Power Options Properties window, use one of the following methods:

Close the display.

Press <Fn><Esc>. To exit standby mode, press the power button or open the display depending on how you set the options on the Advanced tab. You cannot make the computer exit standby mode by pressing a key or touching the touch pad. Hibernate Mode Hibernate mode conserves power by copying system data to a reserved area on the hard drive and then completely turning off the computer. When the computer exits hibernate mode, it returns to the same operating state it was in before entering hibernate mode. NOTICE: You cannot remove devices or disconnect your computer from a docking device while your computer is in hibernate mode. Your computer enters hibernate mode if the battery charge level becomes critically low. To manually enter hibernate mode:

In Windows XP, click the Start button, click Turn off computer, press and hold <Shift> key, and then click Hibernate. In Windows 2000, if hibernate support is enabled, click the Start button, click Shutdown, click Hibernate, and then click OK. or

Depending on how you set the power management options on the Advanced tab in the Power Options Properties window, use one of the following methods to enter hibernate mode:

Close the display.

Press <Fn><Esc>. NOTE: Some PC Cards may not operate correctly after the computer exits hibernate mode. Remove and reinsert the card, or simply restart (reboot) your computer. To exit hibernate mode, press the power button. The computer may take a short time to exit hibernate mode. You cannot make the computer exit hibernate mode by pressing a key or touching the touch pad. For more information on hibernate mode, see the documentation that came with your operating system. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhAD84.htm 1/13/2004 Power Management Page 5 of 6 Power Options Properties The Power Options Properties window helps you to manage power consumption and monitor battery charge status. To access the Microsoft Windows Power Options Properties window:

In Windows XP, click the Start button, click Control Panel, click Performance and Maintenance, and then click Power Options.

In Windows 2000, open the Control Panel and double-click the Power Options icon. Power Schemes Tab Windows XP controls the performance level of the processor depending on the power scheme you select. You do not need to make any further adjustments to set the performance level. For information on setting processor performance for other operating systems, see "Intel SpeedStep Technology Tab (for Windows 2000)."

Each preset power scheme has different time-out settings for entering standby mode, turning off the display, and turning off the hard drive. For more information on power management options, see the Help and Support Center (Windows Help in Windows 2000). Alarms Tab NOTE: To enable audible alarms, click each Alarm Action button and select Sound alarm. The Low battery alarm and Critical battery alarm settings alert you with a message when the battery charge falls below a certain percentage. When you receive your computer, the Low battery alarm and Critical battery alarm check boxes are selected. It is recommended that you continue to use these settings. See "Using a Battery" for more information on low-battery warnings. Power Meter Tab The Power Meter tab displays the current power source and amount of battery charge remaining. Advanced Tab The Advanced tab allows you to:

Set power icon and standby mode password options.

Program the following functions (depending on your operating system):

Prompt a user for an action (Ask me what to do).

Enter standby mode.

Enter hibernate mode.

Shut down Windows and turn off the computer.

Choose no action (None or Do nothing). file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhAD84.htm 1/13/2004 Power Management Page 6 of 6 To program these functions, click an option from the corresponding drop-down menu and then click OK. Hibernate Tab The Hibernate tab lets you enable hibernate mode by clicking the Enable hibernate support check box. Intel SpeedStep Technology Tab (for Windows 2000) NOTE: Windows XP controls the performance level of the processor depending on the power scheme that you select. See "Power Schemes Tab."

NOTE: To use Intel SpeedStep technology, a Windows operating system must be running. Depending on your operating system and microprocessor, the Power Options Properties window includes the Intel SpeedStep technology tab. Intel SpeedStep technology allows you to set the performance level of the processor according to whether the computer is running on battery or AC power. Depending on your operating system, typical options are:

Automatic The processor runs at its highest possible speed (Maximum Performance mode) when the computer is running on AC power. When the computer is running on battery power, the processor runs in Battery Optimized mode.

Maximum Performance The processor runs at its highest possible speed even if the computer is running on battery power.

Battery Optimized Performance Processor speed is optimized for battery power even if the computer is connected to an electrical outlet.

Maximum Battery The processor runs at a slower speed to extend battery life. To change additional Intel SpeedStep options:

1. Click Advanced and click one of the following options:

Disable Intel SpeedStep technology control

Remove flag icon (from the notification area)

Disable audio notification when performance changes 2. Click OK to accept any changes and click OK to close the Intel SpeedStep technology window. You can also change the Intel SpeedStep settings by right-clicking the flag icon in the notification area. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhAD84.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Module Bay Page 1 of 12 Using the Module Bay About the Module Bay Checking the Charge on the Second Battery Removing and Installing Devices While the Computer Is Turned Off Removing and Installing Devices While the Computer Is Running Using CDs or DVDs About the Module Bay CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. You can install devices such as a floppy drive, CD drive, CD-RW drive, DVD drive, CD-RW/DVD drive, DVD+RW, second battery, or second hard drive in the module bay. NOTE: You do not need to install the device screw unless you want to secure the module inside the computer for security purposes. Your Dell computer ships with an optical drive installed in the module bay. However, the device screw is not installed in the optical drive but packaged separately. When you install your device in the module bay, you can install the device screw. Checking the Charge on the Second Battery Before you install a second battery, press the status button on the battery charge gauge to illuminate the charge level lights. Each light represents approximately 20 percent of the total battery charge. For example, if the battery has 80 percent of its charge remaining, four of the lights are on. If no lights appear, the battery has no charge. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF0E2.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Module Bay Page 2 of 12 1 status button on the battery charge gauge 2 second battery (bottom) Removing and Installing Devices While the Computer Is Turned Off CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. NOTE: If the device screw is not installed, you can remove and install devices while the computer is running and connected to a docking device (docked). Your computer ships with an optical drive installed in the module bay. However, the device screw is not installed in the optical drive but packaged separately. When you install your device in the module bay, you can install the device screw. NOTE: You do not need to install the device screw unless you want to secure the module inside the computer for security purposes. If the Device Screw Is Not Installed NOTICE: To prevent damage to devices, place them in a safe, dry place when they are not installed in the computer. Avoid pressing down on them or placing heavy objects on top of them. 1. Press the device latch release so that the latch release pops out. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF0E2.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Module Bay Page 3 of 12 1 device latch release 2. Pull the device by the latch release to remove the device from the module bay. 3. Insert the new device into the bay, push the device until you feel a click, and push the device latch release in so that it is flush with the computer. If the Device Screw Is Installed 1. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and then shut down the computer. 2. If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. NOTICE: To prevent damage to devices, place them in a safe, dry place when they are not installed in the computer. Avoid pressing down on them or placing heavy objects on top of them. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF0E2.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Module Bay Page 4 of 12 3. Close the display and turn the computer over. 4. Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver to remove the device screw from the bottom of the computer. 1 device latch release 5. Press the device latch release so that the latch release pops out. 6. Pull the device by the latch release to remove the device from the module bay. 7. Insert the new device into the bay, push the device until you feel a click, and push the device latch release in so that it is flush with the computer. 8. Replace the device screw. 9. Turn on the computer. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF0E2.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Module Bay Page 5 of 12 Removing and Installing Devices While the Computer Is Running CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. Your computer ships with an optical drive installed in the module bay. However, the device screw is not installed in the optical drive but packaged separately. When you install your device in the module bay, you can install the device screw. NOTE: You do not need to install the device screw unless you want to secure the module inside the computer for security purposes. If the Device Screw Is Not Installed Microsoft Windows XP 1. Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the taskbar. 2. Click Stop and wait for the operating system to confirm that the device has stopped. 3. Click the device you want to eject. NOTICE: To prevent damage to devices, place them in a safe, dry place when they are not installed in the computer. Avoid pressing down on them or placing heavy objects on top of them. 4. Press the device latch release so that the latch release pops out. 1 device latch release file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF0E2.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Module Bay Page 6 of 12 5. Pull the device by the latch release to remove the device from the module bay. 6. Insert the new device into the bay, push the device until you feel a click, and push the device latch release in so that it is flush with the computer. Windows XP automatically recognizes the new device. 7. If necessary, enter your password to unlock your computer. Windows 2000 1. Click the Unplug or Eject Hardware icon on the taskbar. 2. Click the device you want to eject and click Stop. 3. Press the device latch release so that the latch release pops out. 1 device latch release file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF0E2.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Module Bay Page 7 of 12 4. Pull the device by the latch release to remove the device from the module bay. 5. Insert the new device into the bay, push the device until you feel a click, and push the device latch release in so that it is flush with the computer. 6. When the operating system recognizes the new device, click Close. If the Device Screw Is Installed Windows XP 1. Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the taskbar. 2. Click the device you want to eject. 3. If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. NOTICE: To prevent damage to devices, place them in a safe, dry place when they are not installed in the computer. Avoid pressing down on them or placing heavy objects on top of them. 4. Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver to remove the device screw from the bottom of the computer. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF0E2.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Module Bay Page 8 of 12 1 device latch release 5. Press the device latch release so that the latch release pops out. 6. Pull the device by the latch release to remove the device from the module bay. 7. Insert the new device into the bay, push the device until you feel a click, and push the device latch release in so that it is flush with the computer. Windows XP automatically recognizes the new device. 8. If necessary, enter your password to unlock your computer. Windows 2000 1. Click the Unplug or Eject Hardware icon on the taskbar. 2. Click the device you want to eject and click Stop. 3. If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF0E2.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Module Bay Page 9 of 12 4. Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver to remove the device screw from the bottom of the computer. 1 device latch release 5. Press the device latch release so that the latch release pops out. 6. Pull the device by the latch release to remove the device from the module bay. 7. Insert the new device into the bay, push the device until you feel a click, and push the device latch release in so that it is flush with the computer. 8. When the operating system recognizes the new device, click Close. Using CDs or DVDs file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF0E2.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Module Bay Page 10 of 12 Using the CD or DVD Tray NOTICE: Do not press down on the drive tray when opening or closing it. Keep the tray closed when you are not using the drive. NOTICE: Do not move the computer while playing CDs or DVDs. 1. Press the eject button on the front of the drive. 2. Pull the tray out. 3. Place the disc, label side up, in the center of the tray. NOTICE: Ensure that you snap the disc onto the spindle. Otherwise you may damage the drive tray, or your CD or DVD will not work properly. 4. Snap the disc onto the spindle. 1 eject button 5. Push the tray back into the drive. NOTE: If you use a module that shipped with another computer, you need to install the drivers and software necessary to play DVDs or write data. For more information, see the Drivers and Utilities CD. You can play a DVD on your computer if the computer shipped with a DVD drive or a CD-RW/DVD combo drive. You can write data to a CD-R/CD-RW on your computer if the computer shipped with a CD-RW or CD-

RW/DVD combo drive. For more information on playing CDs or DVDs, click Help on the CD player or DVD player (if available). file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF0E2.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Module Bay Page 11 of 12 Adjusting the Volume NOTE: If the speakers are muted, you do not hear the CD or DVD playing. 1. Click the Start button, point to All Programs Accessories Entertainment (or Multimedia), and then click Volume Control. 2. In the Volume Control window, click and drag the bar in the Volume Control column and slide the bar up or down to increase or decrease the volume. For more information on volume control options, click Help in the Volume Control window. The Volume Meter displays the current volume level, including mute, on your computer. Either right-click the icon in the taskbar or press the volume control buttons to enable or disable the Volume Meter on the screen. 1 2 volume icon Volume Meter 3 mute icon NOTE: By default, the Volume Meter appears in the lower-right corner of the display. You can click and drag the meter to a new location, and the meter subsequently always appears at the new location. When the meter is enabled, adjust the volume using the volume control buttons or by pressing the following keys:

Press <Fn><Page Up> to increase volume.

Press <Fn><Page Down> to decrease volume.

Press <Fn><End> to mute volume. For more information about QuickSet, right-click the icon in the taskbar, and click Help. Adjusting the Picture If an error message notifies you that the current resolution and color depth are using too much memory and preventing DVD playback, adjust the display properties. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF0E2.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Module Bay Page 12 of 12 Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Under Pick a category, click Appearance and Themes. 3. Under Pick a task..., click Change the screen resolution. 4. In the Display Properties window, click and drag the bar in Screen resolution to change the setting to 1024 by 768 pixels. 5. Under Color quality, click the drop-down menu and click Medium (16 bit). 6. Click OK. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Display icon and click the Settings tab. 3. Click and drag the bar in Screen area to change the setting to 1024 by 768 pixels. 4. Under Color quality, click the drop-down menu and click High Color (16 bit). 5. Click Apply. 6. Click OK to save the settings and close the window. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF0E2.htm 1/13/2004 Using a Battery Page 1 of 7 Using a Battery Battery Performance Checking the Battery Charge Charging the Battery Removing a Battery Removing and Installing a Reserve Battery Installing a Battery Storing a Battery Battery Performance NOTE: Batteries for portable computers are covered under warranty only during the initial 1-year period of the limited warranty for the computer. For more information about the Dell warranty for the computer, see the System Information Guide or separate paper warranty document that shipped with your computer. For optimal computer performance and to help preserve BIOS settings, operate your Dell portable computer with the main battery installed at all times. Use a battery to run the computer when the computer is not connected to an electrical outlet. One battery is supplied as standard equipment in the battery bay. NOTE: For more information on maximizing battery operating time, see "Power Management."

Battery operating time varies depending on operating conditions. With average usage, you may expect from 3 to 4 hours from a single, fully charged battery. You can install an optional second battery in the module bay to significantly increase operating time. For more information about the second battery, see "Using the Module Bay."

NOTE: It is recommended that you connect your computer to an electrical outlet when writing to a CD. Operating time is significantly reduced when you perform operations including, but not limited to, the following:

Using optical drives, especially DVD and CD-RW drives

Using wireless communications devices, PC Cards, or USB devices

Using high-brightness display settings, 3D screen savers, or other power-intensive programs, such as 3D games

Running the computer in maximum performance mode file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh421A.htm 1/13/2004 Using a Battery Page 2 of 7 You can check the battery charge on the bottom of the computer. You can also set power management options to alert you when the battery charge is low. CAUTION: Using an incompatible battery may increase the risk of fire or explosion. Replace the battery only with a compatible battery purchased from Dell. The lithium-ion battery is designed to work with your Dell computer. Do not use a battery from other computers with your computer. CAUTION: Do not dispose of batteries with household waste. When your battery no longer holds a charge, call your local waste disposal or environmental agency for advice on disposing of a lithium-ion battery. See the battery disposal instructions in your System Information Guide. CAUTION: Misuse of the battery may increase the risk of fire or chemical burn. Do not puncture, incinerate, disassemble, or expose the battery to temperatures above 65C (149 F). Keep the battery away from children. Handle damaged or leaking batteries with extreme care. Damaged batteries may leak and cause personal injury or equipment damage. Checking the Battery Charge The Dell QuickSet battery meter, Microsoft Windows power meter window and charge gauge and health gauge, and the low-battery warning provide information on the battery charge. icon, the battery For more information about checking the charge on the second battery, see "Using the Module Bay."

Dell QuickSet Battery Meter Press <Fn><F3> to display the QuickSet Battery Meter. The Battery Meter screen displays status, charge level, and charge completion time for the primary and second batteries in your computer. The following icons appear in the Battery Meter screen:

The computer is running on battery power.

The battery is discharging or idle.

The computer is connected to an electrical outlet and running on AC power.

The battery is charging.

The computer is connected to an electrical outlet and running on AC power.

The battery is discharging, idle, or charging. For more information about QuickSet, right-click the icon in the taskbar, and click Help. Microsoft Windows Power Meter The Windows power meter indicates the remaining battery charge. To check the power meter, double-click the icon on the taskbar. For more information on the Power Meter tab, see "Power Management."

If the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, a icon appears. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh421A.htm 1/13/2004 Using a Battery Page 3 of 7 Charge Gauge Press the status button on the battery charge gauge to illuminate the charge-level lights. Each light represents approximately 20 percent of the total battery charge. For example, if the battery has 80 percent of its charge remaining, four of the lights are on. If no lights appear, the battery has no charge. Health Gauge The battery operating time is largely determined by the number of times it is charged. After hundreds of charge and discharge cycles, batteries lose some charge capacity, or battery health. To check the battery health, press and hold the status button on the battery charge gauge for at least 3 seconds. If no lights appear, the battery is in good condition, and more than 80 percent of its original charge capacity remains. Each light represents incremental degradation. If five lights appear, less than 60 percent of the charge capacity remains, and you should consider replacing the battery. See "Specifications" for more information about the battery operating time. Low-Battery Warning NOTICE: To avoid losing or corrupting data, save your work immediately after a low-battery warning. Then connect the computer to an electrical outlet, or install a second battery in the module bay. If the battery runs completely out of power, hibernate mode begins automatically. A low-battery warning occurs when the battery charge is approximately 90 percent depleted. The computer beeps once, indicating that minimal battery operating time remains. During that time, the speaker beeps periodically. If two batteries are installed, the low-battery warning means that the combined charge of both batteries is approximately 90 percent depleted. The computer enters hibernate mode when the battery charge is at a critically low level. For more information on low-battery alarms, see "Power Management."

Charging the Battery NOTE: The AC adapter charges a completely discharged battery in approximately 1 hour with the file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh421A.htm 1/13/2004 Using a Battery Page 4 of 7 computer turned off. Charge time is longer with the computer turned on. You can leave the battery in the computer as long as you like. The battery internal circuitry prevents the battery from overcharging. When you connect the computer to an electrical outlet or install a battery while the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, the computer checks the battery charge and temperature. If necessary, the AC adapter then charges the battery and maintains the battery charge. If the battery is hot from being used in your computer or being in a hot environment, the battery may not charge when you connect the computer to an electrical outlet. Disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet and allow the computer and the battery to cool to room temperature. Then connect the computer to an electrical outlet to continue charging the battery. For more information on resolving problems with a battery, see "Power Problems."

Removing a Battery CAUTION: Before performing the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. For more information about removing the second battery, see "Using the Module Bay."

CAUTION: Before performing these procedures, turn off the computer, disconnect it from the electrical outlet, and disconnect the modem from the telephone wall jack. NOTICE: If you choose to replace the battery with the computer in standby mode, you have up to 90 seconds to complete the battery replacement before the computer shuts down and loses any unsaved data. 1. Ensure that the computer is turned off, disconnected from an electrical outlet, and disconnected from the telephone wall jack. 2. If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 3. Slide and hold the battery-bay latch release on the bottom of the computer, and then remove the battery from the bay. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh421A.htm 1/13/2004 Using a Battery Page 5 of 7 Removing and Installing a Reserve Battery CAUTION: Before performing the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. 1. Remove the battery. 2. Remove the reserve battery cover. 3. Pull the reserve battery out of its compartment, and disconnect the reserve battery cable from the connector. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh421A.htm 1/13/2004 Using a Battery Page 6 of 7 1 reserve battery cable 2 connector 3 reserve battery 4. Connect the reserve battery cable to the connector in the reserve battery compartment. 5. Place the reserve battery in the compartment, and replace the reserve battery cover. Installing a Battery CAUTION: Before performing the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh421A.htm 1/13/2004 Using a Battery Page 7 of 7 Slide the battery into the bay until the latch release clicks. For more information about installing the second battery, see "Using the Module Bay."

Storing a Battery Remove the battery when you store your computer for an extended period of time. A battery discharges during prolonged storage. After a long storage period, recharge the battery fully before you use it. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh421A.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Display Page 1 of 3 Using the Display Adjusting Brightness Switching the Video Image Setting Display Resolution Adjusting Brightness When the Dell computer is running on battery power, you can conserve power by setting the brightness to the lowest comfortable setting using the appropriate keyboard shortcuts for the display. The Dell QuickSet Brightness Meter shows the current brightness setting for the display. Right-click the icon in the taskbar to enable or disable the Brightness Meter on the screen. 1 Brightness Meter NOTE: By default, the Brightness Meter appears in the lower-right corner of the display. You can click and drag the meter to a new location, and the meter subsequently always appears at the new location. NOTE: Brightness keyboard shortcuts only affect the display on your portable computer, not monitors that you attach to your portable computer or docking device. If your computer is in CRT only mode and you try to change the brightness level, the Brightness Meter appears, but the brightness level on the monitor does not change. You can enable or disable the Brightness Meter from the QuickSet taskbar menu. When the meter is enabled, press the following keys to adjust brightness:

Press <Fn> up-arrow key to increase brightness on the integrated display only (not on an external monitor).

Press <Fn> down-arrow key to decrease brightness on the integrated display only (not on an external monitor). For more information about QuickSet, right-click the icon in the taskbar and click Help. Switching the Video Image file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh8B25.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Display Page 2 of 3 When you start the computer with an external device (such as an external monitor or projector) attached and turned on, the image may appear on either the display or the external device. Press <Fn><F8> to switch the video image to the integrated display only, the integrated display and an external CRT monitor simultaneously, an external CRT monitor only, the integrated display and external DVI monitor simultaneously, and external DVI monitor only. NOTE: : You cannot use <Fn><F8> to switch the video image between the integrated display and an external S-Video device. Setting Display Resolution To display a program at a specific resolution, both the video controller and the display must support the program, and the necessary video drivers must be installed. Before you change any of the default display settings, make a note of the default settings for future reference. NOTE: Use only the Dell-installed video drivers, which are designed to offer the best performance with your Dell-installed operating system. If you choose a resolution or color palette that is higher than the display supports, the settings adjust automatically to the closest possible setting. NOTE: As the resolution increases, icons and text appear smaller on the screen. If the video resolution setting is higher than that supported by the display, the computer enters pan mode. In pan mode, the screen cannot be completely displayed. For example, the taskbar that usually appears at the bottom of the desktop may no longer be visible. To view the rest of the screen, use the touch pad to pan up, down, left, and right. NOTICE: You can damage an external monitor by using an unsupported refresh rate. Before adjusting the refresh rate on an external monitor, see the monitor user's guide. Microsoft Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Under Pick a category, click Appearance and Themes. 3. Under Pick a task..., click the area you want to change, or under or pick a Control Panel icon, click Display. 4. Try different settings for Color quality and Screen resolution. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Display icon and click the Settings tab. 3. Try different settings for Colors and Screen area. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh8B25.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Display Page 3 of 3 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh8B25.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad Page 1 of 5 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad Numeric Keypad Keyboard Shortcuts Touch Pad Customizing the Touch Pad Numeric Keypad NOTE: When you connect an external keyboard or keypad to the computer, the keypad is disabled. The numeric keypad functions like the numeric keypad on an external keyboard. Each key on the keypad has multiple functions. The keypad numbers and symbols are marked in blue on the right of the keypad keys. To type a number or symbol, enable the keypad, hold down <Fn> and press the desired key.

To enable the keypad, press <Num Lk>. The light indicates that the keypad is active.

To disable the keypad, press <Num Lk> again. Keyboard Shortcuts System Functions file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD317.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad Page 2 of 5 Opens the Windows Task Manager window Enables and disables the numeric keypad (on an external keyboard only) Enables and disables the scroll lock Battery Displays the Dell QuickSet Battery Meter. CD or DVD Tray Ejects the tray out of the drive. Display Functions Switches the video image to the next display in the following sequence: the integrated display only, the integrated display and an external CRT monitor simultaneously, an external CRT monitor only, the integrated display and an external DVI monitor simultaneously, and an external DVI monitor only. Increases brightness on the integrated display only (not on an external monitor) Decreases brightness on the integrated display only (not on an external monitor) Radios (Including Wireless Networking and Bluetooth) Enables and disables radios, including wireless networking and Bluetooth. Power Management Activates the power management mode of your choice. You can program this keyboard shortcut on the Advanced tab in the Power Options Properties window. Speaker Functions If no sound comes from the speakers, press <Fn><End> and adjust the volume. Increases the volume of the integrated speakers and external speakers, if attached file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD317.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad Page 3 of 5 Decreases the volume of the integrated speakers and external speakers, if attached Enables and disables the integrated speakers and external speakers, if attached Microsoft Windows Logo Key Functions Minimizes all open windows Maximizes all windows Runs Windows Explorer Opens the Run dialog box Opens the Search Results dialog box Opens the Search Results-Computer dialog box (if the computer is connected to a network) Opens the System Properties dialog box To adjust keyboard operation, such as the character repeat rate, open the Control Panel, and click Printers and Other Hardware (for Windows XP) or double-click the Keyboard icon (for Windows 2000). Touch Pad The touch pad detects the pressure and movement of your finger to allow you to move the cursor on the display. Use the touch pad and touch pad buttons as you would use a mouse. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD317.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad Page 4 of 5 1 2 touch pad touch pad buttons

To move the cursor, lightly slide your finger over the touch pad.

To select an object, lightly tap once on the surface of the touch pad or use your thumb to press the left touch-pad button.

To select and move (or drag) an object, position the cursor on the object and tap down-up-down on the touch pad. On the second down motion, leave your finger on the touch pad and move the selected object by sliding your finger across the surface.

To double-click an object, position the cursor on the object and then tap twice on the touch pad, or use your thumb to press the left touch-pad button twice. Customizing the Touch Pad You can disable the touch pad or adjust its settings by using the Mouse Properties window. 1. In Windows XP, open the Control Panel, click Printers and Other Hardware, and then click Mouse. In Windows 2000, open the Control Panel and double-click the Mouse icon. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD317.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad Page 5 of 5 2. On the Mouse Properties window:

Click the Device Select tab to disable the touch pad.

Click the Pointer tab to adjust touch pad settings. 3. Select the desired settings and click Apply. 4. Click OK to save the settings and close the window. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD317.htm 1/13/2004 Dell QuickSet Features Page 1 of 2 Dell QuickSet Features Clicking the QuickSet Icon Double-Clicking the QuickSet Icon Right-Clicking the QuickSet Icon Dell QuickSet runs from the click, or right-click the icon. icon located in the taskbar and functions differently when you click, double-

Clicking the QuickSet Icon Click the icon to perform the following tasks:

Adjust power management settings using the Power Management Wizard.

Adjust the size of icons and toolbars.

Select a power scheme that you set in the Power Management Wizard.

Turn presentation mode on or off. Double-Clicking the QuickSet Icon Double-click the icon to adjust power management settings using the Power Management Wizard. Right-Clicking the QuickSet Icon Right-click the icon to perform the following tasks:

Enable or disable the Brightness Meter on the screen.

Enable or disable the Volume Meter on the screen.

Turn wireless activity on or off.

View Dell QuickSet Help.

View the version and copyright date of the QuickSet program installed on your computer. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhFC90.htm 1/13/2004 Dell QuickSet Features Page 2 of 2 For more information about QuickSet, right-click the icon in the taskbar and click Help. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhFC90.htm 1/13/2004 About Microsoft Windows XP Page 1 of 4 About Microsoft Windows XP Help and Support Center Switching to Classic View Desktop Cleanup Wizard Files and Settings Transfer Wizard Program Compatibility Wizard User Accounts and Fast User Switching Home and Small Office Networking Internet Connection Firewall Help and Support Center The Help and Support Center provides help with the Windows XP operating system and other support and educational tools. To access the Help and Support Center, click the Start button and click Help and Support. Switching to Classic View You may change the appearance of the Control Panel, the Start menu, and the Windows desktop to the classic view of earlier Windows operating systems. Control Panel The Control Panel presents information as task-oriented categories. If you are accustomed to performing a particular task with the icon-oriented classic Control Panel, you can switch to the classic icon view:

1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Switch to Classic View or Switch to Category View in the upper-left area of the Control Panel window. Start Menu 1. Right-click the empty area on the taskbar. 2. Click Properties. 3. Click the Start Menu tab. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh4D6E.htm 1/13/2004 About Microsoft Windows XP Page 2 of 4 4. Select Classic Start Menu and click OK. Window and Button Appearance 1. Right-click anywhere on the main desktop screen and click Properties. 2. Click the Appearance tab. 3. From the Windows and buttons drop-down menu, select Windows Classic style. 4. To customize color, font, and other classic desktop options, click Advanced. 5. When you have completed your appearance selections, click OK. Desktop Cleanup Wizard By default, the Desktop Cleanup Wizard moves programs that are not frequently used to a designated folder 7 days after you first start your computer and every 60 days after that. The appearance of the Start menu changes as programs are moved. To turn off the Desktop Cleanup Wizard:

1. Right-click an empty spot on the desktop, and click Properties. 2. Click the Desktop tab and click Customize Desktop. 3. Click Run Desktop Cleanup Wizard every 60 days to remove the check mark. 4. Click OK. To run the Desktop Cleanup Wizard at any time:

1. Right-click an empty spot on the desktop, and click Properties. 2. Click the Desktop tab and click Customize Desktop. 3. Click Clean Desktop Now. 4. When the Desktop Cleanup Wizard appears, click Next. 5. In the list of shortcuts, deselect any shortcuts you want to leave on the desktop, and then click Next. 6. Click Finish to remove the shortcuts and close the wizard. Files and Settings Transfer Wizard The Files and Settings Transfer Wizard allows you to transfer files and settings from one computer to another

(for instance, when upgrading to a new computer), even if the old computer is running an earlier operating system. The time required to collect and transfer data depends on the amount of data collected. Times can vary from just a few minutes to several hours. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh4D6E.htm 1/13/2004 About Microsoft Windows XP Page 3 of 4 You can transfer the data to the new computer over a network or direct serial connection, or you can store it on a removable medium such as a floppy disk or writable CD. If a CD drive is not available, the wizard allows you to create a wizard disk to run on your old computer. For more information, see the Help and Support Center. Program Compatibility Wizard If you encounter problems running a program designed for an earlier Windows operating system, you can use the Program Compatibility Wizard to help resolve the problem. The Program Compatibility Wizard allows you to configure a program to run in an environment closer to that of Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Millennium Edition (Me), Windows NT 4.0 with Service Pack 5, or Windows 2000. If you experience problems with your operating system or other programs after performing an installation, you can use the system restore feature to return your computer to a previous stable condition. For more information, see the Help and Support Center. User Accounts and Fast User Switching Fast User Switching allows multiple users to access the computer. After you log on to the computer with your specific settings, including the desktop and various programs, other users can log on to the computer without requiring you to first log off. New users log on and switch from your session to their own. New users can run their desktop and programs without interfering with yours. You can switch back to your desktop and programs with the original settings. For more information, see the Help and Support Center. Special Considerations With Fast User Switching

Computers with low memory configurations can experience problems. The computer uses memory to keep your programs running in the background while a second user is logged on, which can cause the computer to run slowly. Fast User Switching is off by default on computers with less than 128 MB of RAM.

Fast User Switching is disabled in Windows XP Professional when the computer is a member of a computer domain. Home and Small Office Networking The Network Setup Wizard provides online documentation and support for setting up a home or small office network. The new wizard automatically enables the personal firewall (see "Internet Connection Firewall"). The Network Setup Wizard includes a checklist and steps to guide you through the process of sharing resources, such as files, printers, or an Internet connection, between computers in a home or small office. For more information, see the Help and Support Center. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh4D6E.htm 1/13/2004 About Microsoft Windows XP Page 4 of 4 Internet Connection Firewall The Internet Connection Firewall provides basic protection from unauthorized access to the computer while the computer is connected to the Internet. The firewall is automatically enabled when you run the Network Setup Wizard. When the firewall is enabled for a network connection, the firewall icon appears with a red background in the Network Connections portion of the Control Panel. Note that enabling the Internet Connection Firewall does not reduce the need for virus-checking software. For more information, see the Help and Support Center. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh4D6E.htm 1/13/2004 About Your Computer Page 1 of 11 About Your Computer Front View Left View Right View Back View Bottom View Front View 1 2 3 4 5 display power button device status lights keyboard display latch 6 7 8 9 speakers touch pad buttons touch pad keyboard status lights file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5F5A.htm 1/13/2004 About Your Computer Page 2 of 11 display For more information about your display, see "Using the Display."

power button Press the power button to turn on the computer or exit a power management mode. NOTICE: To avoid losing data, turn off your computer by performing a Microsoft Windows operating system shutdown rather than by pressing the power button. If the computer stops responding, press and hold the power button until the computer turns off completely

(which may take several seconds). device status lights Turns on when you turn on the computer and blinks when the computer is in a power management mode. Turns on when the computer reads or writes data. NOTICE: To avoid loss of data, never turn off the computer while the light is flashing. Turns on steadily or blinks to indicate battery charge status. Turns on when Bluetooth is enabled. To enable or disable Bluetooth, press <Fn><F2>. NOTE: Bluetooth is an optional feature on your computer, so the Bluetooth with your computer. For more information, see the documentation that came with your Bluetooth wireless technology. icon turns on only if you ordered If the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, the light operates as follows:

Solid green: The battery is charging.

Flashing green: The battery is almost fully charged. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5F5A.htm 1/13/2004 About Your Computer Page 3 of 11 If the computer is running on a battery, the light operates as follows:

Off: The battery is adequately charged (or the computer is turned off).

Flashing orange: The battery charge is low. Solid orange: The battery charge is critically low. keyboard The keyboard includes a numeric keypad as well as the Windows logo key information on supported keyboard shortcuts, see "Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad."

. For display latch Keeps the display closed. speakers To adjust the volume of the integrated speakers, press the volume control buttons, mute button, or volume-control keyboard shortcuts. For more information, see "Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad."

touch pad buttons Provide the functionality of a mouse. See "Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad" for more information. touch pad Provides the functionality of a mouse. See "Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad" for more information. keyboard status lights The green lights located above the keyboard indicate the following:

Turns on when the numeric keypad is enabled. Turns on when the uppercase letter function is enabled. Turns on when the scroll lock function is enabled. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5F5A.htm 1/13/2004 About Your Computer Page 4 of 11 Left View 1 air vents (2) 4 infrared sensor 2 IEEE 1394 connector 5 audio connectors (2) 3 PC Card slot 6 security cable slot air vents The computer uses an internal fan to create airflow through the vents, which prevents the computer from overheating. NOTE: The computer turns on the fan when the computer gets hot. Fan noise is normal and does not indicate a problem with the fans or the computer. CAUTION: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air vents. Do not store your Dell computer in a low-airflow environment, such as a closed briefcase, while it is running. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. PC Card slot Supports one PC Card, such as a modem or network adapter. For more information, see

"Using PC Cards."

infrared sensor Lets you transfer files from your computer to another infrared-compatible device without using cable connections. IEEE 1394 connector Use to attach devices supporting IEEE 1394 high-speed transfer rates, such as some digital video cameras. When you receive your computer, the sensor is disabled. You can use the system setup program to enable the sensor. For information on transferring data, see Windows Help, the Help and Support Center, or the documentation that came with your infrared-compatible device. audio connectors file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5F5A.htm 1/13/2004 About Your Computer Page 5 of 11 Attach a microphone to the connector. Attach headphones or speakers to the connector. security cable slot Lets you attach a commercially available antitheft device to the computer. For more information, see the instructions included with the device. NOTICE: Before you buy an antitheft device, ensure that it will work with the security cable slot. Right View file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5F5A.htm 1/13/2004 About Your Computer Page 6 of 11 1 security cable slot 2 module bay 3 device latch release security cable slot Lets you attach a commercially available antitheft device to the computer. For more information, see the instructions included with the device. NOTICE: Before you buy an antitheft device, ensure that it will work with the security cable slot. module bay You can install devices such as an optical drive or a Dell TravelLite module in the module bay. For more information, see "Using the Module Bay."

device latch release Releases the module bay device. See "Using the Module Bay" for instructions. Back View file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5F5A.htm 1/13/2004 About Your Computer Page 7 of 11 CAUTION: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air vents. Do not store your computer in a low- airflow environment, such as a closed briefcase, while it is running. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. 1 USB connectors (2) 6 video connector 2 S-video TV-out connector 7 serial connector 3 modem connector (RJ-11) (optional) 8 AC adapter connector 4 network connector (RJ-45) 9 air vents 5 parallel connector USB connectors Connect USB devices, such as a mouse, keyboard, or printer. You can also connect the optional floppy drive directly to a USB connector using the optional floppy-drive cable. S-video TV-out connector Connects your computer to a TV. For more information, see "Connecting a Television to the Computer."

file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5F5A.htm 1/13/2004 About Your Computer Page 8 of 11 modem connector (RJ-11) (optional) If you ordered the optional internal modem, connect the telephone line to the modem connector. For information on using the modem, see the online modem documentation supplied with your computer. See "Finding Information for Your Computer."

network connector (RJ-45) NOTICE: The network connector is slightly larger than the modem connector. To avoid damaging the computer, do not plug a telephone line in to the network connector. Connects the computer to a network. The green and yellow lights next to the connector indicate activity for both wired and wireless network communications. For information on using the network adapter, see the device user's guide supplied with your computer. See "Finding Information for Your Computer."

parallel connector Connects a parallel device, such as a printer. video connector Connects an external monitor. For more information, see "Using the Display."

serial connector Connects serial devices, such as a mouse or handheld device. AC adapter connector Attach an AC adapter to the computer. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5F5A.htm 1/13/2004 About Your Computer Page 9 of 11 The AC adapter converts AC power to the DC power required by the computer. You can connect the AC adapter with your computer turned either on or off. CAUTION: The AC adapter works with electrical outlets worldwide. However, power connectors and power strips vary among countries. Using an incompatible cable or improperly connecting the cable to the power strip or electrical outlet may cause fire or equipment damage. NOTICE: When you disconnect the AC adapter cable from the computer, grasp the connector, not the cable itself, and pull firmly but gently to avoid damaging the cable. air vents The computer uses an internal fan to create airflow through the vents, which prevents the computer from overheating. NOTE: The computer turns on the fan when the computer gets hot. Fan noise is normal and does not indicate a problem with the fan or the computer. CAUTION: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air vents. Do not store your computer in a low- airflow environment, such as a closed briefcase, while it is running. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. Bottom View file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5F5A.htm 1/13/2004 About Your Computer Page 10 of 11 1 memory module cover 5 docking device slot 2 battery-bay latch release 6 fan 3 battery charge gauge 7 Mini PCI card cover 4 battery 8 hard drive memory module cover Covers the compartment that contains the memory module(s). See "Adding and Replacing Parts."

battery-bay latch release Releases the battery. See "Using a Battery" for instructions. battery charge gauge Provides information on the battery charge. See "Using a Battery."

battery When a battery is installed, you can use the computer without connecting the computer to an electrical outlet. See "Using a Battery."

docking device slot Lets you attach your computer to a docking device. See the documentation that came with your docking device for additional information. fan The computer uses an internal fan to create airflow through the vents, which prevents the computer from overheating. NOTE: The computer turns on the fan when the computer gets hot. Fan noise is normal and does not indicate a problem with the fans or the computer. CAUTION: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air vents. Do not store your computer in a low- airflow environment, such as a closed briefcase, while it is running. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5F5A.htm 1/13/2004 About Your Computer Page 11 of 11 Mini PCI card cover Covers the compartment that contains the Mini PCI card. See "Adding and Replacing Parts."

hard drive Stores software and data. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5F5A.htm 1/13/2004 Finding Information for Your Computer Page 1 of 3 Finding Information for Your Computer What are you looking for?

Find It Here

A diagnostic program for my computer

Drivers for my computer

My computer documentation

My device documentation Drivers and Utilities CD (also known as the ResourceCD) Documentation and drivers are already installed on your computer. You can use the CD to reinstall drivers, run the Dell Diagnostics, or access your documentation. Readme files may be included on your CD to provide last-minute updates about technical changes to your computer or advanced technical-reference material for technicians or experienced users. Dell System Information Guide

How to set up my computer

Warranty information

Safety instructions

How to remove and replace parts

Technical specifications

How to configure system settings

How to troubleshoot and solve problems NOTE: This document is available as a PDF at support.dell.com. User's Guide Windows XP Help and Support Center 1. Click the Start button and click Help and Support. 2. Click User's and system guides and click User's guides. Microsoft Windows 2000

Service Tag and Express Service Double-click the User's Guides icon on your desktop. Service Tag and Microsoft Windows License file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5B40.htm 1/13/2004 Finding Information for Your Computer Page 2 of 3 Code

Microsoft Windows License Label These labels are located on your computer.

Use the Service Tag to identify your computer when you use support.dell.com or contact technical support.

Enter the Express Service Code to direct your call when contacting technical support. The Express Service Code is not available in all countries.

Use the number on the Microsoft Windows License Label if you reinstall your operating system. Dell Support Website support.dell.com The Dell Support website provides several online tools, including:

Solutions Troubleshooting hints and tips, articles from technicians, and online courses

Community Online discussion with other Dell customers

Upgrades Upgrade information for components, such as memory, the hard drive, and the operating system

Customer Care Contact information, order status, warranty, and repair information

Downloads Drivers, patches, and software updates

Reference Computer documentation, product specifications, and white papers Dell Premier Support Website premiersupport.dell.com The Dell Premier Support website is customized for corporate, government, and education customers. This website may not be available in all regions. Windows Help and Support Center 1. Click the Start button and click Help and Support. 2. Type a word or phrase that describes your problem and click the arrow icon. 3. Click the topic that describes your problem. 4. Follow the instructions on the screen.

Latest drivers for my computer

Answers to technical service and support questions

Online discussions with other users and technical support

Documentation for my computer

Service call status and support history

Top technical issues for my computer

Frequently asked questions

File downloads

Details on my computer configuration

Service contract for my computer

How to use Windows XP

Documentation for my computer

Documentation for devices (such as a modem)

How to reinstall my operating system Operating System CD The operating system is already installed on your computer. To resintall your operating system, use the Operating System CD. See your User's Guide for operating system reinstallation instructions. After you reinstall your operating system, use the Drivers and Utilities CD to file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5B40.htm 1/13/2004 Finding Information for Your Computer Page 3 of 3 reinstall drivers for the devices that came with your computer. Your operating system product key label is located on your computer. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5B40.htm 1/13/2004

 

 

tp.htm Page 1 of 1 Dell User's Guide Notes, Notices, and Cautions NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. Abbreviations and Acronyms For a complete list of abbreviations and acronyms, see the Glossary. If you purchased a Dell n Series computer, any references in this document to Microsoft Windows operating systems are not applicable. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. 2003 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, Latitude, Dell Precision, OptiPlex, Inspiron, Dimension, Dell TravelLite, and DellNet are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks and Intel SpeedStep and Centrino are trademarks of Intel Corporation; Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation; Bluetooth is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and is used by Dell Inc. under license; ENERGY STAR is a registered trademark of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Dell Inc. has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Model PP10L September 2003 P/N M1794 Rev. A00 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh985E.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary Glossary Page 1 of 14 A B C D E F G H I K L M N O P R S T U V W X Z Terms in this Glossary are provided for informational purposes only and may or may not describe features included with your particular computer. A AC alternating current The form of electricity that powers your computer when you plug the AC adapter power cable in to an electrical outlet. ACPI advanced configuration and power interface A power management specification that enables Microsoft Windows operating systems to put a computer in standby or hibernate mode to conserve the amount of electrical power allocated to each device attached to the computer. AGP accelerated graphics port A dedicated graphics port that allows system memory to be used for video-related tasks. AGP delivers a smooth, true-color video image because of the faster interface between the video circuitry and the computer memory. antivirus software A program designed to identify, quarantine, and/or delete viruses from your computer. APR advanced port replicator A docking device that allows you to conveniently use a monitor, keyboard, mouse, and other devices with your portable computer. ASF alert standards format A standard to define a mechanism for reporting hardware and software alerts to a management console. ASF is designed to be platform- and operating system-independent. B backup A copy of a program or data file on a floppy disk, CD, or hard drive. As a precaution, back up the data files from your hard drive regularly. battery An internal power source used to operate portable computers when not connected to an AC adapter and an electrical outlet. battery life span The length of time (years) during which a portable computer battery is able to be depleted and recharged. battery operating time The length of time (minutes or hours) that a portable computer battery holds a charge while powering the computer. BIOS basic input/output system A program (or utility) that serves as an interface between the computer hardware and the operating system. Unless you understand what effect the settings have on the computer, do not change the settings for this program. Also referred to as the system setup program. bit The smallest unit of data interpreted by your computer. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary Page 2 of 14 Bluetooth A wireless technology standard for short-range (9 m [29 feet]) networking devices that allows for enabled devices to automatically recognize each other. boot sequence Specifies the order of the devices from which the computer attempts to boot. bootable CD A CD that you can use to start your computer. In case your hard drive is damaged or your computer has a virus, ensure that you always have a bootable CD or floppy disk available. Your Drivers and Utilities or Resource CD is a bootable CD. bootable disk A disk that you can use to start your computer. In case your hard drive is damaged or your computer has a virus, ensure that you always have a bootable CD or floppy disk available. bps bits per second The standard unit for measuring data transmission speed. BTU British thermal unit A measurement of heat output. bus A communication pathway between the components in your computer. bus speed The speed, given in MHz, that indicates how fast a bus can transfer information. byte The basic data unit used by your computer. A byte is usually equal to 8 bits. C C Celsius A temperature measurement system where 0 is the freezing point and 100 is the boiling point of water. cache A special high-speed storage mechanism which can be either a reserved section of main memory or an independent high-speed storage device. The cache enhances the efficiency of many microprocessor operations. L1 cache Primary cache stored inside the microprocessor. L2 cache Secondary cache which can either be external to the microprocessor or incorporated into the microprocessor architecture. carnet An international customs document that facilitates temporary imports into foreign countries. Also known as a merchandise passport. CD compact disc An optical form of storage media, typically used for audio and software programs. CD drive A drive that uses optical technology to read data from CDs. CD player The software used to play music CDs. The CD player displays a window with buttons that you use to play a CD. CD-R CD recordable A recordable version of a CD. Data can be recorded only once onto a CD-R. Once recorded, the data cannot be erased or written over. CD-RW CD rewritable A rewritable version of a CD. Data can be written to a CD-RW disc, and then erased and written over (rewritten). file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary Page 3 of 14 CD-RW drive A drive that can read CDs and write to CD-RW (rewritable CDs) and CD-R (recordable CDs) discs. You can write to CD-RW discs multiple times, but you can write to CD-R discs only once. CD-RW/DVD drive A drive, sometimes referred to as a combo drive, that can read CDs and DVDs and write to CD-RW (rewritable CDs) and CD-R (recordable CDs) discs. You can write to CD-RW discs multiple times, but you can write to CD-R discs only once. clock speed The speed, given in MHz, that indicates how fast computer components that are connected to the system bus operate. COA Certificate of Authenticity The Windows alpha-numeric code located on a sticker on your computer. You may need the COA to complete the operating system setup or reinstallation. Also referred to as the Product Key or Product ID. Control Panel A Windows utility that allows you to modify operating system and hardware settings, such as display settings. controller A chip that controls the transfer of data between the microprocessor and memory or between the microprocessor and devices. CRIMM continuity rambus in-line memory module A special module that has no memory chips and is used to fill unused RIMM slots. cursor The marker on a display or screen that shows where the next keyboard, touch pad, or mouse action will occur. It often is a blinking solid line, an underline character, or a small arrow. D DDR SDRAM double-data-rate SDRAM A type of SDRAM that doubles the data burst cycle, improving system performance. device Hardware such as a disk drive, printer, or keyboard that is installed in or connected to your computer. device driver See driver. DIN connector A round, six-pin connector that conforms to DIN (Deutsche Industrie-Norm) standards; it is typically used to connect PS/2 keyboard or mouse cable connectors. disk striping A technique for spreading data over multiple disk drives. Disk striping can speed up operations that retrieve data from disk storage. Computers that use disk striping generally allow the user to select the data unit size or stripe width. DMA direct memory access A channel that allows certain types of data transfer between RAM and a device to bypass the microprocessor. docking device See APR. DMTF Distributed Management Task Force A consortium of hardware and software companies who develop management standards for distributed desktop, network, enterprise, and Internet environments. domain A group of computers, programs, and devices on a network that are administered as a unit with common rules and procedures for use by a specific group of users. A user logs on to the domain to gain file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary access to the resources. Page 4 of 14 DRAM dynamic random-access memory Memory that stores information in integrated circuits containing capacitors. driver Software that allows the operating system to control a device such as a printer. Many devices do not work properly if the correct driver is not installed in the computer. DSL Digital Subscriber Line A technology that provides a constant, high-speed Internet connection through an analog telephone line. dual display mode A display setting that allows you to use a second monitor as an extension of your display. Also referred to as extended display mode. DVD digital versatile disc A disc usually used to store movies. DVDs are double-sided, whereas CDs are single-sided. DVD drives read most CD media as well. DVD drive A drive that uses optical technology to read data from DVDs and CDs. DVD player The software used to watch DVD movies. The DVD player displays a window with buttons that you use to watch a movie. DVD+RW DVD rewritable A rewritable version of a DVD. Data can be written to a DVD+RW disc, and then erased and written over (rewritten). (DVD+RW technology is different from DVD-RW technology.) DVD+RW drive A drive that can read DVDs and most CD media and write to DVD+RW (rewritable DVDs) discs. DVI digital video interface A standard for digital transmission between a computer and a digital video display; the DVI adapter works through the computer's integrated graphics. E ECC error checking and correction A type of memory that includes special circuitry for testing the accuracy of data as it passes in and out of memory. ECP extended capabilities port A parallel connector design that provides improved bidirectional data transmission. Similar to EPP, ECP uses direct memory access to transfer data and often improves performance. EIDE enhanced integrated device electronics An improved version of the IDE interface for hard drives and CD drives. EMI electromagnetic interference Electrical interference caused by electromagnetic radiation. ENERGY STAR Environmental Protection Agency requirements that decrease the overall consumption of electricity. EPP enhanced parallel port A parallel connector design that provides bidirectional data transmission. ESD electrostatic discharge A rapid discharge of static electricity. ESD can damage integrated circuits found in computer and communications equipment. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary Page 5 of 14 expansion card A circuit board that installs in an expansion slot on the system board in some computers, expanding the capabilities of the computer. Examples include video, modem, and sound cards. expansion slot A connector on the system board (in some computers) where you insert an expansion card, connecting it to the system bus. Express Service Code A numeric code located on a sticker on your Dell computer. Use the Express Service Code when contacting Dell for assistance. Express Service Code service may not be available in some countries. extended display mode A display setting that allows you to use a second monitor as an extension of your display. Also referred to as dual display mode. NOTE: If your computer has two PC Card connectors, always install extended PC Cards in the top connector. extended PC Card A PC Card that extends beyond the edge of the PC Card slot when installed. NOTICE: Always remove an extended PC Card before packing the computer or traveling. If something strikes the exposed end of the PC Card, the system board may be damaged. F Fahrenheit A temperature measurement system where 32 is the freezing point and 212 is the boiling point of water. FCC Federal Communications Commission A U.S. agency responsible for enforcing communications-

related regulations that state how much radiation computers and other electronic equipment can emit. floppy drive A disk drive that can read and write to floppy disks. folder A term used to describe space on a disk or drive where files are organized and grouped. Files in a folder can be viewed and ordered in various ways, such as alphabetically, by date, and by size. format The process that prepares a drive or disk for file storage. When a drive or disk is formatted, the existing information on it is lost. FSB front side bus The data path and physical interface between the microprocessor and RAM. FTP file transfer protocol A standard Internet protocol used to exchange files between computers connected to the Internet. G G gravity A measurement of weight and force. GB gigabyte A measurement of data storage that equals 1024 MB (1,073,741,824 bytes). When used to refer to hard drive storage, the term is often rounded to 1,000,000,000 bytes. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary Page 6 of 14 GHz gigahertz A measurement of frequency that equals one thousand million Hz, or one thousand MHz. The speeds for computer microprocessors, buses, and interfaces are often measured in GHz. graphics mode A video mode that can be defined as x horizontal pixels by y vertical pixels by z colors. Graphics modes can display an unlimited variety of shapes and fonts. GUI graphical user interface Software that interacts with the user by means of menus, windows, and icons. Most programs that operate on the Windows operating systems are GUIs. H hard drive A drive that reads and writes data on a hard disk. The terms hard drive and hard disk are often used interchangeably. heat sink A metal plate on some microprocessors that helps dissipate heat. help file A file that contains descriptive or instructional information about a product. Some help files are associated with a particular program, such as Help in Microsoft Word. Other help files function as stand-alone reference sources. Help files typically have a filename extension of .hlp or .chm. hibernate mode A power management mode that saves everything in memory to a reserved space on the hard drive and then turns off the computer. When you restart the computer, the memory information that was saved to the hard drive is automatically restored. HTML hypertext markup language A set of codes inserted into an Internet web page intended for display on an Internet browser. HTTP hypertext transfer protocol A protocol for exchanging files between computers connected to the Internet. Hz hertz A unit of frequency measurement that equals 1 cycle per second. Computers and electronic devices are often measured in kilohertz (kHz), megahertz (MHz), gigahertz (GHz), or terahertz (THz). I IC Industry Canada The Canadian regulatory body responsible for regulating emissions from electronic equipment, much as the FCC does in the United States. IC integrated circuit A semiconductor wafer, or chip, on which thousands or millions of tiny electronic components are fabricated for use in computer, audio, and video equipment. IDE integrated device electronics An interface for mass storage devices in which the controller is integrated into the hard drive or CD drive. IEEE 1394 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. A high-performance serial bus used to connect IEEE 1394-compatible devices, such as digital cameras and DVD players, to the computer. infrared sensor A port that allows you to transfer data between the computer and infrared-compatible devices without using a cable connection. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary Page 7 of 14 integrated Usually refers to components that are physically located on the computer's system board. Also referred to as built-in. I/O input/output An operation or device that enters and extracts data from your computer. Keyboards and printers are I/O devices. I/O address An address in RAM that is associated with a specific device (such as a serial connector, parallel connector, or expansion slot) and allows the microprocessor to communicate with that device. IRQ interrupt request An electronic pathway assigned to a specific device so that the device can communicate with the microprocessor. Each device connection must be assigned an IRQ. Although two devices can share the same IRQ assignment, you cannot operate both devices simultaneously. ISP Internet service provider A company that allows you to access its host server to connect directly to the Internet, send and receive e-mail, and access websites. The ISP typically provides you with a software package, user name, and access phone numbers for a fee. K Kb kilobit A unit of data that equals 1024 bits. A measurement of the capacity of memory integrated circuits. KB kilobyte A unit of data that equals 1024 bytes but is often referred to as 1000 bytes. keyboard shortcut A command requiring you to press multiple keys at the same time. Also referred to as a key combination. kHz kilohertz A measurement of frequency that equals 1000 Hz. L LAN local area network A computer network covering a small area. A LAN usually is confined to a building or a few nearby buildings. A LAN can be connected to another LAN over any distance through telephone lines and radio waves to form a wide area network (WAN). LCD liquid crystal display The technology used by portable computer and flat-panel displays. LED light-emitting diode An electronic component that emits light to indicate the status of the computer. local bus A data bus that provides a fast throughput for devices to the microprocessor. LPT line print terminal The designation for a parallel connection to a printer or other parallel device. M Mb megabit A measurement of memory chip capacity that equals 1024 Kb. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary Page 8 of 14 Mbps megabits per second One million bits per second. This measurement is typically used for transmission speeds for networks and modems. MB megabyte A measurement of data storage that equals 1,048,576 bytes. 1 MB equals 1024 KB. When used to refer to hard drive storage, the term is often rounded to 1,000,000 bytes. MB/sec megabytes per second One million bytes per second. This measurement is typically used for data transfer ratings. memory A temporary data storage area inside your computer. Because the data in memory is not permanent, it is recommended that you frequently save your files while you are working on them, and always save your files before you shut down the computer. Your computer can contain several different forms of memory, such as RAM, ROM, and video memory. Frequently, the word memory is used as a synonym for RAM. memory address A specific location where data is temporarily stored in RAM. memory mapping The process by which the computer assigns memory addresses to physical locations at start-up. Devices and software can then identify information that the microprocessor can access. memory module A small circuit board containing memory chips, which connects to the system board. MHz megahertz A measure of frequency that equals 1 million cycles per second. The speeds for computer microprocessors, buses, and interfaces are often measured in MHz. microprocessor A computer chip that interprets and executes program instructions. Sometimes the microprocessor is referred to as the processor or the CPU (central processing unit). modem A device that allows your computer to communicate with other computers over analog telephone lines. Three types of modems include: external, PC Card, and internal. You typically use your modem to connect to the Internet and exchange e-mail. module bay A bay that supports devices such as optical drives, a second battery, or a Dell TravelLite module. monitor The high-resolution TV-like device that displays computer output. mouse A pointing device that controls the movement of the cursor on your screen. Typically you roll the mouse over a hard, flat surface to move the pointer or cursor on your screen. ms millisecond A measure of time that equals one thousandth of a second. Access times of storage devices are often measured in ms. N network adapter A chip that provides network capabilities. A computer may include a network adapter on its system board, or it may contain a PC Card with an adapter on it. A network adapter is also referred to as a NIC (network interface controller). NIC See network adapter. notification area The section of the Windows taskbar that contains icons for providing quick access to programs and computer functions, such as the clock, volume control, and print status. Also referred to as file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary system tray. Page 9 of 14 ns nanosecond A measure of time that equals one billionth of a second. NVRAM nonvolatile random access memory A type of memory that stores data when the computer is turned off or loses its external power source. NVRAM is used for maintaining computer configuration information such as date, time, and other system setup options that you can set. O Optical Drive A drive that uses optical technology to read or write data from CDs, DVDs, or DVD+RWs. Example of optical drives include CD drives, DVD drives, CD-RW drives, and CD-RW/DVD combo drives. P parallel connector An I/O port often used to connect a parallel printer to your computer. Also referred to as an LPT port. partition A physical storage area on a hard drive that is assigned to one or more logical storage areas known as logical drives. Each partition can contain multiple logical drives. PC Card A removable I/O card adhering to the PCMCIA standard. Modems and network adapters are common types of PC Cards. PCI peripheral component interconnect PCI is a local bus that supports 32-and 64-bit data paths, providing a high-speed data path between the microprocessor and devices such as video, drives, and networks. PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association The organization that establishes standards for PC Cards. PIN personal identification number A sequence of numerals and/or letters used to restrict unauthorized access to computer networks and other secure systems. PIO programmed input/output A method of transferring data between two devices through the microprocessor as part of the data path. pixel A single point on a display screen. Pixels are arranged in rows and columns to create an image. A video resolution, such as 800 x 600, is expressed as the number of pixels across by the number of pixels up and down. Plug-and-Play The ability of the computer to automatically configure devices. Plug and Play provides automatic installation, configuration, and compatibility with existing hardware if the BIOS, operating system, and all devices are Plug and Play compliant. POST power-on self-test Diagnostics programs, loaded automatically by the BIOS, that perform basic tests on the major computer components, such as memory, hard drives, and video. If no problems are detected during POST, the computer continues the start-up. program Any software that processes data for you, including spreadsheet, word processor, database, and file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary Page 10 of 14 game packages. Programs require an operating system to run. PS/2 personal system/2 A type of connector for attaching a PS/2-compatible keyboard, mouse, or keypad. PXE pre-boot execution environment A WfM (Wired for Management) standard that allows networked computers that do not have an operating system to be configured and started remotely. R RAID redundant array of independent disks A system of two or more drives working together for performance and fault tolerance. RAID drives are typically used on servers and high-end PCs. The three most common RAID levels are 0, 3, and 5:

Level 0: Provides data striping but no redundancy. Level 0 improves performance but does not provide fault tolerance.

Level 3: Same as Level 0, but also reserves one dedicated drive for error correction data, providing good performance and some level of fault tolerance.

Level 5: Provides data striping at the byte level and also stripe error correction information, resulting in excellent performance and good fault tolerance. RAM random-access memory The primary temporary storage area for program instructions and data. Any information stored in RAM is lost when you shut down your computer. readme file A text file included with a software package or hardware product. Typically, readme files provide installation information and describe new product enhancements or corrections that have not yet been documented. read-Only Data and/or files you can view but cannot edit or delete. A file can have read-only status if:

It resides on a physically write-protected floppy disk, CD, or DVD.

It is located on a network in a directory and the system administrator has assigned rights only to specific individuals. refresh rate The frequency, measured in Hz, at which your screen's horizontal lines are recharged

(sometimes also referred to as its vertical frequency). The higher the refresh rate, the less video flicker can be seen by the human eye. resolution The sharpness and clarity of an image produced by a printer or displayed on a monitor. The higher the resolution, the sharper the image. RFI radio frequency interference Interference that is generated at typical radio frequencies, in the range of 10 kHz to 100,000 MHz. Radio frequencies are at the lower end of the electromagnetic frequency spectrum and are more likely to have interference than the higher frequency radiations, such as infrared and light. ROM read-only memory Memory that stores data and programs that cannot be deleted or written to by the computer. ROM, unlike RAM, retains its contents after you shut down your computer. Some programs essential to the operation of your computer reside in ROM. RPM revolutions per minute The number of rotations that occur per minute. Hard drive speed is often measured in rpm. RTC real time clock Battery-powered clock on the system board that keeps the date and time after you file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary shut down the computer. Page 11 of 14 RTCRST real-time clock reset A jumper on the system board of some computers that can often be used for troubleshooting problems. S ScanDisk A Microsoft utility that checks files, folders, and the hard disk's surface for errors. ScanDisk often runs when you restart the computer after it has stopped responding. SDRAM synchronous dynamic random-access memory A type of DRAM that is synchronized with the optimal clock speed of the microprocessor. serial connector An I/O port often used to connect devices such as a handheld digital device or digital camera to your computer. Service Tag A bar code label on your computer that identifies your computer when you access Dell Support at support.dell.com or when you call Dell for customer service or technical support. setup program A program that is used to install and configure hardware and software. The setup.exe or install.exe program comes with most Windows software packages. Setup program differs from system setup program. shortcut An icon that provides quick access to frequently used programs, files, folders, and drives. When you place a shortcut on your Windows desktop and double-click the icon, you can open its corresponding folder or file without having to find it first. Shortcut icons do not change the location of files. If you delete a shortcut, the original file is not affected. Also, you can rename a shortcut icon. shutdown The process of closing windows and exiting programs, exiting the operating system, and turning off your computer. You can lose data if you turn off your computer before completing a shutdown. smart card A card that is embedded with a microprocessor and a memory chip. Smart cards can be used to authenticate a user on computers equipped for smart cards. software Anything that can be stored electronically, such as computer files or programs. S/PDIF Sony/Philips Digital Interface An audio transfer file format that allows the transfer of audio from one file to another without converting it to and from an analog format, which could degrade the quality of the file. standby mode A power management mode that shuts down all unnecessary computer operations to save energy. surge protectors Prevent voltage spikes, such as those that may occur during an electrical storm, from entering the computer through the electrical outlet. Surge protectors do not protect against lightning strikes or against brownouts, which occur when the voltage drops more than 20 percent below the normal AC-line voltage level. Network connections cannot be protected by surge protectors. Always disconnect the network cable from the network connector during electrical storms. SVGA super-video graphics array A video standard for video cards and controllers. Typical SVGA resolutions are 800 x 600 and 1024 x 768. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary Page 12 of 14 The number of colors and resolution that a program displays depends on the capabilities of the monitor, the video controller and its drivers, and the amount of video memory installed in the computer. S-video TV-out A connector used to attach a TV or digital audio device to the computer. SXGA super-extended graphics array A video standard for video cards and controllers that supports resolutions up to 1280 x 1024. SXGA+ super-extended graphics array plus A video standard for video cards and controllers that supports resolutions up to 1400 x 1050. system board The main circuit board in your computer. Also known as the motherboard. system setup program A utility that serves as an interface between the computer hardware and the operating system. System setup allows you to configure user-selectable options in the BIOS, such as date and time or system password. Unless you understand what effect the settings have on the computer, do not change the settings for this program. system tray See notification area. T TAPI telephony application programming interface Enables Windows programs to operate with a wide variety of telephony devices, including voice, data, fax, and video. text editor A program used to create and edit files that contain only text; for example, Windows Notepad uses a text editor. Text editors do not usually provide word wrap or formatting functionality (the option to underline, change fonts, and so on). travel module A plastic device designed to fit inside the module bay of a portable computer to reduce the weight of the computer. U UPS uninterruptible power supply A backup power source used when the electrical power fails or drops to an unacceptable voltage level. A UPS keeps a computer running for a limited amount of time when there is no electrical power. UPS systems typically provide surge suppression and may also provide voltage regulation. Small UPS systems provide battery power for a few minutes to enable you to shut down your computer. USB universal serial bus A hardware interface for a low-speed device such as a USB-compatible keyboard, mouse, joystick, scanner, set of speakers, printer, broadband devices (DSL and cable modems), imaging devices, or storage devices. Devices are plugged directly in to a 4-pin socket on your computer or in to a multi-port hub that plugs in to your computer. USB devices can be connected and disconnected while the computer is turned on, and they can also be daisy-chained together. UTP unshielded twisted pair Describes a type of cable used in most telephone networks and some computer networks. Pairs of unshielded wires are twisted to protect against electromagnetic interference, rather than relying on a metal sheath around each pair of wires to protect against interference. UXGA ultra extended graphics array A video standard for video cards and controllers that supports file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary Page 13 of 14 resolutions up to 1600 x 1200. V video controller The circuitry on a video card or on the system board (in computers with an integrated video controller) that provides the video capabilitiesin combination with the monitorfor your computer. video memory Memory that consists of memory chips dedicated to video functions. Video memory is usually faster than system memory. The amount of video memory installed primarily influences the number of colors that a program can display. video mode A mode that describes how text and graphics are displayed on a monitor. Graphics-based software, such as Windows operating systems, displays in video modes that can be defined as x horizontal pixels by y vertical pixels by z colors. Character-based software, such as text editors, displays in video modes that can be defined as x columns by y rows of characters. video resolution See resolution. virus A program that is designed to inconvenience you or to destroy data stored on your computer. A virus program moves from one computer to another through an infected disk, software downloaded from the Internet, or e-mail attachments. When an infected program starts, its embedded virus also starts. A common type of virus is a boot virus, which is stored in the boot sectors of a floppy disk. If the floppy disk is left in the drive when the computer is shut down and then turned on, the computer is infected when it reads the boot sectors of the floppy disk expecting to find the operating system. If the computer is infected, the boot virus may replicate itself onto all the floppy disks that are read or written in that computer until the virus is eradicated. V volt The measurement of electric potential or electromotive force. One V appears across a resistance of 1 ohm when a current of 1 ampere flows through that resistance. W W watt The measurement of electrical power. One W is 1 ampere of current flowing at 1 volt. WHr watt-hour A unit of measure commonly used to indicate the approximate capacity of a battery. For example, a 66-WHr battery can supply 66 W of power for 1 hour or 33 W for 2 hours. wallpaper The background pattern or picture on the Windows desktop. Change your wallpaper through the Windows Control Panel. You can also scan in your favorite picture and make it wallpaper. write-protected Files or media that cannot be changed. Use write-protection when you want to protect data from being changed or destroyed. To write-protect a 3.5-inch floppy disk, slide its write-protect tab to the open position. X file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Glossary Page 14 of 14 XGA extended graphics array A video standard for video cards and controllers that supports resolutions up to 1024 x 768. Z ZIF zero insertion force A type of socket or connector that allows a computer chip to be installed or removed with no stress applied to either the chip or its socket. Zip A popular data compression format. Files that have been compressed with the Zip format are called Zip files and usually have a filename extension of .zip. A special kind of zipped file is a self-extracting file, which has a filename extension of .exe. You can unzip a self-extracting file by double-clicking it. Zip drive A high-capacity floppy drive developed by Iomega Corporation that uses 3.5-inch removable disks called Zip disks. Zip disks are slightly larger than regular floppy disks, about twice as thick, and hold up to 100 MB of data. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhBAF1.htm 1/13/2004 Page 1 of 13 Appendix Appendix Macrovision Product Notice Ergonomic Computing Habits Regulatory Notices Warranty and Return Policy Macrovision Product Notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Ergonomic Computing Habits CAUTION: Improper or prolonged keyboard use may result in injury. CAUTION: Viewing the display or external monitor screen for extended periods of time may result in eye strain. For comfort and efficiency, observe the following ergonomic guidelines when setting up and using your computer workstation:

Position your computer directly in front of you as you work.

Adjust the tilt of the computer's display, its contrast and/or brightness settings, and the lighting around you (such as overhead lights, desk lamps, and the curtains or blinds on nearby windows) to minimize reflections and glare on the display.

When using an external monitor with your computer, set the monitor at a comfortable viewing distance

(usually 450 to 610 millimeters [18 to 24 inches] from your eyes). Make sure the monitor screen is at eye level or slightly lower when you are sitting in front of the monitor.

Use a chair that provides good lower-back support.

Keep your forearms horizontal with your wrists in a neutral, comfortable position while using the keyboard, touch pad, track stick, or external mouse.

Always use the palm rest with the keyboard, touch pad, or track stick. Leave space to rest your hands when using an external mouse.

Let your upper arms hang naturally at your sides. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh1EA0.htm 1/13/2004 Appendix Page 2 of 13

Ensure that your feet are resting flat on the floor.

When sitting, make sure the weight of your legs is on your feet and not on the front of your chair seat. Adjust your chair's height or use a footrest, if necessary, to maintain proper posture.

Vary your work activities. Try to organize your work so that you do not have to type for extended periods of time. When you stop typing, try to do things that use both hands. For more information about ergonomic computing habits, see the BSR/HFES 100 standard, which can be purchased on the Human Factors and Ergonomics Society (HFES) website at:

www.hfes.org/publications/HFES100.html References:

1. American National Standards Institute. ANSI/HFES 100: American National Standards for Human Factors Engineering of Visual Display Terminal Workstations. Santa Monica, CA: Human Factors Society, Inc., 1988. 2. Human Factors and Ergonomics Society. BSR/HFES 100 Draft standard for trial use: Human Factors Engineering of Computer Workstations. Santa Monica, CA: Human Factors and Ergonomics Society, 2002. 3. International Organization for Standardization (ISO). ISO 9241 Ergonomics requirements for office work with visual display terminals (VDTs). Geneva, Switzerland: International Organization for Standardization, 1992. Regulatory Notices Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) is any signal or emission, radiated in free space or conducted along power or signal leads, that endangers the functioning of a radio navigation or other safety service or seriously degrades, obstructs, or repeatedly interrupts a licensed radio communications service. Radio communications services include but are not limited to AM/FM commercial broadcast, television, cellular services, radar, air-

traffic control, pager, and Personal Communication Services (PCS). These licensed services, along with unintentional radiators such as digital devices, including computers, contribute to the electromagnetic environment. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) is the ability of items of electronic equipment to function properly together in the electronic environment. While this computer has been designed and determined to be compliant with regulatory agency limits for EMI, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference with radio communications services, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, you are encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient the receiving antenna.

Relocate the computer with respect to the receiver.

Move the computer away from the receiver.

Plug the computer into a different outlet so that the computer and the receiver are on different branch circuits. If necessary, consult a Dell Technical Support representative or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. Dell computers are designed, tested, and classified for their intended electromagnetic environment. These electromagnetic environment classifications generally refer to the following harmonized definitions:

file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh1EA0.htm 1/13/2004 Appendix Page 3 of 13

Class A is typically for business or industrial environments.

Class B is typically for residential environments. Information Technology Equipment (ITE), including devices, expansion cards, printers, input/output (I/O) devices, monitors, and so on, that are integrated into or connected to the computer should match the electromagnetic environment classification of the computer. A Notice About Shielded Signal Cables: Use only shielded cables for connecting devices to any Dell device to reduce the possibility of interference with radio communications services. Using shielded cables ensures that you maintain the appropriate EMC classification for the intended environment. For parallel printers, a cable is available from Dell. If you prefer, you can order a cable from Dell on the World Wide Web at accessories.us.dell.com/sna/category.asp?category_id=4117. Most Dell computers are classified for Class B environments. However, the inclusion of certain options can change the rating of some configurations to Class A. To determine the electromagnetic classification for your computer or device, see the following sections specific for each regulatory agency. Each section provides country-specific EMC/EMI or product safety information. FCC Notices (U.S. Only) Most Dell computers are classified by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) as Class B digital devices. To determine which classification applies to your computer, examine all FCC registration labels located on the bottom, side, or back panel of your computer, on card-mounting brackets, and on the cards themselves. If any one of the labels carries a Class A rating, your entire computer is considered to be a Class A digital device. If all labels carry an FCC Class B rating as distinguished by either an FCC ID number or the FCC logo, (

), your computer is considered to be a Class B digital device. Once you have determined your computer's FCC classification, read the appropriate FCC notice. Note that FCC regulations provide that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Dell could void your authority to operate this equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference.

This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Class A This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction manual, may cause harmful interference with radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case you will be required to correct the interference at your own expense. Class B This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction manual, may cause interference with radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh1EA0.htm 1/13/2004 Appendix Page 4 of 13 can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, you are encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help. FCC Identification Information The following information is provided on the device or devices covered in this document in compliance with FCC regulations:

Model number:

Company name:

Dell Inc. One Dell Way Round Rock, Texas 78682 USA 512-338-4400 Modem Regulatory Information This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. On the bottom of your computer is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for your equipment. If requested, you must provide this information to the telephone company. The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices that may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most areas, the sum of all the RENs on your telephone line should be less than five to ensure proper service from the telephone company. To be certain of the number of devices that you may connect to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. The registration jack Universal Service Order Code (USOC) used by this equipment is RJ-11C. An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment. This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack that is Part 68 compliant. This equipment cannot be used on public coin-phone service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. There are no user serviceable parts on the modem contained in your computer. If your telephone equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that service may be temporarily discontinued. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service. If you experience trouble with this telephone equipment, see "Getting Help" in your computer's file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh1EA0.htm 1/13/2004 Appendix Page 5 of 13 troubleshooting documentation or, for some computers, the section titled "Contacting Dell" in your computer's online guide to find the appropriate telephone number for obtaining customer assistance. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. Fax Branding The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent, identification of the business, other entity, or individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges. IC Notice (Canada Only) Most Dell computers (and other Dell digital apparatus) are classified by the Industry Canada (IC) Interference-

Causing Equipment Standard #3 (ICES-003) as Class B digital devices. To determine which classification

(Class A or B) applies to your computer (or other Dell digital apparatus), examine all registration labels located on the bottom, side, or the back panel of your computer (or other digital apparatus). A statement in the form of "IC Class A ICES-003" or "IC Class B ICES-003" will be located on one of these labels. Note that Industry Canada regulations provide that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Dell could void your authority to operate this equipment. Modem Regulatory Information The IC label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The IC label does not guarantee that the equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alteration made by a user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telephone communications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection, that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water-pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas. NOTICE: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves. Contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. NOTE: The REN assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh1EA0.htm 1/13/2004 Appendix Page 6 of 13 terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed the number five. The REN for the internal modem as stated on the IC regulatory label located on the bottom of the computer is 0.6 B. The following information is provided in compliance with IC regulations:

Dell Inc. One Dell Way Round Rock, TX 78682 USA 512-338-4400 CE Notice (European Union) Marking by the symbol Voltage Directive of the European Union. Such marking is indicative that this Dell system meets the following technical standards:

indicates compliance of this Dell computer to the EMC Directive and the Low

EN 55022 "Information Technology Equipment Radio Disturbance Characteristics Limits and Methods of Measurement."

EN 55024 "Information Technology Equipment - Immunity Characteristics - Limits and Methods of Measurement."

EN 61000-3-2 "Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3: Limits - Section 2: Limits for Harmonic Current Emissions (Equipment Input Current Up to and Including 16 A Per Phase)."

EN 61000-3-3 "Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3: Limits - Section 3: Limitation of Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker in Low-Voltage Supply Systems for Equipment With Rated Current Up to and Including 16 A."

EN 60950 "Safety of Information Technology Equipment."

NOTE: EN 55022 emissions requirements provide for two classifications:

Class A is for typical commercial areas.

Class B is for typical domestic areas. RF INTERFERENCE WARNING: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio frequency (RF) interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. This Dell device is classified for use in a typical Class B domestic environment. A "Declaration of Conformity" in accordance with the preceding directives and standards has been made and is on file at Dell Inc. Products Europe BV, Limerick, Ireland. CE Mark Notice This equipment complies with the essential requirements of the European Union Directive 1999/5/EC. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh1EA0.htm 1/13/2004 Appendix Page 7 of 13 New Zealand Telecom Warnings General

"The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services."

"This equipment does not fully meet Telecom impedance requirements. Performance limitations may occur when used in conjunction with some parts of the network. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances."

"This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom `111' Emergence Service."

"If a charge for local calls is unacceptable, the `Dial' button should NOT be used for local calls. Only the 7-

digits of the local number should be dialed from your telephone. DO NOT dial the area code digit or the `0'

prefix."

"This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line."

Important Notice

"Under power failure conditions, this telephone may not operate. Please ensure that a separate telephone, not dependent on local power, is available for emergency use."

"Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specification:

file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh1EA0.htm 1/13/2004 Appendix Page 8 of 13 1. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation, and the equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. 2. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall go on-line for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. 3. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing."

"All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is to be aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act of 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is used and what is disclosed to any other party."

Simplified Chinese Class A Warning Notice (China Only) On Class A systems, the following warning will appear near the regulatory label:

Warning: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. EN 55022 Compliance (Czech Republic Only) VCCI Notice (Japan Only) Most Dell computers are classified by the Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) as Class B information technology equipment (ITE). However, the inclusion of certain options can change the rating of some configurations to Class A. ITE, including devices, expansion cards, printers, input/output (I/O) devices, monitors, and so on, integrated into or connected to the computer should match the electromagnetic environment classification (Class A or B) of the computer. To determine which classification applies to your computer, examine the regulatory labels/markings located on the bottom, side, or back panel of your computer. Once you have determined your computer's VCCI classification, read the appropriate VCCI notice (see "VCCI Class A ITE Regulatory Mark" or "VCCI Class B ITE Regulatory Mark"). Class A ITE file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh1EA0.htm 1/13/2004 Appendix Page 9 of 13 This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) for information technology equipment. If this equipment is used in a domestic environment, radio disturbance may arise. When such trouble occurs, the user may be required to take corrective actions. VCCI Class A ITE Regulatory Mark If the regulatory label includes the following marking, your computer is a Class A product:

Class B ITE This is a Class B product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) for information technology equipment. If this equipment is used near a radio or television receiver in a domestic environment, it may cause radio interference. Install and use the equipment according to the instruction manual. VCCI Class B ITE Regulatory Mark If the regulatory label includes the following marking, your computer is a Class B product:

MIC Notice (Republic of Korea Only) To determine which classification (Class A or B) applies to your computer (or other Dell digital device), examine the Republic of Korean Ministry of Information and Communications (MIC) registration labels located on your computer (or other Dell digital device). The MIC label may be located separately from the other regulatory marking applied to your product. Line two of the label identifies the emissions class for the product"(A)" for Class A products or "(B)" for Class B products. NOTE: MIC emissions requirements provide for two classifications:

Class A devices are for business purposes.

Class B devices are for nonbusiness purposes. Class A Device file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh1EA0.htm 1/13/2004 Appendix Page 10 of 13 Please note that this device has been approved for business purposes with regard to electromagnetic interference. If you find that this device is not suitable for your use, you may exchange it for a nonbusiness-

purpose device. MIC Class A Regulatory Label If the regulatory label includes the following marking, your computer is a Class A product:

Class B Device Please note that this device has been approved for nonbusiness purposes and may be used in any environment, including residential areas. MIC Class B Regulatory Label If the regulatory label includes the following marking, your computer is a Class B product:

Polish Center for Testing and Certification Notice The equipment should draw power from a socket with an attached protection circuit (a 3-prong socket). All equipment that works together (computer, monitor, printer, and so on) should have the same power supply source. The phasing conductor of the room's electrical installation should have a reserve short-circuit protection device in the form of a fuse with a nominal value no larger than 16 amperes (A). file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh1EA0.htm 1/13/2004 Appendix Page 11 of 13 To completely switch off the equipment, the power supply cable must be removed from the power supply socket, which should be located near the equipment and easily accessible. A protection mark "B" confirms that the equipment is in compliance with the protection usage requirements of standard PN-EN 55022. BSMI Notice (Taiwan Only) If you find a computer, the following section is applicable:

or mark on the regulatory label on the bottom, side, or back panel of your file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh1EA0.htm 1/13/2004 Appendix Page 12 of 13 NOM Information (Mexico Only) The following information is provided on the device(s) described in this document in compliance with the requirements of the official Mexican standards (NOM):

Exporter:

Importer:

Ship to:

Dell Inc. One Dell Way Round Rock, TX 78682 Dell Computer de Mxico, S.A. de C.V. Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11 Piso Col. Lomas Altas 11950 Mxico, D.F. Dell Computer de Mxico, S.A. de C.V. al Cuidado de Kuehne & Nagel de Mxico S. de R.L. Avenida Soles No. 55 Col. Peon de los Baos 15520 Mxico, D.F. Model number:

PP10L Supply voltage:

100240 VAC file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh1EA0.htm 1/13/2004 Appendix Page 13 of 13 Frequency:

5060 Hz Current Consumption: 1.5 A Output voltage:

19.5 VDC Output current:

4.62 A ENERGY STAR Compliance Certain configurations of Dell computers comply with the requirements set forth by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) for energy-efficient computers. If the front panel of your computer bears the ENERGY STAR Emblem, your original configuration complies with these requirements and all ENERGY STAR power management features of the computer are enabled. NOTE: Any Dell computer bearing the ENERGY STAR Emblem is certified to comply with EPA ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Dell. Any changes you make to this configuration

(such as installing additional expansion cards or drives) may increase the computer's power consumption beyond the limits set by the EPA's ENERGY STAR Computers program. ENERGY STAR Emblem The EPA's ENERGY STAR Computers program is a joint effort between the EPA and computer manufacturers to reduce air pollution by promoting energy-efficient computer products. The EPA estimates that use of ENERGY STAR computer products can save computer users up to two billion dollars annually in electricity costs. In turn, this reduction in electricity usage can reduce emissions of carbon dioxide, the gas primarily responsible for the greenhouse effect, and sulfur dioxide and nitrogen oxides, the primary causes of acid rain. You can also help reduce electricity usage and its side effects by turning off your computer when it is not in use for extended periods of time, particularly at night and on weekends. Warranty and Return Policy Dell Inc. ("Dell") manufactures its hardware products from parts and components that are new or equivalent to new in accordance with industry-standard practices. For information about the Dell warranty for your computer, see the System Information Guide or separate paper warranty document that shipped with your computer. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh1EA0.htm 1/13/2004 Specifications Page 1 of 6 Specifications Microprocessor Microprocessor type L1 cache L2 cache External bus frequency System Information Data bus width DRAM bus width Intel Centrino Mobile Technology or Intel Pentium M Processor 64 KB (internal); 32-KB instruction and 32-KB write-back data 1 MB 400 MHz, source synchronous processor system bus 64 bits 64 bits Microprocessor address bus width 32 bits Flash EPROM PCI bus PC Card CardBus controller PC Card connector Cards supported 1MB 32 bits PCI4510 CardBus controller supports one Type I or Type II card 3.3 V and 5 V PC Card connector size 68 pins Data width (maximum) PCMCIA 16 bits CardBus 32 bits Memory Minimum speed requirement 266 MHz Memory module connector Memory module capacities Memory type Standard memory Maximum memory Ports and Connectors Serial two user-accessible DDR SDRAM connectors 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB, and 1024MB 2.5V DDR SDRAM 128 MB 2 GB 9-pin connector; 16550C-

compatible, file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh7746.htm 1/13/2004 Specifications Page 2 of 6 Parallel Video Audio USB Infrared sensor S-video TV-out Mini PCI Modem Network adapter IEEE 1394 Communications Modem:

Type Controller Interface Network adapter Wireless Video Video type Video controller Video memory 16-byte buffer connector 25-hole connector; unidirectional, bidirectional, or ECP 15-hole connector microphone miniconnector, stereo headphones/speakers miniconnector two 4-pin USB 2.0compliant connectors sensor compatible with IrDA Standard 1.1 (Fast IR) and IrDA Standard 1.0 (Slow IR) 7-pin mini-DIN connector (optional S-video to composite video adapter cable) Type IIIA Mini PCI card slot RJ-11 port RJ-45 port 4-pin serial connector v.92 56K MDC softmodem internal AC'97 bus 10/100 Ethernet LAN on system board internal Mini PCI Wi-Fi wireless support; Bluetooth (optional, available at point of sale only) Intel UMA Integrated Intel 855GME Integrated chip set 1 MB with Intel DVMT up to 32 MB

(with 128 MB of system memory) or 64 MB (with 256 MB or more of system memory) LCD interface LVDS Audio Audio type compatible with Soundblaster and Microsoft Windows Sound file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh7746.htm 1/13/2004 Specifications Page 3 of 6 Audio controller Stereo conversion Interfaces:

Internal External Speaker System Intel AC'97 20-bit (stereo digital-to-analog), 18-bit (stereo analog-to-digital) AC'97 microphone miniconnector, stereo headphones/speakers miniconnector two 4-ohm speakers Internal speaker amplifier 2-W channel into 4 ohms Volume controls Display keyboard shortcuts or program menus Type (active-matrix TFT) XGA Dimensions:

Height Width Diagonal 228.1 mm (9 inches) 304.1 mm (12 inches) 380.1 mm (15 inches) Maximum resolutions 1024 x 768 at 16.8 million colors Response time (typical) Refresh rate Operating angle Viewing angles:

Horizontal Vertical Pixel pitch Power Consumption:

25-ms rise (maximum), 35-ms fall (maximum) 60 Hz 0 (closed) to 180 60 45 0.2172 x 0.2172 mm Panel with backlight (typical) 4.6 W Controls Keyboard Number of keys Key travel Key spacing brightness can be controlled through keyboard shortcuts 87 (U.S. and Canada); 88 (Europe);

91 (Japan) 2.7 mm 0.3 mm (0.11 inch 0.016 inch) 19.05 mm 0.3 mm (0.75 inch file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh7746.htm 1/13/2004 Specifications Page 4 of 6 Layout Touch Pad X/Y position resolution

(graphics table mode) Size:

Width Height Battery Type Dimensions:

Depth Height Width Weight Voltage Charge time with computer off

(approximate) Operating time 0.012 inch) QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji 240 cpi 64.88-mm (2.55-inch) sensor-active area 48.88-mm (1.92-inch) rectangle 6-cell "smart" lithium ion (48 WHr) 4-cell "smart" lithium ion (32 WHr) 77.5 mm (3.05 inches) 19.5 mm (0.76 inch) 123.4 mm (4.86 inches) 0.32 kg (0.7 lb) (6-cell battery) 0.23 kg (0.52 lb) (4-cell battery) 11.1 VDC (6-cell battery) 14.8 VDC (4-cell battery) 1 hour for 80 percent charge approximately 3 to 4 hours (6-cell battery); approximately 2 to 2.5 hours (4-cell battery); can be significantly reduced under certain power-intensive conditions Life span (approximate) 300 discharge/charge cycles Temperature range:

Operating Storage AC Adapter Input voltage Input current (maximum) Input frequency Output current Output power 0 to 35C (32 to 95F) 20 to 65C (4 to 149F) 90264 VAC 1.7 A 4763 Hz 3.34A (65 W) 4.62A (90 W) 65 W or 90 W file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh7746.htm 1/13/2004 Specifications Page 5 of 6 Rated output voltage 19.5 VDC Dimensions:

Height Width Depth Weight (with cables) Temperature range:

Operating Storage Computer Dimensions and Weight Height Width Depth Weight:

28.2mm (1.11 inches) (65 W) 34.2mm (1.35 inches) (90 W) 57.9mm (2.28 inches) (65 W) 60.8mm (2.39 inches) (90 W) 137.2mm (5.40 inches) (65 W) 153.4mm (6.04 inches) (90 W) 0.4 kg (1 lb) (90 W) 0.3 kg (.69 lb) (65 W) 0 to 35C (32 to 95F) 40 to 65C (40 to 149F) 35.5 mm (1.40 inches) 338.4 mm (13.32 inches) 273 mm (10.75 inches) With travel module and standard battery 2.49 kg (5.49 lb) With CD drive and standard battery 2.70 kg (5.94 lb) Computer Environmental Temperature range:

Operating Storage 0 to 35C (32 to 95F) 40 to 65C (40 to 149F) Relative humidity (maximum):

Operating Storage 10% to 90% (noncondensing) 5% to 95% (noncondensing) Maximum vibration (using a random-vibration spectrum that simulates user environment):

Operating Storage 0.66 GRMS 1.30 GRMS Maximum shock (measured with hard drive in head-parked position and a 2-ms half-sine pulse):

Operating Storage 122 G 163 G file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh7746.htm 1/13/2004 Specifications Altitude (maximum):

Operating Storage 15.2 to 3048 m (50 to 10,000 ft) 15.2 to 10,668 m (50 to 35,000 ft) Page 6 of 6 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh7746.htm 1/13/2004 Specifications Page 1 of 6 Specifications Microprocessor Microprocessor type L1 cache L2 cache External bus frequency System Information Data bus width DRAM bus width Intel Centrino Mobile Technology or Intel Pentium M Processor 64 KB (internal); 32-KB instruction and 32-KB write-back data 1 MB 400 MHz, source synchronous processor system bus 64 bits 64 bits Microprocessor address bus width 32 bits Flash EPROM PCI bus PC Card CardBus controller PC Card connector Cards supported 1MB 32 bits PCI4510 CardBus controller supports one Type I or Type II card 3.3 V and 5 V PC Card connector size 68 pins Data width (maximum) PCMCIA 16 bits CardBus 32 bits Memory Minimum speed requirement 266 MHz Memory module connector Memory module capacities Memory type Standard memory Maximum memory Ports and Connectors Serial two user-accessible DDR SDRAM connectors 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB, and 1024MB 2.5V DDR SDRAM 128 MB 2 GB 9-pin connector; 16550C-

compatible, file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh7746.htm 1/13/2004 Specifications Page 2 of 6 Parallel Video Audio USB Infrared sensor S-video TV-out Mini PCI Modem Network adapter IEEE 1394 Communications Modem:

Type Controller Interface Network adapter Wireless Video Video type Video controller Video memory 16-byte buffer connector 25-hole connector; unidirectional, bidirectional, or ECP 15-hole connector microphone miniconnector, stereo headphones/speakers miniconnector two 4-pin USB 2.0compliant connectors sensor compatible with IrDA Standard 1.1 (Fast IR) and IrDA Standard 1.0 (Slow IR) 7-pin mini-DIN connector (optional S-video to composite video adapter cable) Type IIIA Mini PCI card slot RJ-11 port RJ-45 port 4-pin serial connector v.92 56K MDC softmodem internal AC'97 bus 10/100 Ethernet LAN on system board internal Mini PCI Wi-Fi wireless support; Bluetooth (optional, available at point of sale only) Intel UMA Integrated Intel 855GME Integrated chip set 1 MB with Intel DVMT up to 32 MB

(with 128 MB of system memory) or 64 MB (with 256 MB or more of system memory) LCD interface LVDS Audio Audio type compatible with Soundblaster and Microsoft Windows Sound file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh7746.htm 1/13/2004 Specifications Page 3 of 6 Audio controller Stereo conversion Interfaces:

Internal External Speaker System Intel AC'97 20-bit (stereo digital-to-analog), 18-bit (stereo analog-to-digital) AC'97 microphone miniconnector, stereo headphones/speakers miniconnector two 4-ohm speakers Internal speaker amplifier 2-W channel into 4 ohms Volume controls Display keyboard shortcuts or program menus Type (active-matrix TFT) XGA Dimensions:

Height Width Diagonal 228.1 mm (9 inches) 304.1 mm (12 inches) 380.1 mm (15 inches) Maximum resolutions 1024 x 768 at 16.8 million colors Response time (typical) Refresh rate Operating angle Viewing angles:

Horizontal Vertical Pixel pitch Power Consumption:

25-ms rise (maximum), 35-ms fall (maximum) 60 Hz 0 (closed) to 180 60 45 0.2172 x 0.2172 mm Panel with backlight (typical) 4.6 W Controls Keyboard Number of keys Key travel Key spacing brightness can be controlled through keyboard shortcuts 87 (U.S. and Canada); 88 (Europe);

91 (Japan) 2.7 mm 0.3 mm (0.11 inch 0.016 inch) 19.05 mm 0.3 mm (0.75 inch file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh7746.htm 1/13/2004 Specifications Page 4 of 6 Layout Touch Pad X/Y position resolution

(graphics table mode) Size:

Width Height Battery Type Dimensions:

Depth Height Width Weight Voltage Charge time with computer off

(approximate) Operating time 0.012 inch) QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji 240 cpi 64.88-mm (2.55-inch) sensor-active area 48.88-mm (1.92-inch) rectangle 6-cell "smart" lithium ion (48 WHr) 4-cell "smart" lithium ion (32 WHr) 77.5 mm (3.05 inches) 19.5 mm (0.76 inch) 123.4 mm (4.86 inches) 0.32 kg (0.7 lb) (6-cell battery) 0.23 kg (0.52 lb) (4-cell battery) 11.1 VDC (6-cell battery) 14.8 VDC (4-cell battery) 1 hour for 80 percent charge approximately 3 to 4 hours (6-cell battery); approximately 2 to 2.5 hours (4-cell battery); can be significantly reduced under certain power-intensive conditions Life span (approximate) 300 discharge/charge cycles Temperature range:

Operating Storage AC Adapter Input voltage Input current (maximum) Input frequency Output current Output power 0 to 35C (32 to 95F) 20 to 65C (4 to 149F) 90264 VAC 1.7 A 4763 Hz 3.34A (65 W) 4.62A (90 W) 65 W or 90 W file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh7746.htm 1/13/2004 Specifications Page 5 of 6 Rated output voltage 19.5 VDC Dimensions:

Height Width Depth Weight (with cables) Temperature range:

Operating Storage Computer Dimensions and Weight Height Width Depth Weight:

28.2mm (1.11 inches) (65 W) 34.2mm (1.35 inches) (90 W) 57.9mm (2.28 inches) (65 W) 60.8mm (2.39 inches) (90 W) 137.2mm (5.40 inches) (65 W) 153.4mm (6.04 inches) (90 W) 0.4 kg (1 lb) (90 W) 0.3 kg (.69 lb) (65 W) 0 to 35C (32 to 95F) 40 to 65C (40 to 149F) 35.5 mm (1.40 inches) 338.4 mm (13.32 inches) 273 mm (10.75 inches) With travel module and standard battery 2.49 kg (5.49 lb) With CD drive and standard battery 2.70 kg (5.94 lb) Computer Environmental Temperature range:

Operating Storage 0 to 35C (32 to 95F) 40 to 65C (40 to 149F) Relative humidity (maximum):

Operating Storage 10% to 90% (noncondensing) 5% to 95% (noncondensing) Maximum vibration (using a random-vibration spectrum that simulates user environment):

Operating Storage 0.66 GRMS 1.30 GRMS Maximum shock (measured with hard drive in head-parked position and a 2-ms half-sine pulse):

Operating Storage 122 G 163 G file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh7746.htm 1/13/2004 Specifications Altitude (maximum):

Operating Storage 15.2 to 3048 m (50 to 10,000 ft) 15.2 to 10,668 m (50 to 35,000 ft) Page 6 of 6 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh7746.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Page 1 of 17 Getting Help Technical Assistance Problems With Your Order Product Information Returning Items for Warranty Repair or Credit Before You Call Contacting Dell Technical Assistance If you need help with a technical problem, Dell is ready to assist you. CAUTION: If you need to remove the computer covers, first disconnect the computer power and modem cables from all electrical outlets. 1. Complete the procedures in "Solving Problems."

2. Run the Dell Diagnostics. 3. Make a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist and fill it out. 4. Use Dell's extensive suite of online services available at Dell Support (support.dell.com) for help with installation and troubleshooting procedures. 5. If the preceding steps have not resolved the problem, contact Dell. NOTE: Call technical support from a telephone near or at the computer so that technical support can assist you with any necessary procedures. NOTE: Dell's Express Service Code system may not be available in all countries. When prompted by Dell's automated telephone system, enter your Express Service Code to route the call directly to the proper support personnel. If you do not have an Express Service Code, open the Dell Accessories folder, double-click the Express Service Code icon, and follow the directions. For instructions on using the technical support service, see "Technical Support Service."

NOTE: Some of the following services are not always available in all locations outside the continental U.S. Call your local Dell representative for information on availability. Online Services file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Page 2 of 17 You can access Dell Support at support.dell.com. Select your region on the WELCOME TO DELL SUPPORT page, and fill in the requested details to access help tools and information. You can contact Dell electronically using the following addresses:

World Wide Web www.dell.com/

www.dell.com/ap/ (for Asian/Pacific countries only) www.euro.dell.com (for Europe only) www.dell.com/la/ (for Latin American countries)

Anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP) ftp.dell.com/

Log in as user: anonymous, and use your e-mail address as your password.

Electronic Support Service mobile_support@us.dell.com support@us.dell.com apsupport@dell.com (for Asian/Pacific countries only) support.euro.dell.com (for Europe only)

Electronic Quote Service sales@dell.com apmarketing@dell.com (for Asian/Pacific countries only)

Electronic Information Service info@dell.com AutoTech Service Dell's automated technical support serviceAutoTechprovides recorded answers to the questions most frequently asked by Dell customers about their portable and desktop computers. When you call AutoTech, use your touch-tone telephone to select the subjects that correspond to your questions. The AutoTech service is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. You can also access this service through the technical support service. For the telephone number to call, see the contact numbers for your region. Automated Order-Status Service file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Page 3 of 17 To check on the status of any Dell products that you have ordered, you can go to support.dell.com, or you can call the automated order-status service. A recording prompts you for the information needed to locate and report on your order. For the telephone number to call, see the contact numbers for your region. Technical Support Service Dell's technical support service is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, to answer your questions about Dell hardware. Our technical support staff uses computer-based diagnostics to provide fast, accurate answers. To contact Dell's technical support service, see "Technical Assistance" and then call the number for your country as listed in "Contacting Dell."

Problems With Your Order If you have a problem with your order, such as missing parts, wrong parts, or incorrect billing, contact Dell for customer assistance. Have your invoice or packing slip handy when you call. For the telephone number to call, see the contact numbers for your region. Product Information If you need information about additional products available from Dell, or if you would like to place an order, visit the Dell website at www.dell.com. For the telephone number to call to speak to a sales specialist, see the contact numbers for your region. Returning Items for Warranty Repair or Credit Prepare all items being returned, whether for repair or credit, as follows:

1. Call Dell to obtain a Return Material Authorization Number, and write it clearly and prominently on the outside of the box. For the telephone number to call, see the contact numbers for your region. 2. Include a copy of the invoice and a letter describing the reason for the return. 3. 4. Include a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist indicating the tests you have run and any error messages reported by the Dell Diagnostics. Include any accessories that belong with the item(s) being returned (power cables, software floppy disks, guides, and so on) if the return is for credit. 5. Pack the equipment to be returned in the original (or equivalent) packing materials. You are responsible for paying shipping expenses. You are also responsible for insuring any product returned, and you assume the risk of loss during shipment to Dell. Collect On Delivery (C.O.D.) packages are not accepted. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Page 4 of 17 Returns that are missing any of the preceding requirements will be refused at Dell's receiving dock and returned to you. Before You Call NOTE: Have your Express Service Code ready when you call. The code helps Dell's automated-support telephone system direct your call more efficiently. Remember to fill out the Diagnostics Checklist. If possible, turn on your computer before you call Dell for technical assistance and call from a telephone at or near the computer. You may be asked to type some commands at the keyboard, relay detailed information during operations, or try other troubleshooting steps possible only at the computer itself. Ensure that the computer documentation is available. CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, read the safety instructions in your System Information Guide. Diagnostics Checklist Name:

Date:

Address:

Phone number:

Service tag (bar code on the back of the computer):

Express Service Code:

Return Material Authorization Number (if provided by Dell support technician):

Operating system and version:

Devices:

Expansion cards:

Are you connected to a network? Yes No Network, version, and network adapter:

Programs and versions:

See your operating system documentation to determine the contents of the system's start-up files. If the computer is connected to a printer, print each file. Otherwise, record the contents of each file before calling Dell. Error message, beep code, or diagnostic code:

Description of problem and troubleshooting procedures you performed:

Contacting Dell To contact Dell electronically, you can access the following websites:

file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Page 5 of 17

www.dell.com

support.dell.com (technical support)

premiersupport.dell.com (technical support for educational, government, healthcare, and medium/large business customers, including Premier, Platinum, and Gold customers) For specific web addresses for your country, find the appropriate country section in the table below. NOTE: Toll-free numbers are for use within the country for which they are listed. When you need to contact Dell, use the electronic addresses, telephone numbers, and codes provided in the following table. If you need assistance in determining which codes to use, contact a local or an international operator. Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Anguilla Antigua and Barbuda Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address General Support General Support Argentina (Buenos Aires) Website: www.dell.com.ar Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers toll-free: 800-335-0031 1-800-805-5924 Tech Support and Customer Care toll-free: 0-800-444-0733 International Access Code: 00 Sales Country Code: 54 Tech Support Fax City Code: 11 Aruba Customer Care Fax General Support Australia (Sydney) E-mail (Australia): au_tech_support@dell.com International Access Code: 0011 Country Code: 61 City Code: 2 E-mail (New Zealand): nz_tech_support@dell.com Home and Small Business Government and Business Preferred Accounts Division (PAD) Customer Care Corporate Sales Transaction Sales Fax Austria (Vienna) Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 900 Country Code: 43 City Code: 1 E-mail: tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Home/Small Business Sales Home/Small Business Fax Home/Small Business Customer Care 0-810-444-3355 11 4515 7139 11 4515 7138 toll-free: 800-1578 1-300-65-55-33 toll-free: 1-800-633-559 toll-free: 1-800-060-889 toll-free: 1-800-819-339 toll-free: 1-800-808-385 toll-free: 1-800-808-312 toll-free: 1-800-818-341 0820 240 530 00 0820 240 530 49 0820 240 530 14 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Page 6 of 17 Preferred Accounts/Corporate Customer Care Home/Small Business Technical Support Preferred Accounts/Corporate Technical Support Bahamas Barbados Switchboard General Support General Support Belgium (Brussels) Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 32 City Code: 2 Bermuda Bolivia Brazil International Access Code: 00 E-mail: tech_be@dell.com E-mail for French Speaking Customers:

support.euro.dell.com/be/fr/emaildell/

Technical Support Customer Care Corporate Sales Fax Switchboard General Support General Support Website: www.dell.com/br Customer Support, Technical Support Tech Support Fax Country Code: 55 Customer Care Fax City Code: 51 British Virgin Islands Sales General Support Brunei Customer Technical Support (Penang, Malaysia) Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) Transaction Sales (Penang, Malaysia) Online Order Status: www.dell.ca/ostatus Country Code: 673 Canada (North York, Ontario) International Access Code: 011 0820 240 530 16 0820 240 530 14 0660 8779 0820 240 530 00 toll-free: 1-866-278-6818 1-800-534-3066 02 481 92 88 02 481 91 19 02 481 91 00 02 481 92 99 02 481 91 00 1-800-342-0671 toll-free: 800-10-0238 0800 90 3355 51 481 5470 51 481 5480 0800 90 3390 toll-free: 1-866-278-6820 604 633 4966 604 633 4949 604 633 4955 AutoTech (automated technical support) toll-free: 1-800-247-9362 TechFax toll-free: 1-800-950-1329 Customer Care (Home Sales/Small Business) toll-free: 1-800-847-4096 Customer Care (med./large business, government) toll-free: 1-800-326-9463 Technical Support (Home Sales/Small Business) toll-free: 1-800-847-4096 Technical Support (med./large bus., government) toll-free: 1-800-387-5757 Sales (Home Sales/Small Business) Sales (med./large bus., government) toll-free: 1-800-387-5752 toll-free: 1-800-387-5755 Spare Parts Sales & Extended Service Sales 1 866 440 3355 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Page 7 of 17 Cayman Islands General Support 1-800-805-7541 Chile (Santiago) Sales, Customer Support, and Technical Support toll-free: 1230-020-4823 Country Code: 56 City Code: 2 China (Xiamen) Tech Support website: support.ap.dell.com/china Country Code: 86 City Code: 592 Tech Support E-mail: cn_support@dell.com Tech Support Fax 818 1350 Home and Small Business Technical Support toll-free: 800 858 2437 Corporate Accounts Technical Support Customer Experience Home and Small Business Preferred Accounts Division Large Corporate Accounts GCP Large Corporate Accounts Key Accounts Large Corporate Accounts North Large Corporate Accounts North Government and Education Large Corporate Accounts East Large Corporate Accounts East Government and Education Large Corporate Accounts Queue Team Large Corporate Accounts South Large Corporate Accounts West Large Corporate Accounts Spare Parts Colombia Costa Rica Czech Republic

(Prague) General Support General Support Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: czech_dell@dell.com International Access Code: 00 Technical Support Customer Care Country Code: 420 Fax City Code: 2 Denmark

(Copenhagen) International Access Code: 00 TechFax Switchboard Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail Support (portable computers):

den_nbk_support@dell.com E-mail Support (desktop computers):

toll-free: 800 858 2333 toll-free: 800 858 2060 toll-free: 800 858 2222 toll-free: 800 858 2062 toll-free: 800 858 2055 toll-free: 800 858 2628 toll-free: 800 858 2999 toll-free: 800 858 2955 toll-free: 800 858 2020 toll-free: 800 858 2669 toll-free: 800 858 2572 toll-free: 800 858 2355 toll-free: 800 858 2811 toll-free: 800 858 2621 980-9-15-3978 0800-012-0435 02 2186 27 27 02 2186 27 11 02 2186 27 14 02 2186 27 28 02 2186 27 11 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Country Code: 45 den_support@dell.com E-mail Support (servers):

Nordic_server_support@dell.com Technical Support Customer Care (Relational) Home/Small Business Customer Care Switchboard (Relational) Fax Switchboard (Relational) Switchboard (Home/Small Business) Fax Switchboard (Home/Small Business) Dominica General Support Dominican Republic General Support Ecuador El Salvador General Support General Support Finland (Helsinki) Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 990 Country Code: 358 City Code: 9 E-mail: fin_support@dell.com E-mail Support (servers): Nordic_support@dell.com Technical Support Technical Support Fax Relational Customer Care Home/Small Business Customer Care Fax Switchboard France (Paris)

(Montpellier) Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/fr/fr/emaildell/

International Access Code: 00 Home and Small Business Technical Support Country Code: 33 Customer Care City Codes: (1) (4) Switchboard Switchboard (calls from outside of France) Sales Fax Fax (calls from outside of France) Corporate Technical Support Customer Care Switchboard Page 8 of 17 7023 0182 7023 0184 3287 5505 3287 1200 3287 1201 3287 5000 3287 5001 toll-free: 1-866-278-6821 1-800-148-0530 toll-free: 999-119 01-899-753-0777 09 253 313 60 09 253 313 81 09 253 313 38 09 693 791 94 09 253 313 99 09 253 313 00 0825 387 270 0825 823 833 0825 004 700 04 99 75 40 00 0825 004 700 0825 004 701 04 99 75 40 01 0825 004 719 0825 338 339 01 55 94 71 00 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Sales Fax Germany (Langen) Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 49 City Code: 6103 E-mail: tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Technical Support Home/Small Business Customer Care Global Segment Customer Care Preferred Accounts Customer Care Large Accounts Customer Care Public Accounts Customer Care Switchboard Greece Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 30 Grenada Guatemala Guyana Hong Kong International Access Code: 001 Country Code: 852 E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/gr/en/emaildell/

Technical Support Gold Technical Support Switchboard Sales Fax General Support General Support General Support Website: support.ap.dell.com E-mail: ap_support@dell.com Technical Support (Dimension and Inspiron) Technical Support (OptiPlex, Latitude, and Dell Precision) Page 9 of 17 01 55 94 71 00 01 55 94 71 01 06103 766-7200 0180-5-224400 06103 766-9570 06103 766-9420 06103 766-9560 06103 766-9555 06103 766-7000 080044149518 08844140083 2108129800 2108129800 2108129812 toll-free: 1-866-540-3355 1-800-999-0136 toll-free: 1-877-270-4609 296 93188 296 93191 Customer Service (non-technical, post-sales issues) 800 93 8291 Transaction Sales Large Corporate Accounts HK Large Corporate Accounts GCP HK India Technical Support Sales Ireland

(Cherrywood) Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: dell_direct_support@dell.com International Access Code: 16 Ireland Technical Support U.K. Technical Support (dial within U.K. only) Country Code: 353 Home User Customer Care toll-free: 800 96 4109 toll-free: 800 96 4108 toll-free: 800 90 3708 1600 33 8045 1600 33 8044 1850 543 543 0870 908 0800 01 204 4014 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help City Code: 1 Small Business Customer Care U.K. Customer Care (dial within U.K. only) Corporate Customer Care Corporate Customer Care (dial within U.K. only) Ireland Sales U.K. Sales (dial within U.K. only) Fax/SalesFax Switchboard Italy (Milan) Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 39 City Code: 02 E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/it/it/emaildell/

Home and Small Business Technical Support Customer Care Fax Switchboard Corporate Technical Support Customer Care Fax Switchboard Page 10 of 17 01 204 4014 0870 906 0010 1850 200 982 0870 907 4499 01 204 4444 0870 907 4000 01 204 0103 01 204 4444 02 577 826 90 02 696 821 14 02 696 821 13 02 696 821 12 02 577 826 90 02 577 825 55 02 575 035 30 02 577 821 Jamaica General Support (dial from within Jamaica only) 1-800-682-3639 Japan (Kawasaki) Website: support.jp.dell.com International Access Code: 001 Country Code: 81 City Code: 44 Technical Support (servers) toll-free: 0120-198-498 Technical Support outside of Japan (servers) 81-44-556-4162 Technical Support (Dimension and Inspiron) toll-free: 0120-198-226 Technical Support outside of Japan (Dimension and Inspiron) Technical Support (Dell Precision, OptiPlex, and Latitude) Technical Support outside of Japan (Dell Precision, OptiPlex, and Latitude) Faxbox Service 24-Hour Automated Order Service Customer Care Business Sales Division (up to 400 employees) Preferred Accounts Division Sales (over 400 employees) Large Corporate Accounts Sales (over 3500 employees) 81-44-520-1435 toll-free:0120-198-433 81-44-556-3894 044-556-3490 044-556-3801 044-556-4240 044-556-1465 044-556-3433 044-556-3430 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Public Sales (government agencies, educational institutions, and medical institutions) Global Segment Japan Individual User Switchboard Korea (Seoul) Technical Support International Access Code: 001 Country Code: 82 City Code: 2 Sales Customer Service (Seoul, Korea) Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) Fax Switchboard Latin America Customer Technical Support (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) Customer Service (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) Fax (Technical Support and Customer Service)

(Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) Sales (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) SalesFax (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) Luxembourg Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: tech_be@dell.com Page 11 of 17 044-556-1469 044-556-3469 044-556-1760 044-556-4300 toll-free: 080-200-3800 toll-free: 080-200-3600 toll-free: 080-200-3800 604 633 4949 2194-6202 2194-6000 512 728-4093 512 728-3619 512 728-3883 512 728-4397 512 728-4600 or 512 728-3772 International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 352 Technical Support (Brussels, Belgium) 3420808075 Home/Small Business Sales (Brussels, Belgium) toll-free: 080016884 Corporate Sales (Brussels, Belgium) Customer Care (Brussels, Belgium) Fax (Brussels, Belgium) Switchboard (Brussels, Belgium) Macao Technical Support Country Code: 853 Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) Transaction Sales Malaysia (Penang) Technical Support International Access Code: 00 Customer Service Country Code: 60 City Code: 4 Mexico International Access Transaction Sales Corporate Sales Customer Technical Support 02 481 91 00 02 481 91 19 02 481 92 99 02 481 91 00 toll-free: 0800 582 604 633 4949 toll-free: 0800 581 toll-free: 1 800 888 298 04 633 4949 toll-free: 1 800 888 202 toll-free: 1 800 888 213 001-877-384-8979 or 001-877-269-3383 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Page 12 of 17 Code: 00 Sales Country Code: 52 Customer Service Main Montserrat General Support Netherlands Antilles General Support Netherlands

(Amsterdam) International Access Code: 00 Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail (Technical Support):

(Enterprise): nl_server_support@dell.com Country Code: 31

(Latitude): nl_latitude_support@dell.com City Code: 20

(Inspiron): nl_inspiron_support@dell.com

(Dimension): nl_dimension_support@dell.com

(OptiPlex): nl_optiplex_support@dell.com

(Dell Precision): nl_workstation_support@dell.com Technical Support Technical Support Fax Home/Small Business Customer Care Relational Customer Care Home/Small Business Sales Relational Sales Home/Small Business Sales Fax Relational Sales Fax Switchboard Switchboard Fax New Zealand E-mail (New Zealand): nz_tech_support@dell.com International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 64 E-mail (Australia): au_tech_support@dell.com Home and Small Business Government and Business Sales Fax 50-81-8800 or 01-800-888-3355 001-877-384-8979 or 001-877-269-3383 50-81-8800 or 01-800-888-3355 toll-free: 1-866-278-6822 001-800-882-1519 020 674 45 00 020 674 47 66 020 674 42 00 020 674 4325 020 674 55 00 020 674 50 00 020 674 47 75 020 674 47 50 020 674 50 00 020 674 47 50 0800 446 255 0800 444 617 0800 441 567 0800 441 566 Nicaragua General Support 001-800-220-1006 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Page 13 of 17 Norway (Lysaker) Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 00 E-mail Support (portable computers):

nor_nbk_support@dell.com Country Code: 47 E-mail Support (desktop computers):

nor_support@dell.com E-mail Support (servers):

nordic_server_support@dell.com Technical Support Relational Customer Care Home/Small Business Customer Care Panama Peru Switchboard Fax Switchboard General Support General Support Poland (Warsaw) Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 011 E-mail: pl_support@dell.com Customer Service Phone Country Code: 48 City Code: 22 Customer Care Sales Customer Service Fax Reception Desk Fax Switchboard Portugal Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 351 E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/pt/en/emaildell/

Technical Support Customer Care Sales Fax Puerto Rico General Support St. Kitts and Nevis General Support St. Lucia St. Vincent and the Grenadines General Support General Support Singapore Technical Support 671 16882 671 17514 23162298 671 16800 671 16865 001-800-507-0962 0800-50-669 57 95 700 57 95 999 57 95 999 57 95 806 57 95 998 57 95 999 707200149 800 300 413 800 300 410 or 800 300 411 or 800 300 412 or 21 422 07 10 21 424 01 12 1-800-805-7545 toll-free: 1-877-441-4731 1-800-882-1521 toll-free: 1-877-270-4609 toll-free: 800 6011 051 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Page 14 of 17

(Singapore) Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) International Access Code: 005 Transaction Sales Corporate Sales 604 633 4949 toll-free: 800 6011 054 toll-free: 800 6011 053 Country Code: 65 South Africa

(Johannesburg) International Access Code:

Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: dell_za_support@dell.com Technical Support Customer Care 09/091 Country Code: 27 Sales Fax City Code: 11 Switchboard Southeast Asian and Pacific Countries Customer Technical Support, Customer Service, and Sales (Penang, Malaysia) Spain (Madrid) Website: support.euro.dell.com International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 34 City Code: 91 E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/es/es/emaildell/

Home and Small Business Technical Support Customer Care Sales Switchboard Fax Corporate Technical Support Customer Care Switchboard Fax Sweden (Upplands Vasby) Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: swe_support@dell.com International Access Code: 00 E-mail Support for Latitude and Inspiron:

Swe-nbk_kats@dell.com Country Code: 46 City Code: 8 E-mail Support for OptiPlex: Swe_kats@dell.com E-mail Support for Servers:

Nordic_server_support@dell.com Technical Support Relational Customer Care Home/Small Business Customer Care Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Support 011 709 7710 011 709 7707 011 709 7700 011 706 0495 011 709 7700 604 633 4810 902 100 130 902 118 540 902 118 541 902 118 541 902 118 539 902 100 130 902 118 546 91 722 92 00 91 722 95 83 08 590 05 199 08 590 05 642 08 587 70 527 20 140 14 44 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Fax Technical Support Sales Switzerland

(Geneva) Website: support.euro.dell.com E-mail: swisstech@dell.com International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 41 E-mail for French-speaking HSB and Corporate Customers:

support.euro.dell.com/ch/fr/emaildell/

Technical Support (Home and Small Business) City Code: 22 Technical Support (Corporate) Customer Care (Home and Small Business) Customer Care (Corporate) Fax Switchboard Page 15 of 17 08 590 05 594 08 590 05 185 0844 811 411 0844 822 844 0848 802 202 0848 821 721 022 799 01 90 022 799 01 01 Taiwan Technical Support (portable and desktop computers) toll-free: 00801 86 1011 International Access Code: 002 Country Code: 886 Technical Support (servers) Transaction Sales Corporate Sales Thailand Technical Support toll-free: 0080 60 1256 toll-free: 0080 651 228 or 0800 33 556 toll-free: 0080 651 227 or 0800 33 555 toll-free: 0880 060 07 International Access Code: 001 Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) 604 633 4949 Country Code: 66 Sales Trinidad/Tobago General Support Turks and Caicos Islands General Support U.K. (Bracknell) Website: support.euro.dell.com toll-free: 0880 060 09 1-800-805-8035 toll-free: 1-866-540-3355 International Access Code: 00 Country Code: 44 City Code: 1344 Customer Care website:

support.euro.dell.com/uk/en/ECare/Form/Home.asp E-mail: dell_direct_support@dell.com Technical Support (Corporate/Preferred Accounts/PAD

[1000+ employees]) Technical Support (direct/PAD and general) Global Accounts Customer Care Home and Small Business Customer Care Corporate Customer Care 0870 908 0500 0870 908 0800 01344 373 186 0870 906 0010 01344 373 185 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help Preferred Accounts (5005000 employees) Customer Care Central Government Customer Care Local Government & Education Customer Care Health Customer Care Home and Small Business Sales Corporate/Public Sector Sales Uruguay General Support Page 16 of 17 0870 906 0010 01344 373 193 01344 373 199 01344 373 194 0870 907 4000 01344 860 456 toll-free: 000-413-598-

2521 toll-free: 1-800-433-9014 U.S.A. (Austin, Texas) International Access Code: 011 Country Code: 1 Automated Order-Status Service AutoTech (portable and desktop computers) toll-free: 1-800-247-9362 Consumer (Home and Home Office) Technical Support Customer Service DellNet Service and Support toll-free: 1-800-624-9896 toll-free: 1-800-624-9897 toll-free: 1-877-Dellnet

(1-877-335-5638) Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Customers toll-free: 1-800-695-8133 Financial Services website: www.dellfinancialservices.com Financial Services (lease/loans) toll-free: 1-877-577-3355 Financial Services (Dell Preferred Accounts [DPA]) toll-free: 1-800-283-2210 Business Customer Service and Technical Support toll-free: 1-800-822-8965 Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Customers toll-free: 1-800-695-8133 Projectors Technical Support toll-free: 1-877-459-7298 Public (government, education, and healthcare) Customer Service and Technical Support toll-free: 1-800-456-3355 Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Customers toll-free: 1-800-234-1490 Dell Sales toll-free: 1-800-289-3355 or toll-free: 1-800-879-

3355 Dell Outlet Store (Dell refurbished computers) toll-free: 1-888-798-7561 Software and Peripherals Sales Spare Parts Sales Extended Service and Warranty Sales Fax Dell Services for the Deaf, Hard-of-Hearing, or Speech-Impaired toll-free: 1-800-671-3355 toll-free: 1-800-357-3355 toll-free: 1-800-247-4618 toll-free: 1-800-727-8320 toll-free: 1-877-DELLTTY

(1-877-335-5889) file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Getting Help U.S. Virgin Islands General Support Venezuela General Support Page 17 of 17 1-877-673-3355 8001-3605 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD9C8.htm 1/13/2004 Using the System Setup Program Page 1 of 4 Using the System Setup Program Overview Viewing the System Setup Screens System Setup Screens Commonly Used Options Overview NOTE: Your operating system may automatically configure most of the options available in the system setup program, thus overriding options that you set through the system setup program. (An exception is the External Hot Key option, which you can disable or enable only through the system setup program.) For more information on configuring features for your operating system, see your Microsoft Windows Help or the Windows Help and Support Center. You can use the system setup program as follows:

To set or change user-selectable featuresfor example, your password

To verify information about the computer's current configuration, such as the amount of system memory After you set up the computer, run the system setup program to familiarize yourself with your system configuration information and optional settings. You may want to write down the information for future reference. NOTICE: Unless you are an expert computer user or are directed to do so by Dell technical support, do not change the settings for this program. Certain changes might make your computer work incorrectly. Viewing the System Setup Screens 1. Turn on (or restart) your computer. 2. When the DELL logo appears, press <F2> immediately. If you wait too long and the Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. System Setup Screens The system setup screens display the current setup information and settings for your computer. On each file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh4200.htm 1/13/2004 Using the System Setup Program Page 2 of 4 screen, the system setup options are listed at the left of the screen. To the right of each option is the setting or value for that option. You can change settings that appear as white type on the screen. Options or values that you cannot change (because they are determined by the computer) appear less bright. The upper-right corner of the screen displays help information for the currently highlighted option; the lower-

right corner displays information about the computer. System setup key functions are listed across the bottom of the screen. The screens display such information as:

System configuration

Boot order

Boot (start-up) configuration and docking-device configuration settings

Basic device configuration settings

Battery charge status

System security and hard-drive password settings Commonly Used Options Certain options require that you reboot the computer for new settings to take effect. Changing the Boot Sequence The boot sequence, or boot order, tells the computer where to look to find the software needed to start the operating system. You can control the boot sequence using the Boot Order page of the system setup program. The Boot Order page displays a general list of the bootable devices that may be installed in your computer, including but not limited to the following:

Diskette Drive

Modular bay HDD

Internal HDD

CD/DVD/CD-RW drive During the boot routine, the computer starts at the top of the list and scans each enabled device for the operating system start-up files. When the computer finds the files, it stops searching and starts the operating system. To control the boot devices, select (highlight) a device by pressing the up-arrow key or down-arrow key, and then enable or disable the device or change its order in the list.

To enable or disable a device, highlight the item and press the space-bar key. Enabled items appear as white and display a small triangle to their left; disabled items appear blue or dimmed without a triangle.

To reorder a device in the list, highlight the device and then press <U> or <D> (not case-sensitive) to file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh4200.htm 1/13/2004 Using the System Setup Program Page 3 of 4 move the highlighted device up or down. Boot sequence changes take effect as soon as you save the changes and exit the system setup program. Performing a One-Time Boot You can set a one-time-only boot sequence without entering the system setup program. (You can also use this procedure to boot the Dell Diagnostics on the diagnostics utility partition on your hard drive.) 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Connect the computer to an electrical outlet. 3. Turn on the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press <F12> immediately. If you wait too long and the Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. 4. When the boot device list appears, highlight the device from which you want to boot and press

<Enter>. The computer boots to the selected device. The next time you reboot the computer, the normal boot order is restored. Changing Printer Modes Set the Parallel Mode option according to the type of printer or device connected to the parallel connector. To determine the correct mode to use, see the documentation that came with the device. Setting Parallel Mode to Disabled disables the parallel port and the port's LPT address, freeing its interrupt for another device to use. Changing COM Ports Serial Port allows you to map the serial port COM address or disable the serial port and its address, freeing its interrupt for another device to use. Enabling the Infrared Sensor 1. Enter the system setup program:

a. Turn on your computer. b. Press <F2> when the DELL logo appears. 2. Press <Alt><P> until you locate Infrared Data Port under Basic Device Configuration. 3. Press the down-arrow key to highlight Disabled next to Infrared Data Port. 4. Press the right-arrow key to change the setting to a COM port. Ensure that the COM port that you select is different from the COM port assigned to the serial connector. 5. Press the down-arrow key to select Infrared Mode, and press the right-arrow key to change the file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh4200.htm 1/13/2004 Using the System Setup Program Page 4 of 4 setting to Fast IR or Slow IR. It is recommended that you use Fast IR. If the infrared device cannot communicate with your computer, turn off the computer and repeat steps 1 through 5 to change the setting to Slow IR. 6. Press <Esc> to save the changes and exit the system setup program. If you are prompted to restart your computer, click Yes. 7. Follow the instructions on the screen while the infrared sensor driver is being installed. 8. At the end of the installation process, click Yes to restart the computer. After you enable the infrared sensor, you can use it to establish a link to an infrared device. To set up and use an infrared device, see the infrared device documentation and Windows Help. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh4200.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 1 of 17 Adding and Replacing Parts Before You Begin Recommended Tools Shutting Down Your Computer Memory Keyboard Bluetooth Mini PCI Card Hard Drive Connecting a Television to the Computer Before You Begin This section provides procedures for removing and installing the components in your computer. Unless otherwise noted, each procedure assumes that the following conditions exist:

You have performed the steps in "Shutting Down Your Computer."

You have read the safety information in your System Information Guide. Recommended Tools The procedures in this document may require the following tools:

Small flat-blade screwdriver

Phillips screwdriver

Small plastic scribe

Flash BIOS update program floppy disk or CD Shutting Down Your Computer file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 2 of 17 Use the following safety guidelines to help protect your computer from potential damage and to ensure your own personal safety. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. NOTICE: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. CAUTION: Handle components and cards with care. Do not touch the components or contacts on a card. Hold a card by its edges or by its metal mounting bracket. Hold a component such as a microprocessor by its edges, not by its pins. NOTICE: When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its strain-relief loop, not on the cable itself. Some cables have a connector with locking tabs; if you are disconnecting this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before you disconnect the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep them evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable, ensure that both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned. NOTICE: To avoid damaging the computer, perform the following steps before you begin working inside the computer. 1. Ensure that the work surface is flat and clean to prevent the computer cover from being scratched. 2. Shut down the computer. 3. Ensure that the computer and any attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds. 4. If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network wall jack. 5. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 6. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. 7. Remove any installed PC Cards from the PC Card slot. 8. Close the display and turn the computer upside down on a flat work surface. NOTICE: To avoid damaging the system board, you must remove the main battery before you service the computer. 9. Slide and hold the battery-bay latch release on the bottom of the computer, and then remove the battery from the bay. 10. Remove any installed modules, including a second battery, if installed. 11. Remove the hard drive. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 3 of 17 Memory You can increase your computer memory by installing memory modules on the system board. See

"Specifications" for information on the memory supported by your computer. Be sure to add only memory modules that are intended for your computer. NOTE: Memory modules purchased from Dell are covered under your computer warranty. CAUTION: Before working inside your Dell computer, read the safety instructions in your System Information Guide. 1. Turn the computer over, remove the screw from the memory module cover, and lift the cover. NOTICE: To prevent damage to the memory module connector, do not use tools to spread the inner metal tabs that secure the memory module. 2. If you are replacing a memory module, remove the existing module. NOTICE: Handle memory modules by their edges, and do not touch the components on a module. a. Use your fingertips to carefully spread apart the securing clips on each end of the memory module connector until the module pops up. b. Remove the module from the connector. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 4 of 17 NOTICE: If you need to install memory modules in two connectors, install a memory module in the connector labeled "JDIM (DIMMA)" before you install a module in the connector labeled "JDIM2

(DIMMB)."

3. Ground yourself and install the new memory module:

a. Align the notch in the module with the slot in the center of the connector. b. Slide the edge of the module firmly into the connector, and rotate the module down until you feel a click. If you do not feel the click, remove the module and reinstall it. NOTE: If the memory module is not installed properly, the computer does not boot. No error message indicates this failure. 4. Replace the cover and screw. NOTICE: If the memory module cover is difficult to close, remove the module and reinstall it. Forcing the cover to close may damage your computer. 5. Insert the battery into the battery bay, or connect the AC adapter to your computer and an electrical outlet. 6. Turn on the computer. As the computer boots, it detects the additional memory and automatically updates the system configuration information. Keyboard CAUTION: Before performing the following procedures, read the safety instructions in your System Information Guide. NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 5 of 17 periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as the back panel) on the computer."

1. Turn the computer top-side up and open it. 1 2 3 display center control cover palm rest 2. Remove the center control cover:

a. Open the display all the way (180 degrees) so that it lies flat against your work surface. b. Starting on the right side of the computer, use a plastic scribe to pry up the center control cover. Lift it away from the computer, and lay it aside. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 6 of 17 1 center control cover 3. Remove the keyboard:

a. Remove the two M2.5 x 6-mm screws across the top of the keyboard. NOTICE: The keycaps on the keyboard are fragile, easily dislodged, and time-consuming to replace. Be careful when removing and handling the keyboard. b. Rotate the keyboard up and slide it forward. c. Hold the keyboard up and slightly forward to allow access to the keyboard connector. d. Pull up on the keyboard connector tab to disconnect the keyboard connector from the system board. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 7 of 17 1 M2.5 x 6-mm screws (2) 2 keyboard tabs 3 palm rest NOTE: When you replace the keyboard, ensure that the keyboard tabs are completely in place to avoid scratching the palm rest. Bluetooth If you ordered a Bluetooth card with your computer, the card is already installed. CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, read the safety instructions in your System Information Guide. 1. Ensure that the work surface is flat and clean to prevent scratching the computer cover. 2. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and then shut down the computer. 3. If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 4. Disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet. 5. Wait 10 to 20 seconds, and then disconnect any attached devices. 6. Remove any installed PC Cards, batteries, and module bay devices. NOTICE: Handle components and cards by their edges, and avoid touching pins and contacts. Ground yourself by touching a metal connector on the back of the computer. Continue to ground yourself periodically during this procedure. 7. Remove the Hard Drive. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 8 of 17 8. Pull the Bluetooth card connector out of the system board connector. 9. Pull the cable to remove the Bluetooth card from the computer. 1 Bluetooth card 2 system board connector 3 Bluetooth card connector 4 cable NOTE: When replacing the Bluetooth card, ensure the Bluetooth cable is routed correctly so that you do not damage the cable when you install the hard drive. Mini PCI Card CAUTION: FCC rules strictly prohibit users from installing 5-GHz (802.11a,802.11a/b, 802.11a/b/g) Wireless LAN Mini PCI cards. Under no circumstances should the user install such a device. Only trained Dell service personnel are authorized to install a 5-GHz Wireless LAN Mini PCI card. If you are removing and/or installing a 2.4-GHz (802.11b, 802.11b/g) Mini PCI card, follow the instructions noted below. Only products approved for use in your portable computer may be installed. Approved Mini PCI cards may be purchased only from Dell. NOTE: 2.4-GHz Wireless LAN PC Cards may be removed and installed by the user. If you ordered a Mini PCI card at the same time that you ordered your computer, the card is already installed. NOTE: Handle components and cards by their edges, and avoid touching pins and contacts. CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, read the safety instructions in your System file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 9 of 17 Information Guide. 1. Turn the computer over, and remove the screw from the Mini PCI card cover. 2. Place your finger under the cover at the indentation, and lift and slide the cover open. 3. If a Mini PCI card is not already installed, go to step 6. If you are replacing a Mini PCI card, remove the existing card:

a. Disconnect the Mini PCI card from any attached cables. b. Release the Mini PCI card by spreading the metal securing tabs until the card pops up slightly. c. Lift the Mini PCI card out of its connector. 4. Align the new Mini PCI card with the connector at a 45-degree angle, and press the Mini PCI card into the connector. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 10 of 17 5. Connect the antenna cables from the Mini PCI card to the antenna connectors on the computer. NOTICE: The connectors are keyed for correct insertion; do not force the connections. 1 antenna connectors on card (2) 2 antenna cables (2) 6. Lower the Mini PCI card toward the inner tabs to approximately a 20-degree angle. 7. Continue lowering the Mini PCI card until it snaps into the inner tabs of the connector. 8. Replace the cover. Hard Drive NOTICE: To prevent data loss, shut down your computer before removing the hard drive. Do not remove the hard drive while the computer is on, in standby mode, or in hibernate mode. NOTICE: Hard drives are extremely fragile; even a slight bump can damage the drive. CAUTION: If you remove the hard drive from the computer when the drive is hot, do not touch the metal housing of the hard drive. CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, read the safety instructions in your System Information Guide. NOTE: Dell does not guarantee compatibility or provide support for hard drives from sources other than Dell. 1. Turn the computer over. Use a small screwdriver to loosen the captive hard drive screw. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 11 of 17 1 captive screws 2. Turn the computer over so that it is upright. NOTICE: You cannot remove your hard drive unless you open your display first. 3. Open the display approximately 2.54 cm (1 in). NOTICE: When the hard drive is not in the computer, store it in protective antistatic packaging. See

"Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge" in your System Information Guide."

4. Pull the hard drive cover out of the computer. 5. Remove the new drive from its packaging. Save the original packaging for use when storing or shipping the hard drive. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 12 of 17 NOTICE: You cannot replace your hard drive unless you open your display first. 6. Ensure that the display is open approximately 2.54 cm (1 inch). NOTICE: Use firm and even pressure to slide the drive into place. If you force the hard drive into place using excessive force, you may damage the hard drive connector. 7. Press the hard drive cover into the bay until it is fully seated in the bay. 8. Turn the computer over. Use a small screwdriver to tighten the screw. 9. Use the Operating System CD to install the operating system for your computer. 10. Use the Drivers and Utilities CD to install the drivers and utilities for your computer. Connecting a Television to the Computer Your computer has an S-video TV-out connector that enables you to connect the computer to a television. Using a commercially available S-video cable or composite video cable, you can connect the computer to a television in one of two ways:

S-video (for a television with S-video input)

Composite video (for a television with only a composite video input; also uses a composite TV-out adapter cable) NOTE: Diagrams for each connection combination appear at the beginning of each subsection to help you determine which method you should use. The audio connector on the side of the computer enables you to connect the computer to your television or audio device, using a commercially available audio cable. When you complete the cable connection, see "Enabling the Display Settings for a Television" to ensure that the computer recognizes and works properly with the television. S-Video Connection file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 13 of 17 Before you begin, ensure that you have the following cables:

1 2 S-video cable audio cable 1. Shut down the computer and the television and/or audio device you want to connect. 2. Plug one end of the S-video cable in to the S-video connector on the computer. 3. Plug the other end of the S-video cable in to your television. 4. Plug the single-connector end of the audio cable in to the headphone connector on your computer. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 14 of 17 5. Plug the two RCA connectors on the other end of the audio cable in to the audio input connectors on your television or audio device. 6. Turn on the television, turn on any audio device you connected, and then turn on the computer. 7. See "Enabling the Display Settings for a Television" to ensure that the computer recognizes and works properly with the television. Composite Video Connection To connect the computer to a television that has a composite video input only, use a composite TV-out adapter cable available from Dell. Before you begin, ensure that you have the following cables:

file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 15 of 17 1 composite TV-out adapter cable 2 composite video cable 3 audio cable 1. Turn off the computer and the television and/or audio device you want to connect. 2. Connect the composite TV-out adapter cable to the S-video TV-out connector on the computer. 1 S-video TV-out connector 2 S-video connector 3 composite TV-out adapter cable 4 composite video connector 3. Plug one end of the composite video cable in to the composite video connector on the composite TV-out adapter cable. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 16 of 17 4. Plug the other end of the composite video cable in to the composite video connector on the television. 5. Plug the single-connector end of the audio cable in to the headphone connector on the computer. 6. Plug the two RCA connectors on the other end of the audio cable in to the audio input connectors on your television or audio device. Enabling the Display Settings for a Television Intel UMA Integrated Video Controller NOTE: Ensure that you properly connect the television before you enable the display settings. 1. Open the Control Panel window. In Microsoft Windows XP, click the Start button and click the Control Panel icon. Under Pick a Category, click Appearance and Themes. In Windows 2000, click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Display icon, click the Settings tab, and then click Advanced. 3. Click the Intel (R) Extreme Graphics tab. 4. Click the Graphic Properties button. 5. If you want to use only a television without using the computer display or any other display options:

a. In the new window, click Television so that a red check mark appears over the television icon. b. Ensure that the settings are correct. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Adding and Replacing Parts Page 17 of 17 6. If you want to use a television and the computer display at the same time:

a. In the new window, click Intel (R) Dual Display Clone and ensure that one of the devices listed is a television. b. Click Device Settings. c. In the new window, ensure that the display resolution settings are correct. 7. Click Apply to view the new settings. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh93B0.htm 1/13/2004 Reinstalling Software Page 1 of 9 Reinstalling Software Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities Using Microsoft Windows System Restore Reinstalling Windows XP Reinstalling Windows 2000 Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities Dell ships your computer to you with required drivers and utilities already installedno further installation or configuration is needed. NOTICE: The Drivers and Utilities CD may contain drivers for operating systems that are not on your computer. Ensure that you are installing software appropriate for your operating system. To reinstall drivers for optional devices such as wireless communications and DVD drives, you may need the CD and documentation that came with those devices. NOTICE: The Dell Support website, support.dell.com, and the Drivers and Utilities CD provide approved drivers for Dell computers. If you install drivers from other sources, your computer might not work correctly. To reinstall a driver or utility from your Drivers and Utilities CD:

1. Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs. 2. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD. In most cases, the CD starts running automatically. If it does not, start Microsoft Windows Explorer, click your CD drive directory to display the CD contents, and then double-click the autorcd.exe file. The first time that you run the CD, it might prompt you to install setup files. Click OK, and follow the instructions on the screen to continue. 3. From the Language drop-down menu in the toolbar, select your preferred language for the driver or utility (if available). A welcome screen appears. 4. Click Next. The CD automatically scans your hardware to detect drivers and utilities used by your computer. After the CD completes the hardware scan, you can also detect other drivers and utilities. Under Search Criteria, select the appropriate categories from the System Model, Operating System, and Topic file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E2.htm 1/13/2004 Reinstalling Software drop-down menus. Page 2 of 9 A link or links appear(s) for the specific drivers and utilities used by your computer. 5. Click the link of a specific driver or utility to display information about the driver or utility that you want to install. 6. Click the Install button (if present) to begin installing the driver or utility. At the welcome screen, follow the screen prompts to complete the installation. If no Install button is present, automatic installation is not an option. For installation instructions, either see the appropriate instructions in the following subsections, or click Extract, follow the extracting instructions, and read the readme file. If instructed to navigate to the driver files, click the CD directory on the driver information window to display the files associated with that driver. Manually Reinstalling Drivers for Windows XP NOTE: If you are reinstalling an infrared-sensor driver, you must first enable the infrared sensor in the system setup program before continuing with the driver installation. 1. After extracting the driver files to your hard drive as described previously, click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. Click the Start button and right-click My Computer. 2. Click Properties. 3. Click the Hardware tab and click Device Manager. 4. Double-click the type of device for which you are installing the driver (for example, Modems or Infrared devices). 5. Double-click the name of the device for which you are installing the driver. 6. Click the Driver tab and click Update Driver. 7. Select Install from a list or specific location (Advanced) and click Next. 8. Click Browse, and browse to the location to which you previously extracted the driver files. 9. When the name of the appropriate driver appears, click Next. 10. Click Finish and restart your computer. Using the Windows XP Device Driver Rollback If you install a new device driver that causes system instability, you can use the Windows XP Device Driver Rollback to replace the new device driver with the previously installed version of the device driver. If you cannot reinstall your previous driver by using the Device Driver Rollback process, then use System Restore to return your operating system to its previous operating state before you installed the new device driver. To use Device Driver Rollback:

1. Click the Start button and right-click My Computer. 2. Click Properties. 3. Click the Hardware tab and click Device Manager. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E2.htm 1/13/2004 Reinstalling Software Page 3 of 9 4. In the Device Manager window, right-click the device for which the new driver was installed and then click Properties. 5. Click the Drivers tab. 6. Click Roll Back Driver. Manually Reinstalling Drivers for Windows 2000 NOTE: If you are reinstalling an infrared driver, you must first enable the infrared sensor in the system setup program before continuing with the driver installation. 1. After extracting the driver files to your hard drive as described previously, click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the System icon. 3. Click the Hardware tab. 4. Click Device Manager. 5. Double-click the type of device for which you are installing the driver (for example, Modems or Infrared devices). 6. Double-click the name of the device. 7. Click the Driver tab and click Update Driver. 8. Click Next. 9. Ensure that Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended) is selected, and then click Next. 10. Ensure that the Specify a location check box is checked and that all other check boxes are unchecked, and click Next. 11. Click Browse to browse to the location to which you previously extracted the driver files. 12. When the name of the appropriate driver appears, click Next. 13. Click Finish and restart your computer. Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities In the Microsoft Windows XP and Windows 2000 operating systems, IRQ conflicts occur if a device either is not detected during the operating system setup or is detected but incorrectly configured. See the following subsection that corresponds to your operating system to check for IRQ conflicts on your computer. Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Performance and Maintenance and click System. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E2.htm 1/13/2004 Reinstalling Software Page 4 of 9 3. Click the Hardware tab and click Device Manager. 4. In the Device Manager list, check for conflicts with the other devices. Conflicts are indicated by a yellow exclamation point (!) beside the conflicting device or a red X if the device has been disabled. 5. Double-click any conflicting device listed to bring up the Properties window so that you can determine what needs to be reconfigured or removed from the Device Manager. 6. Resolve these conflicts before checking specific devices. 7. Double-click the malfunctioning device type in the Device Manager list. 8. Double-click the icon for the specific device in the expanded list. The Properties window appears. If an IRQ conflict exists, the Device status area in the Properties window reports what other devices are sharing the device's IRQ. 9. Resolve any IRQ conflicts. You can also use the Windows XP Hardware Troubleshooter. To use the troubleshooter, click the Start button and click Help and Support. Type hardware troubleshooter in the Search field, and then click the arrow to start the search. Click Hardware Troubleshooter in the Search Results list. In the Hardware Troubleshooter list, click I need to resolve a hardware conflict on my computer and click Next. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the System icon. 3. Click the Hardware tab. 4. Click Device Manager. 5. Click View and click Resources by connection. 6. Double-click Interrupt request (IRQ) to view the IRQ assignments. Conflicts are indicated by a yellow exclamation point (!) beside the conflicting device or a red X if the device has been disabled. 7. Double-click any conflicting device listed to bring up the Properties window so that you can determine what needs to be reconfigured or removed from the Device Manager. Resolve these conflicts before checking specific devices. 8. Double-click the malfunctioning device type in the Device Manager list. 9. Double-click the icon for the specific device in the expanded list. The Properties window appears. If an IRQ conflict exists, the Device status area in the Properties window reports what other devices are sharing the device's IRQ. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E2.htm 1/13/2004 Reinstalling Software Page 5 of 9 10. Resolve any IRQ conflicts. You can also use the Windows 2000 Hardware Troubleshooter. To use the troubleshooter, click the Start button and click Help. Click Troubleshooting and Maintenance on the Contents tab, click Windows 2000 troubleshooters, and then click Hardware. In the Hardware Troubleshooter list, click I need to resolve a hardware conflict on my computer, and then click Next. Using Microsoft Windows System Restore The Microsoft Windows XP operating system provides a System Restore feature that allows you to return your computer to an earlier operating state if changes to the computer's hardware, software (including new hardware or program installations), or system settings have left the computer in an undesirable operating state. You can also undo the last system restore. System Restore automatically creates system checkpoints. You can also manually create your own checkpoints by creating restore points. To limit the amount of hard disk space used, older restore points will be automatically purged. To resolve an operating system problem, you can use System Restore from Safe Mode or Normal Mode to return your computer to an earlier operating state. System Restore does not cause you to lose personal files stored in the My Documents folder, data files, or e-

mail messages after restoring the computer to an earlier time. If you restore the computer to an operating state that existed before you installed a program, the program's data files are not lost, but you must reinstall the actual program again. NOTICE: It is important to make regular backups of your data files. System Restore does not monitor changes to or recover your data files. If the original data on the hard disk is accidentally erased or overwritten, or if it becomes inaccessible because of a hard disk malfunction, use your backup files to recover the lost or damaged data. System Restore is enabled on your new computer. However, if you reinstall Windows XP with less than 200 MB of free hard-disk space available, System Restore is automatically disabled. Before you use System Restore, confirm that it is enabled:

1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click the Performance and Maintenance. 3. Click System. 4. Click the System Restore tab. 5. Ensure that Turn off System Restore is not checked. Creating a Restore Point In Windows XP, you can either use the System Restore Wizard or manually create a restore point. Using the System Restore Wizard To use the System Restore Wizard, click the Start button, click Help and Support, click System Restore, file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E2.htm 1/13/2004 Reinstalling Software Page 6 of 9 and then follow the instructions in the System Restore Wizard window. You can also create and name a restore point if you are logged on as the computer administrator or a user with administrator rights. Manually Creating a Restore Point 1. Click the Start button, point to All Programs Accessories System Tools, and then click System Restore. 2. Click Create a restore point. 3. Click Next. 4. Type a name for the new restore point in the Restore point description field. The present date and time are automatically added to the description of the new restore point. 5. Click Create. 6. Click OK. Restoring the Computer to an Earlier Operating State If problems occur after installing a device driver, first try using Device Driver Rollback. If Device Driver Rollback does not resolve the problem, then use System Restore. NOTICE: Before restoring the computer to an earlier operating state, save and close all open files and exit all open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system restoration is complete. 1. Click the Start button, point to All Programs Accessories System Tools, and then click System Restore. 2. Ensure that Restore my computer to an earlier time is selected and click Next. 3. Click a calendar date to which you want to restore your computer. The Select a Restore Point screen provides a calendar that allows you to see and select restore points. All calendar dates with available restore points appear in bold. 4. Select a restore point and click Next. If a calendar date has only one restore point, then that restore point is automatically selected. If two or more restore points are available, click the restore point that you want to use. NOTICE: Save and close all open files and exit all open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system restoration is complete. 5. Click Next. In Windows XP, the Restoration Complete screen appears after System Restore finishes collecting data, and then the computer automatically restarts. 6. After the computer restarts, click OK. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E2.htm 1/13/2004 Reinstalling Software Page 7 of 9 To change the restore point, you can either repeat the steps using a different restore point, or you can undo the restoration. Undoing the Last System Restore NOTICE: Save and close all open files and exit all open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system restoration is complete. 1. Click the Start button, point to All Programs Accessories System Tools, and then click System Restore. 2. Select Undo my last restoration and click Next. NOTICE: Save and close all open files and exit all open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system restoration is complete. 3. Click Next. The System Restore screen appears, and then the computer automatically restarts. 4. After the computer restarts, click OK. Reinstalling Windows XP Before reinstalling the Microsoft Windows XP operating system to correct a problem, try correcting the problem by using Windows System Restore. NOTICE: The Operating System CD provides options for reinstalling the Windows XP operating system. The options can potentially overwrite files installed by Dell and possibly affect programs installed on your hard drive. Therefore, do not reinstall your operating system unless instructed to do so by a Dell technical support representative. 1. Insert the Operating System CD. 2. Shut down the computer, and then turn on the computer. 3. Press any key when the Press any key to boot from CD message appears on the screen. 4. When the Windows XP Setup screen appears, press <Enter> to select To set up Windows now. 5. Read the information in the License Agreement window, and then press <F8> on your keyboard to agree with the license information. 6. If your computer already has Windows XP installed and you want to recover your current Windows XP data, type r to select the repair option, and then go to step 15. If you want to install a new copy of Windows XP, press <Esc> to select the fresh copy option and then press <Enter> on the next screen to select the highlighted partition (recommended). Then follow the instructions on the screen. The Windows XP Setup screen appears and Windows XP begins to copy files and install the device file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E2.htm 1/13/2004 Reinstalling Software Page 8 of 9 drivers. The computer automatically restarts multiple times before it requires additional input. 7. When the Welcome to Microsoft screen appears, click the green arrow icon at the bottom of the screen to continue. Then follow the instructions on the screen to finish the installation. 8. When the Regional Settings screen appears, select the settings for your locale and click Next. 9. Enter your name and organization in the Personalize Your Software screen and click Next. 10. If you are reinstalling Windows XP Home Edition, enter a name for your computer when the Computer Name window appear and click Next. If you are reinstalling Windows XP Professional, enter a name for your computer and a password when the Computer Name and Administrator Password window appears and click Next. 11. If you have a modem installed, the Modem Dialing Information screen appears. Enter the requested information and click Next. 12. Enter the date, time, and time zone in the Date and Time Settings window and click Next. 13. If your computer has a network adapter, select the appropriate network settings. If your computer does not have a network adapter, you do not see this option. Windows XP begins to install its components and configure the computer. The computer automatically restarts. 14. When the Welcome to Microsoft screen appears, click the green arrow icon at the bottom of the screen to continue. Then follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation. 15. Remove the CD from the drive. 16. Reinstall the appropriate drivers. 17. Reinstall your virus protection software. Reinstalling Windows 2000 NOTICE: The Operating System CD provides options for reinstalling the Windows 2000 operating system. The options can potentially overwrite files installed by Dell and possibly affect programs installed on your hard drive. Therefore, do not reinstall your operating system unless instructed to do so by a Dell technical support representative. 1. Turn on the computer, and enter the system setup program as directed by a Dell technical support representative or as follows:

a. Shut down the computer. b. Before the computer boots into Windows, press <F2> to enter the system setup program. c. Press <Alt><P> to move to the Boot menu. d. In the system setup program Boot menu, follow the instructions on the screen to change the boot sequence so that the CD or DVD drive boots first. Then insert the Operating System CD into the drive. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E2.htm 1/13/2004 Reinstalling Software Page 9 of 9 e. Press <Esc> to save your changes and exit the system setup program. f. Press any key to boot the computer from the CD. 2. When the Windows 2000 Setup window appears, ensure that To setup Win2000 now, press ENTER is highlighted. Then press <Enter>. 3. Read the information in the License Agreement window and press <F8> to continue. 4. When the Windows 2000 Professional Setup window appears, press the arrow keys to select the Windows 2000 partition option that you want. Then press the key for the partition option you chose. 5. When the Windows 2000 Professional Setup window reappears, press the arrow keys to select the type of file system that you want Windows 2000 to use, and then press<Enter>. 6. Press <Enter> again to restart your computer. 7. Click Next when the Welcome to the Windows 2000 Setup Wizard window appears. 8. When the Regional Settings window appears, select your region, and then click Next. 9. Enter your name and organization in the Personalize Your Software window and click Next. 10. Enter the Windows product key, which is printed on the Microsoft label on your computer. Then click Next. 11. When the Computer Name and Administrator Password window appears, enter a name for your computer and a password, if desired. Then click Next. 12. Enter the date and time in the Date and Time Settings window and click Next. Windows 2000 installs components and configures the computer. 13. When the Completing the Windows 2000 Setup Wizard window appears, remove the CD from the drive and click Finish. The computer automatically restarts. Enabling Hibernate Mode 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings and click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Power Management icon. 3. Click the Hibernate tab. 4. Ensure that Enable hibernate support is selected and click Apply. 5. Click OK to close the Control Panel. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E2.htm 1/13/2004 Cleaning Your Computer Page 1 of 3 Cleaning Your Computer Computer and Keyboard Display Touch Pad Floppy Drive Optical Media Computer and Keyboard 1. Shut down your computer, disconnect any attached devices, and disconnect them from their electrical outlets. 2. Remove any installed batteries. 3. Gently use a vacuum cleaner with a brush attachment to remove dust from the slots and holes on your computer and between the keys on the keyboard. NOTICE: To avoid damaging the computer or display, do not spray cleaning solution directly onto the display. Only use products specifically designed for cleaning LCDs, and follow the instructions that are included with the product. 4. Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water or an LCD cleaner, and wipe the computer and keyboard. Do not allow water from the cloth to seep between the touch pad and the surrounding palm rest. Display NOTICE: To avoid damaging the computer or display, do not spray cleaning solution directly onto the display. Only use products specifically designed for cleaning LCDs, and follow the instructions that are included with the product. 1. Shut down your computer, disconnect any attached devices, and disconnect them from their electrical outlets. 2. Remove any installed batteries. 3. Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water or an LCD cleaner, and wipe the display until it is clean. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh4ECE.htm 1/13/2004 Cleaning Your Computer Page 2 of 3 Touch Pad 1. Shut down your computer, disconnect any attached devices, and disconnect them from their electrical outlets. 2. Remove any installed batteries. 3. Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water, and stroke it gently across the surface of the touch pad. Do not allow water from the cloth to seep between the touch pad and the surrounding palm rest. Floppy Drive Use only a commercially available cleaning kit to clean your floppy drive. Such kits contain pretreated floppy disks to remove contaminants that accumulate during typical operation. Optical Media NOTICE: Always use compressed air to clean the lens in the drive, and follow the instructions that are included with the compressed air. Never touch the lens in the drive. If you notice problems, such as skipping, with the playback quality of your CDs or DVDs, try cleaning the discs. 1. Hold the disc by its outer edge. You can also touch the inside edge of the center hole. NOTICE: To avoid damaging the surface, do not wipe in a circular motion around the disc. 2. With a soft, dry, lint-free cloth, gently wipe the bottom of the disc (the unlabeled side) in a straight line from the center to the outer edge. You can also purchase commercial products that clean discs and provide some protection from dust, fingerprints, and scratches. Cleaning products for CDs are safe to use on DVDs. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh4ECE.htm 1/13/2004 Cleaning Your Computer Page 3 of 3 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh4ECE.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Dell Diagnostics Page 1 of 3 Using the Dell Diagnostics When to Use the Dell Diagnostics Features of the Dell Diagnostics Starting the Dell Diagnostics When to Use the Dell Diagnostics Whenever a major component or device in your computer does not function properly, you may have a component failure. If you are experiencing a problem with your Dell computer, perform the checks in

"Solving Problems" and run the Dell Diagnostics before you call Dell for technical assistance. Running the Dell Diagnostics may help you to resolve the problem yourself quickly without having to contact Dell for assistance. If you are experienced with computers and know what component(s) you need to test, select the appropriate diagnostic test group(s) or subtest(s). If you are unsure about how to begin diagnosing a problem, see

"Starting the Dell Diagnostics."

Features of the Dell Diagnostics The Dell Diagnostics helps you to check your computer hardware without any additional equipment and without destroying any data. By using the diagnostics, you can have confidence in the operation of your computer. If you find a problem that you cannot solve by yourself, the diagnostic tests can provide you with important information you need when talking to Dell's service and support personnel. NOTICE: Use the Dell Diagnostics to test only your Dell computer. Using this program with other computers may cause incorrect computer responses or result in error messages. The diagnostic test groups or subtests also have the following features:

Options that let you perform express, extended, or custom tests on one or all devices

An option that allows you to select tests based on a symptom of the problem you are having

An option that allows you to choose the number of times a test group or subtest is repeated

The ability to display test results

Options to temporarily suspend testing if an error is detected, or to terminate testing

Extensive online Help that describes the tests and devices

Status messages that inform you whether test groups or subtests were completed successfully

Error messages that appear if any problems are detected file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhA58A.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Dell Diagnostics Page 2 of 3 Starting the Dell Diagnostics The Dell Diagnostics is located on a hidden Diagnostic utility partition on your hard drive. NOTE: If your computer cannot display a screen image, contact Dell. 1. Shut down the computer. 2. If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 3. Connect the computer to an electrical outlet. NOTE: If you cannot see anything on your display, you can hold down the mute button and press the power button (instead of F12) to begin the Dell Diagnostics. You do not need to highlight Diagnostics and press <Enter>. The computer automatically runs the Pre-boot System Assessment. 4. Turn on the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press <F12> immediately. If you wait too long and the Microsoft Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. 5. When the boot device list appears, highlight Diagnostics and press <Enter>. The computer begins to run the Pre-boot System Assessment, a series of embedded diagnostics that perform initial testing on your system board, keyboard, hard drive, and display.

During the assessment, answer any questions that appear.

If a component failure is detected, the computer stops and beeps. To stop the assessment and reboot to the operating system, press <N>; to continue to the next test, press <Y>; to retest the component that failed, press <R>.

If failures are detected during the Pre-boot System Assessment, write down the error code(s) and contact Dell before continuing on to the Dell Diagnostics.

If you receive a message stating that no Diagnostics utility partition has been found, follow the instructions on the screen to run the Dell Diagnostics from your Drivers and Utilities CD. If the Pre-boot System Assessment completes successfully, you receive the message Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue. 6. Press any key to start the Dell Diagnostics from the Diagnostics utility partition on your hard drive. 7. After the Dell Diagnostics loads and the Main Menu screen appears, click the button for the option you want. NOTE: The Service Tag for your computer is located in the title bar of each screen. Option Function Express Test Performs a quick test of devices. The test typically takes 10 to 20 minutes and requires no interaction on your part. Run Express Test first to increase the file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhA58A.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Dell Diagnostics Page 3 of 3 possibility of tracing the problem quickly. Extended Test Performs a thorough check of devices. The test typically takes 1 hour or more and requires you to answer questions periodically. Custom Test Tests a specific device. You can customize the tests to be run. Symptom Tree Allows you to select tests based on a symptom of the problem you are experiencing. The option lists the most common symptoms. 8. If a problem is encountered during a test, a message appears, displaying the error code and a description of the problem. Write down the error code and problem description and follow the instructions on the screen. If you cannot resolve the error condition, contact Dell. 9. If you run a test from the Custom Test or Symptom Tree option, click the applicable tab described in the following table for more information. Tab Function Results Displays the results of the test and any error conditions encountered. Errors Help Displays error conditions encountered, error codes, and problem description. Describes the test and may indicate requirements for running the test. Configuration Displays your hardware configuration for the selected device. The Dell Diagnostics obtains your configuration information for all devices from the system setup program, memory, and various internal tests and displays the information in the device list in the left pane of the screen. The device list may not display the names of all the components installed on your computer or all devices attached to your computer. Parameters Allows you to customize the test by changing the test settings. 10. When you have finished running a test, close the screen to return to the Main Menu screen. To exit the Dell Diagnostics and reboot the computer, close the Main Menu screen. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhA58A.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 1 of 17 Solving Problems Power Problems Error Messages Video and Display Problems Sound and Speaker Problems Printer Problems Modem and Internet Connection Problems Touch Pad or Mouse Problems External Keyboard Problems Unexpected Characters Drive Problems PC Card Problems Network Problems General Program Problems If Your Dell Computer Gets Wet If You Drop or Damage Your Computer Resolving Other Technical Problems Power Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. Check the power light When the power light is lit or blinking, the computer has power. If the power light is blinking, the computer is in standby modepress the power button to exit standby mode. If the light is off, press the power button to turn on the computer. Charge the battery The battery charge may be depleted. 1. Reinstall the battery. 2. Use the AC adapter to connect the computer to an electrical outlet. 3. Turn on the computer. Check the battery status light If the battery status light flashes orange or is a steady file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 2 of 17 orange the battery charge is low or depleted. Connect the computer to an electrical outlet. If the battery status light flashes green and orange, the battery is too hot to charge. Shut down the computer, disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet, and then let the battery and computer cool to room temperature. If the battery status light rapidly flashes orange, the battery may be defective. Contact Dell. Test the electrical outlet Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. Check the AC adapter Check the AC adapter cable connections. If the AC adapter has a light, ensure that the light is on. Connect the computer directly to an electrical outlet Bypass power protection devices, power strips, and the extension cable to verify that the computer turns on. Eliminate possible interference Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, halogen lamps, or other appliances. Adjust the power properties See "Power Management."

Reseat the memory modules If the computer power light turns on but the display remains blank, reseat the memory modules. Error Messages If the message is not listed, see the documentation for the operating system or the program that was running at the time the message appeared. Auxiliary device failure The touch pad or external mouse may be faulty. For an external mouse, check the cable connection. Enable the Pointing Device option in the system setup program. If the problem persists, contact Dell. Bad command or file name Ensure that you have spelled the command correctly, put spaces in the proper place, and used the correct pathname. Cache disabled due to failure The primary cache internal to the microprocessor has failed. Contact Dell. CD drive controller failure The CD drive does not respond to commands from the computer. See "Drive Problems."

Data error The floppy or hard drive cannot read the data. See "Drive Problems."

Decreasing available memory One or more memory modules may be faulty or improperly seated. Reseat the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. See

"Memory."

Disk C: failed initialization The hard drive failed initialization. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Floppy drive 0 seek failure The system configuration information may not match the hardware configuration. Run the Diskette tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Diskette read failure The floppy disk may be defective. If the drive access light turns on, try a different disk. See "Drive Problems."

Diskette subsystem reset failed The floppy drive controller may be faulty. Run the file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 3 of 17 Diskette tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Diskette write-protected Because the floppy disk is write-protected, the operation cannot be completed. Slide the write-protect notch. Drive not ready The operation requires a floppy disk in the drive or a hard drive in the bay before it can continue. Insert a floppy disk, or push the floppy disk all the way into the drive until the eject button pops out. Or, install a hard drive in the hard drive bay. Error reading PCMCIA card The computer cannot identify the PC Card. Reinsert the card or try another PC Card. Extended memory size has changed The amount of memory recorded in NVRAM does not match the memory installed in the computer. Restart the computer. If the error appears again, contact Dell. Gate A20 failure A memory module may be loose. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. General failure The operating system is unable to carry out the command. The message is usually followed by specific informationfor example, Printer out of paper. Take the appropriate action. Hard-disk drive configuration error The computer cannot identify the drive type. Turn off the computer, remove the hard drive, and boot the computer from a bootable floppy disk or CD. Then turn off the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Hard-disk drive controller failure 0 The hard drive does not respond to commands from the computer. Turn off the computer, remove the hard drive, and boot the computer from a bootable floppy disk or CD. Then turn off the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Hard-disk drive failure The hard drive does not respond to commands from the computer. Turn off the computer, remove the hard drive, and boot the computer from a bootable floppy disk or CD. Then turn off the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Hard-disk drive read failure The hard drive may be defective. Turn off the computer, remove the hard drive, and boot the computer from a bootable floppy disk or CD. Then turn off the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Insert bootable media The operating system is trying to boot to a nonbootable floppy disk or CD. Insert a bootable floppy disk or CD. Invalid configuration information-please run System Setup Program The system configuration information does not match the hardware configuration. The message is most likely to occur after a memory module is installed. Correct the appropriate options in the system setup program. See "Using the System Setup Program."

Keyboard clock line failure For external keyboards, check the cable connection. Run the Keyboard Controller test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Keyboard controller failure For external keyboards, check the cable connection. Restart the computer, and avoid touching the keyboard or the mouse during the boot routine. Run the Keyboard Controller test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Keyboard data line failure For external keyboards, check the cable connection. Run the Keyboard Controller test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Keyboard stuck key failure For external keyboards or keypads, check the cable file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 4 of 17 connection. Restart the computer, and avoid touching the keyboard or keys during the boot routine. Run the Stuck Key test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Memory address line failure at address, read value expecting value A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. Memory allocation error The software you are attempting to run is conflicting with the operating system, another program, or a utility. Turn off the computer, wait 30 seconds, and then restart it. Try to run the program again. If the error message still appears, see the software documentation. Memory data line failure at address, read value expecting value A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. Memory double word logic failure at address, read value expecting value A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. Memory odd/even logic failure at address, read value expecting value A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. Memory write/read failure at address, read value expecting value A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. No boot device available The computer cannot find the floppy disk or hard drive. If the floppy drive is your boot device, ensure that a bootable floppy disk is in the drive. If the hard drive is your boot device, ensure that the drive is installed, properly seated, and partitioned as a boot device. No boot sector on hard drive The operating system may be corrupted. Contact Dell. No timer tick interrupt A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Non-system disk or disk error A floppy disk is in the floppy drive. Remove the floppy disk and restart the computer. Not a boot diskette The operating system is trying to boot to a nonbootable floppy disk. Insert a bootable floppy disk. Operating system not found Contact Dell. Optional ROM bad checksum The optional ROM apparently failed. Contact Dell. A required .DLL file was not found The program that you are trying to open is missing an essential file. Remove and then reinstall the program. Microsoft Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Add or Remove Programs. 3. Select the program you want to remove. 4. Click Remove or Change/Remove and follow the prompts on the screen. 5. See the program documentation for installation instructions. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Add/Remove Programs icon. 3. Select the program that you want to remove. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 5 of 17 4. Click Change or Remove Programs. 5. See the program documentation for installation instructions. Sector not found The operating system cannot locate a sector on the floppy or hard drive. You may have a defective sector or corrupted FAT on the floppy disk or hard drive. Run the Windows error-checking utility to check the file structure on the floppy disk or hard drive. See Windows Help for instructions. If a large number of sectors are defective, back up the data (if possible), and then reformat the floppy disk or hard drive. Seek error The operating system cannot find a specific track on the floppy disk or hard drive. If the error is on the floppy disk, try another floppy disk. Shutdown failure A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Time-of-day clock lost power System configuration settings are corrupted. Connect your computer to an electrical outlet to charge the battery. If the problem persists, try to restore the data by entering the system setup program. Then immediately exit the program. See "Using the System Setup Program." If the message reappears, contact Dell. Time-of-day clock stopped The reserve battery that supports the system configuration settings may require recharging. Connect your computer to an electrical outlet to charge the battery. If the problem persists, contact Dell. Time-of-day not set-please run the System Setup program The time or date stored in the system setup program does not match the system clock. Correct the settings for the Date and Time options. See "Using the System Setup Program."

Timer chip counter 2 failed A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Unexpected interrupt in protected mode The keyboard controller may be malfunctioning, or a memory module may be loose. Run the System Memory tests and the Keyboard Controller test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

x:\ is not accessible. The device is not ready Insert a disk into the drive and try again. Warning: Battery is critically low The battery is running out of charge. Replace the battery, or connect the computer to an electrical outlet. Otherwise, activate hibernate mode or turn off the computer. Video and Display Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. If the display is blank NOTE: If you are using a program that requires a higher resolution than your computer supports, it is recommended that you attach an external monitor to your computer. Check the battery If you are using a battery to power your computer, the battery charge may be depleted. Connect the computer to an electrical outlet using the AC adapter, and turn on the computer. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 6 of 17 Test the electrical outlet Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. Check the AC adapter Check the AC adapter cable connections. If the AC adapter has a light, ensure that the light is on. Connect the computer directly to an electrical outlet Bypass power protection devices, power strips, and the extension cable to verify that the computer turns on. Adjust the power properties Search for the keyword standby in Windows Help or the Windows Help and Support Center. Switch the video image If your computer is attached to an external monitor, press

<Fn><F8> to switch the video image to the display. If the display is difficult to read Adjust the brightness See "Adjusting Brightness" for instructions on adjusting the brightness. Move the subwoofer away from the computer or monitor If your external speaker system includes a subwoofer, ensure that the subwoofer is at least 60 cm (2 ft) away from the computer or external monitor. Eliminate possible interference Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, halogen lamps, or other appliances. Rotate the computer to face a different direction Eliminate sunlight glare, which can cause poor picture quality. Adjust the Windows display settings Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and then click Control Panel. 2. Click Appearance and Themes. 3. Click the area you want to change or click the Display icon. 4. Try different settings for Color quality and Screen resolution. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Display icon and click the Settings tab. 3. Try different settings for Colors, Screen area, and Advanced Settings. Run the Video diagnostics tests If no error message appears and you still have a display problem, but the display is not completely blank, run the Video device group in the Dell Diagnostics. Then contact Dell. See "Error Messages" If an error message appears, see "Error Messages."

If only part of the display is readable Connect an external monitor 1. Shut down your computer and connect an external monitor to the computer. 2. Turn on the computer and the monitor and adjust the monitor brightness and contrast controls. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 7 of 17 If the external monitor works, the computer display or video controller may be defective. Contact Dell. Sound and Speaker Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. If you have a problem with integrated speakers Adjust the Windows volume control Double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. Adjust the volume, bass, or treble controls to eliminate distortion. Adjust the volume using keyboard shortcuts See "Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad."

Press <Fn><End> to disable (mute) or reenable the integrated speakers. Reinstall the sound (audio) driver See "Reinstalling Software."

For Windows 2000 only, ensure that digital audio for the CD drive is enabled 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the System icon. 3. Click the Hardware tab. 4. Click Device Manager. 5. Double-click DVD/CD-ROM drives. 6. Double-click the name of the drive. 7. On the drive Properties screen, click the Properties tab. 8. Click the box near the bottom of the screen to enable digital audio for your CD or DVD drive. If you have a problem with external speakers NOTE: The volume control in some MP3 players overrides the Windows volume setting. If you have been listening to MP3 songs, make sure that you did not turn the player volume down or off. Check the speaker cable connections See the setup diagram supplied with the speakers. Test the electrical outlet Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. Ensure that the speakers are turned on See the setup diagram supplied with the speakers. Adjust the Windows volume control Double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. Adjust the volume, bass, or treble controls to eliminate distortion. Test the speakers Plug the speaker audio cable in to the Ensure that the headphone volume control is turned up. Play a music CD. connector on the computer. Run the speaker self-test Some speaker systems have a self-test button on the subwoofer. See the speaker documentation for self-test instructions. Eliminate possible interference Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, or halogen lamps to check for interference. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 8 of 17 Reinstall the sound (audio) driver See "Reinstalling Software."

Run the Misc. PCI Devices diagnostic test See "Using the Dell Diagnostics." If the tests complete successfully, the controller is functioning properly. If the problem persists, or if the tests do not complete successfully, contact Dell. For Windows 2000 only, ensure that digital audio for the CD drive is enabled 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the System icon. 3. Click the Hardware tab. 4. Click Device Manager. 5. Double-click DVD/CD-ROM drives. 6. Double-click the name of the drive. 7. On the drive Properties screen, click the Properties tab. 8. Click the box near the bottom of the screen to enable digital audio for your CD or DVD drive. Printer Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you perform the various checks. Check the printer cable connections Ensure that the printer cable is properly connected to the computer. Check the printer cable 1. Shut down the computer and turn off the printer. 2. Swap the printer cable with a cable that you know is working. 3. Turn on the printer and computer, and try again to print. 4. If you print successfully, contact Dell for assistance in obtaining a new printer cable. Test the electrical outlet Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. Ensure that the printer is turned on See the documentation supplied with the printer. Verify that Windows recognizes the printer Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Printers and Other Hardware. 3. Click View installed printers or fax printers. If the printer model is listed, right-click the printer icon. 4. Click Properties and click the Ports tab. Ensure that the Print to the following port

(s): setting is LPT1 (Printer Port). Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Printers. If the printer model is listed, right-click the printer icon. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 9 of 17 2. Click Properties and click the Ports tab. 3. Ensure that the Print to the following port: option is set for your printer type:

For a parallel printer: LPT1 (Printer Port)

For a USB printer: USB Reinstall the printer driver See "Reinstalling Software."

Check the printer Run the printer self-test. If the test does not complete successfully, the printer is probably defective. Contact the printer manufacturer. Modem and Internet Connection Problems NOTICE: Connect the modem to an analog telephone wall jack only. Connecting the modem to a digital telephone network may damage the modem. NOTICE: Modem and network connectors look similar. Do not plug a telephone line in to the network connector. Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. NOTE: If you can connect to your Internet service provider (ISP), your modem is functioning properly. If you are sure that your modem is working properly and you still experience problems, contact your ISP. Check the telephone wall jack Disconnect the telephone line from the modem and connect it to a telephone. Listen for a dial tone. Ensure that you have touchtone telephone service. Try connecting the modem to a different telephone wall jack. Slow connection speeds can be caused by telephone noise as well as by telephone line or network conditions. Contact your telephone company or network administrator for more information. Connect the modem directly to the telephone wall jack If you have other telephone devices sharing the line, such as an answering machine, fax machine, surge protector, or line splitter, then bypass them and use the telephone line to connect the modem directly to the telephone wall jack. Check the connection Verify that the telephone line is connected to the modem. Check the telephone line Try using a different telephone line. If you are using a line that is 3 m (10 ft) or more in length, try a shorter one. Irregular dial tone If you have voice mail service, you might hear an irregular dial tone when you have messages. Contact your telephone company for instructions on restoring a dial tone. Turn off call waiting (catch-phone) See your telephone directory for instructions on deactivating this feature. Then adjust the dial-up networking connection properties. Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Printers and Other Hardware, click Phone and Modem Options, click the Dialing Rules tab, and then click Edit.... In the Edit Location window, ensure that To disable call waiting, dial: is checked, and 3. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 10 of 17 then select the proper code as listed in your telephone directory. 4. Click Apply and click OK. 5. Close the Phone and Modems Options window. 6. Close the Control Panel window. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Click Phone and Modem Options. 3. Click the Dialing Rules tab and click Edit. 4. Ensure that To disable call waiting, dial: is checked, and then select the proper code as listed in your telephone directory. 5. Click Apply and click OK. 6. Close the Phone and Modem Options window. Verify that the modem is communicating with Windows Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Printers and Other Hardware and click Phone and Modem Options. 3. Click the Modems tab. 4. Click the COM port for your modem. 5. Click Properties, click the Diagnostics tab, and then click Query Modem to verify that the modem is communicating with Windows. If all commands receive responses, the modem is operating properly. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Phone and Modem Options. If multiple entries for the same modem or modems are listed but not installed, delete the entries, restart the computer, and repeat steps 1 and 2. 3. Click the Diagnostics tab. 4. Click the COM port for your modem. 5. Click Query Modem to verify that the modem is communicating with Windows. If all commands receive responses, the modem is operating properly. Touch Pad or Mouse Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you perform the various checks. Check the touch pad settings Windows XP 1. Click the Start button, click Control Panel, and then click Printers and Other Hardware. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 11 of 17 2. Click Mouse. 3. Try adjusting the settings. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Mouse icon. 3. Try adjusting the settings. Check the mouse cable Shut down the computer. Disconnect the mouse cable, check it for damage, and firmly reconnect the cable. If you are using a mouse extension cable, disconnect it and connect the mouse directly to the computer. To verify that the problem is with the mouse, check the touch pad 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect the mouse. 3. Turn on the computer. 4. At the Windows desktop, use the touch pad to move the cursor around, select an icon, and open it. If the touch pad operates correctly, the mouse may be defective. Check the system setup program settings Verify that the system setup program lists the correct device for the pointing device option. (The computer automatically recognizes a USB mouse without making any setting adjustments.) Test the mouse controller To test the mouse controller (which affects pointer movement) and the operation of the touch pad or mouse buttons, run the Mouse test in the Pointing Devices test group in the Dell Diagnostics. Reinstall the touch pad driver See "Reinstalling Software."

External Keyboard Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you perform the various checks. NOTE: Use the integrated keyboard when working in MS-DOS mode or when running the Dell Diagnostics or the system setup program. When you attach an external keyboard, the integrated keyboard remains fully functional. Check the keyboard cable Shut down the computer. Disconnect the keyboard cable and check it for damage, and firmly reconnect the cable. If you are using a keyboard extension cable, disconnect it and connect the keyboard directly to the computer. Check the external keyboard 1. Shut down the computer, wait 1 minute, and turn it on again. 2. Verify that the numbers, capitals, and scroll lock lights on the keyboard blink during the boot routine. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 12 of 17 3. From the Windows desktop, click the Start button, point to Programs, point to Accessories, and click Notepad. 4. Type some characters on the external keyboard and verify that they appear on the display. If you cannot verify these steps, you may have a defective external keyboard. To verify that the problem is with the external keyboard, check the integrated keyboard 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect the external keyboard. 3. Turn on the computer. 4. From the Windows desktop, click the Start button, point to Programs, point to Accessories, and click Notepad. 5. Type some characters on the external keyboard and verify that they appear on the display. If the characters appear now but did not with the external keyboard, you may have a defective external keyboard. Run the keyboard diagnostics tests Run the PC-AT Compatible Keyboards tests in the Dell Diagnostics. If the tests indicate a defective external keyboard, contact Dell. Unexpected Characters Disable the numeric keypad Press <Num Lk> to disable the numeric keypad if numbers are displayed instead of letters. Verify that the numbers lock light is not lit. Drive Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. If you cannot save a file to a floppy disk drive Ensure that Windows recognizes the drive In Windows XP, click the Start button and click My Computer. In other operating systems, double-click My Computer. If the drive is not listed, perform a full scan with your antivirus software to check for and remove viruses. Viruses can sometimes prevent Windows from recognizing the drive. Insert a bootable disk and restart the computer. Ensure that the disk is not write-protected You cannot save data to a write-protected disk. Try another floppy disk Insert another disk to eliminate the possibility that the original disk is defective. Reinstall the drive 1. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and shut down the computer. 2. Remove the drive from the module bay. See "Using the Module Bay" for instructions. 3. Reinstall the drive. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 13 of 17 4. Turn on the computer. Clean the drive See "Cleaning Your Computer" for instructions. Check the drive for errors

If a drive error message appears, see "Error Messages" for an explanation.

Run the Diskette tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

If you cannot play a CD, CD-RW, DVD, or DVD+RW NOTE: Because of different worldwide file types, not all DVD titles work in all DVD drives. High-speed CD drive vibration is normal and may cause noise. The noise does not indicate a defect with the drive or the CD. Ensure that Windows recognizes the drive In Windows XP, click the Start button and click My Computer. In other operating systems, double-click My Computer. If the drive is not listed, perform a full scan with your antivirus software to check for and remove viruses. Viruses can sometimes prevent Windows from recognizing the drive. Insert a bootable disk and restart the computer. Try another disc Insert another disc to eliminate the possibility that the original disc is defective. Adjust the Windows volume control Double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. Reinstall the drive 1. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and shut down the computer. 2. Remove the drive. See "Using the Module Bay" for instructions. 3. Reinstall the drive. 4. Turn on the computer. Clean the drive or disc See "Cleaning Your Computer" for instructions. Check the drive for errors If a drive error message appears, see "Error Messages" for an explanation. Run the IDE Drives tests as described in the Dell Diagnostics. If you cannot eject the CD, CD-RW, DVD, or DVD+RW drive tray 1. Ensure that the computer is turned off. 2. Straighten a paper clip and insert one end into the eject hole at the front of the drive;

push firmly until the tray is partially ejected. 3. Gently pull out the tray until it stops. If you hear an unfamiliar scraping or grinding sound

Ensure that the sound is not caused by the program that is running.

Ensure that the disk or disc is inserted properly. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 14 of 17 If the CD-RW or DVD+RW drive stops writing Disable standby or hibernate mode in Windows before writing to a CD-RW Search for the keyword standby or hibernate in Windows Help or the Windows Help and Support Center. Change the write speed to a slower rate See the help files for your CD or DVD creation software. Exit all other open programs Exiting all other open programs before writing to the CD-RW or DVD+RW may alleviate the problem. If you have problems with a hard drive Allow the computer to cool before turning it on A hot hard drive may prevent the operating system from starting. Try allowing the computer to return to room temperature before turning it on. Check the drive for errors

Run the Windows error-checking tool:

1. In Windows XP, click the Start button and click My Computer. In Windows 2000, double-

click My Computer. 2. Right-click the drive letter (local disk) that you want to scan for errors, and then click Properties. 3. Click the Tools tab. 4. Under Error-checking, click Check Now. 5. Click Start.

Run the IDE Drives tests as described in the Dell Diagnostics. PC Card Problems Check the PC Card Ensure that the PC Card is properly inserted into the connector. Ensure that the card is recognized by Windows Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware (Unplug or Eject Hardware in Windows 2000) icon in the Windows taskbar. Ensure that the card is listed. Run the PC Card diagnostics test See the documentation that came with the PC Card for instructions if a diagnostics test was provided with the card. If you have problems with a Dell-provided PC Card Contact Dell. If you have problems with a PC Card not provided by Dell Contact the PC Card manufacturer. Network Problems file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 15 of 17 Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. Check the network cable connector Ensure that the network cable connector is firmly connected to the connector on the computer and the network wall jack. Check the network lights on the network connector Green indicates that the network connection is active. If the status light is not green, try replacing the network cable. Amber indicates that the network adapter driver is loaded and the adapter is detecting activity. Restart the computer Try to log on to the network again. Contact your network administrator Verify that your network settings are correct and that the network is functioning. General Program Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. A program crashes NOTE: Software usually includes installation instructions in its documentation or on a floppy disk or CD. See the software documentation Many software manufacturers maintain websites with information that may help you solve the problem. Ensure that you properly installed and configured the program. Reinstall the program if necessary. A program stops responding End the program 1. Simultaneously press <Ctrl><Shift><Esc>. 2. Click the Applications tab, and then select the program that is no longer responding. 3. Click End Task. A solid blue screen appears Turn the computer off If the computer does not respond to a keystroke or a proper shutdown, press the power button until the computer turns off. Press the power button again to restart the computer. Windows XP The computer restarts. Windows 2000 The solid blue screen appears because you were not able to perform a proper Windows shutdown. ScanDisk automatically runs during the start-up process. Follow the instructions on file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems the screen. Error messages appear Page 16 of 17 Review "Error Messages" Look up the message and take the appropriate action. See the software documentation. Confirm that the problem is software-related Run the System Board Devices tests in the Dell Diagnostics. If all tests in the device group run successfully, the problem may be software-

related. See the software documentation. If Your Dell Computer Gets Wet CAUTION: Perform this procedure only after you are certain that it is safe to do so. If the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, it is recommended that you turn off AC power at the circuit breaker before attempting to remove the power cables from the electrical outlet. Use the utmost caution when removing wet cables from a live power source. 1. Shut down the computer, disconnect the AC adapter from the computer, and then disconnect the AC adapter from the electrical outlet. 2. Turn off any attached external devices, and disconnect them from their power sources and then from the computer. 3. Ground yourself by touching one of the metal connectors on the back of the computer. 4. Remove the module bay device and any installed PC Cards, and put them in a safe place to dry. 5. Remove the battery. 6. Wipe off the battery and put it in a safe place to dry. 7. Remove the hard drive. 8. Remove the memory module(s). 9. Open the display and place the computer right-side up across two books or similar props to let air circulate all around it. Let the computer dry for at least 24 hours in a dry area at room temperature. NOTICE: Do not use artificial means, such as a hair dryer or a fan, to speed the drying process. CAUTION: To help prevent electrical shock, verify that the computer is thoroughly dry before continuing with the rest of this procedure. 10. Ground yourself by touching one of the metal connectors on the back of the computer. 11. Replace the memory module(s), the memory module cover, and the screw(s). 12. Replace the hard drive. 13. Replace the module bay device and any PC Cards you removed. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 17 of 17 14. Replace the battery. 15. Turn on the computer and verify that it is working properly. NOTE: See your System Information Guide or separate paper warranty document that shipped with your computer for information on your warranty coverage. If the computer does not start, or if you cannot identify the damaged components, contact Dell. If You Drop or Damage Your Computer 1. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect the AC adapter from the computer and from the electrical outlet. 3. Turn off any attached external devices, and disconnect them from their power sources and then from the computer. 4. Remove and reinstall the battery. 5. Turn on the computer. NOTE: See your System Information Guide for information on your warranty coverage. If the computer does not start, or if you cannot identify the damaged components, contact Dell. Resolving Other Technical Problems Go to the Dell Support website Go to support.dell.com for help with general usage, installation, and troubleshooting questions. See "Getting Help" for a description of the hardware and software support provided by Dell. E-mail Dell Go to support.dell.com and then click E-Mail Dell in the Communicate list. Send an e-mail message to Dell about your problem; you can expect to receive an e-mail message from Dell within hours. See "Getting Help" for a description of the hardware and software support provided by Dell. Contact Dell If you cannot solve your problem using the Dell Support website

(support.dell.com) or e-mail service, call Dell for technical assistance. See "Getting Help" for a description of the hardware and software support provided by Dell. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 1 of 17 Solving Problems Power Problems Error Messages Video and Display Problems Sound and Speaker Problems Printer Problems Modem and Internet Connection Problems Touch Pad or Mouse Problems External Keyboard Problems Unexpected Characters Drive Problems PC Card Problems Network Problems General Program Problems If Your Dell Computer Gets Wet If You Drop or Damage Your Computer Resolving Other Technical Problems Power Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. Check the power light When the power light is lit or blinking, the computer has power. If the power light is blinking, the computer is in standby modepress the power button to exit standby mode. If the light is off, press the power button to turn on the computer. Charge the battery The battery charge may be depleted. 1. Reinstall the battery. 2. Use the AC adapter to connect the computer to an electrical outlet. 3. Turn on the computer. Check the battery status light If the battery status light flashes orange or is a steady file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 2 of 17 orange the battery charge is low or depleted. Connect the computer to an electrical outlet. If the battery status light flashes green and orange, the battery is too hot to charge. Shut down the computer, disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet, and then let the battery and computer cool to room temperature. If the battery status light rapidly flashes orange, the battery may be defective. Contact Dell. Test the electrical outlet Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. Check the AC adapter Check the AC adapter cable connections. If the AC adapter has a light, ensure that the light is on. Connect the computer directly to an electrical outlet Bypass power protection devices, power strips, and the extension cable to verify that the computer turns on. Eliminate possible interference Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, halogen lamps, or other appliances. Adjust the power properties See "Power Management."

Reseat the memory modules If the computer power light turns on but the display remains blank, reseat the memory modules. Error Messages If the message is not listed, see the documentation for the operating system or the program that was running at the time the message appeared. Auxiliary device failure The touch pad or external mouse may be faulty. For an external mouse, check the cable connection. Enable the Pointing Device option in the system setup program. If the problem persists, contact Dell. Bad command or file name Ensure that you have spelled the command correctly, put spaces in the proper place, and used the correct pathname. Cache disabled due to failure The primary cache internal to the microprocessor has failed. Contact Dell. CD drive controller failure The CD drive does not respond to commands from the computer. See "Drive Problems."

Data error The floppy or hard drive cannot read the data. See "Drive Problems."

Decreasing available memory One or more memory modules may be faulty or improperly seated. Reseat the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. See

"Memory."

Disk C: failed initialization The hard drive failed initialization. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Floppy drive 0 seek failure The system configuration information may not match the hardware configuration. Run the Diskette tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Diskette read failure The floppy disk may be defective. If the drive access light turns on, try a different disk. See "Drive Problems."

Diskette subsystem reset failed The floppy drive controller may be faulty. Run the file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 3 of 17 Diskette tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Diskette write-protected Because the floppy disk is write-protected, the operation cannot be completed. Slide the write-protect notch. Drive not ready The operation requires a floppy disk in the drive or a hard drive in the bay before it can continue. Insert a floppy disk, or push the floppy disk all the way into the drive until the eject button pops out. Or, install a hard drive in the hard drive bay. Error reading PCMCIA card The computer cannot identify the PC Card. Reinsert the card or try another PC Card. Extended memory size has changed The amount of memory recorded in NVRAM does not match the memory installed in the computer. Restart the computer. If the error appears again, contact Dell. Gate A20 failure A memory module may be loose. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. General failure The operating system is unable to carry out the command. The message is usually followed by specific informationfor example, Printer out of paper. Take the appropriate action. Hard-disk drive configuration error The computer cannot identify the drive type. Turn off the computer, remove the hard drive, and boot the computer from a bootable floppy disk or CD. Then turn off the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Hard-disk drive controller failure 0 The hard drive does not respond to commands from the computer. Turn off the computer, remove the hard drive, and boot the computer from a bootable floppy disk or CD. Then turn off the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Hard-disk drive failure The hard drive does not respond to commands from the computer. Turn off the computer, remove the hard drive, and boot the computer from a bootable floppy disk or CD. Then turn off the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Hard-disk drive read failure The hard drive may be defective. Turn off the computer, remove the hard drive, and boot the computer from a bootable floppy disk or CD. Then turn off the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Insert bootable media The operating system is trying to boot to a nonbootable floppy disk or CD. Insert a bootable floppy disk or CD. Invalid configuration information-please run System Setup Program The system configuration information does not match the hardware configuration. The message is most likely to occur after a memory module is installed. Correct the appropriate options in the system setup program. See "Using the System Setup Program."

Keyboard clock line failure For external keyboards, check the cable connection. Run the Keyboard Controller test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Keyboard controller failure For external keyboards, check the cable connection. Restart the computer, and avoid touching the keyboard or the mouse during the boot routine. Run the Keyboard Controller test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Keyboard data line failure For external keyboards, check the cable connection. Run the Keyboard Controller test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Keyboard stuck key failure For external keyboards or keypads, check the cable file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 4 of 17 connection. Restart the computer, and avoid touching the keyboard or keys during the boot routine. Run the Stuck Key test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Memory address line failure at address, read value expecting value A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. Memory allocation error The software you are attempting to run is conflicting with the operating system, another program, or a utility. Turn off the computer, wait 30 seconds, and then restart it. Try to run the program again. If the error message still appears, see the software documentation. Memory data line failure at address, read value expecting value A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. Memory double word logic failure at address, read value expecting value A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. Memory odd/even logic failure at address, read value expecting value A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. Memory write/read failure at address, read value expecting value A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. No boot device available The computer cannot find the floppy disk or hard drive. If the floppy drive is your boot device, ensure that a bootable floppy disk is in the drive. If the hard drive is your boot device, ensure that the drive is installed, properly seated, and partitioned as a boot device. No boot sector on hard drive The operating system may be corrupted. Contact Dell. No timer tick interrupt A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Non-system disk or disk error A floppy disk is in the floppy drive. Remove the floppy disk and restart the computer. Not a boot diskette The operating system is trying to boot to a nonbootable floppy disk. Insert a bootable floppy disk. Operating system not found Contact Dell. Optional ROM bad checksum The optional ROM apparently failed. Contact Dell. A required .DLL file was not found The program that you are trying to open is missing an essential file. Remove and then reinstall the program. Microsoft Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Add or Remove Programs. 3. Select the program you want to remove. 4. Click Remove or Change/Remove and follow the prompts on the screen. 5. See the program documentation for installation instructions. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Add/Remove Programs icon. 3. Select the program that you want to remove. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 5 of 17 4. Click Change or Remove Programs. 5. See the program documentation for installation instructions. Sector not found The operating system cannot locate a sector on the floppy or hard drive. You may have a defective sector or corrupted FAT on the floppy disk or hard drive. Run the Windows error-checking utility to check the file structure on the floppy disk or hard drive. See Windows Help for instructions. If a large number of sectors are defective, back up the data (if possible), and then reformat the floppy disk or hard drive. Seek error The operating system cannot find a specific track on the floppy disk or hard drive. If the error is on the floppy disk, try another floppy disk. Shutdown failure A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Time-of-day clock lost power System configuration settings are corrupted. Connect your computer to an electrical outlet to charge the battery. If the problem persists, try to restore the data by entering the system setup program. Then immediately exit the program. See "Using the System Setup Program." If the message reappears, contact Dell. Time-of-day clock stopped The reserve battery that supports the system configuration settings may require recharging. Connect your computer to an electrical outlet to charge the battery. If the problem persists, contact Dell. Time-of-day not set-please run the System Setup program The time or date stored in the system setup program does not match the system clock. Correct the settings for the Date and Time options. See "Using the System Setup Program."

Timer chip counter 2 failed A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

Unexpected interrupt in protected mode The keyboard controller may be malfunctioning, or a memory module may be loose. Run the System Memory tests and the Keyboard Controller test as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

x:\ is not accessible. The device is not ready Insert a disk into the drive and try again. Warning: Battery is critically low The battery is running out of charge. Replace the battery, or connect the computer to an electrical outlet. Otherwise, activate hibernate mode or turn off the computer. Video and Display Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. If the display is blank NOTE: If you are using a program that requires a higher resolution than your computer supports, it is recommended that you attach an external monitor to your computer. Check the battery If you are using a battery to power your computer, the battery charge may be depleted. Connect the computer to an electrical outlet using the AC adapter, and turn on the computer. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 6 of 17 Test the electrical outlet Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. Check the AC adapter Check the AC adapter cable connections. If the AC adapter has a light, ensure that the light is on. Connect the computer directly to an electrical outlet Bypass power protection devices, power strips, and the extension cable to verify that the computer turns on. Adjust the power properties Search for the keyword standby in Windows Help or the Windows Help and Support Center. Switch the video image If your computer is attached to an external monitor, press

<Fn><F8> to switch the video image to the display. If the display is difficult to read Adjust the brightness See "Adjusting Brightness" for instructions on adjusting the brightness. Move the subwoofer away from the computer or monitor If your external speaker system includes a subwoofer, ensure that the subwoofer is at least 60 cm (2 ft) away from the computer or external monitor. Eliminate possible interference Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, halogen lamps, or other appliances. Rotate the computer to face a different direction Eliminate sunlight glare, which can cause poor picture quality. Adjust the Windows display settings Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and then click Control Panel. 2. Click Appearance and Themes. 3. Click the area you want to change or click the Display icon. 4. Try different settings for Color quality and Screen resolution. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Display icon and click the Settings tab. 3. Try different settings for Colors, Screen area, and Advanced Settings. Run the Video diagnostics tests If no error message appears and you still have a display problem, but the display is not completely blank, run the Video device group in the Dell Diagnostics. Then contact Dell. See "Error Messages" If an error message appears, see "Error Messages."

If only part of the display is readable Connect an external monitor 1. Shut down your computer and connect an external monitor to the computer. 2. Turn on the computer and the monitor and adjust the monitor brightness and contrast controls. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 7 of 17 If the external monitor works, the computer display or video controller may be defective. Contact Dell. Sound and Speaker Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. If you have a problem with integrated speakers Adjust the Windows volume control Double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. Adjust the volume, bass, or treble controls to eliminate distortion. Adjust the volume using keyboard shortcuts See "Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad."

Press <Fn><End> to disable (mute) or reenable the integrated speakers. Reinstall the sound (audio) driver See "Reinstalling Software."

For Windows 2000 only, ensure that digital audio for the CD drive is enabled 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the System icon. 3. Click the Hardware tab. 4. Click Device Manager. 5. Double-click DVD/CD-ROM drives. 6. Double-click the name of the drive. 7. On the drive Properties screen, click the Properties tab. 8. Click the box near the bottom of the screen to enable digital audio for your CD or DVD drive. If you have a problem with external speakers NOTE: The volume control in some MP3 players overrides the Windows volume setting. If you have been listening to MP3 songs, make sure that you did not turn the player volume down or off. Check the speaker cable connections See the setup diagram supplied with the speakers. Test the electrical outlet Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. Ensure that the speakers are turned on See the setup diagram supplied with the speakers. Adjust the Windows volume control Double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. Adjust the volume, bass, or treble controls to eliminate distortion. Test the speakers Plug the speaker audio cable in to the Ensure that the headphone volume control is turned up. Play a music CD. connector on the computer. Run the speaker self-test Some speaker systems have a self-test button on the subwoofer. See the speaker documentation for self-test instructions. Eliminate possible interference Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, or halogen lamps to check for interference. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 8 of 17 Reinstall the sound (audio) driver See "Reinstalling Software."

Run the Misc. PCI Devices diagnostic test See "Using the Dell Diagnostics." If the tests complete successfully, the controller is functioning properly. If the problem persists, or if the tests do not complete successfully, contact Dell. For Windows 2000 only, ensure that digital audio for the CD drive is enabled 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the System icon. 3. Click the Hardware tab. 4. Click Device Manager. 5. Double-click DVD/CD-ROM drives. 6. Double-click the name of the drive. 7. On the drive Properties screen, click the Properties tab. 8. Click the box near the bottom of the screen to enable digital audio for your CD or DVD drive. Printer Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you perform the various checks. Check the printer cable connections Ensure that the printer cable is properly connected to the computer. Check the printer cable 1. Shut down the computer and turn off the printer. 2. Swap the printer cable with a cable that you know is working. 3. Turn on the printer and computer, and try again to print. 4. If you print successfully, contact Dell for assistance in obtaining a new printer cable. Test the electrical outlet Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. Ensure that the printer is turned on See the documentation supplied with the printer. Verify that Windows recognizes the printer Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Printers and Other Hardware. 3. Click View installed printers or fax printers. If the printer model is listed, right-click the printer icon. 4. Click Properties and click the Ports tab. Ensure that the Print to the following port

(s): setting is LPT1 (Printer Port). Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Printers. If the printer model is listed, right-click the printer icon. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 9 of 17 2. Click Properties and click the Ports tab. 3. Ensure that the Print to the following port: option is set for your printer type:

For a parallel printer: LPT1 (Printer Port)

For a USB printer: USB Reinstall the printer driver See "Reinstalling Software."

Check the printer Run the printer self-test. If the test does not complete successfully, the printer is probably defective. Contact the printer manufacturer. Modem and Internet Connection Problems NOTICE: Connect the modem to an analog telephone wall jack only. Connecting the modem to a digital telephone network may damage the modem. NOTICE: Modem and network connectors look similar. Do not plug a telephone line in to the network connector. Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. NOTE: If you can connect to your Internet service provider (ISP), your modem is functioning properly. If you are sure that your modem is working properly and you still experience problems, contact your ISP. Check the telephone wall jack Disconnect the telephone line from the modem and connect it to a telephone. Listen for a dial tone. Ensure that you have touchtone telephone service. Try connecting the modem to a different telephone wall jack. Slow connection speeds can be caused by telephone noise as well as by telephone line or network conditions. Contact your telephone company or network administrator for more information. Connect the modem directly to the telephone wall jack If you have other telephone devices sharing the line, such as an answering machine, fax machine, surge protector, or line splitter, then bypass them and use the telephone line to connect the modem directly to the telephone wall jack. Check the connection Verify that the telephone line is connected to the modem. Check the telephone line Try using a different telephone line. If you are using a line that is 3 m (10 ft) or more in length, try a shorter one. Irregular dial tone If you have voice mail service, you might hear an irregular dial tone when you have messages. Contact your telephone company for instructions on restoring a dial tone. Turn off call waiting (catch-phone) See your telephone directory for instructions on deactivating this feature. Then adjust the dial-up networking connection properties. Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Printers and Other Hardware, click Phone and Modem Options, click the Dialing Rules tab, and then click Edit.... In the Edit Location window, ensure that To disable call waiting, dial: is checked, and 3. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 10 of 17 then select the proper code as listed in your telephone directory. 4. Click Apply and click OK. 5. Close the Phone and Modems Options window. 6. Close the Control Panel window. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Click Phone and Modem Options. 3. Click the Dialing Rules tab and click Edit. 4. Ensure that To disable call waiting, dial: is checked, and then select the proper code as listed in your telephone directory. 5. Click Apply and click OK. 6. Close the Phone and Modem Options window. Verify that the modem is communicating with Windows Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Printers and Other Hardware and click Phone and Modem Options. 3. Click the Modems tab. 4. Click the COM port for your modem. 5. Click Properties, click the Diagnostics tab, and then click Query Modem to verify that the modem is communicating with Windows. If all commands receive responses, the modem is operating properly. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Phone and Modem Options. If multiple entries for the same modem or modems are listed but not installed, delete the entries, restart the computer, and repeat steps 1 and 2. 3. Click the Diagnostics tab. 4. Click the COM port for your modem. 5. Click Query Modem to verify that the modem is communicating with Windows. If all commands receive responses, the modem is operating properly. Touch Pad or Mouse Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you perform the various checks. Check the touch pad settings Windows XP 1. Click the Start button, click Control Panel, and then click Printers and Other Hardware. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 11 of 17 2. Click Mouse. 3. Try adjusting the settings. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Mouse icon. 3. Try adjusting the settings. Check the mouse cable Shut down the computer. Disconnect the mouse cable, check it for damage, and firmly reconnect the cable. If you are using a mouse extension cable, disconnect it and connect the mouse directly to the computer. To verify that the problem is with the mouse, check the touch pad 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect the mouse. 3. Turn on the computer. 4. At the Windows desktop, use the touch pad to move the cursor around, select an icon, and open it. If the touch pad operates correctly, the mouse may be defective. Check the system setup program settings Verify that the system setup program lists the correct device for the pointing device option. (The computer automatically recognizes a USB mouse without making any setting adjustments.) Test the mouse controller To test the mouse controller (which affects pointer movement) and the operation of the touch pad or mouse buttons, run the Mouse test in the Pointing Devices test group in the Dell Diagnostics. Reinstall the touch pad driver See "Reinstalling Software."

External Keyboard Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you perform the various checks. NOTE: Use the integrated keyboard when working in MS-DOS mode or when running the Dell Diagnostics or the system setup program. When you attach an external keyboard, the integrated keyboard remains fully functional. Check the keyboard cable Shut down the computer. Disconnect the keyboard cable and check it for damage, and firmly reconnect the cable. If you are using a keyboard extension cable, disconnect it and connect the keyboard directly to the computer. Check the external keyboard 1. Shut down the computer, wait 1 minute, and turn it on again. 2. Verify that the numbers, capitals, and scroll lock lights on the keyboard blink during the boot routine. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 12 of 17 3. From the Windows desktop, click the Start button, point to Programs, point to Accessories, and click Notepad. 4. Type some characters on the external keyboard and verify that they appear on the display. If you cannot verify these steps, you may have a defective external keyboard. To verify that the problem is with the external keyboard, check the integrated keyboard 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect the external keyboard. 3. Turn on the computer. 4. From the Windows desktop, click the Start button, point to Programs, point to Accessories, and click Notepad. 5. Type some characters on the external keyboard and verify that they appear on the display. If the characters appear now but did not with the external keyboard, you may have a defective external keyboard. Run the keyboard diagnostics tests Run the PC-AT Compatible Keyboards tests in the Dell Diagnostics. If the tests indicate a defective external keyboard, contact Dell. Unexpected Characters Disable the numeric keypad Press <Num Lk> to disable the numeric keypad if numbers are displayed instead of letters. Verify that the numbers lock light is not lit. Drive Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. If you cannot save a file to a floppy disk drive Ensure that Windows recognizes the drive In Windows XP, click the Start button and click My Computer. In other operating systems, double-click My Computer. If the drive is not listed, perform a full scan with your antivirus software to check for and remove viruses. Viruses can sometimes prevent Windows from recognizing the drive. Insert a bootable disk and restart the computer. Ensure that the disk is not write-protected You cannot save data to a write-protected disk. Try another floppy disk Insert another disk to eliminate the possibility that the original disk is defective. Reinstall the drive 1. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and shut down the computer. 2. Remove the drive from the module bay. See "Using the Module Bay" for instructions. 3. Reinstall the drive. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 13 of 17 4. Turn on the computer. Clean the drive See "Cleaning Your Computer" for instructions. Check the drive for errors

If a drive error message appears, see "Error Messages" for an explanation.

Run the Diskette tests as described in "Using the Dell Diagnostics."

If you cannot play a CD, CD-RW, DVD, or DVD+RW NOTE: Because of different worldwide file types, not all DVD titles work in all DVD drives. High-speed CD drive vibration is normal and may cause noise. The noise does not indicate a defect with the drive or the CD. Ensure that Windows recognizes the drive In Windows XP, click the Start button and click My Computer. In other operating systems, double-click My Computer. If the drive is not listed, perform a full scan with your antivirus software to check for and remove viruses. Viruses can sometimes prevent Windows from recognizing the drive. Insert a bootable disk and restart the computer. Try another disc Insert another disc to eliminate the possibility that the original disc is defective. Adjust the Windows volume control Double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. Reinstall the drive 1. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and shut down the computer. 2. Remove the drive. See "Using the Module Bay" for instructions. 3. Reinstall the drive. 4. Turn on the computer. Clean the drive or disc See "Cleaning Your Computer" for instructions. Check the drive for errors If a drive error message appears, see "Error Messages" for an explanation. Run the IDE Drives tests as described in the Dell Diagnostics. If you cannot eject the CD, CD-RW, DVD, or DVD+RW drive tray 1. Ensure that the computer is turned off. 2. Straighten a paper clip and insert one end into the eject hole at the front of the drive;

push firmly until the tray is partially ejected. 3. Gently pull out the tray until it stops. If you hear an unfamiliar scraping or grinding sound

Ensure that the sound is not caused by the program that is running.

Ensure that the disk or disc is inserted properly. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 14 of 17 If the CD-RW or DVD+RW drive stops writing Disable standby or hibernate mode in Windows before writing to a CD-RW Search for the keyword standby or hibernate in Windows Help or the Windows Help and Support Center. Change the write speed to a slower rate See the help files for your CD or DVD creation software. Exit all other open programs Exiting all other open programs before writing to the CD-RW or DVD+RW may alleviate the problem. If you have problems with a hard drive Allow the computer to cool before turning it on A hot hard drive may prevent the operating system from starting. Try allowing the computer to return to room temperature before turning it on. Check the drive for errors

Run the Windows error-checking tool:

1. In Windows XP, click the Start button and click My Computer. In Windows 2000, double-

click My Computer. 2. Right-click the drive letter (local disk) that you want to scan for errors, and then click Properties. 3. Click the Tools tab. 4. Under Error-checking, click Check Now. 5. Click Start.

Run the IDE Drives tests as described in the Dell Diagnostics. PC Card Problems Check the PC Card Ensure that the PC Card is properly inserted into the connector. Ensure that the card is recognized by Windows Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware (Unplug or Eject Hardware in Windows 2000) icon in the Windows taskbar. Ensure that the card is listed. Run the PC Card diagnostics test See the documentation that came with the PC Card for instructions if a diagnostics test was provided with the card. If you have problems with a Dell-provided PC Card Contact Dell. If you have problems with a PC Card not provided by Dell Contact the PC Card manufacturer. Network Problems file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 15 of 17 Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. Check the network cable connector Ensure that the network cable connector is firmly connected to the connector on the computer and the network wall jack. Check the network lights on the network connector Green indicates that the network connection is active. If the status light is not green, try replacing the network cable. Amber indicates that the network adapter driver is loaded and the adapter is detecting activity. Restart the computer Try to log on to the network again. Contact your network administrator Verify that your network settings are correct and that the network is functioning. General Program Problems Fill out the Diagnostics Checklist as you complete these checks. A program crashes NOTE: Software usually includes installation instructions in its documentation or on a floppy disk or CD. See the software documentation Many software manufacturers maintain websites with information that may help you solve the problem. Ensure that you properly installed and configured the program. Reinstall the program if necessary. A program stops responding End the program 1. Simultaneously press <Ctrl><Shift><Esc>. 2. Click the Applications tab, and then select the program that is no longer responding. 3. Click End Task. A solid blue screen appears Turn the computer off If the computer does not respond to a keystroke or a proper shutdown, press the power button until the computer turns off. Press the power button again to restart the computer. Windows XP The computer restarts. Windows 2000 The solid blue screen appears because you were not able to perform a proper Windows shutdown. ScanDisk automatically runs during the start-up process. Follow the instructions on file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems the screen. Error messages appear Page 16 of 17 Review "Error Messages" Look up the message and take the appropriate action. See the software documentation. Confirm that the problem is software-related Run the System Board Devices tests in the Dell Diagnostics. If all tests in the device group run successfully, the problem may be software-

related. See the software documentation. If Your Dell Computer Gets Wet CAUTION: Perform this procedure only after you are certain that it is safe to do so. If the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, it is recommended that you turn off AC power at the circuit breaker before attempting to remove the power cables from the electrical outlet. Use the utmost caution when removing wet cables from a live power source. 1. Shut down the computer, disconnect the AC adapter from the computer, and then disconnect the AC adapter from the electrical outlet. 2. Turn off any attached external devices, and disconnect them from their power sources and then from the computer. 3. Ground yourself by touching one of the metal connectors on the back of the computer. 4. Remove the module bay device and any installed PC Cards, and put them in a safe place to dry. 5. Remove the battery. 6. Wipe off the battery and put it in a safe place to dry. 7. Remove the hard drive. 8. Remove the memory module(s). 9. Open the display and place the computer right-side up across two books or similar props to let air circulate all around it. Let the computer dry for at least 24 hours in a dry area at room temperature. NOTICE: Do not use artificial means, such as a hair dryer or a fan, to speed the drying process. CAUTION: To help prevent electrical shock, verify that the computer is thoroughly dry before continuing with the rest of this procedure. 10. Ground yourself by touching one of the metal connectors on the back of the computer. 11. Replace the memory module(s), the memory module cover, and the screw(s). 12. Replace the hard drive. 13. Replace the module bay device and any PC Cards you removed. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Solving Problems Page 17 of 17 14. Replace the battery. 15. Turn on the computer and verify that it is working properly. NOTE: See your System Information Guide or separate paper warranty document that shipped with your computer for information on your warranty coverage. If the computer does not start, or if you cannot identify the damaged components, contact Dell. If You Drop or Damage Your Computer 1. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect the AC adapter from the computer and from the electrical outlet. 3. Turn off any attached external devices, and disconnect them from their power sources and then from the computer. 4. Remove and reinstall the battery. 5. Turn on the computer. NOTE: See your System Information Guide for information on your warranty coverage. If the computer does not start, or if you cannot identify the damaged components, contact Dell. Resolving Other Technical Problems Go to the Dell Support website Go to support.dell.com for help with general usage, installation, and troubleshooting questions. See "Getting Help" for a description of the hardware and software support provided by Dell. E-mail Dell Go to support.dell.com and then click E-Mail Dell in the Communicate list. Send an e-mail message to Dell about your problem; you can expect to receive an e-mail message from Dell within hours. See "Getting Help" for a description of the hardware and software support provided by Dell. Contact Dell If you cannot solve your problem using the Dell Support website

(support.dell.com) or e-mail service, call Dell for technical assistance. See "Getting Help" for a description of the hardware and software support provided by Dell. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF5E5.htm 1/13/2004 Using PC Cards Page 1 of 3 Using PC Cards PC Card Types Extended PC Cards Installing a PC Card Removing a PC Card CAUTION: Before performing any of the procedures listed below, read and follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. PC Card Types See "Specifications" for information on supported PC Cards. NOTE: A PC Card is not a bootable device. The PC Card slot has one connector that supports a single Type I or Type II card. The PC Card slot supports CardBus technology and extended PC Cards. "Type" of card refers to its thickness, not its functionality. Extended PC Cards An extended PC Card (for example, a wireless network adapter) is longer than a standard PC Card and extends outside the computer. Follow these precautions when using extended PC Cards:

Protect the exposed end of an installed card. Striking the end of the card can damage the system board.

Always remove an extended PC Card before you pack the computer in its carrying case.

Install an extended card in the upper PC Card connector to allow room for a second PC Card. Installing a PC Card You can install a PC Card in the computer while the computer is running. The computer automatically detects the card. PC Cards are generally marked with a symbol (such as a triangle or an arrow) to indicate which end to insert into the slot. The cards are keyed to prevent incorrect insertion. If card orientation is not clear, see the documentation that came with the card. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh2518.htm 1/13/2004 Using PC Cards To install a PC Card:

Page 2 of 3 1. Hold the card with its orientation symbol pointing into the slot and the top side of the card facing up. The latch needs to be in the "in" position before you insert the card. 2. Slide the card into the slot until the card is completely seated in its connector. If you encounter too much resistance, do not force the card. Check the card orientation and try again. The computer recognizes most PC Cards and automatically loads the appropriate device driver. If the configuration program tells you to load the manufacturer's drivers, use the floppy disk or CD that came with the PC Card. Removing a PC Card NOTICE: Before you remove a PC Card from the computer, click the a card and stop it from functioning. If you do not stop the card in the configuration utility, you could lose data. Do not attempt to eject a card by pulling its cable, if one is attached. icon on the taskbar to select 1. Press the eject button. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh2518.htm 1/13/2004 Using PC Cards 1 eject button 2. Push the eject button a second time. 3. Gently remove the card. Page 3 of 3 1 2 eject button PC Card file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh2518.htm 1/13/2004 Connecting to a Wireless Local Area Network Page 1 of 4 Connecting to a Wireless Local Area Network Determining Your Network Type Connecting to a Network in Microsoft Windows XP Finalizing Your Network Connection (Security Settings) NOTE: These networking instructions do not apply to Bluetooth or cellular products. Before you can connect to a wireless Local Area Network (LAN), you must have specific information about your network. Be sure to get the name of your wireless network along with any special security settings from your network administrator. The settings are unique to your network and cannot be provided by Dell. Determining Your Network Type NOTE: Most wireless networks are of the infrastructure type. Consult your network administrator if you are unsure of the type of network you are connecting to. Wireless networks fall into two categoriesinfrastructure networks and ad-hoc networks. An infrastructure network uses routers or access points to connect several computers. An ad-hoc network does not use routers or access points and consists of computers that broadcast to one another. 1 2 infrastructure network Ad-Hoc network Connecting to a Network in Microsoft Windows XP file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh55CE.htm 1/13/2004 Connecting to a Wireless Local Area Network Page 2 of 4 Your wireless network card requires proper software and drivers in order to connect to a network. The software is pre-installed in the factory. If the software is removed or corrupted, follow the instructions listed in the User's Guide for your wireless card. The User's Guide is located on your Drivers and Utilities CD (that came with your computer) in the "User's Guides-Network User's Guides" category. The User's Guide is also available on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. 1. Click the Start button, click Control Panel, and then click Switch to Classic View. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Click Wireless Network Connection. The Wireless Network Connection icon is highlighted. 4. Under Network Tasks in the left-hand pane, click Change settings of this connection. The Wireless Network Connection Properties window appears. 5. Select the Wireless Networks tab. NOTE: The names of wireless networks that your computer can detect are listed under Available Networks. 6. Click Add. The Wireless network properties window appears. 7. Enter the name of your network in the Network name (SSID) field. 8. If you are connecting to an ad-hoc network, which does not use any routers or access points, click the check box labeled This is a computer-to-computer (ad hoc) network; wireless access points are not used. 9. Click OK. Your new network name appears in the Preferred networks area. Finalizing Your Network Connection (Security Settings) To finalize your connection, you must change your wireless security settings to match the wireless network you are trying to connect to. Choose one of the following connection options based on the security settings for your network:

Connecting to a Network without Security-Related Requirements (common for home and small office networks)

Connecting to a Network with Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) Security Requirements

Connecting to a Network with Wired Equivalent Protocol (WEP) Security Requirements NOTE: Network security settings are only provided by your network administrator and are unique to file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh55CE.htm 1/13/2004 Connecting to a Wireless Local Area Network Page 3 of 4 your network. Dell cannot provide this information. Connecting to a Network Without Security-Related Requirements 1. In the Preferred networks area, click the name of your wireless network. 2. Click Properties. 3. From the Network Authentication drop-down menu, select Open. Earlier versions of the Dell wireless software may not contain the drop-down menu. If you are using an earlier version, click to uncheck the Data encryption (WEP enabled) check box and go to step 5. 4. From the Data encryption drop-down menu, select Disabled. NOTE: Your computer can take up to 1 minute to connect to the network. 5. Click OK. Your network setup is complete. Connecting to a Network With Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) Security Requirements The following instructions are basic steps for connecting to a WPA network. If your network requires a user name, password, or domain settings, consult the setup instructions in the User's Guide for your wireless network card. NOTE: WPA protocols require that you know the Network Authentication and Data Encryption settings for your wireless network. In addition, your WPA-protected network may require special settings such as a network key, user name, password, and domain name. Be sure to get all necessary WPA settings from your network administrator before continuing. 1. In the Preferred networks section, click the name of your wireless network. 2. Click Properties. 3. From the Network Authentication drop-down menu, select your network authentication type (as provided by the network administrator). If you do not see the drop-down menu, you must update your wireless software before continuing. Download and install the latest version of your wireless driver software from the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. 4. From the Data encryption drop-down menu, select your data encryption type (as provided by the network administrator). 5. If your wireless network requires a key, enter it in the Network key field. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh55CE.htm 1/13/2004 Connecting to a Wireless Local Area Network Page 4 of 4 NOTE: Your computer can take up to 1 minute to connect to the network. 6. Click OK. Your network setup is complete. Connecting to a Network With Wired Equivalent Protocol (WEP) Security Requirements 1. In the Preferred networks section, click the name of your wireless network. 2. Click Properties. 3. From the Network Authentication drop-down menu, select Open. Earlier versions of Dell wireless software may not contain the drop-down menus. If you are using an earlier version, click to check the check box labeled Data encryption (WEP enabled) and go to step 5. 4. From the Data encryption drop-down menu, select WEP. 5. If the wireless network does not require a network key (for example, a password), go to step 8. 6. Click to uncheck the check box labeled The key is provided for me automatically. 7. Enter the WEP network key, provided by your network administrator, in the Network key field. 8. Enter the WEP network key again in the Confirm network key field. NOTE: Your computer can take up to 1 minute to connect to the network. 9. Click OK. Your network setup is complete. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh55CE.htm 1/13/2004 Power Management Page 1 of 6 Power Management Power Management Tips Power Management Wizard Power Management Modes Power Options Properties Power Management Tips NOTE: See "Using a Battery" for more information on conserving battery power.

Connect the computer to an electrical outlet when possible because battery life is largely determined by the number of times the battery is charged.

Place the computer in standby mode or hibernate mode when you leave the computer unattended for long periods of time.

To enter a power management mode, close the display or press <Fn><Esc>.

To exit a power management mode, press the power button. Power Management Wizard NOTE: The Power Management Wizard is not available if you have restricted access rights. Click or double-click the icon to open the Power Management Wizard. The first two screens of the wizardWelcome and What is Power Management?describe and define various power management options. NOTE: On the What is Power Management? screen, you can select Do not show this page again. When you select this option, the Welcome screen also does not appear again. Use the following screens of the Power Management Wizard to set various power management options, including sleep modes, power schemes, and low battery-charge alarms. Setting Sleep Modes The screen defines standby and hibernate modes. From the screen you can:

file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhAD84.htm 1/13/2004 Power Management Page 2 of 6

Set standby-mode password options.

Enable or disable hibernate mode.

Select how the computer will respond when you close the display:

Choose no action.

Enter standby mode.

Enter hibernate mode.

Select how the computer will respond when you press the power button:

Choose no action.

Enter standby mode.

Enter hibernate mode.

Shut down the Microsoft Windows operating system and turn off the computer.

Prompt a user for an action (Ask me what to do).

Select how the computer will respond when you press <Fn><Esc>.

Choose no action.

Enter standby mode.

Enter hibernate mode.

Shut down Microsoft Windows and turn off the computer.

Prompt a user for an action (Ask me what to do). Selecting a Power Scheme NOTE: When your computer is running on battery power, the Network Disabled power scheme disables your internal network and wireless activity. When your computer is connected to an electrical outlet, the Network Disabled power scheme disables only your wireless activity. You must set the power scheme through QuickSet (not Microsoft Windows) for Network Disabled to work. The screen allows you to select, create, and edit power scheme settings. In addition, you can delete power schemes that you create, but you cannot delete Dell QuickSet predefined power schemes (Maximum Battery, Maximum Performance, Presentation, and Network Disabled). NOTE: QuickSet automatically adds the word (QuickSet) after the names of power schemes created using QuickSet. All QuickSet power schemes are displayed in a drop-down menu near the center of the screen. The power settings for each scheme in the menu are listed below the menu. The power settings are listed separately for when the computer is running on battery or connected to an electrical outlet. The Power Management Wizard also allows you to associate the display brightness level with a power scheme. You must enable brightness-level power schemes through QuickSet in order to set the brightness level. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhAD84.htm 1/13/2004 Power Management Page 3 of 6 The display brightness, internal network-card activity, and wireless activity features are not available through the Microsoft Windows Control Panel power schemes. In order to make use of these value-added features, you must set them through QuickSet power schemes. NOTE: Brightness shortcut keys only affect the display on your portable computer, not monitors that you attach to your portable computer or docking device. If your computer is in CRT only mode and you try to change the brightness level, the Brightness Meter appears, but the brightness level on the monitor does not change. Setting Battery Alarms and Actions The screen allows you to enable the low-battery and critical-battery alarms and to change settings for the alarms. For example, you can set the low-battery alarm to 20 percent to remind you to save work and switch to AC power, and you can set the critical-battery alarm to 10 percent to enter hibernate mode. From the screen, you can:

Select whether the alarm will notify you by sound or text.

Adjust the power level at which you want the alarm to notify you.

Select how the computer will respond when the alarm notifies you:

Choose no action.

Enter standby mode.

Enter hibernate mode.

Shut down Windows and turn off the computer. Completing the Power Management Wizard The screen summarizes the QuickSet power scheme, sleep mode, and battery alarm settings for your computer. Review the settings you have selected and click Finish. For more information about QuickSet, right-click the icon in the taskbar and click Help. Power Management Modes Standby Mode Standby mode conserves power by turning off the display and the hard drive after a predetermined period of inactivity (a time-out). When the computer exits standby mode, it returns to the same operating state it was in before entering standby mode. NOTICE: If your computer loses AC and battery power while in standby mode, it may lose data. To enter standby mode:

In the Microsoft Windows XP operating system, click the Start button, click Turn off computer, file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhAD84.htm 1/13/2004 Power Management Page 4 of 6 and then click Stand by. In Windows 2000, click the Start button, click Shutdown, click Standby, and then click OK. or

Depending on how you set the power management options on the Advanced tab in the Power Options Properties window, use one of the following methods:

Close the display.

Press <Fn><Esc>. To exit standby mode, press the power button or open the display depending on how you set the options on the Advanced tab. You cannot make the computer exit standby mode by pressing a key or touching the touch pad. Hibernate Mode Hibernate mode conserves power by copying system data to a reserved area on the hard drive and then completely turning off the computer. When the computer exits hibernate mode, it returns to the same operating state it was in before entering hibernate mode. NOTICE: You cannot remove devices or disconnect your computer from a docking device while your computer is in hibernate mode. Your computer enters hibernate mode if the battery charge level becomes critically low. To manually enter hibernate mode:

In Windows XP, click the Start button, click Turn off computer, press and hold <Shift> key, and then click Hibernate. In Windows 2000, if hibernate support is enabled, click the Start button, click Shutdown, click Hibernate, and then click OK. or

Depending on how you set the power management options on the Advanced tab in the Power Options Properties window, use one of the following methods to enter hibernate mode:

Close the display.

Press <Fn><Esc>. NOTE: Some PC Cards may not operate correctly after the computer exits hibernate mode. Remove and reinsert the card, or simply restart (reboot) your computer. To exit hibernate mode, press the power button. The computer may take a short time to exit hibernate mode. You cannot make the computer exit hibernate mode by pressing a key or touching the touch pad. For more information on hibernate mode, see the documentation that came with your operating system. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhAD84.htm 1/13/2004 Power Management Page 5 of 6 Power Options Properties The Power Options Properties window helps you to manage power consumption and monitor battery charge status. To access the Microsoft Windows Power Options Properties window:

In Windows XP, click the Start button, click Control Panel, click Performance and Maintenance, and then click Power Options.

In Windows 2000, open the Control Panel and double-click the Power Options icon. Power Schemes Tab Windows XP controls the performance level of the processor depending on the power scheme you select. You do not need to make any further adjustments to set the performance level. For information on setting processor performance for other operating systems, see "Intel SpeedStep Technology Tab (for Windows 2000)."

Each preset power scheme has different time-out settings for entering standby mode, turning off the display, and turning off the hard drive. For more information on power management options, see the Help and Support Center (Windows Help in Windows 2000). Alarms Tab NOTE: To enable audible alarms, click each Alarm Action button and select Sound alarm. The Low battery alarm and Critical battery alarm settings alert you with a message when the battery charge falls below a certain percentage. When you receive your computer, the Low battery alarm and Critical battery alarm check boxes are selected. It is recommended that you continue to use these settings. See "Using a Battery" for more information on low-battery warnings. Power Meter Tab The Power Meter tab displays the current power source and amount of battery charge remaining. Advanced Tab The Advanced tab allows you to:

Set power icon and standby mode password options.

Program the following functions (depending on your operating system):

Prompt a user for an action (Ask me what to do).

Enter standby mode.

Enter hibernate mode.

Shut down Windows and turn off the computer.

Choose no action (None or Do nothing). file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhAD84.htm 1/13/2004 Power Management Page 6 of 6 To program these functions, click an option from the corresponding drop-down menu and then click OK. Hibernate Tab The Hibernate tab lets you enable hibernate mode by clicking the Enable hibernate support check box. Intel SpeedStep Technology Tab (for Windows 2000) NOTE: Windows XP controls the performance level of the processor depending on the power scheme that you select. See "Power Schemes Tab."

NOTE: To use Intel SpeedStep technology, a Windows operating system must be running. Depending on your operating system and microprocessor, the Power Options Properties window includes the Intel SpeedStep technology tab. Intel SpeedStep technology allows you to set the performance level of the processor according to whether the computer is running on battery or AC power. Depending on your operating system, typical options are:

Automatic The processor runs at its highest possible speed (Maximum Performance mode) when the computer is running on AC power. When the computer is running on battery power, the processor runs in Battery Optimized mode.

Maximum Performance The processor runs at its highest possible speed even if the computer is running on battery power.

Battery Optimized Performance Processor speed is optimized for battery power even if the computer is connected to an electrical outlet.

Maximum Battery The processor runs at a slower speed to extend battery life. To change additional Intel SpeedStep options:

1. Click Advanced and click one of the following options:

Disable Intel SpeedStep technology control

Remove flag icon (from the notification area)

Disable audio notification when performance changes 2. Click OK to accept any changes and click OK to close the Intel SpeedStep technology window. You can also change the Intel SpeedStep settings by right-clicking the flag icon in the notification area. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhAD84.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Module Bay Page 1 of 12 Using the Module Bay About the Module Bay Checking the Charge on the Second Battery Removing and Installing Devices While the Computer Is Turned Off Removing and Installing Devices While the Computer Is Running Using CDs or DVDs About the Module Bay CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. You can install devices such as a floppy drive, CD drive, CD-RW drive, DVD drive, CD-RW/DVD drive, DVD+RW, second battery, or second hard drive in the module bay. NOTE: You do not need to install the device screw unless you want to secure the module inside the computer for security purposes. Your Dell computer ships with an optical drive installed in the module bay. However, the device screw is not installed in the optical drive but packaged separately. When you install your device in the module bay, you can install the device screw. Checking the Charge on the Second Battery Before you install a second battery, press the status button on the battery charge gauge to illuminate the charge level lights. Each light represents approximately 20 percent of the total battery charge. For example, if the battery has 80 percent of its charge remaining, four of the lights are on. If no lights appear, the battery has no charge. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF0E2.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Module Bay Page 2 of 12 1 status button on the battery charge gauge 2 second battery (bottom) Removing and Installing Devices While the Computer Is Turned Off CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. NOTE: If the device screw is not installed, you can remove and install devices while the computer is running and connected to a docking device (docked). Your computer ships with an optical drive installed in the module bay. However, the device screw is not installed in the optical drive but packaged separately. When you install your device in the module bay, you can install the device screw. NOTE: You do not need to install the device screw unless you want to secure the module inside the computer for security purposes. If the Device Screw Is Not Installed NOTICE: To prevent damage to devices, place them in a safe, dry place when they are not installed in the computer. Avoid pressing down on them or placing heavy objects on top of them. 1. Press the device latch release so that the latch release pops out. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF0E2.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Module Bay Page 3 of 12 1 device latch release 2. Pull the device by the latch release to remove the device from the module bay. 3. Insert the new device into the bay, push the device until you feel a click, and push the device latch release in so that it is flush with the computer. If the Device Screw Is Installed 1. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and then shut down the computer. 2. If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. NOTICE: To prevent damage to devices, place them in a safe, dry place when they are not installed in the computer. Avoid pressing down on them or placing heavy objects on top of them. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF0E2.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Module Bay Page 4 of 12 3. Close the display and turn the computer over. 4. Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver to remove the device screw from the bottom of the computer. 1 device latch release 5. Press the device latch release so that the latch release pops out. 6. Pull the device by the latch release to remove the device from the module bay. 7. Insert the new device into the bay, push the device until you feel a click, and push the device latch release in so that it is flush with the computer. 8. Replace the device screw. 9. Turn on the computer. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF0E2.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Module Bay Page 5 of 12 Removing and Installing Devices While the Computer Is Running CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. Your computer ships with an optical drive installed in the module bay. However, the device screw is not installed in the optical drive but packaged separately. When you install your device in the module bay, you can install the device screw. NOTE: You do not need to install the device screw unless you want to secure the module inside the computer for security purposes. If the Device Screw Is Not Installed Microsoft Windows XP 1. Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the taskbar. 2. Click Stop and wait for the operating system to confirm that the device has stopped. 3. Click the device you want to eject. NOTICE: To prevent damage to devices, place them in a safe, dry place when they are not installed in the computer. Avoid pressing down on them or placing heavy objects on top of them. 4. Press the device latch release so that the latch release pops out. 1 device latch release file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF0E2.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Module Bay Page 6 of 12 5. Pull the device by the latch release to remove the device from the module bay. 6. Insert the new device into the bay, push the device until you feel a click, and push the device latch release in so that it is flush with the computer. Windows XP automatically recognizes the new device. 7. If necessary, enter your password to unlock your computer. Windows 2000 1. Click the Unplug or Eject Hardware icon on the taskbar. 2. Click the device you want to eject and click Stop. 3. Press the device latch release so that the latch release pops out. 1 device latch release file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF0E2.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Module Bay Page 7 of 12 4. Pull the device by the latch release to remove the device from the module bay. 5. Insert the new device into the bay, push the device until you feel a click, and push the device latch release in so that it is flush with the computer. 6. When the operating system recognizes the new device, click Close. If the Device Screw Is Installed Windows XP 1. Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the taskbar. 2. Click the device you want to eject. 3. If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. NOTICE: To prevent damage to devices, place them in a safe, dry place when they are not installed in the computer. Avoid pressing down on them or placing heavy objects on top of them. 4. Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver to remove the device screw from the bottom of the computer. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF0E2.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Module Bay Page 8 of 12 1 device latch release 5. Press the device latch release so that the latch release pops out. 6. Pull the device by the latch release to remove the device from the module bay. 7. Insert the new device into the bay, push the device until you feel a click, and push the device latch release in so that it is flush with the computer. Windows XP automatically recognizes the new device. 8. If necessary, enter your password to unlock your computer. Windows 2000 1. Click the Unplug or Eject Hardware icon on the taskbar. 2. Click the device you want to eject and click Stop. 3. If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF0E2.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Module Bay Page 9 of 12 4. Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver to remove the device screw from the bottom of the computer. 1 device latch release 5. Press the device latch release so that the latch release pops out. 6. Pull the device by the latch release to remove the device from the module bay. 7. Insert the new device into the bay, push the device until you feel a click, and push the device latch release in so that it is flush with the computer. 8. When the operating system recognizes the new device, click Close. Using CDs or DVDs file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF0E2.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Module Bay Page 10 of 12 Using the CD or DVD Tray NOTICE: Do not press down on the drive tray when opening or closing it. Keep the tray closed when you are not using the drive. NOTICE: Do not move the computer while playing CDs or DVDs. 1. Press the eject button on the front of the drive. 2. Pull the tray out. 3. Place the disc, label side up, in the center of the tray. NOTICE: Ensure that you snap the disc onto the spindle. Otherwise you may damage the drive tray, or your CD or DVD will not work properly. 4. Snap the disc onto the spindle. 1 eject button 5. Push the tray back into the drive. NOTE: If you use a module that shipped with another computer, you need to install the drivers and software necessary to play DVDs or write data. For more information, see the Drivers and Utilities CD. You can play a DVD on your computer if the computer shipped with a DVD drive or a CD-RW/DVD combo drive. You can write data to a CD-R/CD-RW on your computer if the computer shipped with a CD-RW or CD-

RW/DVD combo drive. For more information on playing CDs or DVDs, click Help on the CD player or DVD player (if available). file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF0E2.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Module Bay Page 11 of 12 Adjusting the Volume NOTE: If the speakers are muted, you do not hear the CD or DVD playing. 1. Click the Start button, point to All Programs Accessories Entertainment (or Multimedia), and then click Volume Control. 2. In the Volume Control window, click and drag the bar in the Volume Control column and slide the bar up or down to increase or decrease the volume. For more information on volume control options, click Help in the Volume Control window. The Volume Meter displays the current volume level, including mute, on your computer. Either right-click the icon in the taskbar or press the volume control buttons to enable or disable the Volume Meter on the screen. 1 2 volume icon Volume Meter 3 mute icon NOTE: By default, the Volume Meter appears in the lower-right corner of the display. You can click and drag the meter to a new location, and the meter subsequently always appears at the new location. When the meter is enabled, adjust the volume using the volume control buttons or by pressing the following keys:

Press <Fn><Page Up> to increase volume.

Press <Fn><Page Down> to decrease volume.

Press <Fn><End> to mute volume. For more information about QuickSet, right-click the icon in the taskbar, and click Help. Adjusting the Picture If an error message notifies you that the current resolution and color depth are using too much memory and preventing DVD playback, adjust the display properties. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF0E2.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Module Bay Page 12 of 12 Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Under Pick a category, click Appearance and Themes. 3. Under Pick a task..., click Change the screen resolution. 4. In the Display Properties window, click and drag the bar in Screen resolution to change the setting to 1024 by 768 pixels. 5. Under Color quality, click the drop-down menu and click Medium (16 bit). 6. Click OK. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Display icon and click the Settings tab. 3. Click and drag the bar in Screen area to change the setting to 1024 by 768 pixels. 4. Under Color quality, click the drop-down menu and click High Color (16 bit). 5. Click Apply. 6. Click OK to save the settings and close the window. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhF0E2.htm 1/13/2004 Using a Battery Page 1 of 7 Using a Battery Battery Performance Checking the Battery Charge Charging the Battery Removing a Battery Removing and Installing a Reserve Battery Installing a Battery Storing a Battery Battery Performance NOTE: Batteries for portable computers are covered under warranty only during the initial 1-year period of the limited warranty for the computer. For more information about the Dell warranty for the computer, see the System Information Guide or separate paper warranty document that shipped with your computer. For optimal computer performance and to help preserve BIOS settings, operate your Dell portable computer with the main battery installed at all times. Use a battery to run the computer when the computer is not connected to an electrical outlet. One battery is supplied as standard equipment in the battery bay. NOTE: For more information on maximizing battery operating time, see "Power Management."

Battery operating time varies depending on operating conditions. With average usage, you may expect from 3 to 4 hours from a single, fully charged battery. You can install an optional second battery in the module bay to significantly increase operating time. For more information about the second battery, see "Using the Module Bay."

NOTE: It is recommended that you connect your computer to an electrical outlet when writing to a CD. Operating time is significantly reduced when you perform operations including, but not limited to, the following:

Using optical drives, especially DVD and CD-RW drives

Using wireless communications devices, PC Cards, or USB devices

Using high-brightness display settings, 3D screen savers, or other power-intensive programs, such as 3D games

Running the computer in maximum performance mode file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh421A.htm 1/13/2004 Using a Battery Page 2 of 7 You can check the battery charge on the bottom of the computer. You can also set power management options to alert you when the battery charge is low. CAUTION: Using an incompatible battery may increase the risk of fire or explosion. Replace the battery only with a compatible battery purchased from Dell. The lithium-ion battery is designed to work with your Dell computer. Do not use a battery from other computers with your computer. CAUTION: Do not dispose of batteries with household waste. When your battery no longer holds a charge, call your local waste disposal or environmental agency for advice on disposing of a lithium-ion battery. See the battery disposal instructions in your System Information Guide. CAUTION: Misuse of the battery may increase the risk of fire or chemical burn. Do not puncture, incinerate, disassemble, or expose the battery to temperatures above 65C (149 F). Keep the battery away from children. Handle damaged or leaking batteries with extreme care. Damaged batteries may leak and cause personal injury or equipment damage. Checking the Battery Charge The Dell QuickSet battery meter, Microsoft Windows power meter window and charge gauge and health gauge, and the low-battery warning provide information on the battery charge. icon, the battery For more information about checking the charge on the second battery, see "Using the Module Bay."

Dell QuickSet Battery Meter Press <Fn><F3> to display the QuickSet Battery Meter. The Battery Meter screen displays status, charge level, and charge completion time for the primary and second batteries in your computer. The following icons appear in the Battery Meter screen:

The computer is running on battery power.

The battery is discharging or idle.

The computer is connected to an electrical outlet and running on AC power.

The battery is charging.

The computer is connected to an electrical outlet and running on AC power.

The battery is discharging, idle, or charging. For more information about QuickSet, right-click the icon in the taskbar, and click Help. Microsoft Windows Power Meter The Windows power meter indicates the remaining battery charge. To check the power meter, double-click the icon on the taskbar. For more information on the Power Meter tab, see "Power Management."

If the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, a icon appears. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh421A.htm 1/13/2004 Using a Battery Page 3 of 7 Charge Gauge Press the status button on the battery charge gauge to illuminate the charge-level lights. Each light represents approximately 20 percent of the total battery charge. For example, if the battery has 80 percent of its charge remaining, four of the lights are on. If no lights appear, the battery has no charge. Health Gauge The battery operating time is largely determined by the number of times it is charged. After hundreds of charge and discharge cycles, batteries lose some charge capacity, or battery health. To check the battery health, press and hold the status button on the battery charge gauge for at least 3 seconds. If no lights appear, the battery is in good condition, and more than 80 percent of its original charge capacity remains. Each light represents incremental degradation. If five lights appear, less than 60 percent of the charge capacity remains, and you should consider replacing the battery. See "Specifications" for more information about the battery operating time. Low-Battery Warning NOTICE: To avoid losing or corrupting data, save your work immediately after a low-battery warning. Then connect the computer to an electrical outlet, or install a second battery in the module bay. If the battery runs completely out of power, hibernate mode begins automatically. A low-battery warning occurs when the battery charge is approximately 90 percent depleted. The computer beeps once, indicating that minimal battery operating time remains. During that time, the speaker beeps periodically. If two batteries are installed, the low-battery warning means that the combined charge of both batteries is approximately 90 percent depleted. The computer enters hibernate mode when the battery charge is at a critically low level. For more information on low-battery alarms, see "Power Management."

Charging the Battery NOTE: The AC adapter charges a completely discharged battery in approximately 1 hour with the file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh421A.htm 1/13/2004 Using a Battery Page 4 of 7 computer turned off. Charge time is longer with the computer turned on. You can leave the battery in the computer as long as you like. The battery internal circuitry prevents the battery from overcharging. When you connect the computer to an electrical outlet or install a battery while the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, the computer checks the battery charge and temperature. If necessary, the AC adapter then charges the battery and maintains the battery charge. If the battery is hot from being used in your computer or being in a hot environment, the battery may not charge when you connect the computer to an electrical outlet. Disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet and allow the computer and the battery to cool to room temperature. Then connect the computer to an electrical outlet to continue charging the battery. For more information on resolving problems with a battery, see "Power Problems."

Removing a Battery CAUTION: Before performing the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. For more information about removing the second battery, see "Using the Module Bay."

CAUTION: Before performing these procedures, turn off the computer, disconnect it from the electrical outlet, and disconnect the modem from the telephone wall jack. NOTICE: If you choose to replace the battery with the computer in standby mode, you have up to 90 seconds to complete the battery replacement before the computer shuts down and loses any unsaved data. 1. Ensure that the computer is turned off, disconnected from an electrical outlet, and disconnected from the telephone wall jack. 2. If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 3. Slide and hold the battery-bay latch release on the bottom of the computer, and then remove the battery from the bay. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh421A.htm 1/13/2004 Using a Battery Page 5 of 7 Removing and Installing a Reserve Battery CAUTION: Before performing the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. 1. Remove the battery. 2. Remove the reserve battery cover. 3. Pull the reserve battery out of its compartment, and disconnect the reserve battery cable from the connector. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh421A.htm 1/13/2004 Using a Battery Page 6 of 7 1 reserve battery cable 2 connector 3 reserve battery 4. Connect the reserve battery cable to the connector in the reserve battery compartment. 5. Place the reserve battery in the compartment, and replace the reserve battery cover. Installing a Battery CAUTION: Before performing the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh421A.htm 1/13/2004 Using a Battery Page 7 of 7 Slide the battery into the bay until the latch release clicks. For more information about installing the second battery, see "Using the Module Bay."

Storing a Battery Remove the battery when you store your computer for an extended period of time. A battery discharges during prolonged storage. After a long storage period, recharge the battery fully before you use it. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh421A.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Display Page 1 of 3 Using the Display Adjusting Brightness Switching the Video Image Setting Display Resolution Adjusting Brightness When the Dell computer is running on battery power, you can conserve power by setting the brightness to the lowest comfortable setting using the appropriate keyboard shortcuts for the display. The Dell QuickSet Brightness Meter shows the current brightness setting for the display. Right-click the icon in the taskbar to enable or disable the Brightness Meter on the screen. 1 Brightness Meter NOTE: By default, the Brightness Meter appears in the lower-right corner of the display. You can click and drag the meter to a new location, and the meter subsequently always appears at the new location. NOTE: Brightness keyboard shortcuts only affect the display on your portable computer, not monitors that you attach to your portable computer or docking device. If your computer is in CRT only mode and you try to change the brightness level, the Brightness Meter appears, but the brightness level on the monitor does not change. You can enable or disable the Brightness Meter from the QuickSet taskbar menu. When the meter is enabled, press the following keys to adjust brightness:

Press <Fn> up-arrow key to increase brightness on the integrated display only (not on an external monitor).

Press <Fn> down-arrow key to decrease brightness on the integrated display only (not on an external monitor). For more information about QuickSet, right-click the icon in the taskbar and click Help. Switching the Video Image file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh8B25.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Display Page 2 of 3 When you start the computer with an external device (such as an external monitor or projector) attached and turned on, the image may appear on either the display or the external device. Press <Fn><F8> to switch the video image to the integrated display only, the integrated display and an external CRT monitor simultaneously, an external CRT monitor only, the integrated display and external DVI monitor simultaneously, and external DVI monitor only. NOTE: : You cannot use <Fn><F8> to switch the video image between the integrated display and an external S-Video device. Setting Display Resolution To display a program at a specific resolution, both the video controller and the display must support the program, and the necessary video drivers must be installed. Before you change any of the default display settings, make a note of the default settings for future reference. NOTE: Use only the Dell-installed video drivers, which are designed to offer the best performance with your Dell-installed operating system. If you choose a resolution or color palette that is higher than the display supports, the settings adjust automatically to the closest possible setting. NOTE: As the resolution increases, icons and text appear smaller on the screen. If the video resolution setting is higher than that supported by the display, the computer enters pan mode. In pan mode, the screen cannot be completely displayed. For example, the taskbar that usually appears at the bottom of the desktop may no longer be visible. To view the rest of the screen, use the touch pad to pan up, down, left, and right. NOTICE: You can damage an external monitor by using an unsupported refresh rate. Before adjusting the refresh rate on an external monitor, see the monitor user's guide. Microsoft Windows XP 1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Under Pick a category, click Appearance and Themes. 3. Under Pick a task..., click the area you want to change, or under or pick a Control Panel icon, click Display. 4. Try different settings for Color quality and Screen resolution. Windows 2000 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Display icon and click the Settings tab. 3. Try different settings for Colors and Screen area. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh8B25.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Display Page 3 of 3 file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh8B25.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad Page 1 of 5 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad Numeric Keypad Keyboard Shortcuts Touch Pad Customizing the Touch Pad Numeric Keypad NOTE: When you connect an external keyboard or keypad to the computer, the keypad is disabled. The numeric keypad functions like the numeric keypad on an external keyboard. Each key on the keypad has multiple functions. The keypad numbers and symbols are marked in blue on the right of the keypad keys. To type a number or symbol, enable the keypad, hold down <Fn> and press the desired key.

To enable the keypad, press <Num Lk>. The light indicates that the keypad is active.

To disable the keypad, press <Num Lk> again. Keyboard Shortcuts System Functions file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD317.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad Page 2 of 5 Opens the Windows Task Manager window Enables and disables the numeric keypad (on an external keyboard only) Enables and disables the scroll lock Battery Displays the Dell QuickSet Battery Meter. CD or DVD Tray Ejects the tray out of the drive. Display Functions Switches the video image to the next display in the following sequence: the integrated display only, the integrated display and an external CRT monitor simultaneously, an external CRT monitor only, the integrated display and an external DVI monitor simultaneously, and an external DVI monitor only. Increases brightness on the integrated display only (not on an external monitor) Decreases brightness on the integrated display only (not on an external monitor) Radios (Including Wireless Networking and Bluetooth) Enables and disables radios, including wireless networking and Bluetooth. Power Management Activates the power management mode of your choice. You can program this keyboard shortcut on the Advanced tab in the Power Options Properties window. Speaker Functions If no sound comes from the speakers, press <Fn><End> and adjust the volume. Increases the volume of the integrated speakers and external speakers, if attached file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD317.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad Page 3 of 5 Decreases the volume of the integrated speakers and external speakers, if attached Enables and disables the integrated speakers and external speakers, if attached Microsoft Windows Logo Key Functions Minimizes all open windows Maximizes all windows Runs Windows Explorer Opens the Run dialog box Opens the Search Results dialog box Opens the Search Results-Computer dialog box (if the computer is connected to a network) Opens the System Properties dialog box To adjust keyboard operation, such as the character repeat rate, open the Control Panel, and click Printers and Other Hardware (for Windows XP) or double-click the Keyboard icon (for Windows 2000). Touch Pad The touch pad detects the pressure and movement of your finger to allow you to move the cursor on the display. Use the touch pad and touch pad buttons as you would use a mouse. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD317.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad Page 4 of 5 1 2 touch pad touch pad buttons

To move the cursor, lightly slide your finger over the touch pad.

To select an object, lightly tap once on the surface of the touch pad or use your thumb to press the left touch-pad button.

To select and move (or drag) an object, position the cursor on the object and tap down-up-down on the touch pad. On the second down motion, leave your finger on the touch pad and move the selected object by sliding your finger across the surface.

To double-click an object, position the cursor on the object and then tap twice on the touch pad, or use your thumb to press the left touch-pad button twice. Customizing the Touch Pad You can disable the touch pad or adjust its settings by using the Mouse Properties window. 1. In Windows XP, open the Control Panel, click Printers and Other Hardware, and then click Mouse. In Windows 2000, open the Control Panel and double-click the Mouse icon. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD317.htm 1/13/2004 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad Page 5 of 5 2. On the Mouse Properties window:

Click the Device Select tab to disable the touch pad.

Click the Pointer tab to adjust touch pad settings. 3. Select the desired settings and click Apply. 4. Click OK to save the settings and close the window. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhD317.htm 1/13/2004 Dell QuickSet Features Page 1 of 2 Dell QuickSet Features Clicking the QuickSet Icon Double-Clicking the QuickSet Icon Right-Clicking the QuickSet Icon Dell QuickSet runs from the click, or right-click the icon. icon located in the taskbar and functions differently when you click, double-

Clicking the QuickSet Icon Click the icon to perform the following tasks:

Adjust power management settings using the Power Management Wizard.

Adjust the size of icons and toolbars.

Select a power scheme that you set in the Power Management Wizard.

Turn presentation mode on or off. Double-Clicking the QuickSet Icon Double-click the icon to adjust power management settings using the Power Management Wizard. Right-Clicking the QuickSet Icon Right-click the icon to perform the following tasks:

Enable or disable the Brightness Meter on the screen.

Enable or disable the Volume Meter on the screen.

Turn wireless activity on or off.

View Dell QuickSet Help.

View the version and copyright date of the QuickSet program installed on your computer. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhFC90.htm 1/13/2004 Dell QuickSet Features Page 2 of 2 For more information about QuickSet, right-click the icon in the taskbar and click Help. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hhFC90.htm 1/13/2004 About Microsoft Windows XP Page 1 of 4 About Microsoft Windows XP Help and Support Center Switching to Classic View Desktop Cleanup Wizard Files and Settings Transfer Wizard Program Compatibility Wizard User Accounts and Fast User Switching Home and Small Office Networking Internet Connection Firewall Help and Support Center The Help and Support Center provides help with the Windows XP operating system and other support and educational tools. To access the Help and Support Center, click the Start button and click Help and Support. Switching to Classic View You may change the appearance of the Control Panel, the Start menu, and the Windows desktop to the classic view of earlier Windows operating systems. Control Panel The Control Panel presents information as task-oriented categories. If you are accustomed to performing a particular task with the icon-oriented classic Control Panel, you can switch to the classic icon view:

1. Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2. Click Switch to Classic View or Switch to Category View in the upper-left area of the Control Panel window. Start Menu 1. Right-click the empty area on the taskbar. 2. Click Properties. 3. Click the Start Menu tab. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh4D6E.htm 1/13/2004 About Microsoft Windows XP Page 2 of 4 4. Select Classic Start Menu and click OK. Window and Button Appearance 1. Right-click anywhere on the main desktop screen and click Properties. 2. Click the Appearance tab. 3. From the Windows and buttons drop-down menu, select Windows Classic style. 4. To customize color, font, and other classic desktop options, click Advanced. 5. When you have completed your appearance selections, click OK. Desktop Cleanup Wizard By default, the Desktop Cleanup Wizard moves programs that are not frequently used to a designated folder 7 days after you first start your computer and every 60 days after that. The appearance of the Start menu changes as programs are moved. To turn off the Desktop Cleanup Wizard:

1. Right-click an empty spot on the desktop, and click Properties. 2. Click the Desktop tab and click Customize Desktop. 3. Click Run Desktop Cleanup Wizard every 60 days to remove the check mark. 4. Click OK. To run the Desktop Cleanup Wizard at any time:

1. Right-click an empty spot on the desktop, and click Properties. 2. Click the Desktop tab and click Customize Desktop. 3. Click Clean Desktop Now. 4. When the Desktop Cleanup Wizard appears, click Next. 5. In the list of shortcuts, deselect any shortcuts you want to leave on the desktop, and then click Next. 6. Click Finish to remove the shortcuts and close the wizard. Files and Settings Transfer Wizard The Files and Settings Transfer Wizard allows you to transfer files and settings from one computer to another

(for instance, when upgrading to a new computer), even if the old computer is running an earlier operating system. The time required to collect and transfer data depends on the amount of data collected. Times can vary from just a few minutes to several hours. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh4D6E.htm 1/13/2004 About Microsoft Windows XP Page 3 of 4 You can transfer the data to the new computer over a network or direct serial connection, or you can store it on a removable medium such as a floppy disk or writable CD. If a CD drive is not available, the wizard allows you to create a wizard disk to run on your old computer. For more information, see the Help and Support Center. Program Compatibility Wizard If you encounter problems running a program designed for an earlier Windows operating system, you can use the Program Compatibility Wizard to help resolve the problem. The Program Compatibility Wizard allows you to configure a program to run in an environment closer to that of Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Millennium Edition (Me), Windows NT 4.0 with Service Pack 5, or Windows 2000. If you experience problems with your operating system or other programs after performing an installation, you can use the system restore feature to return your computer to a previous stable condition. For more information, see the Help and Support Center. User Accounts and Fast User Switching Fast User Switching allows multiple users to access the computer. After you log on to the computer with your specific settings, including the desktop and various programs, other users can log on to the computer without requiring you to first log off. New users log on and switch from your session to their own. New users can run their desktop and programs without interfering with yours. You can switch back to your desktop and programs with the original settings. For more information, see the Help and Support Center. Special Considerations With Fast User Switching

Computers with low memory configurations can experience problems. The computer uses memory to keep your programs running in the background while a second user is logged on, which can cause the computer to run slowly. Fast User Switching is off by default on computers with less than 128 MB of RAM.

Fast User Switching is disabled in Windows XP Professional when the computer is a member of a computer domain. Home and Small Office Networking The Network Setup Wizard provides online documentation and support for setting up a home or small office network. The new wizard automatically enables the personal firewall (see "Internet Connection Firewall"). The Network Setup Wizard includes a checklist and steps to guide you through the process of sharing resources, such as files, printers, or an Internet connection, between computers in a home or small office. For more information, see the Help and Support Center. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh4D6E.htm 1/13/2004 About Microsoft Windows XP Page 4 of 4 Internet Connection Firewall The Internet Connection Firewall provides basic protection from unauthorized access to the computer while the computer is connected to the Internet. The firewall is automatically enabled when you run the Network Setup Wizard. When the firewall is enabled for a network connection, the firewall icon appears with a red background in the Network Connections portion of the Control Panel. Note that enabling the Internet Connection Firewall does not reduce the need for virus-checking software. For more information, see the Help and Support Center. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh4D6E.htm 1/13/2004 About Your Computer Page 1 of 11 About Your Computer Front View Left View Right View Back View Bottom View Front View 1 2 3 4 5 display power button device status lights keyboard display latch 6 7 8 9 speakers touch pad buttons touch pad keyboard status lights file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5F5A.htm 1/13/2004 About Your Computer Page 2 of 11 display For more information about your display, see "Using the Display."

power button Press the power button to turn on the computer or exit a power management mode. NOTICE: To avoid losing data, turn off your computer by performing a Microsoft Windows operating system shutdown rather than by pressing the power button. If the computer stops responding, press and hold the power button until the computer turns off completely

(which may take several seconds). device status lights Turns on when you turn on the computer and blinks when the computer is in a power management mode. Turns on when the computer reads or writes data. NOTICE: To avoid loss of data, never turn off the computer while the light is flashing. Turns on steadily or blinks to indicate battery charge status. Turns on when Bluetooth is enabled. To enable or disable Bluetooth, press <Fn><F2>. NOTE: Bluetooth is an optional feature on your computer, so the Bluetooth with your computer. For more information, see the documentation that came with your Bluetooth wireless technology. icon turns on only if you ordered If the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, the light operates as follows:

Solid green: The battery is charging.

Flashing green: The battery is almost fully charged. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5F5A.htm 1/13/2004 About Your Computer Page 3 of 11 If the computer is running on a battery, the light operates as follows:

Off: The battery is adequately charged (or the computer is turned off).

Flashing orange: The battery charge is low. Solid orange: The battery charge is critically low. keyboard The keyboard includes a numeric keypad as well as the Windows logo key information on supported keyboard shortcuts, see "Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad."

. For display latch Keeps the display closed. speakers To adjust the volume of the integrated speakers, press the volume control buttons, mute button, or volume-control keyboard shortcuts. For more information, see "Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad."

touch pad buttons Provide the functionality of a mouse. See "Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad" for more information. touch pad Provides the functionality of a mouse. See "Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad" for more information. keyboard status lights The green lights located above the keyboard indicate the following:

Turns on when the numeric keypad is enabled. Turns on when the uppercase letter function is enabled. Turns on when the scroll lock function is enabled. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5F5A.htm 1/13/2004 About Your Computer Page 4 of 11 Left View 1 air vents (2) 4 infrared sensor 2 IEEE 1394 connector 5 audio connectors (2) 3 PC Card slot 6 security cable slot air vents The computer uses an internal fan to create airflow through the vents, which prevents the computer from overheating. NOTE: The computer turns on the fan when the computer gets hot. Fan noise is normal and does not indicate a problem with the fans or the computer. CAUTION: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air vents. Do not store your Dell computer in a low-airflow environment, such as a closed briefcase, while it is running. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. PC Card slot Supports one PC Card, such as a modem or network adapter. For more information, see

"Using PC Cards."

infrared sensor Lets you transfer files from your computer to another infrared-compatible device without using cable connections. IEEE 1394 connector Use to attach devices supporting IEEE 1394 high-speed transfer rates, such as some digital video cameras. When you receive your computer, the sensor is disabled. You can use the system setup program to enable the sensor. For information on transferring data, see Windows Help, the Help and Support Center, or the documentation that came with your infrared-compatible device. audio connectors file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5F5A.htm 1/13/2004 About Your Computer Page 5 of 11 Attach a microphone to the connector. Attach headphones or speakers to the connector. security cable slot Lets you attach a commercially available antitheft device to the computer. For more information, see the instructions included with the device. NOTICE: Before you buy an antitheft device, ensure that it will work with the security cable slot. Right View file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5F5A.htm 1/13/2004 About Your Computer Page 6 of 11 1 security cable slot 2 module bay 3 device latch release security cable slot Lets you attach a commercially available antitheft device to the computer. For more information, see the instructions included with the device. NOTICE: Before you buy an antitheft device, ensure that it will work with the security cable slot. module bay You can install devices such as an optical drive or a Dell TravelLite module in the module bay. For more information, see "Using the Module Bay."

device latch release Releases the module bay device. See "Using the Module Bay" for instructions. Back View file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5F5A.htm 1/13/2004 About Your Computer Page 7 of 11 CAUTION: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air vents. Do not store your computer in a low- airflow environment, such as a closed briefcase, while it is running. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. 1 USB connectors (2) 6 video connector 2 S-video TV-out connector 7 serial connector 3 modem connector (RJ-11) (optional) 8 AC adapter connector 4 network connector (RJ-45) 9 air vents 5 parallel connector USB connectors Connect USB devices, such as a mouse, keyboard, or printer. You can also connect the optional floppy drive directly to a USB connector using the optional floppy-drive cable. S-video TV-out connector Connects your computer to a TV. For more information, see "Connecting a Television to the Computer."

file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5F5A.htm 1/13/2004 About Your Computer Page 8 of 11 modem connector (RJ-11) (optional) If you ordered the optional internal modem, connect the telephone line to the modem connector. For information on using the modem, see the online modem documentation supplied with your computer. See "Finding Information for Your Computer."

network connector (RJ-45) NOTICE: The network connector is slightly larger than the modem connector. To avoid damaging the computer, do not plug a telephone line in to the network connector. Connects the computer to a network. The green and yellow lights next to the connector indicate activity for both wired and wireless network communications. For information on using the network adapter, see the device user's guide supplied with your computer. See "Finding Information for Your Computer."

parallel connector Connects a parallel device, such as a printer. video connector Connects an external monitor. For more information, see "Using the Display."

serial connector Connects serial devices, such as a mouse or handheld device. AC adapter connector Attach an AC adapter to the computer. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5F5A.htm 1/13/2004 About Your Computer Page 9 of 11 The AC adapter converts AC power to the DC power required by the computer. You can connect the AC adapter with your computer turned either on or off. CAUTION: The AC adapter works with electrical outlets worldwide. However, power connectors and power strips vary among countries. Using an incompatible cable or improperly connecting the cable to the power strip or electrical outlet may cause fire or equipment damage. NOTICE: When you disconnect the AC adapter cable from the computer, grasp the connector, not the cable itself, and pull firmly but gently to avoid damaging the cable. air vents The computer uses an internal fan to create airflow through the vents, which prevents the computer from overheating. NOTE: The computer turns on the fan when the computer gets hot. Fan noise is normal and does not indicate a problem with the fan or the computer. CAUTION: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air vents. Do not store your computer in a low- airflow environment, such as a closed briefcase, while it is running. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. Bottom View file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5F5A.htm 1/13/2004 About Your Computer Page 10 of 11 1 memory module cover 5 docking device slot 2 battery-bay latch release 6 fan 3 battery charge gauge 7 Mini PCI card cover 4 battery 8 hard drive memory module cover Covers the compartment that contains the memory module(s). See "Adding and Replacing Parts."

battery-bay latch release Releases the battery. See "Using a Battery" for instructions. battery charge gauge Provides information on the battery charge. See "Using a Battery."

battery When a battery is installed, you can use the computer without connecting the computer to an electrical outlet. See "Using a Battery."

docking device slot Lets you attach your computer to a docking device. See the documentation that came with your docking device for additional information. fan The computer uses an internal fan to create airflow through the vents, which prevents the computer from overheating. NOTE: The computer turns on the fan when the computer gets hot. Fan noise is normal and does not indicate a problem with the fans or the computer. CAUTION: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air vents. Do not store your computer in a low- airflow environment, such as a closed briefcase, while it is running. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5F5A.htm 1/13/2004 About Your Computer Page 11 of 11 Mini PCI card cover Covers the compartment that contains the Mini PCI card. See "Adding and Replacing Parts."

hard drive Stores software and data. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5F5A.htm 1/13/2004 Finding Information for Your Computer Page 1 of 3 Finding Information for Your Computer What are you looking for?

Find It Here

A diagnostic program for my computer

Drivers for my computer

My computer documentation

My device documentation Drivers and Utilities CD (also known as the ResourceCD) Documentation and drivers are already installed on your computer. You can use the CD to reinstall drivers, run the Dell Diagnostics, or access your documentation. Readme files may be included on your CD to provide last-minute updates about technical changes to your computer or advanced technical-reference material for technicians or experienced users. Dell System Information Guide

How to set up my computer

Warranty information

Safety instructions

How to remove and replace parts

Technical specifications

How to configure system settings

How to troubleshoot and solve problems NOTE: This document is available as a PDF at support.dell.com. User's Guide Windows XP Help and Support Center 1. Click the Start button and click Help and Support. 2. Click User's and system guides and click User's guides. Microsoft Windows 2000

Service Tag and Express Service Double-click the User's Guides icon on your desktop. Service Tag and Microsoft Windows License file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5B40.htm 1/13/2004 Finding Information for Your Computer Page 2 of 3 Code

Microsoft Windows License Label These labels are located on your computer.

Use the Service Tag to identify your computer when you use support.dell.com or contact technical support.

Enter the Express Service Code to direct your call when contacting technical support. The Express Service Code is not available in all countries.

Use the number on the Microsoft Windows License Label if you reinstall your operating system. Dell Support Website support.dell.com The Dell Support website provides several online tools, including:

Solutions Troubleshooting hints and tips, articles from technicians, and online courses

Community Online discussion with other Dell customers

Upgrades Upgrade information for components, such as memory, the hard drive, and the operating system

Customer Care Contact information, order status, warranty, and repair information

Downloads Drivers, patches, and software updates

Reference Computer documentation, product specifications, and white papers Dell Premier Support Website premiersupport.dell.com The Dell Premier Support website is customized for corporate, government, and education customers. This website may not be available in all regions. Windows Help and Support Center 1. Click the Start button and click Help and Support. 2. Type a word or phrase that describes your problem and click the arrow icon. 3. Click the topic that describes your problem. 4. Follow the instructions on the screen.

Latest drivers for my computer

Answers to technical service and support questions

Online discussions with other users and technical support

Documentation for my computer

Service call status and support history

Top technical issues for my computer

Frequently asked questions

File downloads

Details on my computer configuration

Service contract for my computer

How to use Windows XP

Documentation for my computer

Documentation for devices (such as a modem)

How to reinstall my operating system Operating System CD The operating system is already installed on your computer. To resintall your operating system, use the Operating System CD. See your User's Guide for operating system reinstallation instructions. After you reinstall your operating system, use the Drivers and Utilities CD to file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5B40.htm 1/13/2004 Finding Information for Your Computer Page 3 of 3 reinstall drivers for the devices that came with your computer. Your operating system product key label is located on your computer. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\msclark1\Local%20Settings\Temp\~hh5B40.htm 1/13/2004

 

 

Regulatory Information Page 1 of 5 Regulatory Information: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless Network Connection 2200BG User's Guide Information for the user Safety Notices

. The FCC with its action in ET Docket 96-8 has adopted a safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency

(RF) electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC certified equipment. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection meets the Human Exposure limits found in OET Bulletin 65, 2001, and ANSI/IEEE C95.1, 1992. Proper operation of this radio according to the instructions found in this manual will result in exposure substantially below the FCCs recommended limits. The following safety precautions should be observed:

e Co not touch or move antenna while the unit is transmitting or receiving. e Do not hold any component containing the radio such that the antenna is very close or touching any exposed parts of the body, especially the face or eyes, while transmitting. e Do not operate the radio or attempt to transmit data unless the antenna is connected; if not, the radio may be damaged. e Use in specific environments:

o The use of wireless devices in hazardous locations is limited by the constraints posed by the safety directors of such environments. o The use of wireless devices on airplanes is governed by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA). o The use of wireless devices in hospitals is restricted to the limits set forth by each hospital. Explosive Device Proximity Warning (see below) Antenna Warning (see below) Use on Aircraft Caution (see below) Ctther Wireless Devices (see below) Power Supply (Access Point) (see below)

"Explosive Device Proximity Warning A Warning: Do not operate a portable transmitter (such as a wireless network device) near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the device has been modified to be qualified for such use. Antenna Warnings ad Warning: To comply with the FCC and ANSI C95.1 RF exposure limits, it is recommended for the Intel(R) PROMWireless 2200BG Network Connection installed in a desktop or portable computer, that the antenna for this _ device be installed so as to provide a separation distance of al least 20 cm (8 inches) from all persons and that the antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or radio transmitter. It is recommended that the user limit exposure time if the antenna is positioned closer than 20 cm (8 inches). file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings Jason_Limoges\Local%20Settings\Temporary%2... 3/25/2004 Regulatory Information Page 2 of 5 A Warning: The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection product is not designed for use with high-gain directional antennas. Use of such antennas with these products is illegal. Use On Aircraft Caution A Caution: Regulations of the FCC and FAA prohibit airborne operation of radio-frequency wireless devices because their signals could interfere with critical aircraft instruments. Local Restrictions on 802.11b Radio Usage A Caution: Due to the fact that the frequency used by 802.11b wireless LAN devices may not yet be harmonized in all countries, 802.11b products are designed for use only in specific countries, and are not allowed to be operated in countries other than those of designated use. As a user of these products, you are responsible for ensuring that the products are used only in the countries for which they were intended and for verifying that they are configured with the correct selection of frequency and channel for the country of use. Any deviation from the permissible settings for the country of use is an infringement of national law and may be punished as such. For counitry-specific information, see the additional compliance information supplied with the product. Wireless interoperability The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter is designed to be interoperable with any wireless LAN product that is based on direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) radio technology and to comply with the following standards:

e IEEE Std. 802.11b-1999. Standard on Wireless LAN. e IEEE Std. 802.119 compliant. Standard on Wireless LAN. e Wireless Fidelity (WiFi(R)) certification, as defined by the WECA (Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance). The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN 2200 3A Mini PCI adapter and your health The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by this device, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter wireless device operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter wireless device may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations include the following:

e Using the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter equipment on board airplanes, or e Using the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter equipment in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. :

If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or environment (an airport, for example), you: are encouraged to ask for authorization to use the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter wireless device before you turn it on. Regulatory information The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter wireless network device must be installed and file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\Jason_Limoges\Local%20Settings\Temporary%2... 3/25/2004 Regulatory Information Page 3 of 5 used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. For country-specific approvals, see Radio approvals. Dell Inc. is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with the Intel(R) PROMireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter kit, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than that specified by Dell Inc. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment is the responsibility of the user. Dell inc. and its authorized resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from the user failing to comply with these guidelines. NOTEYour Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter transmits less than 100 mW, but more than 10 mW. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation of the device is subject to the following two conditions:

e This device may not cause harmful interference. e This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTEThe radiated output power of the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter wireless network device is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, you should keep a distance of at least 20 cm between you (or any other person in the vicinity) and the antenna that is built into the computer. To determine the location of the antenna within your computer, check the information Interference statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, the equipment may cause harmful interference to radio communications. There is no guarantee, however, that such interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by taking one or more of the following:measures:

e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. e Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver. e Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. NOTE-The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection adapter wireless network device must be installec| and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. Any other installation or use will violate FCC Part 15 regulations. U.S. Frequency Bands 2.400 - 2.473 GHz Canadaindustry Canada (IC) This Ciass B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003, Issue 2, and RSS-210, Issue 4 (Dec. 2000). Cet appariel numrique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB-003, No. 2, et CNR-210, No 4 (Dec 2000). _ file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings Jason_Limoges\Local%20Settings\Temporary%2... 3/25/2004 Regulatory Information | Page 4 of 5

"To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its trasmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing."

Pour empcher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit tre utilis a

'intrieur et devrait tre plac loin des fentres afinde fournir un cran de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'mission) est install a lextrieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. Europe-EU Declaration of Conformity Europe Frequency Bands 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Europe ETS!) This equipment complies with the essential requirements of the European Union directive 1999/5/EC. Cet quipement est conforme aux principales exigences essentielles dfinies dans la Directive europenne RTTE 1999/5/CE. Die Gerate erfiillen die grundlegenden Anforderungen der RTTE-Richtlinie 1999/5/EG. Questa apparecchiatura 8 conforme ai requisiti essenziali della Direttiva Europea R&TTE 1999/5/CE. Este equipo cumple los requisitos principales de la Directiva 1999/5/CE de la UE, "Equipos de Terminales de _ Radio y Telecomunicaciones". Este equipamento cumpre os requisitos essenciais da Directiva 1999/5/CE do Parlamento Europeu e do Conselho (Directiva RTT). t O exoplismos autos plhroi tis basikes apaits ths koinotikhs odhgias EU R&TTE 1999/5/E. Deze apparatuur voldoet aan de noodzakelijke vereisten van EU-richtlijn betreffende radioapparatuur en telecommunicatie-eindapparatuur 1999/5/EG. Dette uclstyr opfyider de Veesentlige krav i EU's direktiv 1999/5/EC om Radio- og teleterminaludstyr. Dette utstyret er i overensstemmelse med hovedkravene i R&TTE-direktivet (1999/5/EC) fra EU. _ Utrustningen uppfyller kraven for EU-direktivet 1999/5/EC om ansluten teleutrustning och Omsesidigt erkannande av utrustningens 6verensstammelse (R&TTE). Tama laite vastaa EU:n-radio- ja telepaatelaitedirektiivin (EU R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC). vaatimuksia. Belgique Dans le cas d'une utilisation prive, a 'extrieur d'un batiment, au-dessus d'un espace public, aucun _ enregistrement n'est ncessaire pour une distance de moins de 300m. Pour une distance suprieure 4 300m un enregistrement auprs de I'IBPT est requise. Pour les enregistrements et licences, veuillez contacter 'IBPT. Italia For use in private premises: no restriction outdoor or indoor, 2.400 - 2.4835 Ghz For use in public premises: no restriction outdoor or indoor, 2.400 - 2.4835 Ghz, but a general authorization has to be requested to the ministry of Post and telecommunications. file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\Jason_Limoges\Local%20Settings\Temporary%2... 3/25/2004 Regulatory Information Page 5 of 5 Japan Frequency Bands 2.400 - 2.497 GHz (Japan) Radio approvals To determine whether you are allowed to use your wireless network device in a specific country, please check to see if the radio type number that is printed on the identification label of your device is listed on the radio approval Back to Contents file://C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\ Jason_Limoges\Local%20Settings\Temporary%2... 3/25/2004

 

 

w w w

. d e l l

. c o m

s u p p o r t

. d e l l

. c o m Installing and Configuring the Mini PCI Card CAUTION: Before performing any of the procedures listed below, read and follow the safety instructions in the System Information Guide or the Owner's Manual that came with your computer. Read the information on the following pages before you complete the setup of your wireless network. Before You Begin Ensure that you have the following items:

Your portable computer Your Mini PCI card The CD that came with your wireless Mini PCI card The Dell TrueMobile 1180/1300/1400 Wireless Mini PCI Card and Intel Pro/Wireless LAN 3A Mini PCI Adapter Setup Guide The regulatory label(s) if required in your region For Latitude D600/D500 and Inspiron 600m/500m Computers Installing the Mini PCI Card 1 Ensure that the work surface is flat and clean to prevent the computer cover from being scratched. 2 Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and then shut down the computer. Installing and Configuring the Mini PCI Card 5 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 3 If the computer is connected to a docking device

(docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 4 Disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet. 5 Wait 10 to 20 seconds, and then disconnect any attached devices. 6 Remove any installed PC Cards, batteries, and module bay devices. NOTICE: Handle components and cards by their edges, and avoid touching pins and contacts. Ground yourself by touching a metal connector on the back of the computer. Continue to ground yourself periodically during this procedure. 7 Turn the computer over. 8 Loosen the captive screw from the Mini PCI card cover, and remove the cover. 6 Installing and Configuring the Mini PCI Card 9 If a Mini PCI card is not already installed, go to step 10. If you are replacing a Mini PCI card, remove the existing card:

a Disconnect the Mini PCI card from any attached cables. b Release the Mini PCI card by spreading the metal securing tabs until the card pops up slightly. c Lift the Mini PCI card out of its connector. w w w

. d e l l

. c o m

s u p p o r t

. d e l l

. c o m antenna cables (2) NOTICE: To avoid damaging the Mini PCI card, never place cables on top of or under the card. NOTICE: The connectors are keyed to ensure correct insertion. If you feel resistance, check the connectors and realign the card. Installing and Configuring the Mini PCI Card 7 10 Align the Mini PCI card with the connector at a 45-degree angle, and press the Mini PCI card into the connector until you feel a click. 11 Connect the antenna cables to the Mini PCI card. m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 12 Replace the cover and tighten the screw. Attaching the Regulatory Label NOTICE: You must affix the provided label because it is a regulatory requirement. Failure to do so may void your authority to operate the equipment. NOTE: If your kit came with a SIRIM label, attach the label as shown. 1 Close the display and turn the computer upside down on a clean, flat work surface. 8 Installing and Configuring the Mini PCI Card 2 Remove the adhesive cover from the back of the regulatory label and attach the label. w w w

. d e l l

. c o m

s u p p o r t

. d e l l

. c o m SIRIM label Mini PCI card regulatory label NOTE: The label shown is a sample only. It may not exactly represent the characters and words appearing on your enclosed label. For Latitude D800, Inspiron 8500, and Dell Precision M60 Computers Installing the Mini PCI Card 1 Ensure that the work surface is flat and clean to prevent the computer cover from being scratched. 2 Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and then shut down the computer. Installing and Configuring the Mini PCI Card 9 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 3 If the computer is connected to a docking device

(docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 4 Disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet. 5 Wait 10 to 20 seconds, and then disconnect any attached devices. 6 Remove any installed PC Cards, batteries, and module bay devices. NOTICE: Handle components and cards by their edges, and avoid touching pins and contacts. Ground yourself by touching a metal connector on the back of the computer. Continue to ground yourself periodically during this procedure. 7 Turn the computer over. 8 Loosen the captive screw from the Mini PCI card/modem cover, and remove the cover. 10 Installing and Configuring the Mini PCI Card w w w

. d e l l

. c o m

s u p p o r t

. d e l l

. c o m 9 If a Mini PCI card is not already installed, go to step 10. If you are replacing a Mini PCI card, remove the existing card:

a Disconnect the Mini PCI card from any attached cables. b Release the Mini PCI card by spreading the metal securing tabs until the card pops up slightly. c Lift the Mini PCI card out of its connector. Mini PCI card antenna cables (2) NOTICE: To avoid damaging the Mini PCI card, never place cables on top of or under the card. NOTICE: The connectors are keyed to ensure correct insertion. If you feel resistance, check the connectors and realign the card. Installing and Configuring the Mini PCI Card 11 10 Align the Mini PCI card with the connector at a 45-degree angle, and press the Mini PCI card into the connector until you feel a click. 11 Connect the antenna cables to the Mini PCI card. Mini PCI card m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w antenna cables (2) 12 Replace the cover and tighten the screw. Attaching the Regulatory Label NOTICE: You must affix the provided label because it is a regulatory requirement. Failure to do so may void your authority to operate the equipment. NOTE: If your kit came with a SIRIM label, attach the label as shown. 1 Close the display and turn the computer upside down on a clean, flat work surface. 2 Remove the adhesive cover from the back of the regulatory label and attach the label. 12 Installing and Configuring the Mini PCI Card SIRIM label w w w

. d e l l

. c o m

s u p p o r t

. d e l l

. c o m Mini PCI card regulatory label NOTE: The label shown is a sample only. It may not exactly represent the characters and words appearing on your enclosed label. Inspiron 1100 and 5100 Computers Installing the Mini PCI Card 1 Ensure that the work surface is flat and clean to prevent the computer cover from being scratched. 2 Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and then shut down the computer. 3 If the computer is connected to a docking device

(docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. Installing and Configuring the Mini PCI Card 13 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 4 Disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet. 5 Wait 10 to 20 seconds, and then disconnect any attached devices. 6 Remove any installed PC Cards, batteries, and module bay devices. NOTICE: Handle components and cards by their edges, and avoid touching pins and contacts. Ground yourself by touching a metal connector on the back of the computer. Continue to ground yourself periodically during this procedure. 7 Turn the computer over, remove the screw from the modem/Mini PCI card cover, and then lift the cover away from the computer. screw modem/Mini PCI card cover 14 Installing and Configuring the Mini PCI Card w w w

. d e l l

. c o m

s u p p o r t

. d e l l

. c o m 8 If you are replacing a Mini PCI card, remove the existing card:

a Disconnect the Mini PCI card from any attached cables. Mini PCI card antenna cables metal securing tabs (2) Mini PCI card connector b Release the Mini PCI card by spreading the metal securing tabs until the card pops up slightly. c Lift the Mini PCI card out of its connector. NOTICE: To avoid damaging the Mini PCI card, never place cables on top of or under the card. NOTICE: The connectors are keyed to ensure correct insertion. If you feel resistance, check the connectors and realign the card. Installing and Configuring the Mini PCI Card 15 9 Align the Mini PCI card with the connector at a 45-degree angle, and press the Mini PCI card into the connector until you feel a click. Mini PCI card antenna cables m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Mini PCI card connector 10 Connect the antenna cables to the Mini PCI card. 11 Replace the cover and screw. Attaching the Regulatory Label NOTICE: You must affix the provided label because it is a regulatory requirement. Failure to do so may void your authority to operate the equipment. NOTE: If your kit came with a SIRIM label, attach the label as shown. 1 Close the display and turn the computer upside down on a clean, flat work surface. 2 Remove the adhesive cover from the back of the regulatory label and attach the label. 16 Installing and Configuring the Mini PCI Card modem/Mini PCI card cover SIRIM label Mini PCI card regulatory label w w w

. d e l l

. c o m

s u p p o r t

. d e l l

. c o m NOTE: The label shown is a sample only. It may not exactly represent the characters and words appearing on your enclosed label. Latitude D400 Computers Installing the Mini PCI Card Before you install the Mini PCI card, you need to remove the keyboard:

1 Ensure that the work surface is flat and clean to prevent the computer cover from being scratched. Installing and Configuring the Mini PCI Card 17 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 2 Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and then shut down the computer. 3 If the computer is connected to a docking device

(docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 4 Disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet. 5 Wait 10 to 20 seconds, and then disconnect any attached devices. 6 Remove any installed PC Cards and the battery. NOTICE: Handle components and cards by their edges, and avoid touching pins and contacts. Ground yourself by touching a metal connector on the back of the computer. Continue to ground yourself periodically during this procedure. 7 Open the display approximately 180 degrees. 8 Use a small flat-blade screwdriver or plastic scribe to lift the notched right edge of the center control cover, and pry the cover loose from the bottom case. 9 Remove the two screws from the top of the keyboard. 10 Use the pull-tab to pull the keyboard up and out

(toward the display) of the bottom case. 18 Installing and Configuring the Mini PCI Card keyboard pull-tab screws (2) keyboard securing tabs (5) w w w

. d e l l

. c o m

s u p p o r t

. d e l l

. c o m keyboard connector pull-tab interface connector (system board) 11 Rest the keyboard face down on the palm rest. 12 Pull straight up on the pull-tab that is attached to the keyboard connector to disconnect the connector from the interface connector on the system board. To install the Mini PCI card, complete the following steps:

1 If a Mini PCI card is not already installed, go to step 2. If you are replacing a Mini PCI card, remove the existing card:

a Disconnect the Mini PCI card from the attached antenna cables. Installing and Configuring the Mini PCI Card 19 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w antenna cables (2) Mini PCI card b Release the Mini PCI card by spreading the metal securing tabs until the card pops up slightly. c Lift the Mini PCI card out of its connector. 20 Installing and Configuring the Mini PCI Card w w w

. d e l l

. c o m

s u p p o r t

. d e l l

. c o m securing tabs(2) Mini PCI card connector NOTICE: To avoid damaging the Mini PCI card, never place cables on top of or under the card. NOTICE: The connectors are keyed to ensure correct insertion. If you feel resistance, check the connectors and realign the card. NOTE: If a Mini PCI card was not already installed, remove the foam that secures the antenna cables before you install the card. 2 Align the Mini PCI card with the connector at a 45-degree angle, and press the Mini PCI card into the connector until you feel a click. Installing and Configuring the Mini PCI Card 21 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 3 Connect the antenna cables to the Mini PCI card. To complete the Mini PCI card installation, you need to replace the keyboard:

1 Connect the keyboard connector to the interface connector on the system board. 2 Insert the five securing tabs on the keyboard into their respective slots in the palm rest. 3 Replace the two screws at the top of the keyboard. 4 Replace the center control cover and snap it down so that it is flush with the palm rest. Attaching the Regulatory Label NOTICE: You must affix the provided label because it is a regulatory requirement. Failure to do so may void your authority to operate the equipment. NOTE: If your kit came with a SIRIM label, attach the label as shown. 1 Close the display and turn the computer upside down on a clean, flat work surface. 2 Remove the adhesive cover from the back of the regulatory label and attach the label. 22 Installing and Configuring the Mini PCI Card w w w

. d e l l

. c o m

s u p p o r t

. d e l l

. c o m SIRIM label Mini PCI card regulatory label NOTE: The label shown is a sample only. It may not exactly represent the characters and words appearing on your enclosed label. Installing and Configuring the Mini PCI Card 23 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Installing and Configuring the Software Installing Software 1 Insert the Mini PCI card CD. 2 If the Main Menu screen does not appear, click the Start button, click Run, type x:\setup.exe

(where x is your CD or DVD drive letter), and then click OK. 3 Click Install Software. 4 Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the software installation. Configuring Your Mini PCI Card 1 Insert the wireless Mini PCI card CD. 2 If the Main Menu screen does not appear, click the Start button, click Run, type x:\setup.exe

(where x is your CD or DVD drive letter), and then click OK. 3 Click View User Guide. 4 Select the language you want and click OK. 5 Click Completing the setup. 6 Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the configuration of your wireless card. FCC Statement (U.S. Only) Not installing this device according to the instructions provided in this document may violate FCC regulations and void your authority to operate this equipment. 24 Installing and Configuring the Sof tware w w w

. d e l l

. c o m

s u p p o r t

. d e l l

. c o m Technical Support After you have determined the type of network option that you need to set up, you can obtain technical support by referring to your Dell computer documentation for Dell contact information. Limited Warranties and Return Policy Dell-branded hardware products purchased in the U.S. or Canada come with either a 90-day (U.S. only), one-year, two-year, three-year, or four-year limited warranty. To determine which warranty you purchased, see the invoice that accompanied your hardware product(s). The following sections describe the limited warranties and return policy for the U.S., the limited warranties and return policy for Canada, and the manufacturer guarantee for Latin America and the Caribbean. Limited Warranty for the U.S. What is covered by this limited warranty?

This limited warranty covers defects in materials and workmanship in yourour end-user customer'sDell-branded hardware products, including Dell-branded peripheral products. Technical Support 25 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w What is not covered by this limited warranty?

This limited warranty does not cover:

Software, including the operating system and software added to the Dell-branded hardware products through our factory-

integration system, third-party software, or the reloading of software Non-Dell-branded products and accessories Problems that result from:

External causes such as accident, abuse, misuse, or problems with electrical power Servicing not authorized by us Usage that is not in accordance with product instructions Failure to follow the product instructions or failure to perform preventive maintenance Problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by us Products with missing or altered service tags or serial numbers Products for which we have not received payment THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE (OR JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION). DELL'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR MALFUNCITONS AND DEFECTS IN HARDWARE IS LIMITED TO REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT AS SET FORTH IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES FOR THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED IN TIME TO THE TERM OF THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD REFLECTED ON YOUR INVOICE. NO WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD HAS EXPIRED. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 26 Limited Warranties and Return Policy w w w

. d e l l

. c o m

s u p p o r t

. d e l l

. c o m WE DO NOT ACCEPT LIABILITY BEYOND THE REMEDIES PROVIDED FOR IN THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY LIABILTY FOR THIRD PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES, FOR PRODUCTS NOT BEING AVAILABLE FOR USE, OR FOR LOST DATA OR LOST SOFTWARE. OUR LIABILITY WILL BE NO MORE THAN THE AMOUNT YOU PAID FOR THE PRODUCT THAT IS THE SUBJECT OF A CLAIM. THIS IS THE MAXIMUM AMOUNT FOR WHICH WE ARE RESPONSIBLE. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. How long does this limited warranty last?

This limited warranty lasts for the time period indicated on your invoice, except that the limited warranty on Dell-branded batteries lasts only one year and the limited warranty on the lamps for Dell-

branded projectors lasts only ninety days. The limited warranty begins on the date of the invoice. The warranty period is not extended if we repair or replace a warranted product or any parts. Dell may change the availability of limited warranties, at its discretion, but any changes will not be retroactive. What do I do if I need warranty service?

Before the warranty expires, please call us at the relevant number listed in the following table. Please also have your Dell service tag number or order number available. Individual Home Consumers:

Technical Support Customer Service U.S. Only 1-800-624-9896 1-800-624-9897 Individual Home Consumers who purchased through an Employee Purchase Program:

Technical Support and Customer Service 1-800-822-8965 Home and Small Business Commercial Customers:

Technical Support and Customer Service 1-800-456-3355 Limited Warranties and Return Policy 27 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w Medium, Large, or Global Commercial Customers, Healthcare Customers, and Value Added Resellers (VARs):

Technical Support and Customer Service 1-800-822-8965 Government and Education Customers:

Technical Support and Customer Service Dell-Branded Memory 1-800-234-1490 1-888-363-5150 What will Dell do?

During the first 90 days of the 90-day limited warranty and the first year of all other limited warranties: For the first 90 days of the 90-day limited warranty and the first year of all other limited warranties, we will repair any Dell-branded hardware products returned to us that prove to be defective in materials or workmanship. If we are not able to repair the product, we will replace it with a comparable product that is new or refurbished. When you contact us, we will issue a Return Material Authorization Number for you to include with your return. You must return the products to us in their original or equivalent packaging, prepay shipping charges, and insure the shipment or accept the risk if the product is lost or damaged in shipment. We will return the repaired or replacement products to you. We will pay to ship the repaired or replaced products to you if you use an address in the United States

(excluding Puerto Rico and U.S. possessions and territories). Otherwise, we will ship the product to you freight collect. If we determine that the product is not covered under this warranty, we will notify you and inform you of service alternatives that are available to you on a fee basis. NOTE: Before you ship the product(s) to us, make sure to back up the data on the hard drive(s) and any other storage device(s) in the product(s). Remove any confidential, proprietary, or personal information and removable media such as floppy disks, CDs, or PC Cards. We are not responsible for any of your confidential, proprietary, or personal information; lost or corrupted data; or damaged or lost removable media. 28 Limited Warranties and Return Policy w w w

. d e l l

. c o m

s u p p o r t

. d e l l

. c o m During the remaining years: For the remaining period of the limited warranty, we will replace any defective part with new or refurbished parts, if we agree that it needs to be replaced. When you contact us, we will require a valid credit card number at the time you request a replacement part, but we will not charge you for the replacement part as long as you return the original part to us within thirty days after we ship the replacement part to you. If we do not receive the original part within thirty days, we will charge to your credit card the then-current standard price for that part. We will pay to ship the part to you if you use an address in the United States (excluding Puerto Rico and U.S. possessions and territories). Otherwise, we will ship the part freight collect. We will also include a prepaid shipping container with each replacement part for your use in returning the replaced part to us. NOTE: Before you replace parts, make sure to back up the data on the hard drive(s) and any other storage device(s) in the product(s). We are not responsible for lost or corrupted data. What if I purchased a service contract?

If your on-site service contract is with Dell, on-site service will be provided to you under the terms of the on-site service agreement. Please refer to that contract for details on how to obtain service. If you purchased through us a service contract with one of our third-

party service providers, please refer to that contract for details on how to obtain service. How will you fix my product?

We use new and refurbished parts made by various manufacturers in performing warranty repairs and in building replacement parts and systems. Refurbished parts and systems are parts or systems that have been returned to Dell, some of which were never used by a customer. All parts and systems are inspected and tested for quality. Replacement parts and systems are covered for the remaining period of the limited warranty for the product you bought. Limited Warranties and Return Policy 29 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w What do I do if I am not satisfied?

We pride ourselves on our great customer service. If you are not satisfied with the service you receive under this limited warranty, please let us know. We have found that the best way to resolve issues regarding our limited warranty is to work together. If, after those discussions, you are still not satisfied, we believe arbitration is the most expeditious way to resolve your concerns. Therefore, ANY CLAIM, DISPUTE, OR CONTROVERSY (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, WHETHER PREEXISTING, PRESENT, OR FUTURE, AND INCLUDING STATUTORY, COMMON LAW, INTENTIONAL TORT, AND EQUITABLE CLAIMS) AGAINST DELL arising from or relating to this limited warranty, its interpretation, or the breach, termination, or validity thereof, the relationships which result from this limited warranty

(including, to the full extent permitted by applicable law, relationships with third parties), Dell's advertising, or any related purchase SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY AND FINALLY BY BINDING ARBITRATION ADMINISTERED BY THE NATIONAL ARBITRATION FORUM (NAF) under its Code of Procedure then in effect (available via the Internet at www.arb-forum.com/ or via telephone at 1-800-474-2371). The arbitration will be limited solely to the dispute or controversy between you and Dell. Any award of the arbitrator(s) shall be final and binding on each of the parties, and may be entered as a judgment in any court of competent jurisdiction. Information may be obtained and claims may be filed with the NAF at P.O. Box 50191, Minneapolis, MN 55405. This provision applies only to individual home consumers and consumers who purchased through an employee purchase program. It does not apply to small, medium, large, and global commercial customers or government, education, and healthcare customers. May I transfer the limited warranty?

Limited warranties on systems may be transferred if the current owner transfers ownership of the system and records the transfer with us. The limited warranty on Dell-branded memory may not be transferred. You may record your transfer by going to Dell's website:

If you are an Individual Home Consumer, go to www.dell.com/us/en/dhs/topics/sbtopic_015_ccare.htm If you are a Small, Medium, Large, or Global Commercial Customer, go to www.dell.com/us/en/biz/topics/sbtopic_ccare_nav_015_ccare.htm 30 Limited Warranties and Return Policy w w w

. d e l l

. c o m

s u p p o r t

. d e l l

. c o m If you are a Government, Education, or Healthcare Customer, or an Individual Consumer who purchased through an employee purchase program, go to www.dell.com/us/en/pub/topics/sbtopic_015_ccare.htm If you do not have Internet access, call your customer care representative or call 1-800-624-9897.

"Total Satisfaction" Return Policy (U.S. Only) We value our relationship with you and want to make sure that you're satisfied with your purchases. That's why we offer a "Total Satisfaction"

return policy for most products that youthe end-user customer purchase directly from Dell. Under this policy, you may return to Dell products that you purchased directly from Dell for a credit or a refund of the purchase price paid, less shipping and handling and applicable restocking fees as follows:

New Hardware Products and Accessories All new hardware, accessories, parts, and unopened software still in its sealed package, excluding the products listed below, may be returned within thirty days from the invoice date. To return applications software or an operating system that has been installed by Dell, you must return the entire computer. A different return policy applies to nondefective products purchased through Dell's Software and Peripherals division by customers of our Small and Medium Business divisions. Those products may be returned within thirty days from the invoice date, but a fifteen percent

(15%) restocking fee will be deducted from any refund or credit. The "Total Satisfaction" Return Policy and Software and Peripherals division return policy are not available for Dell |

EMC storage products, EMC-branded products, or enterprise software. Reconditioned or Refurbished Dell-Branded Hardware Products and Parts All reconditioned or refurbished Dell-

branded server and storage products may be returned within thirty days from the invoice date. All other reconditioned or refurbished Dell-branded hardware products and parts may be returned within fourteen days of the invoice date. Limited Warranties and Return Policy 31 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w To return products, e-mail or call Dell customer service to receive a Credit Return Authorization Number within the return policy period applicable to the product you want to return. You must obtain a Credit Return Authorization Number in order to return the product. See

"Contacting Dell" or "Getting Help" in your customer documentation

(or www.dell.com/us/en/gen/contact.htm) to find the appropriate contact information for obtaining customer assistance. You must ship the products to Dell within five days of the date that Dell issues the Credit Return Authorization Number. You must also return the products to Dell in their original packaging, in as-new condition along with any media, documentation, and all other items that were included in the original shipment, prepay shipping charges, and insure the shipment or accept the risk of loss or damage during shipment. Limited Warranty Terms for Canada What is covered by this limited warranty?

This limited warranty covers defects in materials and workmanship in yourour end-user customer'sDell-branded hardware products, including Dell-branded peripheral products. What is not covered by this limited warranty?

This limited warranty does not cover:

Software, including the operating system and software added to the Dell-branded hardware products through our factory-

integration system, or the reloading of the software Non-Dell branded products and accessories Problems that result from:

External causes such as accident, abuse, misuse, or problems with electrical power Servicing not authorized by us Usage that is not in accordance with product instructions Failure to follow the product instructions or failure to perform preventive maintenance Problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by us 32 Limited Warranties and Return Policy w w w

. d e l l

. c o m

s u p p o r t

. d e l l

. c o m Products with missing or altered service tags or serial numbers Products for which we have not received payment THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM PROVINCE TO PROVINCE. DELL'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR MALFUNCTIONS AND DEFECTS IN PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT AS SET FORTH IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT, FOR THE TERM OF THE WARRANTY PERIOD REFLECTED ON YOUR INVOICE. EXCEPT FOR THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES CONTAINED IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT, DELL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. SOME PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF CERTAIN IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, OR LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION LASTS. THEREFORE, THE FOREGOING EXCLUSIONS AND LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. WE DO NOT ACCEPT LIABILITY BEYOND THE REMEDIES PROVIDED FOR IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT OR FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY LIABILTY FOR THIRD PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES, FOR PRODUCTS NOT BEING AVAILABLE FOR USE, OR FOR LOST DATA OR LOST SOFTWARE. OUR LIABILITY WILL BE NO MORE THAN THE AMOUNT YOU PAID FOR THE PRODUCT THAT IS THE SUBJECT OF A CLAIM. THIS IS THE MAXIMUM AMOUNT FOR WHICH WE ARE RESPONSIBLE. SOME PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. Limited Warranties and Return Policy 33 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w How long does this limited warranty last?

This limited warranty lasts for the time period indicated on your invoice, except that the limited warranty on Dell-branded batteries lasts only one year and the limited warranty on the lamps for Dell-

branded projectors lasts only ninety days. The limited warranty begins on the date of the invoice. The warranty period is not extended if we repair or replace a warranted product or any parts. Dell may change the terms and availability of limited warranties, at its discretion, but any changes will not be retroactive (that is, the warranty terms in place at the time of purchase will apply to your purchase). What do I do if I need warranty service?

Before the warranty expires, please call us at the relevant number listed in the following table. Please also have your Dell service tag number or order number available. Individual Home Consumers; Home Office and Small Business Customers:

Canada Only Technical Support and Customer Service 1-800-847-4096 Medium, Large, and Global Commercial Customers; Government, Education, and Healthcare Customers; and Value Added Resellers (VARs):

Technical Support Customer Service 1-800-387-5757 1-800-326-9463 Government or Education Customers, or Individual Home Consumers who purchased through an Employee Purchase Program:

Technical Support Customer Service Dell-Branded Memory 1-800-387-5757 1-800-326-9463

(Extension 8221 for Individual Consumers) 1-888-363-5150 34 Limited Warranties and Return Policy w w w

. d e l l

. c o m

s u p p o r t

. d e l l

. c o m What will Dell do?

During the first year of all limited warranties: During the first year of all limited warranties, we will repair any Dell-branded hardware products returned to us that prove to be defective in materials or workmanship. If we are not able to repair the product, we will replace it with a comparable product that is new or refurbished. When you contact us, we will issue a Return Material Authorization Number for you to include with your return. You must return the products to us in their original or equivalent packaging, prepay shipping charges, and insure the shipment or accept the risk if the product is lost or damaged in shipment. We will return the repaired or replacement products to you. We will pay to ship the repaired or replaced products to you if you use an address in Canada. Otherwise, we will ship the product to you freight collect. If we determine that the problem is not covered under this warranty, we will notify you and inform you of service alternatives that are available to you on a fee basis. NOTE: Before you ship the product(s) to us, make sure to back up the data on the hard drive(s) and any other storage device(s) in the product(s). Remove any confidential, proprietary or personal information, removable media, such as floppy disks, CDs, or PC Cards. We are not responsible for any of your confidential, proprietary or personal information; lost or corrupted data; or damaged or lost removable media. During the remaining years following the first year of all limited warranties: We will replace any defective part with new or refurbished parts, if we agree that it needs to be replaced. When you contact us, we will require a valid credit card number at the time you request a replacement part, but we will not charge you for the replacement part as long as you return the original part to us within thirty days after we ship the replacement part to you. If we do not receive the original part within thirty days, we will charge to your credit card the then-current standard price for that part. We will pay to ship the part to you if you use an address in Canada. Otherwise, we will ship the part freight collect. We will also include a prepaid shipping container with each replacement part for your use in returning the replaced part to us. NOTE: Before you replace parts, make sure to back up the data on the hard drive(s) and any other storage device(s) in the product(s). We are not responsible for lost or corrupted data. Limited Warranties and Return Policy 35 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w What if I purchased an on-site service contract?

If your service contract is with Dell, service will be provided to you under the terms of the service contract. Please refer to that contract for details on how to obtain service. Dell's service contracts can be found online at www.dell.ca or by calling Customer Care at 1-800-847-4096. If you purchased through us a service contract with one of our third-

party service providers, please refer to that contract (mailed to you with your invoice) for details on how to obtain service. How will you fix my product?

We use new and refurbished parts made by various manufacturers in performing warranty repairs and in building replacement parts and systems. Refurbished parts and systems are parts or systems that have been returned to Dell, some of which were never used by a customer. All parts and systems are inspected and tested for quality. Replacement parts and systems are covered for the remaining period of the limited warranty for the product you bought. Dell owns all parts removed from repaired products. What do I do if I am not satisfied?

We pride ourselves on our great customer service. If you are not satisfied with the service you receive under this limited warranty, please let us know. We have found that the best way to resolve issues regarding our limited warranty is to work together. If, after those discussions, you are still not satisfied, we believe arbitration is the most expeditious way to resolve your concerns. Therefore, ANY CLAIM, DISPUTE, OR CONTROVERSY (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, WHETHER PREEXISTING, PRESENT OR FUTURE, AND INCLUDING STATUTORY, COMMON LAW, INTENTIONAL TORT, AND EQUITABLE CLAIMS) AGAINST DELL arising from or relating to this limited warranty, its interpretation, or the breach, termination or validity thereof, the relationships which result from this limited warranty (including, to the full extent permitted by applicable law, relationships with third parties), Dell's advertising, or any related purchase SHALL BE 36 Limited Warranties and Return Policy w w w

. d e l l

. c o m

s u p p o r t

. d e l l

. c o m RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY AND FINALLY BY BINDING ARBITRATION ADMINISTERED BY THE NATIONAL ARBITRATION FORUM (NAF) under its Code of Procedure then in effect (available via the Internet at www.arb-forum.com/, or via telephone at 1-800-474-2371). The arbitration will be limited solely to the dispute or controversy between you and Dell. Any award of the arbitrator(s) shall be final and binding on each of the parties, and may be entered as a judgment in any court of competent jurisdiction. Information may be obtained and claims may be filed with the NAF at P.O. Box 50191, Minneapolis, MN 55405. May I transfer the limited warranty?

Limited warranties on systems may be transferred if the current owner transfers ownership of the system and records the transfer with us. The limited warranty on Dell-branded memory may not be transferred. You may record your transfer by going to our website:

If you are an Individual Home Consumer, go to www.dell.com/us/en/dhs/topics/sbtopic_016_ccare.htm If you are a Home Office, Small, Medium, Large, or Global Commercial Customer, go to www.dell.com/us/en/biz/topics/sbtopic_ccare_nav_016_ccare.htm If you are a Government, Education, or Healthcare Customer, or an Individual Home Consumer who purchased through an Employee Purchase Program, go to www.dell.com/us/en/pub/topics/sbtopic_016_ccare.htm If you do not have Internet access, please call Dell at 1-800-326-9463.

"Total Satisfaction" Return Policy (Canada Only) If you are an end-user customer who bought new products directly from Dell, you may return them to Dell up to 30 days after you receive them for a refund or credit of the product purchase price. If you are an end-user customer who bought reconditioned or refurbished products from Dell, you may return them to Dell within 14 days after the date of invoice for a refund or credit of the product purchase price. In either case, the refund or credit will not include any shipping and handling charges shown on your invoice and will be subject to a fifteen percent

(15%) restocking fee, unless otherwise prohibited by law. If you are an organization that bought the products under a written agreement with Dell, the agreement may contain different terms for the return of products than specified by this policy. Limited Warranties and Return Policy 37 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w To return products, you must call Dell Customer Service at 1-800-387-

5759 to receive a Credit Return Authorization Number. To expedite the process of your refund or credit, Dell expects you to return the products to Dell in their original packaging within five days of the date that Dell issues the Credit Return Authorization Number. You must also prepay shipping charges and insure the shipment or accept the risk of loss or damage during shipment. You may return software for a refund or credit only if the sealed package containing the floppy disk(s) or CD(s) is unopened. Returned products must be in as-new condition, and all of the manuals, floppy disk(s), CD(s), power cables, and other items included with a product must be returned with it. For customers who want to return, for refund or credit only, either application or operating system software that has been installed by Dell, the whole system must be returned, along with any media and documentation that may have been included in the original shipment. The "Total Satisfaction" Return Policy does not apply to Dell | EMC storage products. It also does not apply to products purchased through Dell's Software and Peripherals division. For those products, please instead refer to Dell's Software and Peripheral's then-current return policy (see the following section, "Dell Software and Peripherals

(Canada Only)"). Dell Software and Peripherals (Canada Only) Third-Party Software and Peripherals Products Similar to other resellers of software and peripherals, Dell does not warrant third-party products. Third-party software and peripheral products are covered by the warranties provided by the original manufacturer or publisher only. Third party manufacturer warranties vary from product to product. Consult your product documentation for specific warranty information. More information may also be available from the manufacturer or publisher. While Dell offers a wide selection of software and peripheral products, we do not specifically test or guarantee that all of the products we offer work with any or all of the various models of Dell computers, nor do we test or guarantee all of the products we sell on the hundreds of different brands of computers available today. If you have questions about compatibility, we recommend and encourage you to contact the third-party software and peripheral product manufacturer or publisher directly. 38 Limited Warranties and Return Policy w w w

. d e l l

. c o m

s u p p o r t

. d e l l

. c o m Dell-Branded Peripheral Products Dell does provide a limited warranty for new Dell-branded peripheral products (products for which Dell is listed as the manufacturer) such as monitors, batteries, memory, docking stations, and projectors). To determine which limited warranty applies to the product you purchased, see the Dell invoice and/or the product documentation that accompanied your product. Descriptions of Dell's limited warranties are described in preceding sections. Return Policy If you are an end-user customer who bought Dell Software and Peripherals products directly from a Dell company, you may return Dell Software and Peripherals products that are in as-new condition to Dell up to 30 days from the date of invoice for a refund of the product purchase price if already paid. This refund will not include any shipping and handling charges shown on your invoice; you are responsible for those. To return products, you must call Dell Customer Service at 1-800-387-

5759 to receive a Credit Return Authorization Number. You must ship the Dell Software and Peripherals products back to Dell in their original manufacturer's packaging (which must be in as-new condition), prepay shipping charges, and insure the shipment or accept the risk of loss or damage during shipment. To qualify for refund or replacement, returned products must be in as-

new condition, software products must be unopened, and all of the manuals, floppy disk(s), CD(s), power cables, and other items included with a product must be returned with it. Limited Warranties and Return Policy 39 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w One-Year End-User Manufacturer Guarantee

(Latin America and the Caribbean Only) Guarantee Dell Computer Corporation ("Dell") warrants to the end user in accordance with the following provisions that its branded hardware products, purchased by the end user from a Dell company or an authorized Dell distributor in Latin America or the Caribbean, will be free from defects in materials, workmanship, and design affecting normal use, for a period of one year from the original purchase date. Products for which proper claims are made will, at Dells option, be repaired or replaced at Dells expense. Dell owns all parts removed from repaired products. Dell uses new and reconditioned parts made by various manufacturers in performing repairs and building replacement products. Exclusions This Guarantee does not apply to defects resulting from: improper or inadequate installation, use, or maintenance; actions or modifications by unauthorized third parties or the end user; accidental or willful damage; or normal wear and tear. Making a Claim Claims must be made in Latin America or the Caribbean by contacting the Dell point of sale within the guarantee period. The end user must always supply proof of purchase, indicating name and address of the seller, date of purchase, model and serial number, name and address of the customer, and details of symptoms and configuration at the time of malfunction, including peripherals and software used. Otherwise, Dell may refuse the guarantee claim. Upon diagnosis of a warranted defect, Dell will make arrangements and pay for ground freight and insurance to and from Dells repair/replacement center. The end user must ensure that the defective product is available for collection properly packed in original or equally protective packaging together with the details listed above and the return number provided to the end user by Dell. 40 Limited Warranties and Return Policy w w w

. d e l l

. c o m

s u p p o r t

. d e l l

. c o m Limitation and Statutory Rights Dell makes no other warranty, guarantee or like statement other than as explicitly stated above, and this Guarantee is given in place of all other guarantees whatsoever, to the fullest extent permitted by law. In the absence of applicable legislation, this Guarantee will be the end users sole and exclusive remedy against Dell or any of its affiliates, and neither Dell nor any of its affiliates shall be liable for loss of profit or contracts, or any other indirect or consequential loss arising from negligence, breach of contract, or howsoever. This Guarantee does not impair or affect mandatory statutory rights of the end user against and/or any rights resulting from other contracts concluded by the end user with Dell and/or any other seller. Dell World Trade LP One Dell Way, Round Rock, TX 78682, USA Dell Computadores do Brasil Ltda (CNPJ No. 72.381.189/0001-10)/

Dell Commercial do Brasil Ltda (CNPJ No. 03 405 822/0001-40) Avenida Industrial Belgraf, 400 92990-000 - Eldorado do Sul RS - Brasil Dell Computer de Chile Ltda Coyancura 2283, Piso 3- Of.302, Providencia, Santiago - Chile Dell Computer de Colombia Corporation Carrera 7 #115-33 Oficina 603 Bogota, Colombia Dell Computer de Mexico SA de CV Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11 Piso Col. Lomas Altas 11950 Mxico, D.F. Limited Warranties and Return Policy 41 m o c

. l l e d

. t r o p p u s

m o c

. l l e d

. w w w 42 Limited Warranties and Return Policy